Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
The Project Gutenberg eBook of Astronomy for Amateurs
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.
Title: Astronomy for Amateurs
Author: Camille Flammarion
Translator: Frances A. Welby
Release date: April 30, 2008 [eBook #25267]
Most recently updated: January 3, 2021
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/25267
Credits: Produced by Jason Isbell, Greg Bergquist and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ASTRONOMY
FOR AMATEURS ***
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.
Title: Astronomy for Amateurs
Author: Camille Flammarion
Translator: Frances A. Welby
Release date: April 30, 2008 [eBook #25267]
Most recently updated: January 3, 2021
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/25267
Credits: Produced by Jason Isbell, Greg Bergquist and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ASTRONOMY
FOR AMATEURS ***
Page 4
Paul Renaud.
CONTEMPLATION
ASTRONOMY FOR
AMATEURS
CONTEMPLATION
ASTRONOMY FOR
AMATEURS
Page 5
BY
CAMILLE FLAMMARION
AUTHOR OF POPULAR ASTRONOMY
AUTHORIZED TRANSLATION BY
FRANCES A. WELBY
ILLUSTRATED
NEW YORK AND LONDON
D. AP P L E TON AND COMPA NY
1910
Copyright, 1904, by
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
Published October, 1904
CAMILLE FLAMMARION
AUTHOR OF POPULAR ASTRONOMY
AUTHORIZED TRANSLATION BY
FRANCES A. WELBY
ILLUSTRATED
NEW YORK AND LONDON
D. AP P L E TON AND COMPA NY
1910
Copyright, 1904, by
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
Published October, 1904
Page 6
TO
Madame C.R. CAVARÉ
ORIGINAL MEMBER OF THE ASTRONOMICAL SOCIETY OF FRANCE
CHÂTEAU DE MAUPERTHUIS
Madame: I have dedicated none of my works, save Stella—offered to the
liberal-minded, the free and generous friend of progress, and patron of the
sciences, James Gordon Bennett, editor of the New York Herald. In this
volume, Madame, I make another exception, and ask your permission to
offer it to the first woman who consented to be enrolled in the list of
members of the Astronomical Society of France, as foundress of this
splendid work, from the very beginning of our vast association (1887); and
who also desired to take part in the permanent organization of the
Observatory at Juvisy, a task of private enterprise, emancipated from
administrative routine. An Astronomy for Women[1] can not be better placed
than upon the table of a lady whose erudition is equal to her virtues, and
who has consecrated her long career to the pursuit and service of the
Beautiful, the Good, and the True.
Camille Flammarion.
Observatory of Juvisy, November, 1903.
Madame C.R. CAVARÉ
ORIGINAL MEMBER OF THE ASTRONOMICAL SOCIETY OF FRANCE
CHÂTEAU DE MAUPERTHUIS
Madame: I have dedicated none of my works, save Stella—offered to the
liberal-minded, the free and generous friend of progress, and patron of the
sciences, James Gordon Bennett, editor of the New York Herald. In this
volume, Madame, I make another exception, and ask your permission to
offer it to the first woman who consented to be enrolled in the list of
members of the Astronomical Society of France, as foundress of this
splendid work, from the very beginning of our vast association (1887); and
who also desired to take part in the permanent organization of the
Observatory at Juvisy, a task of private enterprise, emancipated from
administrative routine. An Astronomy for Women[1] can not be better placed
than upon the table of a lady whose erudition is equal to her virtues, and
who has consecrated her long career to the pursuit and service of the
Beautiful, the Good, and the True.
Camille Flammarion.
Observatory of Juvisy, November, 1903.
Page 7
CONTENTS
CHAPTER PAGE
Introduction 1
I. The Contemplation of the Heavens 10
II. The Constellations 28
III. The Stars, Suns of the Infinite. A Journey through Space 56
IV. Our Star the Sun 88
V. The Planets. A. Mercury, Venus, The Earth, Mars 113
VI. The Planets. B. Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune 146
VII. The Comets 172
VIII. The Earth 205
IX. The Moon 232
X. The Eclipses 259
On Methods. How Celestial Distances are Determined,
XI. 287
and How the Sun is Weighed
XII. Life, Universal and Eternal 317
Index 341
CHAPTER PAGE
Introduction 1
I. The Contemplation of the Heavens 10
II. The Constellations 28
III. The Stars, Suns of the Infinite. A Journey through Space 56
IV. Our Star the Sun 88
V. The Planets. A. Mercury, Venus, The Earth, Mars 113
VI. The Planets. B. Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune 146
VII. The Comets 172
VIII. The Earth 205
IX. The Moon 232
X. The Eclipses 259
On Methods. How Celestial Distances are Determined,
XI. 287
and How the Sun is Weighed
XII. Life, Universal and Eternal 317
Index 341
Page 8
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Contemplation Frontispiece
From a painting by Paul Renaud
FIG. PAGE
The great Book of the Heavens is open to all
1. 15
eyes
2. The earth in space. June solstice, midday 20
3. The Great Bear (or Dipper) and the Pole Star 34
4. To find the Pole Star 35
5. To find Cassiopeia 37
6. To find Pegasus and Andromeda 37
7. Perseus, the Pleiades, Capella 38
To find Arcturus, the Herdsman, and the
8. 40
Northern Crown
9. The Swan, Vega, the Eagle 41
The Constellations of the Zodiac: summer
10. and autumn; Capricorn, Archer, Scorpion, 46
Balance, Virgin, Lion
The Constellations of the Zodiac: winter and
11. spring; Crab, Twins, Bull, Ram, Fishes, 47
Water-Carrier
12. Orion and his celestial companions 48
13. Winter Constellations 51
14. Spring Constellations 52
15. Summer Constellations 53
16. Autumn Constellations 54
17. The double star Mizar 69
Contemplation Frontispiece
From a painting by Paul Renaud
FIG. PAGE
The great Book of the Heavens is open to all
1. 15
eyes
2. The earth in space. June solstice, midday 20
3. The Great Bear (or Dipper) and the Pole Star 34
4. To find the Pole Star 35
5. To find Cassiopeia 37
6. To find Pegasus and Andromeda 37
7. Perseus, the Pleiades, Capella 38
To find Arcturus, the Herdsman, and the
8. 40
Northern Crown
9. The Swan, Vega, the Eagle 41
The Constellations of the Zodiac: summer
10. and autumn; Capricorn, Archer, Scorpion, 46
Balance, Virgin, Lion
The Constellations of the Zodiac: winter and
11. spring; Crab, Twins, Bull, Ram, Fishes, 47
Water-Carrier
12. Orion and his celestial companions 48
13. Winter Constellations 51
14. Spring Constellations 52
15. Summer Constellations 53
16. Autumn Constellations 54
17. The double star Mizar 69
Page 9
18. Triple star ξ in Cancer 72
19. Quadruple star ε of the Lyre 73
20. Sextuple star θ in the Nebula of Orion 74
21. The Star-Cluster in Hercules 79
22. The Star-Cluster in the Centaur 80
23. The Nebula in Andromeda 81
24. Nebula in the Greyhounds 82
25. The Pleiades 83
26. Occultation of the Pleiades by the Moon 85
27. Stellar dial of the double star γ of the Virgin 86
28. Comparative sizes of the Sun and Earth 93
29. Direct photograph of the Sun 96
30. Telescopic aspect of a Sun-Spot 97
Rose-colored solar flames 228,000 kilometers
31. (141,500 miles) in height, i.e., 18 times the 103
diameter of the Earth
32. Orbits of the four Planets nearest to the Sun 115
Orbits of the four Planets farthest from the
33. 116
Sun
34. Mercury near quadrature 117
35. The Earth viewed from Mercury 119
36. The Evening Star 123
37. Successive phases of Venus 124
38. Venus at greatest brilliancy 126
39. The Earth viewed from Venus 130
Diminution of the polar snows of Mars during
40. 136
the summer
Telescopic aspect of the planet Mars (Feb.,
41. 137
1901)
Telescopic aspect of the planet Mars (Feb.,
42. 138
1901)
43. Chart of Mars 140
19. Quadruple star ε of the Lyre 73
20. Sextuple star θ in the Nebula of Orion 74
21. The Star-Cluster in Hercules 79
22. The Star-Cluster in the Centaur 80
23. The Nebula in Andromeda 81
24. Nebula in the Greyhounds 82
25. The Pleiades 83
26. Occultation of the Pleiades by the Moon 85
27. Stellar dial of the double star γ of the Virgin 86
28. Comparative sizes of the Sun and Earth 93
29. Direct photograph of the Sun 96
30. Telescopic aspect of a Sun-Spot 97
Rose-colored solar flames 228,000 kilometers
31. (141,500 miles) in height, i.e., 18 times the 103
diameter of the Earth
32. Orbits of the four Planets nearest to the Sun 115
Orbits of the four Planets farthest from the
33. 116
Sun
34. Mercury near quadrature 117
35. The Earth viewed from Mercury 119
36. The Evening Star 123
37. Successive phases of Venus 124
38. Venus at greatest brilliancy 126
39. The Earth viewed from Venus 130
Diminution of the polar snows of Mars during
40. 136
the summer
Telescopic aspect of the planet Mars (Feb.,
41. 137
1901)
Telescopic aspect of the planet Mars (Feb.,
42. 138
1901)
43. Chart of Mars 140
Page 10
44. The Earth viewed from Mars 144
45. Telescopic aspect of Jupiter 150
46. Jupiter and his four principal satellites 155
47. Saturn 159
Varying perspective of Saturn's Rings, as seen
48. 161
from the Earth
49. The Great Comet of 1858 174
What our Ancestors saw in a Comet [After
50. 177
Ambroise Paré (1858)]
Prodigies seen in the Heavens by our
51. 178
Forefathers
52. The orbit of a Periodic Comet 182
53. The tails of Comets are opposed to the Sun 185
54. A Meteor 191
Shooting Stars of November 12, 1799 [From a
55. 196
contemporary drawing]
Fire-Ball seen from the Observatory at Juvisy,
56. 199
August 10, 1899
Explosion of a Fire-Ball above Madrid,
57. 200
February 10, 1896
Raphael's Fire-Ball (The Madonna of
58. 202
Foligno)
59. A Uranolith 203
60. Motion of the Earth round the Sun 222
61. Inclination of the Earth 224
The divisions of the globe. Longitudes and
62. 226
latitudes
63. To find the long and short months 230
64. The Full Moon slowly rises 234
65. The Moon viewed with the unaided eye 236
66. The Man's head in the Moon 237
67. Woman's head in the Moon 238
68. The kiss in the Moon 239
45. Telescopic aspect of Jupiter 150
46. Jupiter and his four principal satellites 155
47. Saturn 159
Varying perspective of Saturn's Rings, as seen
48. 161
from the Earth
49. The Great Comet of 1858 174
What our Ancestors saw in a Comet [After
50. 177
Ambroise Paré (1858)]
Prodigies seen in the Heavens by our
51. 178
Forefathers
52. The orbit of a Periodic Comet 182
53. The tails of Comets are opposed to the Sun 185
54. A Meteor 191
Shooting Stars of November 12, 1799 [From a
55. 196
contemporary drawing]
Fire-Ball seen from the Observatory at Juvisy,
56. 199
August 10, 1899
Explosion of a Fire-Ball above Madrid,
57. 200
February 10, 1896
Raphael's Fire-Ball (The Madonna of
58. 202
Foligno)
59. A Uranolith 203
60. Motion of the Earth round the Sun 222
61. Inclination of the Earth 224
The divisions of the globe. Longitudes and
62. 226
latitudes
63. To find the long and short months 230
64. The Full Moon slowly rises 234
65. The Moon viewed with the unaided eye 236
66. The Man's head in the Moon 237
67. Woman's head in the Moon 238
68. The kiss in the Moon 239
Page 11
69. Photograph of the Moon 240
70. The Moon's Phases 241
71. Map of the Moon 247
72. The Lunar Apennines 251
73. Flammarion's Lunar Ring 253
74. Lunar landscape with the Earth in the sky 254
Battle between the Medes and Lydians
75. 266
arrested by an Eclipse of the Sun
Eclipse of the Moon at Laos (February 27,
76. 269
1877)
77. The path of the Eclipse of May 28, 1900 273
Total eclipse of the Sun, May 28, 1900, as
78. 281
observed from Elche (Spain)
The Eclipse of May 28, 1900, as
79. photographed by King Alfonso XIII, at 285
Madrid
80. Measurement of Angles 289
Division of the Circumference into 360
81. 291
degrees
82. Measurement of the distance of the Moon 292
83. Measurement of the distance of the Sun 297
Small apparent ellipses described by the stars
84. as a result of the annual displacement of the 306
Earth
70. The Moon's Phases 241
71. Map of the Moon 247
72. The Lunar Apennines 251
73. Flammarion's Lunar Ring 253
74. Lunar landscape with the Earth in the sky 254
Battle between the Medes and Lydians
75. 266
arrested by an Eclipse of the Sun
Eclipse of the Moon at Laos (February 27,
76. 269
1877)
77. The path of the Eclipse of May 28, 1900 273
Total eclipse of the Sun, May 28, 1900, as
78. 281
observed from Elche (Spain)
The Eclipse of May 28, 1900, as
79. photographed by King Alfonso XIII, at 285
Madrid
80. Measurement of Angles 289
Division of the Circumference into 360
81. 291
degrees
82. Measurement of the distance of the Moon 292
83. Measurement of the distance of the Sun 297
Small apparent ellipses described by the stars
84. as a result of the annual displacement of the 306
Earth
Page 12
INTRODUCTION
The Science of Astronomy is sublime and beautiful. Noble, elevating,
consoling, divine, it gives us wings, and bears us through Infinitude. In
these ethereal regions all is pure, luminous, and splendid. Dreams of the
Ideal, even of the Inaccessible, weave their subtle spells upon us. The
imagination soars aloft, and aspires to the sources of Eternal Beauty.
What greater delight can be conceived, on a fine spring evening, at the
hour when the crescent moon is shining in the West amid the last glimmer
of twilight, than the contemplation of that grand and silent spectacle of the
stars stepping forth in sequence in the vast Heavens? All sounds of life die
out upon the earth, the last notes of the sleepy birds have sunk away, the
Angelus of the church hard by has rung the close of day. But if life is
arrested around us, we may seek it in the Heavens. These incandescing orbs
are so many points of interrogation suspended above our heads in the
inaccessible depths of space.... Gradually they multiply. There is Venus, the
white star of the shepherd. There Mars, the little celestial world so near our
own. There the giant Jupiter. The seven stars of the Great Bear seem to
point out the pole, while they slowly revolve around it.... What is this
nebulous light that blanches the darkness of the heavens, and traverses the
constellations like a celestial path? It is the Galaxy, the Milky Way,
composed of millions on millions of suns!... The darkness is profound, the
abyss immense.... See! Yonder a shooting star glides silently across the sky,
and disappears!...
Who can remain insensible to this magic spectacle of the starry
Heavens? Where is the mind that is not attracted to these enigmas? The
intelligence of the amateur, the feminine, no less than the more material and
The Science of Astronomy is sublime and beautiful. Noble, elevating,
consoling, divine, it gives us wings, and bears us through Infinitude. In
these ethereal regions all is pure, luminous, and splendid. Dreams of the
Ideal, even of the Inaccessible, weave their subtle spells upon us. The
imagination soars aloft, and aspires to the sources of Eternal Beauty.
What greater delight can be conceived, on a fine spring evening, at the
hour when the crescent moon is shining in the West amid the last glimmer
of twilight, than the contemplation of that grand and silent spectacle of the
stars stepping forth in sequence in the vast Heavens? All sounds of life die
out upon the earth, the last notes of the sleepy birds have sunk away, the
Angelus of the church hard by has rung the close of day. But if life is
arrested around us, we may seek it in the Heavens. These incandescing orbs
are so many points of interrogation suspended above our heads in the
inaccessible depths of space.... Gradually they multiply. There is Venus, the
white star of the shepherd. There Mars, the little celestial world so near our
own. There the giant Jupiter. The seven stars of the Great Bear seem to
point out the pole, while they slowly revolve around it.... What is this
nebulous light that blanches the darkness of the heavens, and traverses the
constellations like a celestial path? It is the Galaxy, the Milky Way,
composed of millions on millions of suns!... The darkness is profound, the
abyss immense.... See! Yonder a shooting star glides silently across the sky,
and disappears!...
Who can remain insensible to this magic spectacle of the starry
Heavens? Where is the mind that is not attracted to these enigmas? The
intelligence of the amateur, the feminine, no less than the more material and
Page 13
prosaic masculine mind, is well adapted to the consideration of
astronomical problems. Women, indeed, are naturally predisposed to these
contemplative studies. And the part they are called to play in the education
of our children is so vast, and so important, that the elements of Astronomy
might well be taught by the young mother herself to the budding minds that
are curious about every issue—whose first impressions are so keen and so
enduring.
Throughout the ages women have occupied themselves successfully with
Astronomy, not merely in its contemplative and descriptive, but also in its
mathematical aspects. Of such, the most illustrious was the beautiful and
learned Hypatia of Alexandria, born in the year 375 of our era, public
lecturer on geometry, algebra, and astronomy, and author of three works of
great importance. Then, in that age of ignorance and fanaticism, she fell a
victim to human stupidity and malice, was dragged from her chariot while
crossing the Cathedral Square, in March, 415, stripped of her garments,
stoned to death, and burned as a dishonored witch!
Among the women inspired with a passion for the Heavens may be cited
St. Catherine of Alexandria, admired for her learning, her beauty and her
virtue. She was martyred in the reign of Maximinus Daza, about the year
312, and has given her name to one of the lunar rings.
Another celebrated female mathematician was Madame Hortense
Lepaute, born in 1723, who collaborated with Clairaut in the immense
calculations by which he predicted the return of Halley's Comet. "Madame
Lepaute," wrote Lalande, "gave us such immense assistance that, without
her, we should never have ventured to undertake this enormous labor, in
which it was necessary to calculate for every degree, and for a hundred and
fifty years, the distances and forces of the planets acting by their attraction
on the comet. During more than six months, we calculated from morning to
night, sometimes even at table, and as the result of this forced labor I
contracted an illness that has changed my constitution for life; but it was
important to publish the result before the arrival of the comet."
astronomical problems. Women, indeed, are naturally predisposed to these
contemplative studies. And the part they are called to play in the education
of our children is so vast, and so important, that the elements of Astronomy
might well be taught by the young mother herself to the budding minds that
are curious about every issue—whose first impressions are so keen and so
enduring.
Throughout the ages women have occupied themselves successfully with
Astronomy, not merely in its contemplative and descriptive, but also in its
mathematical aspects. Of such, the most illustrious was the beautiful and
learned Hypatia of Alexandria, born in the year 375 of our era, public
lecturer on geometry, algebra, and astronomy, and author of three works of
great importance. Then, in that age of ignorance and fanaticism, she fell a
victim to human stupidity and malice, was dragged from her chariot while
crossing the Cathedral Square, in March, 415, stripped of her garments,
stoned to death, and burned as a dishonored witch!
Among the women inspired with a passion for the Heavens may be cited
St. Catherine of Alexandria, admired for her learning, her beauty and her
virtue. She was martyred in the reign of Maximinus Daza, about the year
312, and has given her name to one of the lunar rings.
Another celebrated female mathematician was Madame Hortense
Lepaute, born in 1723, who collaborated with Clairaut in the immense
calculations by which he predicted the return of Halley's Comet. "Madame
Lepaute," wrote Lalande, "gave us such immense assistance that, without
her, we should never have ventured to undertake this enormous labor, in
which it was necessary to calculate for every degree, and for a hundred and
fifty years, the distances and forces of the planets acting by their attraction
on the comet. During more than six months, we calculated from morning to
night, sometimes even at table, and as the result of this forced labor I
contracted an illness that has changed my constitution for life; but it was
important to publish the result before the arrival of the comet."
Page 14
This extract will suffice for the appreciation of the scientific ardor of
Madame Lepaute. We are indebted to her for some considerable works. Her
husband was clock-maker to the King. "To her intellectual talents," says one
of her biographers, "were joined all the qualities of the heart. She was
charming to a degree, with an elegant figure, a dainty foot, and such a
beautiful hand that Voiriot, the King's painter, who had made a portrait of
her, asked permission to copy it, in order to preserve a model of the best in
Nature." And then we are told that learned women can not be good-
looking!...
The Marquise du Châtelet was no less renowned. She was predestined to
her career, if the following anecdote be credible. Gabrielle-Émilie de
Breteuil, born in 1706 (who, in 1725, was to marry the Marquis du Châtelet,
becoming, in 1733, the most celebrated friend of Voltaire), was four or five
years old when she was given an old compass, dressed up as a doll, for a
plaything. After examining this object for some time, the child began
angrily and impatiently to strip off the silly draperies the toy was wrapped
in, and after turning it over several times in her little hands, she divined its
uses, and traced a circle with it on a sheet of paper. To her, among other
things, we owe a precious, and indeed the only French, translation of
Newton's great work on universal gravitation, the famous Principia, and she
was, with Voltaire, an eloquent propagator of the theory of attraction,
rejected at that time by the Académie des Sciences.
Numbers of other women astronomers might be cited, all showing how
accessible this highly abstract science is to the feminine intellect. President
des Brosses, in his charming Voyage en Italie, tells of the visit he paid in
Milan to the young Italian, Marie Agnesi, who delivered harangues in Latin,
and was acquainted with seven languages, and for whom mathematics held
no secrets. She was devoted to algebra and geometry, which, she said, "are
the only provinces of thought wherein peace reigns." Madame de Charrière
expressed herself in an aphorism of the same order: "An hour or two of
mathematics sets my mind at liberty, and puts me in good spirits; I feel that
I can eat and sleep better when I have seen obvious and indisputable truths.
Madame Lepaute. We are indebted to her for some considerable works. Her
husband was clock-maker to the King. "To her intellectual talents," says one
of her biographers, "were joined all the qualities of the heart. She was
charming to a degree, with an elegant figure, a dainty foot, and such a
beautiful hand that Voiriot, the King's painter, who had made a portrait of
her, asked permission to copy it, in order to preserve a model of the best in
Nature." And then we are told that learned women can not be good-
looking!...
The Marquise du Châtelet was no less renowned. She was predestined to
her career, if the following anecdote be credible. Gabrielle-Émilie de
Breteuil, born in 1706 (who, in 1725, was to marry the Marquis du Châtelet,
becoming, in 1733, the most celebrated friend of Voltaire), was four or five
years old when she was given an old compass, dressed up as a doll, for a
plaything. After examining this object for some time, the child began
angrily and impatiently to strip off the silly draperies the toy was wrapped
in, and after turning it over several times in her little hands, she divined its
uses, and traced a circle with it on a sheet of paper. To her, among other
things, we owe a precious, and indeed the only French, translation of
Newton's great work on universal gravitation, the famous Principia, and she
was, with Voltaire, an eloquent propagator of the theory of attraction,
rejected at that time by the Académie des Sciences.
Numbers of other women astronomers might be cited, all showing how
accessible this highly abstract science is to the feminine intellect. President
des Brosses, in his charming Voyage en Italie, tells of the visit he paid in
Milan to the young Italian, Marie Agnesi, who delivered harangues in Latin,
and was acquainted with seven languages, and for whom mathematics held
no secrets. She was devoted to algebra and geometry, which, she said, "are
the only provinces of thought wherein peace reigns." Madame de Charrière
expressed herself in an aphorism of the same order: "An hour or two of
mathematics sets my mind at liberty, and puts me in good spirits; I feel that
I can eat and sleep better when I have seen obvious and indisputable truths.
Page 15
This consoles me for the obscurities of religion and metaphysics, or rather
makes me forget them; I am thankful there is something positive in this
world." And did not Madame de Blocqueville, last surviving daughter of
Marshal Davout, who died in 1892, exclaim in her turn: "Astronomy,
science of sciences! by which I am attracted, and terrified, and which I
adore! By it my soul is detached from the things of this world, for it draws
me to those unknown spheres that evoked from Newton the triumphant cry:
'Cœli enarrant gloriam Dei!'"
Nor must we omit Miss Caroline Herschel, sister of the greatest observer
of the Heavens, the grandest discoverer of the stars, that has ever lived.
Astronomy gave her a long career; she discovered no less than seven
comets herself, and her patient labors preserved her to the age of ninety-
eight.—And Mrs. Somerville, to whom we owe the English translation of
Laplace's Mécanique céleste, of whom Humboldt said, "In pure
mathematics, Mrs. Somerville is absolutely superior." Like Caroline
Herschel, she was almost a centenarian, appearing always much younger
than her years: she died at Naples, in 1872, at the age of ninety-two.—So,
too, the Russian Sophie Kovalevsky, descendant of Mathias Corvinus, King
of Hungary, who, an accomplished mathematician at sixteen, married at
eighteen, in order to follow the curriculum at the University (then forbidden
to unmarried women); arranging with her young husband to live as brother
and sister until their studies should be completed. In 1888 the Prix Bordin
of the Institut was conferred on her.—And Maria Mitchell of the United
States, for whom Le Verrier gave a fête at the Observatory of Paris, and who
was exceptionally authorized by Pope Pius IX to visit the Observatory of
the Roman College, at that time an ecclesiastical establishment, closed to
women.—And Madame Scarpellini, the Roman astronomer, renowned for
her works on shooting stars, whom the author had the honor of visiting, in
company with Father Secchi, Director of the Observatory mentioned above.
At the present time, Astronomy is proud to reckon among its most
famous workers Miss Agnes Clerke, the learned Irishwoman, to whom we
owe, inter alia, an excellent History of Astronomy in the Nineteenth
makes me forget them; I am thankful there is something positive in this
world." And did not Madame de Blocqueville, last surviving daughter of
Marshal Davout, who died in 1892, exclaim in her turn: "Astronomy,
science of sciences! by which I am attracted, and terrified, and which I
adore! By it my soul is detached from the things of this world, for it draws
me to those unknown spheres that evoked from Newton the triumphant cry:
'Cœli enarrant gloriam Dei!'"
Nor must we omit Miss Caroline Herschel, sister of the greatest observer
of the Heavens, the grandest discoverer of the stars, that has ever lived.
Astronomy gave her a long career; she discovered no less than seven
comets herself, and her patient labors preserved her to the age of ninety-
eight.—And Mrs. Somerville, to whom we owe the English translation of
Laplace's Mécanique céleste, of whom Humboldt said, "In pure
mathematics, Mrs. Somerville is absolutely superior." Like Caroline
Herschel, she was almost a centenarian, appearing always much younger
than her years: she died at Naples, in 1872, at the age of ninety-two.—So,
too, the Russian Sophie Kovalevsky, descendant of Mathias Corvinus, King
of Hungary, who, an accomplished mathematician at sixteen, married at
eighteen, in order to follow the curriculum at the University (then forbidden
to unmarried women); arranging with her young husband to live as brother
and sister until their studies should be completed. In 1888 the Prix Bordin
of the Institut was conferred on her.—And Maria Mitchell of the United
States, for whom Le Verrier gave a fête at the Observatory of Paris, and who
was exceptionally authorized by Pope Pius IX to visit the Observatory of
the Roman College, at that time an ecclesiastical establishment, closed to
women.—And Madame Scarpellini, the Roman astronomer, renowned for
her works on shooting stars, whom the author had the honor of visiting, in
company with Father Secchi, Director of the Observatory mentioned above.
At the present time, Astronomy is proud to reckon among its most
famous workers Miss Agnes Clerke, the learned Irishwoman, to whom we
owe, inter alia, an excellent History of Astronomy in the Nineteenth
Page 16
Century;—Mrs. Isaac Roberts, who, under the familiar name of Miss
Klumpke, sat on the Council of the Astronomical Society of France, and is
D. Sc. of the Faculty of Paris and head of the Bureau for measuring star
photographs at the Observatory of Paris (an American who became English
by her marriage with the astronomer Roberts, but is not forgotten in
France);—Mrs. Fleming, one of the astronomers of the Observatory at
Harvard College, U.S.A., to whom we owe the discovery of a great number
of variable stars by the examination of photographic records, and by
spectral photography;—Lady Huggins, who in England is the learned
collaborator of her illustrious husband;—and many others.
The following chapters, which aim at summing up the essentials of
Astronomy in twelve lessons for amateurs, will not make astronomers or
mathematicians of my readers—much less prigs or pedants. They are
designed to show the constitution of the Universe, in its grandeur and its
beauty, so that, inhabiting this world, we may know where we are living,
may realize our position in the Cosmos, appreciate Creation as it is, and
enjoy it to better advantage. This sun by which we live, this succession of
months and years, of days and nights, the apparent motions of the heavens,
these starry skies, the divine rays of the moon, the whole totality of things,
constitutes in some sort the tissue of our existence, and it is indeed
extraordinary that the inhabitants of our planet should almost all have lived
till now without knowing where they are, without suspecting the marvels of
the Universe.
For the rest, my little book is dedicated to a woman, muse and goddess
—the charming enchantress Urania, fit companion of Venus, ranking even
above her in the choir of celestial beauties, as purer and more noble,
Klumpke, sat on the Council of the Astronomical Society of France, and is
D. Sc. of the Faculty of Paris and head of the Bureau for measuring star
photographs at the Observatory of Paris (an American who became English
by her marriage with the astronomer Roberts, but is not forgotten in
France);—Mrs. Fleming, one of the astronomers of the Observatory at
Harvard College, U.S.A., to whom we owe the discovery of a great number
of variable stars by the examination of photographic records, and by
spectral photography;—Lady Huggins, who in England is the learned
collaborator of her illustrious husband;—and many others.
The following chapters, which aim at summing up the essentials of
Astronomy in twelve lessons for amateurs, will not make astronomers or
mathematicians of my readers—much less prigs or pedants. They are
designed to show the constitution of the Universe, in its grandeur and its
beauty, so that, inhabiting this world, we may know where we are living,
may realize our position in the Cosmos, appreciate Creation as it is, and
enjoy it to better advantage. This sun by which we live, this succession of
months and years, of days and nights, the apparent motions of the heavens,
these starry skies, the divine rays of the moon, the whole totality of things,
constitutes in some sort the tissue of our existence, and it is indeed
extraordinary that the inhabitants of our planet should almost all have lived
till now without knowing where they are, without suspecting the marvels of
the Universe.
For the rest, my little book is dedicated to a woman, muse and goddess
—the charming enchantress Urania, fit companion of Venus, ranking even
above her in the choir of celestial beauties, as purer and more noble,
Page 17
dominating with her clear glance the immensities of the universe. Urania,
be it noted, is feminine, and never would the poetry of the ancients have
imagined a masculine symbol to personify the pageant of the heavens. Not
Uranus, nor Saturn, nor Jupiter can compare with the ideal beauty of
Urania.
Moreover, I have before me two delightful books, in breviary binding,
dated the one from the year 1686, the other from a century later, 1786. The
first was written by Fontenelle for a Marquise, and is entitled Entretiens sur
la Pluralité des Mondes. In this, banter is pleasantly married with science,
the author declaring that he only demands from his fair readers the amount
of application they would concede to a novel. The second is written by
Lalande, and is called Astronomie des Dames. In addressing myself to both
sexes, I am in honorable company with these two sponsors and esteem
myself the better for it.
be it noted, is feminine, and never would the poetry of the ancients have
imagined a masculine symbol to personify the pageant of the heavens. Not
Uranus, nor Saturn, nor Jupiter can compare with the ideal beauty of
Urania.
Moreover, I have before me two delightful books, in breviary binding,
dated the one from the year 1686, the other from a century later, 1786. The
first was written by Fontenelle for a Marquise, and is entitled Entretiens sur
la Pluralité des Mondes. In this, banter is pleasantly married with science,
the author declaring that he only demands from his fair readers the amount
of application they would concede to a novel. The second is written by
Lalande, and is called Astronomie des Dames. In addressing myself to both
sexes, I am in honorable company with these two sponsors and esteem
myself the better for it.
Page 18
CHAPTER I
THE CONTEMPLATION OF THE HEAVENS
The crimson disk of the Sun has plunged beneath the Ocean. The sea has
decked itself with the burning colors of the orb, reflected from the Heavens
in a mirror of turquoise and emerald. The rolling waves are gold and silver,
and break noisily on a shore already darkened by the disappearance of the
celestial luminary.
We gaze regretfully after the star of day, that poured its cheerful rays
anon so generously over many who were intoxicated with gaiety and
happiness. We dream, contemplating the magnificent spectacle, and in
dreaming forget the moments that are rapidly flying by. Yet the darkness
gradually increases, and twilight gives way to night.
The most indifferent spectator of the setting Sun as it descends beneath
the waves at the far horizon, could hardly be unmoved by the pageant of
Nature at such an impressive moment.
The light of the Crescent Moon, like some fairy boat suspended in the
sky, is bright enough to cast changing and dancing sparkles of silver upon
the ocean. The Evening Star declines slowly in its turn toward the western
horizon. Our gaze is held by a shining world that dominates the whole of
the occidental heavens. This is the "Shepherd's Star," Venus of rays
translucent.
Little by little, one by one, the more brilliant stars shine out. Here are the
white Vega of the Lyre, the burning Arcturus, the seven stars of the Great
Bear, a whole sidereal population catching fire, like innumerable eyes that
open on the Infinite. It is a new life that is revealed to our imagination,
inviting us to soar into these mysterious regions.
THE CONTEMPLATION OF THE HEAVENS
The crimson disk of the Sun has plunged beneath the Ocean. The sea has
decked itself with the burning colors of the orb, reflected from the Heavens
in a mirror of turquoise and emerald. The rolling waves are gold and silver,
and break noisily on a shore already darkened by the disappearance of the
celestial luminary.
We gaze regretfully after the star of day, that poured its cheerful rays
anon so generously over many who were intoxicated with gaiety and
happiness. We dream, contemplating the magnificent spectacle, and in
dreaming forget the moments that are rapidly flying by. Yet the darkness
gradually increases, and twilight gives way to night.
The most indifferent spectator of the setting Sun as it descends beneath
the waves at the far horizon, could hardly be unmoved by the pageant of
Nature at such an impressive moment.
The light of the Crescent Moon, like some fairy boat suspended in the
sky, is bright enough to cast changing and dancing sparkles of silver upon
the ocean. The Evening Star declines slowly in its turn toward the western
horizon. Our gaze is held by a shining world that dominates the whole of
the occidental heavens. This is the "Shepherd's Star," Venus of rays
translucent.
Little by little, one by one, the more brilliant stars shine out. Here are the
white Vega of the Lyre, the burning Arcturus, the seven stars of the Great
Bear, a whole sidereal population catching fire, like innumerable eyes that
open on the Infinite. It is a new life that is revealed to our imagination,
inviting us to soar into these mysterious regions.
Page 19
O Night, diapered with fires innumerable! hast thou not written in
flaming letters on these Constellations the syllables of the great enigma of
Eternity? The contemplation of thee is a wonder and a charm. How rapidly
canst thou efface the regrets we suffered on the departure of our beloved
Sun! What wealth, what beauty hast thou not reserved for our enraptured
souls! Where is the man that can remain blind to such a pageant and deaf to
its language!
To whatever quarter of the Heavens we look, the splendors of the night
are revealed to our astonished gaze. These celestial eyes seem in their turn
to gaze at, and to question us. Thus indeed have they questioned every
thinking soul, so long as Humanity has existed on our Earth. Homer saw
and sung these self-same stars. They shone upon the slow succession of
civilizations that have disappeared, from Egypt of the period of the
Pyramids, Greece at the time of the Trojan War, Rome and Carthage,
Constantine and Charlemagne, down to the Twentieth Century. The
generations are buried with the dust of their ancient temples. The Stars are
still there, symbols of Eternity.
The silence of the vast and starry Heavens may terrify us; its immensity
may seem to overwhelm us. But our inquiring thought flies curiously on the
wings of dream, toward the remotest regions of the visible. It rests on one
star and another, like the butterfly on the flower. It seeks what will best
respond to its aspirations: and thus a kind of communication is established,
and, as it were, protected by all Nature in these silent appeals. Our sense of
solitude has disappeared. We feel that, if only as infinitesimal atoms, we
form part of that immense universe, and this dumb language of the starry
night is more eloquent than any speech. Each star becomes a friend, a
discreet confidant, often indeed a precious counsellor, for all the thoughts it
suggests to us are pure and holy.
Is any poem finer than the book written in letters of fire upon the tablets
of the firmament? Nothing could be more ideal. And yet, the poetic
sentiment that the beauty of Heaven awakens in our soul ought not to veil
flaming letters on these Constellations the syllables of the great enigma of
Eternity? The contemplation of thee is a wonder and a charm. How rapidly
canst thou efface the regrets we suffered on the departure of our beloved
Sun! What wealth, what beauty hast thou not reserved for our enraptured
souls! Where is the man that can remain blind to such a pageant and deaf to
its language!
To whatever quarter of the Heavens we look, the splendors of the night
are revealed to our astonished gaze. These celestial eyes seem in their turn
to gaze at, and to question us. Thus indeed have they questioned every
thinking soul, so long as Humanity has existed on our Earth. Homer saw
and sung these self-same stars. They shone upon the slow succession of
civilizations that have disappeared, from Egypt of the period of the
Pyramids, Greece at the time of the Trojan War, Rome and Carthage,
Constantine and Charlemagne, down to the Twentieth Century. The
generations are buried with the dust of their ancient temples. The Stars are
still there, symbols of Eternity.
The silence of the vast and starry Heavens may terrify us; its immensity
may seem to overwhelm us. But our inquiring thought flies curiously on the
wings of dream, toward the remotest regions of the visible. It rests on one
star and another, like the butterfly on the flower. It seeks what will best
respond to its aspirations: and thus a kind of communication is established,
and, as it were, protected by all Nature in these silent appeals. Our sense of
solitude has disappeared. We feel that, if only as infinitesimal atoms, we
form part of that immense universe, and this dumb language of the starry
night is more eloquent than any speech. Each star becomes a friend, a
discreet confidant, often indeed a precious counsellor, for all the thoughts it
suggests to us are pure and holy.
Is any poem finer than the book written in letters of fire upon the tablets
of the firmament? Nothing could be more ideal. And yet, the poetic
sentiment that the beauty of Heaven awakens in our soul ought not to veil
Page 20
its reality from us. That is no less marvelous than the mystery by which we
were enchanted.
And here we may ask ourselves how many there are, even among
thinking human beings, who ever raise their eyes to the starry heavens?
How many men and women are sincerely, and with unfeigned curiosity,
interested in these shining specks, and inaccessible luminaries, and really
desirous of a better acquaintance with them?
Seek, talk, ask in the intercourse of daily life. You, who read these pages,
who already love the Heavens, and comprehend them, who desire to
account for our existence in this world, who seek to know what the Earth is,
and what Heaven—you shall witness that the number of those inquiring
after truth is so limited that no one dares to speak of it, so disgraceful is it to
the so-called intelligence of our race. And yet! the great Book of the
Heavens is open to all eyes. What pleasures await us in the study of the
Universe! Nothing could speak more eloquently to our heart and intellect!
Astronomy is the science par excellence. It is the most beautiful and
most ancient of all, inasmuch as it dates back to the indeterminate times of
highest antiquity. Its mission is not only to make us acquainted with the
innumerable orbs by which our nights are illuminated, but it is, moreover,
thanks to it that we know where and what we are. Without it we should live
as the blind, in eternal ignorance of the very conditions of our terrestrial
existence. Without it we should still be penetrated with the naïve error that
reduced the entire Universe to our minute globule, making our Humanity
the goal of the Creation, and should have no exact notion of the immense
reality.
To-day, thanks to the intellectual labor of so many centuries, thanks also
to the immortal genius of the men of science who have devoted their lives
to searching after Truth—men such as Copernicus, Galileo, Kepler, Newton
—the veil of ignorance has been rent, and glimpses of the marvels of
were enchanted.
And here we may ask ourselves how many there are, even among
thinking human beings, who ever raise their eyes to the starry heavens?
How many men and women are sincerely, and with unfeigned curiosity,
interested in these shining specks, and inaccessible luminaries, and really
desirous of a better acquaintance with them?
Seek, talk, ask in the intercourse of daily life. You, who read these pages,
who already love the Heavens, and comprehend them, who desire to
account for our existence in this world, who seek to know what the Earth is,
and what Heaven—you shall witness that the number of those inquiring
after truth is so limited that no one dares to speak of it, so disgraceful is it to
the so-called intelligence of our race. And yet! the great Book of the
Heavens is open to all eyes. What pleasures await us in the study of the
Universe! Nothing could speak more eloquently to our heart and intellect!
Astronomy is the science par excellence. It is the most beautiful and
most ancient of all, inasmuch as it dates back to the indeterminate times of
highest antiquity. Its mission is not only to make us acquainted with the
innumerable orbs by which our nights are illuminated, but it is, moreover,
thanks to it that we know where and what we are. Without it we should live
as the blind, in eternal ignorance of the very conditions of our terrestrial
existence. Without it we should still be penetrated with the naïve error that
reduced the entire Universe to our minute globule, making our Humanity
the goal of the Creation, and should have no exact notion of the immense
reality.
To-day, thanks to the intellectual labor of so many centuries, thanks also
to the immortal genius of the men of science who have devoted their lives
to searching after Truth—men such as Copernicus, Galileo, Kepler, Newton
—the veil of ignorance has been rent, and glimpses of the marvels of
Page 21
creation are perceptible in their splendid truth to the dazzled eye of the
thinker.
The study of Astronomy is not, as many suppose, the sacrifice of oneself
in a cerebral torture that obliterates all the beauty, the fascination, and the
grandeur of the pageant of Nature. Figures, and naught but figures, would
not be entertaining, even to those most desirous of instruction. Let the
reader take courage! We do not propose that he shall decipher the
hieroglyphics of algebra and geometry. Perish the thought! For the rest,
figures are but the scaffolding, the method, and do not exist in Nature.
thinker.
The study of Astronomy is not, as many suppose, the sacrifice of oneself
in a cerebral torture that obliterates all the beauty, the fascination, and the
grandeur of the pageant of Nature. Figures, and naught but figures, would
not be entertaining, even to those most desirous of instruction. Let the
reader take courage! We do not propose that he shall decipher the
hieroglyphics of algebra and geometry. Perish the thought! For the rest,
figures are but the scaffolding, the method, and do not exist in Nature.
Page 22
Fig. 1.—The great Book of the Heavens is open to all eyes.
We simply beg of you to open your eyes, to see where you are, so that
you may not stray from the path of truth, which is also the path of
happiness. Once you have entered upon it, no persuasion will be needed to
make you persevere. And you will have the profound satisfaction of
knowing that you are thinking correctly, and that it is infinitely better to be
educated than to be ignorant. The reality is far beyond all dreams, beyond
the most fantastic imagination. The most fairy-like transformations of our
theaters, the most resplendent pageants of our military reviews, the most
We simply beg of you to open your eyes, to see where you are, so that
you may not stray from the path of truth, which is also the path of
happiness. Once you have entered upon it, no persuasion will be needed to
make you persevere. And you will have the profound satisfaction of
knowing that you are thinking correctly, and that it is infinitely better to be
educated than to be ignorant. The reality is far beyond all dreams, beyond
the most fantastic imagination. The most fairy-like transformations of our
theaters, the most resplendent pageants of our military reviews, the most
Page 23
sumptuous marvels on which the human race can pride itself—all that we
admire, all that we envy on the Earth—is as nothing compared with the
unheard-of wonders scattered through Infinitude. There are so many that
one does not know how to see them. The fascinated eye would fain grasp all
at once.
If you will yield yourselves to the pleasure of gazing upon the sparkling
fires of Space, you will never regret the moments passed all too rapidly in
the contemplation of the Heavens.
Diamonds, turquoises, rubies, emeralds, all the precious stones with
which women love to deck themselves, are to be found in greater
perfection, more beautiful, and more splendid, set in the immensity of
Heaven! In the telescopic field, we may watch the progress of armies of
majestic and powerful suns, from whose attacks there is naught to fear. And
these vagabond comets and shooting stars and stellar nebulæ, do they not
make up a prodigious panorama? What are our romances in comparison
with the History of Nature? Soaring toward the Infinite, we purify our souls
from all the baseness of this world, we strive to become better and more
intelligent.
But in the first place, you ask, what are the Heavens? This vault
oppresses us. We can not venture to investigate it.
Heaven, we reply, is no vault, it is a limitless immensity, inconceivable,
unfathomable, that surrounds us on all sides, and in the midst of which our
globe is floating. The Heavens are all that exists, all that we see, and all
that we do not see: the Earth on which we are, that bears us onward in her
rapid flight; the Moon that accompanies us, and sheds her soft beams upon
our silent nights; the good Sun to which we owe our existence; the Stars,
suns of Infinitude; in a word—the whole of Creation.
admire, all that we envy on the Earth—is as nothing compared with the
unheard-of wonders scattered through Infinitude. There are so many that
one does not know how to see them. The fascinated eye would fain grasp all
at once.
If you will yield yourselves to the pleasure of gazing upon the sparkling
fires of Space, you will never regret the moments passed all too rapidly in
the contemplation of the Heavens.
Diamonds, turquoises, rubies, emeralds, all the precious stones with
which women love to deck themselves, are to be found in greater
perfection, more beautiful, and more splendid, set in the immensity of
Heaven! In the telescopic field, we may watch the progress of armies of
majestic and powerful suns, from whose attacks there is naught to fear. And
these vagabond comets and shooting stars and stellar nebulæ, do they not
make up a prodigious panorama? What are our romances in comparison
with the History of Nature? Soaring toward the Infinite, we purify our souls
from all the baseness of this world, we strive to become better and more
intelligent.
But in the first place, you ask, what are the Heavens? This vault
oppresses us. We can not venture to investigate it.
Heaven, we reply, is no vault, it is a limitless immensity, inconceivable,
unfathomable, that surrounds us on all sides, and in the midst of which our
globe is floating. The Heavens are all that exists, all that we see, and all
that we do not see: the Earth on which we are, that bears us onward in her
rapid flight; the Moon that accompanies us, and sheds her soft beams upon
our silent nights; the good Sun to which we owe our existence; the Stars,
suns of Infinitude; in a word—the whole of Creation.
Page 24
Yes, our Earth is an orb of the Heavens: the sky is her domain, and our
Sun, shining above our heads, and fertilizing our seasons, is as much a star
as the pretty sparkling points that scintillate up there, in the far distance, and
embellish the calm of our nights with their brilliancy. All are in the
Heavens, you as well as I, for the Earth, in her course through Space, bears
us with herself into the depths of Infinitude.
In the Heavens there is neither "above" nor "below." These words do not
exist in celestial speech, because their significance is relative to the surface
of this planet only. In reality, for the inhabitants of the Earth, "low" is the
inside, the center of the globe, and "high" is what is above our heads, all
round the Earth. The Heavens are what surround us on all sides, to Infinity.
The Earth is, like her fellows, Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn,
Uranus, Neptune, one of the planets of the great solar family.
The Sun, her father, protects her, and directs all her actions. She, as the
grateful daughter, obeys him blindly. All float in perfect harmony over the
celestial ocean.
But, you may say, on what does the Earth rest in her ethereal navigation?
On nothing. The Earth turns round the colossal Sun, a little globe of
relatively light weight, isolated on all sides in Space, like a soap-bubble
blown by some careless child.
Above, below, on all sides, millions of similar globes are grouped into
families, and form other systems of worlds revolving round the numerous
and distant stars that people Infinitude; suns more or less analogous to that
by which we are illuminated, and generally speaking of larger bulk,
although our Sun is a million times larger than our planet.
Among the ancients, before the isolation of our globe in Space and the
motions that incessantly alter its position were recognized, the Earth was
supposed to be the immobile lower half of the Universe. The sky was
regarded as the upper half. The ancients supplied our world with fantastic
Sun, shining above our heads, and fertilizing our seasons, is as much a star
as the pretty sparkling points that scintillate up there, in the far distance, and
embellish the calm of our nights with their brilliancy. All are in the
Heavens, you as well as I, for the Earth, in her course through Space, bears
us with herself into the depths of Infinitude.
In the Heavens there is neither "above" nor "below." These words do not
exist in celestial speech, because their significance is relative to the surface
of this planet only. In reality, for the inhabitants of the Earth, "low" is the
inside, the center of the globe, and "high" is what is above our heads, all
round the Earth. The Heavens are what surround us on all sides, to Infinity.
The Earth is, like her fellows, Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn,
Uranus, Neptune, one of the planets of the great solar family.
The Sun, her father, protects her, and directs all her actions. She, as the
grateful daughter, obeys him blindly. All float in perfect harmony over the
celestial ocean.
But, you may say, on what does the Earth rest in her ethereal navigation?
On nothing. The Earth turns round the colossal Sun, a little globe of
relatively light weight, isolated on all sides in Space, like a soap-bubble
blown by some careless child.
Above, below, on all sides, millions of similar globes are grouped into
families, and form other systems of worlds revolving round the numerous
and distant stars that people Infinitude; suns more or less analogous to that
by which we are illuminated, and generally speaking of larger bulk,
although our Sun is a million times larger than our planet.
Among the ancients, before the isolation of our globe in Space and the
motions that incessantly alter its position were recognized, the Earth was
supposed to be the immobile lower half of the Universe. The sky was
regarded as the upper half. The ancients supplied our world with fantastic
Page 25
supports that penetrated to the Infernal Regions. They could not admit the
notion of the Earth's isolation, because they had a false idea of its weight.
To-day, however, we know positively that the Earth is based on nothing.
The innumerable journeys accomplished round it in all directions give
definite proof of this. It is attached to nothing. As we said before, there is
neither "above" nor "below" in the Universe. What we call "below" is the
center of the Earth. For the rest the Earth turns upon its own axis in twenty-
four hours. Night is only a partial phenomenon, due to the rotary motion of
the planet, a motion that could not exist under conditions other than that of
the absolute isolation of our globe in space.
Fig. 2.—The earth in space. June solstice, midday.
Since the Sun can only illuminate one side of our globe at one moment,
that is to say one hemisphere, it follows that Night is nothing but the state
of the part that is not illuminated. As the Earth revolves upon itself, all the
parts successively exposed to the Sun are in the day, while the parts situated
opposite to the Sun, in the cone of shadow produced by the Earth itself, are
notion of the Earth's isolation, because they had a false idea of its weight.
To-day, however, we know positively that the Earth is based on nothing.
The innumerable journeys accomplished round it in all directions give
definite proof of this. It is attached to nothing. As we said before, there is
neither "above" nor "below" in the Universe. What we call "below" is the
center of the Earth. For the rest the Earth turns upon its own axis in twenty-
four hours. Night is only a partial phenomenon, due to the rotary motion of
the planet, a motion that could not exist under conditions other than that of
the absolute isolation of our globe in space.
Fig. 2.—The earth in space. June solstice, midday.
Since the Sun can only illuminate one side of our globe at one moment,
that is to say one hemisphere, it follows that Night is nothing but the state
of the part that is not illuminated. As the Earth revolves upon itself, all the
parts successively exposed to the Sun are in the day, while the parts situated
opposite to the Sun, in the cone of shadow produced by the Earth itself, are
Page 26
in night. But whether it be noon or midnight, the stars always occupy the
same position in the Heavens, even when, dazzled by the ardent light of the
orb of day, we can no longer see them; and when we are plunged into the
darkness of the night, the god Phœbus still continues to pour his beneficent
rays upon the countries turned toward him.
The sequence of day and night is a phenomenon belonging, properly
speaking, to the Earth, in which the rest of the Universe does not
participate. The same occurs for every world that is illuminated by a sun,
and endowed with a rotary movement. In absolute space, there is no
succession of nights and days.
Upheld in space by forces that will be explained at a later point, our
planet glides in the open heavens round our Sun.
Imagine a magnificent aerostat, lightly and rapidly cleaving space.
Surround it with eight little balloons of different sizes, the smallest like
those sold on the streets for children to play with, the larger, such as are
distributed for a bonus in large stores. Imagine this group sailing through
the air, and you have the system of our worlds in miniature.
Still, this is only an image, a comparison. The balloons are held up by
the atmosphere, in which they float at equilibrium. The Earth is sustained
by nothing material. What maintains her in equilibrium is the ethereal void;
an immaterial force; gravitation. The Sun attracts her, and if she did not
revolve, she would drop into him; but rotating round him, at a speed of
107,000 kilometers[2] (about 66,000 miles) per hour, she produces a
centrifugal force, like that of a stone in a sling, that is precisely equivalent,
and of contrary sign, to its gravitation toward the central orb, and these two
equilibrated forces keep her at the same medium distance.
This solar and planetary group does not exist solitary in the immense
void that extends indefinitely around us. As we said above, each star that we
admire in the depths of the sky, and to which we lift up our eyes and
thoughts during the charmed hours of the night, is another sun burning with
same position in the Heavens, even when, dazzled by the ardent light of the
orb of day, we can no longer see them; and when we are plunged into the
darkness of the night, the god Phœbus still continues to pour his beneficent
rays upon the countries turned toward him.
The sequence of day and night is a phenomenon belonging, properly
speaking, to the Earth, in which the rest of the Universe does not
participate. The same occurs for every world that is illuminated by a sun,
and endowed with a rotary movement. In absolute space, there is no
succession of nights and days.
Upheld in space by forces that will be explained at a later point, our
planet glides in the open heavens round our Sun.
Imagine a magnificent aerostat, lightly and rapidly cleaving space.
Surround it with eight little balloons of different sizes, the smallest like
those sold on the streets for children to play with, the larger, such as are
distributed for a bonus in large stores. Imagine this group sailing through
the air, and you have the system of our worlds in miniature.
Still, this is only an image, a comparison. The balloons are held up by
the atmosphere, in which they float at equilibrium. The Earth is sustained
by nothing material. What maintains her in equilibrium is the ethereal void;
an immaterial force; gravitation. The Sun attracts her, and if she did not
revolve, she would drop into him; but rotating round him, at a speed of
107,000 kilometers[2] (about 66,000 miles) per hour, she produces a
centrifugal force, like that of a stone in a sling, that is precisely equivalent,
and of contrary sign, to its gravitation toward the central orb, and these two
equilibrated forces keep her at the same medium distance.
This solar and planetary group does not exist solitary in the immense
void that extends indefinitely around us. As we said above, each star that we
admire in the depths of the sky, and to which we lift up our eyes and
thoughts during the charmed hours of the night, is another sun burning with
Page 27
its own light, the chief of a more or less numerous family, such as are
multiplied through all space to infinity. Notwithstanding the immense
distances between the sun-stars, Space is so vast, and the number of these
so great, that by an effect of perspective due solely to the distance,
appearances would lead us to believe that the stars were touching. And
under certain telescopic aspects, and in some of the astral photographs, they
really do appear to be contiguous.
The Universe is infinite. Space is limitless. If our love for the Heavens
should incite in us the impulse, and provide us with the means of
undertaking a journey directed to the ends of Heaven as its goal, we should
be astonished, on arriving at the confines of the Milky Way, to see the
grandiose and phenomenal spectacle of a new Universe unfold before our
dazzled eyes; and if in our mad career we crossed this new archipelago of
worlds to seek the barriers of Heaven beyond them, we should still find
universe eternally succeeding to universe before us. Millions of suns roll on
in the immensities of Space. Everywhere, on all sides, Creation renews
itself in an infinite variety.
According to all the probabilities, universal life is distributed there as
well as here, and has sown the germ of intelligence upon those distant
worlds that we divine in the vicinity of the innumerable suns that plow the
ether, for everything upon the Earth tends to show that Life is the goal of
Nature. Burning foci, inextinguishable sources of warmth and light, these
various, multi-colored suns shed their rays upon the worlds that belong to
them and which they fertilize.
Our globe is no exception in the Universe. As we have seen, it is one of
the celestial orbs, nourished, warmed, lighted, quickened by the Sun, which
in its turn again is but a star.
Innumerable Worlds! We dream of them. Who can say that their
unknown inhabitants do not think of us in their turn, and that Space may not
be traversed by waves of thought, as it is by the vibrations of light and
multiplied through all space to infinity. Notwithstanding the immense
distances between the sun-stars, Space is so vast, and the number of these
so great, that by an effect of perspective due solely to the distance,
appearances would lead us to believe that the stars were touching. And
under certain telescopic aspects, and in some of the astral photographs, they
really do appear to be contiguous.
The Universe is infinite. Space is limitless. If our love for the Heavens
should incite in us the impulse, and provide us with the means of
undertaking a journey directed to the ends of Heaven as its goal, we should
be astonished, on arriving at the confines of the Milky Way, to see the
grandiose and phenomenal spectacle of a new Universe unfold before our
dazzled eyes; and if in our mad career we crossed this new archipelago of
worlds to seek the barriers of Heaven beyond them, we should still find
universe eternally succeeding to universe before us. Millions of suns roll on
in the immensities of Space. Everywhere, on all sides, Creation renews
itself in an infinite variety.
According to all the probabilities, universal life is distributed there as
well as here, and has sown the germ of intelligence upon those distant
worlds that we divine in the vicinity of the innumerable suns that plow the
ether, for everything upon the Earth tends to show that Life is the goal of
Nature. Burning foci, inextinguishable sources of warmth and light, these
various, multi-colored suns shed their rays upon the worlds that belong to
them and which they fertilize.
Our globe is no exception in the Universe. As we have seen, it is one of
the celestial orbs, nourished, warmed, lighted, quickened by the Sun, which
in its turn again is but a star.
Innumerable Worlds! We dream of them. Who can say that their
unknown inhabitants do not think of us in their turn, and that Space may not
be traversed by waves of thought, as it is by the vibrations of light and
Page 28
universal gravitation? May not an immense solidarity, hardly guessed at by
our imperfect senses, exist between the Celestial Humanities, our Earth
being only a modest planet.
Let us meditate on this Infinity! Let us lose no opportunity of employing
the best of our hours, those of the silence and peace of the bewitching
nights, in contemplating, admiring, spelling out the words of the Great
Book of the Heavens. Let our freed souls fly swift and rapt toward those
marvelous countries where indescribable joys are prepared for us, and let us
do homage to the first and most splendid of the sciences, to Astronomy,
which diffuses the light of Truth within us.
To poetical souls, the contemplation of the Heavens carries thought away
to higher regions than it attains in any other meditation. Who does not
remember the beautiful lines of Victor Hugo in the Orientales? Who has not
heard or read them? The poem is called "Ecstasy," and it is a fitting title.
The words are sometimes set to music, and the melody seems to complete
their pure beauty:
J'étais seul près des flots par une nuit d'étoiles.
Pas un nuage aux cieux, sur les mers pas de voiles;
Mes yeux plongeaient plus loin que le monde réel,
Et les bois et les monts et toute la nature
Semblaient interroger, dans un confus murmure,
Les flots des mers, les feux du ciel.
Et les étoiles d'or, légions infinies,
A voix haute, à voix basse, avec mille harmonies
Disaient, en inclinant leurs couronnes de feu;
Et les flots bleus, que rien ne gouverne et n'arrête,
Disaient en recourbant l'écume de leur crête:
... C'est le Seigneur, le Seigneur Dieu!
Note: Free Translation
our imperfect senses, exist between the Celestial Humanities, our Earth
being only a modest planet.
Let us meditate on this Infinity! Let us lose no opportunity of employing
the best of our hours, those of the silence and peace of the bewitching
nights, in contemplating, admiring, spelling out the words of the Great
Book of the Heavens. Let our freed souls fly swift and rapt toward those
marvelous countries where indescribable joys are prepared for us, and let us
do homage to the first and most splendid of the sciences, to Astronomy,
which diffuses the light of Truth within us.
To poetical souls, the contemplation of the Heavens carries thought away
to higher regions than it attains in any other meditation. Who does not
remember the beautiful lines of Victor Hugo in the Orientales? Who has not
heard or read them? The poem is called "Ecstasy," and it is a fitting title.
The words are sometimes set to music, and the melody seems to complete
their pure beauty:
J'étais seul près des flots par une nuit d'étoiles.
Pas un nuage aux cieux, sur les mers pas de voiles;
Mes yeux plongeaient plus loin que le monde réel,
Et les bois et les monts et toute la nature
Semblaient interroger, dans un confus murmure,
Les flots des mers, les feux du ciel.
Et les étoiles d'or, légions infinies,
A voix haute, à voix basse, avec mille harmonies
Disaient, en inclinant leurs couronnes de feu;
Et les flots bleus, que rien ne gouverne et n'arrête,
Disaient en recourbant l'écume de leur crête:
... C'est le Seigneur, le Seigneur Dieu!
Note: Free Translation
Page 29
I was alone on the waves, on a starry night,
Not a cloud in the sky, not a sail in sight,
My eyes pierced beyond the natural world...
And the woods, and the hills, and the voice of Nature
Seemed to question in a confused murmur,
The waves of the Sea, and Heaven's fires.
And the golden stars in infinite legion,
Sang loudly, and softly, in glad recognition,
Inclining their crowns of fire;...
And the waves that naught can check nor arrest
Sang, bowing the foam of their haughty crest...
Behold the Lord God—Jehovah!
The immortal poet of France was an astronomer. The author more than
once had the honor of conversing with him on the problems of the starry
sky—and reflected that astronomers might well be poets.
It is indeed difficult to resist a sense of profound emotion before the
abysses of infinite Space, when we behold the innumerable multitude of
worlds suspended above our heads. We feel in this solitary contemplation of
the Heavens that there is more in the Universe than tangible and visible
matter: that there are forces, laws, destinies. Our ants' brains may know
themselves microscopic, and yet recognize that there is something greater
than the Earth, the Heavens;—more absolute than the Visible, the Invisible;
—beyond the more or less vulgar affairs of life, the sense of the True, the
Good, the Beautiful. We feel that an immense mystery broods over Nature,
—over Being, over created things. And it is here again that Astronomy
surpasses all the other sciences, that it becomes our sovereign teacher, that
it is the pharos of modern philosophy.
O Night, mysterious, sublime, and infinite! withdrawing from our eyes
the veil spread above us by the light of day, giving back transparency to the
Heavens, showing us the prodigious reality, the shining casket of the
Not a cloud in the sky, not a sail in sight,
My eyes pierced beyond the natural world...
And the woods, and the hills, and the voice of Nature
Seemed to question in a confused murmur,
The waves of the Sea, and Heaven's fires.
And the golden stars in infinite legion,
Sang loudly, and softly, in glad recognition,
Inclining their crowns of fire;...
And the waves that naught can check nor arrest
Sang, bowing the foam of their haughty crest...
Behold the Lord God—Jehovah!
The immortal poet of France was an astronomer. The author more than
once had the honor of conversing with him on the problems of the starry
sky—and reflected that astronomers might well be poets.
It is indeed difficult to resist a sense of profound emotion before the
abysses of infinite Space, when we behold the innumerable multitude of
worlds suspended above our heads. We feel in this solitary contemplation of
the Heavens that there is more in the Universe than tangible and visible
matter: that there are forces, laws, destinies. Our ants' brains may know
themselves microscopic, and yet recognize that there is something greater
than the Earth, the Heavens;—more absolute than the Visible, the Invisible;
—beyond the more or less vulgar affairs of life, the sense of the True, the
Good, the Beautiful. We feel that an immense mystery broods over Nature,
—over Being, over created things. And it is here again that Astronomy
surpasses all the other sciences, that it becomes our sovereign teacher, that
it is the pharos of modern philosophy.
O Night, mysterious, sublime, and infinite! withdrawing from our eyes
the veil spread above us by the light of day, giving back transparency to the
Heavens, showing us the prodigious reality, the shining casket of the
Page 30
celestial diamonds, the innumerable stars that succeed each other
interminably in immeasurable space! Without Night we should know
nothing. Without it our eyes would never have divined the sidereal
population, our intellects would never have pierced the harmony of the
Heavens, and we should have remained the blind, deaf parasites of a world
isolated from the rest of the universe. O Sacred Night! If on the one hand it
rests upon the heights of Truth beyond the day's illusions, on the other its
invisible urns pour down a silent and tranquil peace, a penetrating calm,
upon our souls that weary of Life's fever. It makes us forget the struggles,
perfidies, intrigues, the miseries of the hours of toil and noisy activity, all
the conventionalities of civilization. Its domain is that of rest and dreams.
We love it for its peace and calm tranquillity. We love it because it is true.
We love it because it places us in communication with the other worlds,
because it gives us the presage of Life, Universal and Eternal, because it
brings us Hope, because it proclaims us citizens of Heaven.
interminably in immeasurable space! Without Night we should know
nothing. Without it our eyes would never have divined the sidereal
population, our intellects would never have pierced the harmony of the
Heavens, and we should have remained the blind, deaf parasites of a world
isolated from the rest of the universe. O Sacred Night! If on the one hand it
rests upon the heights of Truth beyond the day's illusions, on the other its
invisible urns pour down a silent and tranquil peace, a penetrating calm,
upon our souls that weary of Life's fever. It makes us forget the struggles,
perfidies, intrigues, the miseries of the hours of toil and noisy activity, all
the conventionalities of civilization. Its domain is that of rest and dreams.
We love it for its peace and calm tranquillity. We love it because it is true.
We love it because it places us in communication with the other worlds,
because it gives us the presage of Life, Universal and Eternal, because it
brings us Hope, because it proclaims us citizens of Heaven.
Page 31
CHAPTER II
THE CONSTELLATIONS
In Chapter I we saw the Earth hanging in space, like a globe isolated on
all sides, and surrounded at vast distances by a multitude of stars.
These fiery orbs are suns like that which illuminates ourselves. They
shine by their own light. We know this for a fact, because they are so far off
that they could neither be illuminated by the Sun, nor, still more, reflect his
rays back upon us: and because, on the other hand, we have been able to
measure and analyze their light. Many of these distant suns are simple and
isolated; others are double, triple, or multiple; others appear to be the
centers of systems analogous to that which gravitates round our own Sun,
and of which we form part. But these celestial tribes are situated at such
remote distances from us that it is impossible to distinguish all the
individuals of each particular family. The most delicate observations have
only revealed a few of them. We must content ourselves here with admiring
the principals,—the sun-stars,—prodigious globes, flaming torches,
scattered profusely through the firmament.
How, then, is one to distinguish them? How can they be readily found
and named? There are so many of them!
Do not fear; it is quite a simple matter. In studying the surface of the
Earth we make use of geographical maps on which the continents and seas
of which it consists are drawn with the utmost care. Each country of our
planet is subdivided into states, each of which has its proper name. We shall
pursue the same plan in regard to the Heavens, and it will be all the easier
since the Great Book of the Firmament is constantly open to our gaze. Our
globe, moreover, actually revolves upon itself so that we read the whole in
THE CONSTELLATIONS
In Chapter I we saw the Earth hanging in space, like a globe isolated on
all sides, and surrounded at vast distances by a multitude of stars.
These fiery orbs are suns like that which illuminates ourselves. They
shine by their own light. We know this for a fact, because they are so far off
that they could neither be illuminated by the Sun, nor, still more, reflect his
rays back upon us: and because, on the other hand, we have been able to
measure and analyze their light. Many of these distant suns are simple and
isolated; others are double, triple, or multiple; others appear to be the
centers of systems analogous to that which gravitates round our own Sun,
and of which we form part. But these celestial tribes are situated at such
remote distances from us that it is impossible to distinguish all the
individuals of each particular family. The most delicate observations have
only revealed a few of them. We must content ourselves here with admiring
the principals,—the sun-stars,—prodigious globes, flaming torches,
scattered profusely through the firmament.
How, then, is one to distinguish them? How can they be readily found
and named? There are so many of them!
Do not fear; it is quite a simple matter. In studying the surface of the
Earth we make use of geographical maps on which the continents and seas
of which it consists are drawn with the utmost care. Each country of our
planet is subdivided into states, each of which has its proper name. We shall
pursue the same plan in regard to the Heavens, and it will be all the easier
since the Great Book of the Firmament is constantly open to our gaze. Our
globe, moreover, actually revolves upon itself so that we read the whole in
Page 32
due sequence. Given a clear atmosphere, and a little stimulus to the will
from our love of truth and science, and the geography of the Heavens, or
"uranography," will soon be as familiar to us as the geography of our
terrestrial atom.
On a beautiful summer's night, when we look toward the starry sky, we
are at first aware only of a number of shining specks. The stars seem to be
scattered almost accidentally through Space; they are so numerous and so
close to one another that it would appear rash to attempt to name them
separately. Yet some of the brighter ones particularly attract and excite our
attention. After a little observation we notice a certain regularity in the
arrangement of these distant suns, and take pleasure in drawing imaginary
figures round the celestial groups.
That is what the ancients did from a practical point of view. In order to
guide themselves across the trackless ocean, the earliest Phenician
navigators noted certain fixed bearings in the sky, by which they mapped
out their routes. In this way they discovered the position of the immovable
Pole, and acquired empire over the sea. The Chaldean pastors, too, the
nomad people of the East, invoked the Heavens to assist in their migrations.
They grouped the more brilliant of the stars into Constellations with simple
outlines, and gave to each of these celestial provinces a name derived from
mythology, history, or from the natural kingdoms. It is impossible to
determine the exact epoch of this primitive celestial geography. The
Centaur Chiron, Jason's tutor, was reputed the first to divide the Heavens
upon the sphere of the Argonauts. But this origin is a little mythical! In the
Bible we have the Prophet Job, who names Orion, the Pleiades, and the
Hyades, 3,300 years ago. The Babylonian Tables, and the hieroglyphs of
Egypt, witness to an astronomy that had made considerable advance even in
those remote epochs. Our actual constellations, which are doubtless of
Babylonian origin, appear to have been arranged in their present form by
the learned philosopher Eudoxus of Cnidus, about the year 360 b.c. Aratus
sang of them in a didactic poem toward 270. Hipparchus of Rhodes was the
first to note the astronomical positions with any precision, one hundred and
from our love of truth and science, and the geography of the Heavens, or
"uranography," will soon be as familiar to us as the geography of our
terrestrial atom.
On a beautiful summer's night, when we look toward the starry sky, we
are at first aware only of a number of shining specks. The stars seem to be
scattered almost accidentally through Space; they are so numerous and so
close to one another that it would appear rash to attempt to name them
separately. Yet some of the brighter ones particularly attract and excite our
attention. After a little observation we notice a certain regularity in the
arrangement of these distant suns, and take pleasure in drawing imaginary
figures round the celestial groups.
That is what the ancients did from a practical point of view. In order to
guide themselves across the trackless ocean, the earliest Phenician
navigators noted certain fixed bearings in the sky, by which they mapped
out their routes. In this way they discovered the position of the immovable
Pole, and acquired empire over the sea. The Chaldean pastors, too, the
nomad people of the East, invoked the Heavens to assist in their migrations.
They grouped the more brilliant of the stars into Constellations with simple
outlines, and gave to each of these celestial provinces a name derived from
mythology, history, or from the natural kingdoms. It is impossible to
determine the exact epoch of this primitive celestial geography. The
Centaur Chiron, Jason's tutor, was reputed the first to divide the Heavens
upon the sphere of the Argonauts. But this origin is a little mythical! In the
Bible we have the Prophet Job, who names Orion, the Pleiades, and the
Hyades, 3,300 years ago. The Babylonian Tables, and the hieroglyphs of
Egypt, witness to an astronomy that had made considerable advance even in
those remote epochs. Our actual constellations, which are doubtless of
Babylonian origin, appear to have been arranged in their present form by
the learned philosopher Eudoxus of Cnidus, about the year 360 b.c. Aratus
sang of them in a didactic poem toward 270. Hipparchus of Rhodes was the
first to note the astronomical positions with any precision, one hundred and
Page 33
thirty years before our era. He classified the stars in order of magnitude,
according to their apparent brightness; and his catalogue, preserved in the
Almagest of Ptolemy, contains 1,122 stars distributed into forty-eight
Constellations.
The figures of the constellations, taken almost entirely from fable, are
visible only to the eyes of the imagination, and where the ancients placed
such and such a person or animal, we may see, with a little good-will,
anything we choose to fancy. There is nothing real about these figures. And
yet it is indispensable to be able to recognize the constellations in order to
find our way among the innumerable army of the stars, and we shall
commence this study with the description of the most popular and best
known of them all, the one that circles every night through our Northern
Heavens. Needless to name it; it is familiar to every one. You have already
exclaimed—the Great Bear!
This vast and splendid association of suns, which is also known as the
Chariot of David, the Plow or Charles's Wain, and the Dipper, is one of the
finest constellations in the Heavens, and one of the oldest—seeing that the
Chinese hailed it as the divinity of the North, over three thousand years ago.
If any of my readers should happen to forget its position in the sky, the
following is a very simple expedient for finding it. Turn to the North—that
is, opposite to the point where the sun is to be found at midday. Whatever
the season of the year, day of the month, or hour of the night, you will
always see, high up in the firmament, seven magnificent stars, arranged in a
quadrilateral, followed by a tail, or handle, of three stars. This magnificent
constellation never sinks below our horizon. Night and day it watches
above us, turning in twenty-four hours round a very famous star that we
shall shortly become acquainted with. In the figure of the Great Bear, the
four stars of the quadrilateral are found in the body, and the three at the
extremity make the tail. As David's Chariot, the four stars represent the
wheels, and the three others the horses.
according to their apparent brightness; and his catalogue, preserved in the
Almagest of Ptolemy, contains 1,122 stars distributed into forty-eight
Constellations.
The figures of the constellations, taken almost entirely from fable, are
visible only to the eyes of the imagination, and where the ancients placed
such and such a person or animal, we may see, with a little good-will,
anything we choose to fancy. There is nothing real about these figures. And
yet it is indispensable to be able to recognize the constellations in order to
find our way among the innumerable army of the stars, and we shall
commence this study with the description of the most popular and best
known of them all, the one that circles every night through our Northern
Heavens. Needless to name it; it is familiar to every one. You have already
exclaimed—the Great Bear!
This vast and splendid association of suns, which is also known as the
Chariot of David, the Plow or Charles's Wain, and the Dipper, is one of the
finest constellations in the Heavens, and one of the oldest—seeing that the
Chinese hailed it as the divinity of the North, over three thousand years ago.
If any of my readers should happen to forget its position in the sky, the
following is a very simple expedient for finding it. Turn to the North—that
is, opposite to the point where the sun is to be found at midday. Whatever
the season of the year, day of the month, or hour of the night, you will
always see, high up in the firmament, seven magnificent stars, arranged in a
quadrilateral, followed by a tail, or handle, of three stars. This magnificent
constellation never sinks below our horizon. Night and day it watches
above us, turning in twenty-four hours round a very famous star that we
shall shortly become acquainted with. In the figure of the Great Bear, the
four stars of the quadrilateral are found in the body, and the three at the
extremity make the tail. As David's Chariot, the four stars represent the
wheels, and the three others the horses.
Page 34
Sometimes our ancestors called them the Seven Oxen, the "oxen of the
celestial pastures," from which the word septentrion (septem triones, seven
oxen of labor) is derived. Some see a Plowshare; others more familiarly call
this figure the Dipper. As it rotates round the pole, its outline varies with the
different positions.
It is not easy to guess why this constellation should have been called the
Bear. Yet the name has had a certain influence. From the Greek word arctos
(bear) has come arctic, and for its antithesis, antarctic. From the Latin word
trio (ox of labor) has come septentrion, the seven oxen. Etymology is not
always logical. Is not the word "venerate" derived from Venus?
In order to distinguish one star from another, the convention of denoting
them by the letters of the Greek Alphabet has been adopted, for it would be
impossible to give a name to each, so considerable is their number.[3]
α and β denote the front wheels of the Chariot generally known as the
"pointers;" γ and δ the hind wheels; ε, ζ, η the three horses. All these stars
are of the second order of magnitude (the specific meaning of this
expression will be explained in the next chapter), except the last (δ) of the
quadrilateral, which is of the third order.
Figure 3 gives the outline of this primitive constellation. In revolving in
twenty-four hours round the Pole, which is situated at the prolongation of a
line drawn from β to α, it occupies every conceivable position,—as if this
page were turned in all directions. But the relative arrangement of the seven
stars remains unaltered. In contemplating these seven stars it must never be
forgotten that each is a dazzling sun, a center of force and life. One of them
is especially remarkable: ζ, known as Mizar to the Arabs. Those who have
good sight will distinguish near it a minute star, Alcor, or the Cavalier, also
called Saidak by the Arabs—that is, the Test, because it can be used as a test
of vision. But further, if you have a small telescope at your disposal, direct
it upon the fine star Mizar: you will be astonished at discovering two of the
finest diamonds you could wish to see, with which no brilliant is
celestial pastures," from which the word septentrion (septem triones, seven
oxen of labor) is derived. Some see a Plowshare; others more familiarly call
this figure the Dipper. As it rotates round the pole, its outline varies with the
different positions.
It is not easy to guess why this constellation should have been called the
Bear. Yet the name has had a certain influence. From the Greek word arctos
(bear) has come arctic, and for its antithesis, antarctic. From the Latin word
trio (ox of labor) has come septentrion, the seven oxen. Etymology is not
always logical. Is not the word "venerate" derived from Venus?
In order to distinguish one star from another, the convention of denoting
them by the letters of the Greek Alphabet has been adopted, for it would be
impossible to give a name to each, so considerable is their number.[3]
α and β denote the front wheels of the Chariot generally known as the
"pointers;" γ and δ the hind wheels; ε, ζ, η the three horses. All these stars
are of the second order of magnitude (the specific meaning of this
expression will be explained in the next chapter), except the last (δ) of the
quadrilateral, which is of the third order.
Figure 3 gives the outline of this primitive constellation. In revolving in
twenty-four hours round the Pole, which is situated at the prolongation of a
line drawn from β to α, it occupies every conceivable position,—as if this
page were turned in all directions. But the relative arrangement of the seven
stars remains unaltered. In contemplating these seven stars it must never be
forgotten that each is a dazzling sun, a center of force and life. One of them
is especially remarkable: ζ, known as Mizar to the Arabs. Those who have
good sight will distinguish near it a minute star, Alcor, or the Cavalier, also
called Saidak by the Arabs—that is, the Test, because it can be used as a test
of vision. But further, if you have a small telescope at your disposal, direct
it upon the fine star Mizar: you will be astonished at discovering two of the
finest diamonds you could wish to see, with which no brilliant is
Page 35
comparable. There are
several double stars;
these we shall become
acquainted with later
on.
Meantime, we must
not forget our celestial
geography. The Great
Bear will help us to
find all the adjacent
constellations.
If a straight line is
drawn (Fig. 4) from β
Fig. 3.—The Great Bear (or Dipper), and the Pole-Star.
through α, which forms
the extremity of the square, and is
prolonged by a quantity equal to the
distance of α from the tip of the
handle, we come on a star of second
magnitude, which marks the
extremity of a figure perfectly
comparable with the Great Bear, but
smaller, less brilliant, and pointing
in the contrary direction. This is the
Fig. 4.—To find the Pole-Star.
Little Bear, composed, like its big
brother, of seven stars; the one
situated at the end of the line by which we have found it is the Pole-Star.
Immovable in the region of the North Pole, the Pole-Star has captivated
all eyes by its position in the firmament. It is the providence of mariners
who have gone astray on the ocean, for it points them to the North, while it
is the pivot of the immense rotation accomplished round it by all the stars in
twenty-four hours. Hence it is a very important factor, and we must hasten
several double stars;
these we shall become
acquainted with later
on.
Meantime, we must
not forget our celestial
geography. The Great
Bear will help us to
find all the adjacent
constellations.
If a straight line is
drawn (Fig. 4) from β
Fig. 3.—The Great Bear (or Dipper), and the Pole-Star.
through α, which forms
the extremity of the square, and is
prolonged by a quantity equal to the
distance of α from the tip of the
handle, we come on a star of second
magnitude, which marks the
extremity of a figure perfectly
comparable with the Great Bear, but
smaller, less brilliant, and pointing
in the contrary direction. This is the
Fig. 4.—To find the Pole-Star.
Little Bear, composed, like its big
brother, of seven stars; the one
situated at the end of the line by which we have found it is the Pole-Star.
Immovable in the region of the North Pole, the Pole-Star has captivated
all eyes by its position in the firmament. It is the providence of mariners
who have gone astray on the ocean, for it points them to the North, while it
is the pivot of the immense rotation accomplished round it by all the stars in
twenty-four hours. Hence it is a very important factor, and we must hasten
Page 36
to find it, and render it due homage. It should be added that its special
immobility, in the prolongation of the Earth's axis, is merely an effect
caused by the diurnal movements of our planet. Our readers are of course
aware that it is the earth that turns and not the sky. But evidence of this will
be given later on. In looking at the Pole-Star, the South is behind one, the
East to the right, and the West to the left.
Between the Great and the Little Bear, we can distinguish a winding
procession of smaller stars. These constitute the Dragon.
We will continue our journey by way of Cassiopeia, a fine constellation
placed on the opposite side of the Pole-Star in relation to the Great Bear,
and shaped somewhat like the open limbs of the letter W. It is also called
the Chair. And, in fact, when the figure is represented with the line α β
below, the line χ γ forms the seat, and γ δ ε its back.
If a straight line is drawn from δ of the Great Bear, and prolonged
beyond the Pole-Star in a quantity equal to the distance which separates
these two stars, it is easy to find this constellation (Fig. 5). This group, like
the preceding, never sets, and is always visible, opposite to the Great Bear.
It revolves in twenty-four hours round the Pole-Star, and is to be seen, now
above, now below, now to the right, now to the left.
Fig. 5.—To find Cassiopeia.
immobility, in the prolongation of the Earth's axis, is merely an effect
caused by the diurnal movements of our planet. Our readers are of course
aware that it is the earth that turns and not the sky. But evidence of this will
be given later on. In looking at the Pole-Star, the South is behind one, the
East to the right, and the West to the left.
Between the Great and the Little Bear, we can distinguish a winding
procession of smaller stars. These constitute the Dragon.
We will continue our journey by way of Cassiopeia, a fine constellation
placed on the opposite side of the Pole-Star in relation to the Great Bear,
and shaped somewhat like the open limbs of the letter W. It is also called
the Chair. And, in fact, when the figure is represented with the line α β
below, the line χ γ forms the seat, and γ δ ε its back.
If a straight line is drawn from δ of the Great Bear, and prolonged
beyond the Pole-Star in a quantity equal to the distance which separates
these two stars, it is easy to find this constellation (Fig. 5). This group, like
the preceding, never sets, and is always visible, opposite to the Great Bear.
It revolves in twenty-four hours round the Pole-Star, and is to be seen, now
above, now below, now to the right, now to the left.
Fig. 5.—To find Cassiopeia.
Page 37
Fig. 6.—To Find Pegasus and Andromeda.
If in the next place, starting from the stars α and δ in the Great Bear, we
draw two lines which join at Polaris and are prolonged beyond Cassiopeia,
we arrive at the Square of Pegasus (Fig. 6), a vast constellation that
terminates on one side in a prolongation formed of three stars.
These three last stars belong to Andromeda, and themselves abut on
Perseus. The last star in the Square of Pegasus is also the first in
Andromeda.
γ of Andromeda is a magnificent double orb, to which we shall return in
the next chapter, i.e., the telescope resolves it into two marvelous suns, one
of which is topaz-yellow, and the other emerald-green. Three stars, indeed,
are visible with more powerful instruments.
Above β and near a small star, is visible a faint, whitish, luminous trail:
this is the oblong nebula of Andromeda, the first mentioned in the history of
astronomy, and one of the most beautiful in the Heavens, perceptible to the
unaided eye on very clear nights.
The stars α, β and γ of Perseus form a concave bow which will serve in a
new orientation. If it is prolonged in the direction of δ, we find a very
If in the next place, starting from the stars α and δ in the Great Bear, we
draw two lines which join at Polaris and are prolonged beyond Cassiopeia,
we arrive at the Square of Pegasus (Fig. 6), a vast constellation that
terminates on one side in a prolongation formed of three stars.
These three last stars belong to Andromeda, and themselves abut on
Perseus. The last star in the Square of Pegasus is also the first in
Andromeda.
γ of Andromeda is a magnificent double orb, to which we shall return in
the next chapter, i.e., the telescope resolves it into two marvelous suns, one
of which is topaz-yellow, and the other emerald-green. Three stars, indeed,
are visible with more powerful instruments.
Above β and near a small star, is visible a faint, whitish, luminous trail:
this is the oblong nebula of Andromeda, the first mentioned in the history of
astronomy, and one of the most beautiful in the Heavens, perceptible to the
unaided eye on very clear nights.
The stars α, β and γ of Perseus form a concave bow which will serve in a
new orientation. If it is prolonged in the direction of δ, we find a very
Page 38
brilliant star of the first
magnitude. This is Capella,
the Goat, in the constellation
of the Charioteer (Fig. 7).
If coming back to δ in
Perseus, a line is drawn
toward the South, we reach
the Pleiades, a gorgeous
cluster of stars, scintillating
like the finest dust of
diamonds, on the shoulder of
the Bull, to which we shall
come shortly, in studying the
Constellations of the Zodiac.
Not far off is a very
curious star, β of Perseus, or
Fig. 7.—Perseus, the Pleiades, Capella.
Algol, which forms a little
triangle with two others
smaller than itself. This star is peculiar in that, instead of shining with a
fixed light, it varies in intensity, and is sometimes pale, sometimes brilliant.
It belongs to the category of variable stars which we shall study later on. All
the observations made on it for more than two hundred years go to prove
that a dark star revolves round this sun, almost in the plane of our line of
sight, producing as it passes in front of it a partial eclipse that reduces it
from the second to the fourth magnitude, every other two days, twenty
hours, and forty-nine minutes.
And now, let us return to the Great Bear, which aided us so beneficently
to start for these distant shores, and whence we shall set out afresh in search
of other constellations.
magnitude. This is Capella,
the Goat, in the constellation
of the Charioteer (Fig. 7).
If coming back to δ in
Perseus, a line is drawn
toward the South, we reach
the Pleiades, a gorgeous
cluster of stars, scintillating
like the finest dust of
diamonds, on the shoulder of
the Bull, to which we shall
come shortly, in studying the
Constellations of the Zodiac.
Not far off is a very
curious star, β of Perseus, or
Fig. 7.—Perseus, the Pleiades, Capella.
Algol, which forms a little
triangle with two others
smaller than itself. This star is peculiar in that, instead of shining with a
fixed light, it varies in intensity, and is sometimes pale, sometimes brilliant.
It belongs to the category of variable stars which we shall study later on. All
the observations made on it for more than two hundred years go to prove
that a dark star revolves round this sun, almost in the plane of our line of
sight, producing as it passes in front of it a partial eclipse that reduces it
from the second to the fourth magnitude, every other two days, twenty
hours, and forty-nine minutes.
And now, let us return to the Great Bear, which aided us so beneficently
to start for these distant shores, and whence we shall set out afresh in search
of other constellations.
Page 39
If we produce the curved line of the tail, or handle, we encounter a
magnificent golden-yellow star, a splendid sun of dazzling brilliancy: let us
make our bow to Arcturus, α of the Herdsman, which is at the extremity of
this pentagonal constellation. The principal stars of this asterism are of the
third magnitude, with the exception of α, which is of the first. Alongside of
the Herdsman is a circle consisting of five stars of the third and fourth
magnitude, save the third, α, or the Pearl, which is of the second magnitude.
This is the Corona Borealis. It is very easily recognized (Fig. 8).
Fig. 8.—To find Arcturus, the Herdsman, and the Northern Crown.
A line drawn from the Pole-Star to Arcturus forms the base of an
equilateral triangle, the apex of which, situated opposite the Great Bear, is
occupied by Vega, or α of the Lyre, a splendid diamond of ideal purity
scintillating through the ether. This magnificent star, of first magnitude, is,
with Arcturus, the most luminous in our Heavens. It burns with a white
light, in the proximity of the Milky Way, not far from a constellation that is
very easily recognized by the arrangement of its principal stars in the form
of a cross. It is named Cygnus, the Bird, or the Swan (Fig. 9), and is easy to
find by the Square of Pegasus, and the Milky Way. This figure, the
brilliancy of whose constituents (of the third and fourth magnitudes)
contrasts strongly with the pallor of the Milky Way, includes at its extremity
at the foot of the Cross, a superb double star, β or Albirio: α of Cygnus is
also called Deneb. The first star of which the distance was calculated is in
magnificent golden-yellow star, a splendid sun of dazzling brilliancy: let us
make our bow to Arcturus, α of the Herdsman, which is at the extremity of
this pentagonal constellation. The principal stars of this asterism are of the
third magnitude, with the exception of α, which is of the first. Alongside of
the Herdsman is a circle consisting of five stars of the third and fourth
magnitude, save the third, α, or the Pearl, which is of the second magnitude.
This is the Corona Borealis. It is very easily recognized (Fig. 8).
Fig. 8.—To find Arcturus, the Herdsman, and the Northern Crown.
A line drawn from the Pole-Star to Arcturus forms the base of an
equilateral triangle, the apex of which, situated opposite the Great Bear, is
occupied by Vega, or α of the Lyre, a splendid diamond of ideal purity
scintillating through the ether. This magnificent star, of first magnitude, is,
with Arcturus, the most luminous in our Heavens. It burns with a white
light, in the proximity of the Milky Way, not far from a constellation that is
very easily recognized by the arrangement of its principal stars in the form
of a cross. It is named Cygnus, the Bird, or the Swan (Fig. 9), and is easy to
find by the Square of Pegasus, and the Milky Way. This figure, the
brilliancy of whose constituents (of the third and fourth magnitudes)
contrasts strongly with the pallor of the Milky Way, includes at its extremity
at the foot of the Cross, a superb double star, β or Albirio: α of Cygnus is
also called Deneb. The first star of which the distance was calculated is in
Page 40
this constellation. This little orb of fifth magnitude, which hangs
69,000,000,000,000 kilometers (42,000,000,000,000 miles) above our
Earth, is the nearest of all the stars to the skies of Europe.
Fig. 9.—The Swan, Vega, the Eagle.
Not far off is the fine Eagle, which spreads its wings in the Milky Way,
and in which the star Altaïr, α, of first magnitude, is situated between its
two satellites, β and γ.
The Constellation of Hercules, toward which the motions of the Sun are
impelling us, with all the planets of its system, is near the Lyre. Its principal
stars can be recognized inside the triangle formed by the Pole-Star,
Arcturus, and Vega.
All the Constellations described above belong to the Northern
Hemisphere. Those nearest the pole are called circumpolar. They revolve
round the pole in twenty-four hours.
Having now learned the Northern Heavens, we must come back to the
Sun, which we have left behind us. The Earth revolves round him in a year,
and in consequence he seems to revolve round us, sweeping through a vast
circle of the celestial sphere. In each year, at the same period, he passes the
same points of the Heavens, in front of the same constellations, which are
69,000,000,000,000 kilometers (42,000,000,000,000 miles) above our
Earth, is the nearest of all the stars to the skies of Europe.
Fig. 9.—The Swan, Vega, the Eagle.
Not far off is the fine Eagle, which spreads its wings in the Milky Way,
and in which the star Altaïr, α, of first magnitude, is situated between its
two satellites, β and γ.
The Constellation of Hercules, toward which the motions of the Sun are
impelling us, with all the planets of its system, is near the Lyre. Its principal
stars can be recognized inside the triangle formed by the Pole-Star,
Arcturus, and Vega.
All the Constellations described above belong to the Northern
Hemisphere. Those nearest the pole are called circumpolar. They revolve
round the pole in twenty-four hours.
Having now learned the Northern Heavens, we must come back to the
Sun, which we have left behind us. The Earth revolves round him in a year,
and in consequence he seems to revolve round us, sweeping through a vast
circle of the celestial sphere. In each year, at the same period, he passes the
same points of the Heavens, in front of the same constellations, which are
Page 41
rendered invisible by his light. We know that the stars are at a fixed position
from the Earth, whatever their distance, and that if we do not see them at
noon as at midnight, it is simply because they are extinguished by the
dazzling light of the orb of day. With the aid of a telescope it is always
possible to see the more brilliant of them.
The Zodiac is the zone of stars traversed by the Sun in the course of a
year. This word is derived from the Greek Zodiakos, which signifies
"animal," and this etymology arose because most of the figures traced on
this belt of stars represent animals. The belt is divided into twelve parts that
are called the twelve Signs of the Zodiac, also named by the ancients the
"Houses of the Sun," since the Sun visits one of them in each month. These
are the signs, with the primitive characters that distinguish them: the Ram
♈, the Bull ♉, the Twins ♊, the Crab ♋, the Lion ♌, the Virgin ♍, the
Balance ♎, the Scorpion ♏, the Archer ♐, the Goat ♑, the Water-Carrier
♒, the Fishes ♓. The sign ♈ Aries represents the horns of the Ram, ♉ the
head of the Bull, and so on.
If you will now follow me into the Houses of the Sun you will readily
recognize them again, provided you have a clear picture of the principal
stars of the Northern Heavens. First, you see the Ram, the initial sign of the
Zodiac; because at the epoch at which the actual Zodiac was fixed, the Sun
entered this sign at the vernal equinox, and the equator crossed the ecliptic
at this point. This constellation, in which the horns of the Ram (third
magnitude) are the brightest, is situated between Andromeda and the
Pleiades. Two thousand years ago, the Ram was regarded as the symbol of
spring; but owing to the secular movement of the precession of the
equinoxes, the Sun is no longer there on March 21: he is in the Fishes.
To the left, or east of the Ram, we find the Bull, the head of which forms
a triangle in which burns Aldebaran, of first magnitude, a magnificent red
star that marks the right eye; and the Hyades, scintillating pale and
trembling, on its forehead. The timid Pleiades, as we have seen, veil
themselves on the shoulder of the Bull—a captivating cluster, of which six
from the Earth, whatever their distance, and that if we do not see them at
noon as at midnight, it is simply because they are extinguished by the
dazzling light of the orb of day. With the aid of a telescope it is always
possible to see the more brilliant of them.
The Zodiac is the zone of stars traversed by the Sun in the course of a
year. This word is derived from the Greek Zodiakos, which signifies
"animal," and this etymology arose because most of the figures traced on
this belt of stars represent animals. The belt is divided into twelve parts that
are called the twelve Signs of the Zodiac, also named by the ancients the
"Houses of the Sun," since the Sun visits one of them in each month. These
are the signs, with the primitive characters that distinguish them: the Ram
♈, the Bull ♉, the Twins ♊, the Crab ♋, the Lion ♌, the Virgin ♍, the
Balance ♎, the Scorpion ♏, the Archer ♐, the Goat ♑, the Water-Carrier
♒, the Fishes ♓. The sign ♈ Aries represents the horns of the Ram, ♉ the
head of the Bull, and so on.
If you will now follow me into the Houses of the Sun you will readily
recognize them again, provided you have a clear picture of the principal
stars of the Northern Heavens. First, you see the Ram, the initial sign of the
Zodiac; because at the epoch at which the actual Zodiac was fixed, the Sun
entered this sign at the vernal equinox, and the equator crossed the ecliptic
at this point. This constellation, in which the horns of the Ram (third
magnitude) are the brightest, is situated between Andromeda and the
Pleiades. Two thousand years ago, the Ram was regarded as the symbol of
spring; but owing to the secular movement of the precession of the
equinoxes, the Sun is no longer there on March 21: he is in the Fishes.
To the left, or east of the Ram, we find the Bull, the head of which forms
a triangle in which burns Aldebaran, of first magnitude, a magnificent red
star that marks the right eye; and the Hyades, scintillating pale and
trembling, on its forehead. The timid Pleiades, as we have seen, veil
themselves on the shoulder of the Bull—a captivating cluster, of which six
Page 42
stars can be counted with the unaided eye, while several hundred are
discovered with the telescope.
Next the Twins. They are easily recognized by the two fine stars, α and
β, of first magnitude, which mark their heads, and immortalize Castor and
Pollux, the sons of Jupiter, celebrated for their indissoluble friendship.
Cancer, the Crab, is the least important sign of the Zodiac. It is
distinguished only by five stars of fourth and fifth magnitudes, situated
below the line of Castor and Pollux, and by a pale cluster called Præsepe,
the Beehive.
The Lion next approaches, superb in his majesty. At his heart is a
gorgeous star of first magnitude, α or Regulus. This figure forms a grand
trapezium of four stars on the celestial sphere.
The Virgin exhibits a splendid star of first magnitude; this is Spica,
which with Regulus and Arcturus, form a triangle by which this
constellation can be recognized.
The Balance follows the Virgin. Its scales, marked by two stars of
second magnitude, are situated a little to the East of Spica.
We next come to the eighth constellation of the Zodiac, which is one of
the most beautiful of this belt of stars. Antares, a red star of first magnitude,
occupies the heart of the venomous and accursed Scorpion. It is situated on
the prolongation of a line joining Regulus to Spica, and forms with Vega of
the Lyre, and Arcturus of the Herdsman, a great isosceles triangle, of which
this latter star is the apex.
The Scorpion, held to be a sign of ill luck, has been prejudicial to the
Archer, which follows it, and traces an oblique trapezium in the sky, a little
to the east of Antares. These two southernmost constellations never rise
much above the horizon for France and England. In fable, the Archer is
Chiron, the preceptor of Jason, Achilles and Æsculapius.
discovered with the telescope.
Next the Twins. They are easily recognized by the two fine stars, α and
β, of first magnitude, which mark their heads, and immortalize Castor and
Pollux, the sons of Jupiter, celebrated for their indissoluble friendship.
Cancer, the Crab, is the least important sign of the Zodiac. It is
distinguished only by five stars of fourth and fifth magnitudes, situated
below the line of Castor and Pollux, and by a pale cluster called Præsepe,
the Beehive.
The Lion next approaches, superb in his majesty. At his heart is a
gorgeous star of first magnitude, α or Regulus. This figure forms a grand
trapezium of four stars on the celestial sphere.
The Virgin exhibits a splendid star of first magnitude; this is Spica,
which with Regulus and Arcturus, form a triangle by which this
constellation can be recognized.
The Balance follows the Virgin. Its scales, marked by two stars of
second magnitude, are situated a little to the East of Spica.
We next come to the eighth constellation of the Zodiac, which is one of
the most beautiful of this belt of stars. Antares, a red star of first magnitude,
occupies the heart of the venomous and accursed Scorpion. It is situated on
the prolongation of a line joining Regulus to Spica, and forms with Vega of
the Lyre, and Arcturus of the Herdsman, a great isosceles triangle, of which
this latter star is the apex.
The Scorpion, held to be a sign of ill luck, has been prejudicial to the
Archer, which follows it, and traces an oblique trapezium in the sky, a little
to the east of Antares. These two southernmost constellations never rise
much above the horizon for France and England. In fable, the Archer is
Chiron, the preceptor of Jason, Achilles and Æsculapius.
Page 43
Capricorn lies to the south of Altaïr, on the prolongation of a line from
the Lyre to the Eagle. It is hardly noticeable save for the stars α and β of
third magnitude, which scintillate on its forehead.
The Water-Carrier pours his streams toward the horizon. He is not rich in
stars, exhibiting only three of third magnitude that form a very flattened
triangle.
Lastly the Fishes, concluding sign of the Zodiac, are found to the south
of Andromeda and Pegasus. Save for α, of third magnitude, this
constellation consists of small stars that are hardly visible.
These twelve zodiacal constellations will be recognized on examining
the chart (Figs. 10–11).
We must now visit the stars of the Southern Heavens, some of which are
equally deserving of admiration.
Fig. 10.—The Constellations of the Zodiac: summer and autumn;
Capricorn, Archer, Scorpion, Balance, Virgin, Lion.
It should in the first place be noted that the signs of the Zodiac and the
Southern Constellations are not, like those which are circumpolar,
perpetually visible at all periods of the year. Their visibility depends on the
time of year and the hour of the night.[4]
In order to admire the fine constellations of the North, as described
above, we have only to open our windows on a clear summer's evening, or
the Lyre to the Eagle. It is hardly noticeable save for the stars α and β of
third magnitude, which scintillate on its forehead.
The Water-Carrier pours his streams toward the horizon. He is not rich in
stars, exhibiting only three of third magnitude that form a very flattened
triangle.
Lastly the Fishes, concluding sign of the Zodiac, are found to the south
of Andromeda and Pegasus. Save for α, of third magnitude, this
constellation consists of small stars that are hardly visible.
These twelve zodiacal constellations will be recognized on examining
the chart (Figs. 10–11).
We must now visit the stars of the Southern Heavens, some of which are
equally deserving of admiration.
Fig. 10.—The Constellations of the Zodiac: summer and autumn;
Capricorn, Archer, Scorpion, Balance, Virgin, Lion.
It should in the first place be noted that the signs of the Zodiac and the
Southern Constellations are not, like those which are circumpolar,
perpetually visible at all periods of the year. Their visibility depends on the
time of year and the hour of the night.[4]
In order to admire the fine constellations of the North, as described
above, we have only to open our windows on a clear summer's evening, or
Page 44
walk round the garden in the mysterious light of these inaccessible suns,
while we look up at the immense fields in which each star is like the head
of a celestial spear.
But the summer is over, autumn is upon us, and then, too soon, comes
winter clothed in hoar-frost. The days are short and cold, dark and dreary;
but as a compensation the night is much longer, and adorns herself with her
most beautiful jewels, offering us the contemplation of her inexhaustible
treasures.
Fig. 11.—The Constellations of the Zodiac: winter and spring; Crab, Twins, Bull, Ram,
Fishes, Water-Carrier.
First, let us do homage to the magnificent Orion, most splendid of all the
constellations: he advances like a colossal giant, and confronts the Bull.
This constellation appears about midnight in November, in the south-
eastern Heavens; toward eleven o'clock in December and January, due
south; about ten in February, in the south-east; about nine in March, and
about eight in April, in the west; and then sets below our horizon.
while we look up at the immense fields in which each star is like the head
of a celestial spear.
But the summer is over, autumn is upon us, and then, too soon, comes
winter clothed in hoar-frost. The days are short and cold, dark and dreary;
but as a compensation the night is much longer, and adorns herself with her
most beautiful jewels, offering us the contemplation of her inexhaustible
treasures.
Fig. 11.—The Constellations of the Zodiac: winter and spring; Crab, Twins, Bull, Ram,
Fishes, Water-Carrier.
First, let us do homage to the magnificent Orion, most splendid of all the
constellations: he advances like a colossal giant, and confronts the Bull.
This constellation appears about midnight in November, in the south-
eastern Heavens; toward eleven o'clock in December and January, due
south; about ten in February, in the south-east; about nine in March, and
about eight in April, in the west; and then sets below our horizon.
Page 45
Fig. 12.—Orion and his celestial companions.
It is indisputably the most striking figure in the sky, and with the Great
Bear, the most ancient in history, the first that was noticed: both are referred
to in the ancient texts of China, Chaldea, and Egypt.
Eight principal stars delineate its outline; two are of the first magnitude,
five of the second, and one of the third (Fig. 12). The most brilliant are
Betelgeuse (α) and Rigel (β): the former marking the right shoulder of the
Colossus as it faces us; the second the left foot. The star on the left shoulder
is γ or Bellatrix, of second magnitude; that of the right foot, χ, is almost of
the third. Three stars of second magnitude placed obliquely at equal
distances from each other, the first or highest of which marks the position of
It is indisputably the most striking figure in the sky, and with the Great
Bear, the most ancient in history, the first that was noticed: both are referred
to in the ancient texts of China, Chaldea, and Egypt.
Eight principal stars delineate its outline; two are of the first magnitude,
five of the second, and one of the third (Fig. 12). The most brilliant are
Betelgeuse (α) and Rigel (β): the former marking the right shoulder of the
Colossus as it faces us; the second the left foot. The star on the left shoulder
is γ or Bellatrix, of second magnitude; that of the right foot, χ, is almost of
the third. Three stars of second magnitude placed obliquely at equal
distances from each other, the first or highest of which marks the position of
Page 46
the equatorial line, indicate the Belt or Girdle. These stars, known as the
Three Kings, and by country people as the Rake, assist greatly in the
recognition of this fine constellation.
A little below the second star of the Belt, a large white patch, like a band
of fog, the apparent dimensions of which are equal to that of the lunar disk,
is visible to the unaided eye: this is the Nebula of Orion, one of the most
magnificent in the entire Heavens. It was discovered in 1656 by Huyghens,
who counted twelve stars in the pale cloud. Since that date it has been
constantly studied and photographed by its many admirers, while the giant
eye of the telescope discovers in it to-day an innumerable multitude of little
stars which reveal the existence of an entire universe in this region.
Orion is not merely the most imposing of the celestial figures; it is also
the richest in sidereal wonders. Among these, it exhibits the most complex
of all the multiple systems known to us: that of the star θ situated in the
celebrated nebula just mentioned. This marvelous star, viewed through a
powerful telescope, breaks up into six suns, forming a most remarkable
stellar group.
This region is altogether one of the most brilliant in the entire
firmament. We must no longer postpone our homage to the brightest star in
the sky, the magnificent Sirius, which shines on the left below Orion: it
returns every year toward the end of November. This marvelous star, of
dazzling brilliancy, is the first, α, in the constellation of the Great Dog,
which forms a quadrilateral, the base of which is adjacent to a triangle
erected from the horizon.
When astronomers first endeavored to determine the distance of the
stars, Sirius, which attracted all eyes to its burning fires, was the particular
object of attention. After long observation, they succeeded in determining
its distance as 92 trillion kilometers (57 trillion miles). Light, that radiates
through space at a velocity of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) per
Three Kings, and by country people as the Rake, assist greatly in the
recognition of this fine constellation.
A little below the second star of the Belt, a large white patch, like a band
of fog, the apparent dimensions of which are equal to that of the lunar disk,
is visible to the unaided eye: this is the Nebula of Orion, one of the most
magnificent in the entire Heavens. It was discovered in 1656 by Huyghens,
who counted twelve stars in the pale cloud. Since that date it has been
constantly studied and photographed by its many admirers, while the giant
eye of the telescope discovers in it to-day an innumerable multitude of little
stars which reveal the existence of an entire universe in this region.
Orion is not merely the most imposing of the celestial figures; it is also
the richest in sidereal wonders. Among these, it exhibits the most complex
of all the multiple systems known to us: that of the star θ situated in the
celebrated nebula just mentioned. This marvelous star, viewed through a
powerful telescope, breaks up into six suns, forming a most remarkable
stellar group.
This region is altogether one of the most brilliant in the entire
firmament. We must no longer postpone our homage to the brightest star in
the sky, the magnificent Sirius, which shines on the left below Orion: it
returns every year toward the end of November. This marvelous star, of
dazzling brilliancy, is the first, α, in the constellation of the Great Dog,
which forms a quadrilateral, the base of which is adjacent to a triangle
erected from the horizon.
When astronomers first endeavored to determine the distance of the
stars, Sirius, which attracted all eyes to its burning fires, was the particular
object of attention. After long observation, they succeeded in determining
its distance as 92 trillion kilometers (57 trillion miles). Light, that radiates
through space at a velocity of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) per
Page 47
second, takes no less than ten years to reach us from this sun, which,
nevertheless, is one of our neighbors.
The Little Dog, in which Procyon (α, of first magnitude) shines out, is
above its big brother. With the exception of α, it has no bright stars.
Fig. 13.—Winter Constellations.
Lastly, toward the southern horizon, we must notice the Hydra, Eridanus,
the Whale, the Southern Fish, the Ship, and the Centaur. This last
constellation, while invisible to our latitudes, contains the star that is nearest
to the Earth, α, of first magnitude, the distance of which is 40 trillion
kilometers (25 trillion miles).
nevertheless, is one of our neighbors.
The Little Dog, in which Procyon (α, of first magnitude) shines out, is
above its big brother. With the exception of α, it has no bright stars.
Fig. 13.—Winter Constellations.
Lastly, toward the southern horizon, we must notice the Hydra, Eridanus,
the Whale, the Southern Fish, the Ship, and the Centaur. This last
constellation, while invisible to our latitudes, contains the star that is nearest
to the Earth, α, of first magnitude, the distance of which is 40 trillion
kilometers (25 trillion miles).
Page 48
Fig. 14.—Spring Constellations.
The feet of the Centaur touch the Southern Cross, which is always
invisible to us, and a little farther down the Southern Pole reigns over the
icy desert of the antarctic regions.
The feet of the Centaur touch the Southern Cross, which is always
invisible to us, and a little farther down the Southern Pole reigns over the
icy desert of the antarctic regions.
Page 49
Fig. 15.—Summer Constellations.
Page 50
Fig. 16.—Autumn Constellations.
In order to complete the preceding descriptions, we subjoin four charts
representing the aspect of the starry heavens during the evenings of winter,
spring, summer, and autumn. To make use of these, we must suppose them
to be placed above our heads, the center marking the zenith, and the sky
descending all round to the horizon. The horizon, therefore, bounds these
panoramas. Turning the chart in any direction, and looking at it from north,
south, east, or west, we find all the principal stars. The first map (Fig. 13)
represents the sky in winter (January) at 8 p.m.; the second, in spring (April)
at 9 p.m.; the third, in summer (July) at the same hour; the fourth, the sky in
autumn (October) at the same time.
And so, at little cost, we have made one of the grandest and most
beautiful journeys conceivable. We now have a new country, or, better, have
In order to complete the preceding descriptions, we subjoin four charts
representing the aspect of the starry heavens during the evenings of winter,
spring, summer, and autumn. To make use of these, we must suppose them
to be placed above our heads, the center marking the zenith, and the sky
descending all round to the horizon. The horizon, therefore, bounds these
panoramas. Turning the chart in any direction, and looking at it from north,
south, east, or west, we find all the principal stars. The first map (Fig. 13)
represents the sky in winter (January) at 8 p.m.; the second, in spring (April)
at 9 p.m.; the third, in summer (July) at the same hour; the fourth, the sky in
autumn (October) at the same time.
And so, at little cost, we have made one of the grandest and most
beautiful journeys conceivable. We now have a new country, or, better, have
Page 51
learned to see and know our own country, for since the Earth is a planet we
must all be citizens of the Heavens before we can belong to such or such a
nation of our lilliputian world.
We must now study this sublime spectacle of the Heavens in detail.
must all be citizens of the Heavens before we can belong to such or such a
nation of our lilliputian world.
We must now study this sublime spectacle of the Heavens in detail.
Page 52
CHAPTER III
THE STARS, SUNS OF THE INFINITE
A Journey through Space
We have seen from the foregoing summary of the principal
Constellations that there is great diversity in the brightness of the stars, and
that while our eyes are dazzled with the brilliancy of certain orbs, others, on
the contrary, sparkle modestly in the azure depths of the night, and are
hardly perceptible to the eye that seeks to plumb the abysses of Immensity.
We have appended the word "magnitude" to the names of certain stars,
and the reader might imagine this to bear some relation to the volume of the
orb. But this is not the case.
To facilitate the observation of stars of varying brilliancy, they have been
classified in order of magnitude, according to their apparent brightness, and
since the dimensions of these distant suns are almost wholly unknown to us,
the most luminous stars were naturally denoted as of first magnitude, those
which were a little less bright of the second, and so on. But in reality this
word "magnitude" is quite erroneous, for it bears no relation to the mass of
the stars, divided thus at an epoch when it was supposed that the most
brilliant must be the largest. It simply indicates the apparent brightness of a
star, the real brilliancy depending on its dimensions, its intrinsic light, and
its distance from our planet.
And now to make some comparison between the different orders.
Throughout the entire firmament, only nineteen stars of first magnitude are
discoverable. And, strictly speaking, the last of this series might just as well
be noted of "second magnitude," while the first of the second series might
THE STARS, SUNS OF THE INFINITE
A Journey through Space
We have seen from the foregoing summary of the principal
Constellations that there is great diversity in the brightness of the stars, and
that while our eyes are dazzled with the brilliancy of certain orbs, others, on
the contrary, sparkle modestly in the azure depths of the night, and are
hardly perceptible to the eye that seeks to plumb the abysses of Immensity.
We have appended the word "magnitude" to the names of certain stars,
and the reader might imagine this to bear some relation to the volume of the
orb. But this is not the case.
To facilitate the observation of stars of varying brilliancy, they have been
classified in order of magnitude, according to their apparent brightness, and
since the dimensions of these distant suns are almost wholly unknown to us,
the most luminous stars were naturally denoted as of first magnitude, those
which were a little less bright of the second, and so on. But in reality this
word "magnitude" is quite erroneous, for it bears no relation to the mass of
the stars, divided thus at an epoch when it was supposed that the most
brilliant must be the largest. It simply indicates the apparent brightness of a
star, the real brilliancy depending on its dimensions, its intrinsic light, and
its distance from our planet.
And now to make some comparison between the different orders.
Throughout the entire firmament, only nineteen stars of first magnitude are
discoverable. And, strictly speaking, the last of this series might just as well
be noted of "second magnitude," while the first of the second series might
Page 53
be added to the list of stars of the "first order." But in order to form classes
distinct from one another, some limit has to be adopted, and it was
determined that the first series should include only the following stars, the
most luminous in the Heavens, which are subjoined in order of decreasing
brilliancy.
STARS OF THE FIRST MAGNITUDE
1. Sirius, or α of the Great Dog.
2. Canopus, or α of the Ship.
3. Capella, or α of the Charioteer.
4. Arcturus, or α of the Herdsman.
5. Vega, or α of the Lyre.
6. Proxima, or α of the Centaur.
7. Rigel, or β of Orion.
8. Achernar, or α of Eridanus.
9. Procyon, or α of the Little Dog.
10. β of the Centaur.
11. Betelgeuse, or α of Orion.
12. Altaïr, or α of the Eagle.
13. α of the Southern Cross.
14. Aldebaran, or α of the Bull.
15. Spica, or α of the Virgin.
16. Antares, or α of the Scorpion.
17. Pollux, or β of the Twins.
18. Regulus, or α of the Lion.
19. Fomalhaut, or α of the Southern Fish.
THE STARS OF THE SECOND MAGNITUDE
Then come the stars of the second magnitude, of which there are fifty-
nine. The stars of the Great Bear (with the exception of δ, which is of third
magnitude), the Pole-Star, the chief stars in Orion (after Rigel and
Betelgeuse), of the Lion, of Pegasus, of Andromeda, of Cassiopeia, are of
distinct from one another, some limit has to be adopted, and it was
determined that the first series should include only the following stars, the
most luminous in the Heavens, which are subjoined in order of decreasing
brilliancy.
STARS OF THE FIRST MAGNITUDE
1. Sirius, or α of the Great Dog.
2. Canopus, or α of the Ship.
3. Capella, or α of the Charioteer.
4. Arcturus, or α of the Herdsman.
5. Vega, or α of the Lyre.
6. Proxima, or α of the Centaur.
7. Rigel, or β of Orion.
8. Achernar, or α of Eridanus.
9. Procyon, or α of the Little Dog.
10. β of the Centaur.
11. Betelgeuse, or α of Orion.
12. Altaïr, or α of the Eagle.
13. α of the Southern Cross.
14. Aldebaran, or α of the Bull.
15. Spica, or α of the Virgin.
16. Antares, or α of the Scorpion.
17. Pollux, or β of the Twins.
18. Regulus, or α of the Lion.
19. Fomalhaut, or α of the Southern Fish.
THE STARS OF THE SECOND MAGNITUDE
Then come the stars of the second magnitude, of which there are fifty-
nine. The stars of the Great Bear (with the exception of δ, which is of third
magnitude), the Pole-Star, the chief stars in Orion (after Rigel and
Betelgeuse), of the Lion, of Pegasus, of Andromeda, of Cassiopeia, are of
Page 54
this order. These, with the former, constitute the principal outlines of the
constellations visible to us.
Then follow the third and fourth magnitudes, and so on.
The following table gives a summary of the series, down to the sixth
magnitude, which is the limit of visibility for the unaided human eye:
19 stars of first magnitude.
59 of second magnitude.
182 of third magnitude.
530 of fourth magnitude.
1,600 of fifth magnitude.
4,800 of sixth magnitude.
This makes a total of some seven thousand stars visible to the unaided
eye. It will be seen that each series is, roughly speaking, three times as
populated as that preceding it; consequently, if we multiply the number of
any class by three, we obtain the approximate number of stars that make up
the class succeeding it.
Seven thousand stars! It is an imposing figure, when one reflects that all
these lucid points are suns, as enormous as they are potent, as incandescent
as our own (which exceeds the volume of the Earth by more than a million
times), distant centers of light and heat, exerting their attraction on
unknown systems. And yet it is generally imagined that millions of stars are
visible in the firmament. This is an illusion; even the best vision is unable to
distinguish stars below the sixth magnitude, and ordinary sight is far from
discovering all of these.
Again, seven thousand stars for the whole Heavens makes only three
thousand five hundred for half the sky. And we can only see one celestial
hemisphere at a time. Moreover, toward the horizon, the vapor of the
constellations visible to us.
Then follow the third and fourth magnitudes, and so on.
The following table gives a summary of the series, down to the sixth
magnitude, which is the limit of visibility for the unaided human eye:
19 stars of first magnitude.
59 of second magnitude.
182 of third magnitude.
530 of fourth magnitude.
1,600 of fifth magnitude.
4,800 of sixth magnitude.
This makes a total of some seven thousand stars visible to the unaided
eye. It will be seen that each series is, roughly speaking, three times as
populated as that preceding it; consequently, if we multiply the number of
any class by three, we obtain the approximate number of stars that make up
the class succeeding it.
Seven thousand stars! It is an imposing figure, when one reflects that all
these lucid points are suns, as enormous as they are potent, as incandescent
as our own (which exceeds the volume of the Earth by more than a million
times), distant centers of light and heat, exerting their attraction on
unknown systems. And yet it is generally imagined that millions of stars are
visible in the firmament. This is an illusion; even the best vision is unable to
distinguish stars below the sixth magnitude, and ordinary sight is far from
discovering all of these.
Again, seven thousand stars for the whole Heavens makes only three
thousand five hundred for half the sky. And we can only see one celestial
hemisphere at a time. Moreover, toward the horizon, the vapor of the
Page 55
atmosphere veils the little stars of sixth magnitude. In reality, we never see
at a given moment more than three thousand stars. This number is below
that of the population of a small town.
But celestial space is unlimited, and we must not suppose that these
seven thousand stars that fascinate our eyes and enrich our Heavens,
without which our nights would be black, dark, and empty,[5] comprise the
whole of Creation. They only represent the vestibule of the temple.
Where our vision is arrested, a larger, more powerful eye, that is
developing from century to century, plunges its analyzing gaze into the
abysses, and reflects back to the insatiable curiosity of science the light of
the innumerable suns that it discovers. This eye is the lens of the optical
instruments. Even opera-glasses disclose stars of the seventh magnitude. A
small astronomical objective penetrates to the eighth and ninth orders. More
powerful instruments attain the tenth. The Heavens are progressively
transformed to the eye of the astronomer, and soon he is able to reckon
hundreds of thousands of orbs in the night. The evolution continues, the
power of the instrument is developed; and the stars of the eleventh and
twelfth magnitudes are discovered successively, and together number four
millions. Then follow the thirteenth, fourteenth, and fifteenth magnitudes.
This is the sequence:
7th magnitude 13,000.
8th magnitude 40,000.
9th magnitude 120,000.
10th magnitude 380,000.
11th magnitude 1,000,000.
12th magnitude 3,000,000.
13th magnitude 9,000,000.
14th magnitude 27,000,000.
at a given moment more than three thousand stars. This number is below
that of the population of a small town.
But celestial space is unlimited, and we must not suppose that these
seven thousand stars that fascinate our eyes and enrich our Heavens,
without which our nights would be black, dark, and empty,[5] comprise the
whole of Creation. They only represent the vestibule of the temple.
Where our vision is arrested, a larger, more powerful eye, that is
developing from century to century, plunges its analyzing gaze into the
abysses, and reflects back to the insatiable curiosity of science the light of
the innumerable suns that it discovers. This eye is the lens of the optical
instruments. Even opera-glasses disclose stars of the seventh magnitude. A
small astronomical objective penetrates to the eighth and ninth orders. More
powerful instruments attain the tenth. The Heavens are progressively
transformed to the eye of the astronomer, and soon he is able to reckon
hundreds of thousands of orbs in the night. The evolution continues, the
power of the instrument is developed; and the stars of the eleventh and
twelfth magnitudes are discovered successively, and together number four
millions. Then follow the thirteenth, fourteenth, and fifteenth magnitudes.
This is the sequence:
7th magnitude 13,000.
8th magnitude 40,000.
9th magnitude 120,000.
10th magnitude 380,000.
11th magnitude 1,000,000.
12th magnitude 3,000,000.
13th magnitude 9,000,000.
14th magnitude 27,000,000.
Page 56
15th magnitude 80,000,000.
Accordingly, the most powerful telescopes of the day, reenforced by
celestial photography, can bring a stream of more than 120 millions of stars
into the scope of our vision.
The photographic map of the Heavens now being executed comprises
the first fourteen magnitudes, and will give the precise position of some
40,000,000 stars, distributed over 22,054 sheets, forming a sphere 3 meters
44 centimeters in diameter.
The boldest imagination is overwhelmed by these figures, and fails to
picture such millions of suns—formidable and burning globes that roll
through space, sweeping their systems along with them. What furnaces are
there! what unknown lives! what vast immensities!
And again, what enormous distances must separate the stars, to admit of
their free revolution in the ether! In what abysses, at what a distance from
our terrestrial atom, must these magnificent and dazzling Suns pursue the
paths traced for them by Destiny!
If all the stars radiated an equal light, their distances might be calculated
on the principle that an object appears smaller in proportion to its distance.
But this equality does not exist. The suns were not all cast in the same
mold.
Indeed, the stars differ widely in size and brightness, and the distances
that have been measured show that the most brilliant are not the nearest.
They are scattered through Space at all distances.
Among the nearer stars of which it has been found possible to calculate
the distance, some are found to be of the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth,
Accordingly, the most powerful telescopes of the day, reenforced by
celestial photography, can bring a stream of more than 120 millions of stars
into the scope of our vision.
The photographic map of the Heavens now being executed comprises
the first fourteen magnitudes, and will give the precise position of some
40,000,000 stars, distributed over 22,054 sheets, forming a sphere 3 meters
44 centimeters in diameter.
The boldest imagination is overwhelmed by these figures, and fails to
picture such millions of suns—formidable and burning globes that roll
through space, sweeping their systems along with them. What furnaces are
there! what unknown lives! what vast immensities!
And again, what enormous distances must separate the stars, to admit of
their free revolution in the ether! In what abysses, at what a distance from
our terrestrial atom, must these magnificent and dazzling Suns pursue the
paths traced for them by Destiny!
If all the stars radiated an equal light, their distances might be calculated
on the principle that an object appears smaller in proportion to its distance.
But this equality does not exist. The suns were not all cast in the same
mold.
Indeed, the stars differ widely in size and brightness, and the distances
that have been measured show that the most brilliant are not the nearest.
They are scattered through Space at all distances.
Among the nearer stars of which it has been found possible to calculate
the distance, some are found to be of the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth,
Page 57
and even ninth magnitudes, proving that the most brilliant are not always
the least distant.
For the rest, among the beautiful and shining stars with which we made
acquaintance in the last chapter may be cited Sirius, which at a distance of
92 trillion kilometers (57 trillion miles) from here still dazzles us with its
burning fires; Procyon or α of the Little Dog, as remote as 112 trillion
kilometers (691⁄2 trillion miles); Altaïr of the Eagle, at 160 trillion
kilometers (99 trillion miles); the white Vega, at 204 trillion kilometers
(1261⁄2 trillion miles); Capella, at 276 trillion kilometers (171 trillion
miles); and the Pole-Star at 344 trillion kilometers (2131⁄2 trillion miles).
The light that flies through Space at a velocity of 300,000 kilometers
(186,000 miles) per second, takes thirty-six years and a half to reach us
from this distant sun: i.e., the luminous ray we are now receiving from
Polaris has been traveling for more than the third of a century. When you,
gentle reader, were born, the ray that arrives to-day from the Pole-Star was
already speeding on its way. In the first second after it had started it traveled
300,000 kilometers; in the second it added another 300,000 which at once
makes 600,000 kilometers; add another 300,000 kilometers for the third
second, and so on during the thirty-six years and a half.
If we tried to arrange the number 300,000 (which represents the distance
accomplished in one second) in superposed rows, as if for an addition sum,
as many times as is necessary to obtain the distance that separates the Pole-
Star from our Earth, the necessary operation would comprise 1,151,064,000
rows, and the sheet of paper required for the setting out of such a sum
would measure approximately 11,510 kilometers (about 7,000 miles), i.e.,
almost the diameter of our terrestrial globe, or about four times the distance
from Paris to Moscow!
Is it not impossible to realize that our Sun, with its entire system, is lost
in the Heavens at such a distance from his peers in Space? At the distance
of the least remote of the stars he would appear as one of the smallest.
the least distant.
For the rest, among the beautiful and shining stars with which we made
acquaintance in the last chapter may be cited Sirius, which at a distance of
92 trillion kilometers (57 trillion miles) from here still dazzles us with its
burning fires; Procyon or α of the Little Dog, as remote as 112 trillion
kilometers (691⁄2 trillion miles); Altaïr of the Eagle, at 160 trillion
kilometers (99 trillion miles); the white Vega, at 204 trillion kilometers
(1261⁄2 trillion miles); Capella, at 276 trillion kilometers (171 trillion
miles); and the Pole-Star at 344 trillion kilometers (2131⁄2 trillion miles).
The light that flies through Space at a velocity of 300,000 kilometers
(186,000 miles) per second, takes thirty-six years and a half to reach us
from this distant sun: i.e., the luminous ray we are now receiving from
Polaris has been traveling for more than the third of a century. When you,
gentle reader, were born, the ray that arrives to-day from the Pole-Star was
already speeding on its way. In the first second after it had started it traveled
300,000 kilometers; in the second it added another 300,000 which at once
makes 600,000 kilometers; add another 300,000 kilometers for the third
second, and so on during the thirty-six years and a half.
If we tried to arrange the number 300,000 (which represents the distance
accomplished in one second) in superposed rows, as if for an addition sum,
as many times as is necessary to obtain the distance that separates the Pole-
Star from our Earth, the necessary operation would comprise 1,151,064,000
rows, and the sheet of paper required for the setting out of such a sum
would measure approximately 11,510 kilometers (about 7,000 miles), i.e.,
almost the diameter of our terrestrial globe, or about four times the distance
from Paris to Moscow!
Is it not impossible to realize that our Sun, with its entire system, is lost
in the Heavens at such a distance from his peers in Space? At the distance
of the least remote of the stars he would appear as one of the smallest.
Page 58
The nearest star to us is α of the Centaur, of first magnitude, a neighbor
of the South Pole, invisible in our latitudes. Its distance is 275,000 radii of
the terrestrial orbit, i.e., 275,000 times 149 million kilometers, which gives
41 trillions, or 41,000 milliards of kilometers (= 251⁄2 trillion miles). [A
milliard = 1,000 millions, the French billion. A trillion = 1,000 milliards, or
a million millions, the English billion. The French nomenclature has been
retained by the translator.] At a speed of 300,000 kilometers (186,000
miles) per second the light takes four years to come from thence. It is a fine
double star.
The next nearest star after this is a little orb invisible to the unaided eye.
It has no name, and stands as No. 21,185 in the Catalogue of Lalande. It
almost attains the seventh magnitude (6.8). Its distance is 64 trillion
kilometers (391⁄2 trillion miles).
The third of which the distance has been measured is the small star in
Cygnus, already referred to in Chapter II, in describing the Constellations.
Its distance is 69 trillion kilometers (421⁄2 trillion miles). This, too, is a
double star. The light takes seven years to reach us.
As we have seen, the fine stars Sirius, Procyon, Aldebaran, Altaïr, Vega,
and Capella are more remote.
Our solar system is thus very isolated in the vastness of Infinitude. The
latest known planet of our system, Neptune, performs its revolutions in
space at 4 milliards, 470 million kilometers (2,771,400,000 miles) from our
Sun. Even this is a respectable distance! But beyond this world, an immense
gulf, almost a void abyss, extends to the nearest star, α of the Centaur.
Between Neptune and Centauris there is no star to cheer the black and cold
solitude of the immense vacuum. One or two unknown planets, some
wandering comets, and swarms of meteors, doubtless traverse those
unknown spaces, but all invisible to us.
of the South Pole, invisible in our latitudes. Its distance is 275,000 radii of
the terrestrial orbit, i.e., 275,000 times 149 million kilometers, which gives
41 trillions, or 41,000 milliards of kilometers (= 251⁄2 trillion miles). [A
milliard = 1,000 millions, the French billion. A trillion = 1,000 milliards, or
a million millions, the English billion. The French nomenclature has been
retained by the translator.] At a speed of 300,000 kilometers (186,000
miles) per second the light takes four years to come from thence. It is a fine
double star.
The next nearest star after this is a little orb invisible to the unaided eye.
It has no name, and stands as No. 21,185 in the Catalogue of Lalande. It
almost attains the seventh magnitude (6.8). Its distance is 64 trillion
kilometers (391⁄2 trillion miles).
The third of which the distance has been measured is the small star in
Cygnus, already referred to in Chapter II, in describing the Constellations.
Its distance is 69 trillion kilometers (421⁄2 trillion miles). This, too, is a
double star. The light takes seven years to reach us.
As we have seen, the fine stars Sirius, Procyon, Aldebaran, Altaïr, Vega,
and Capella are more remote.
Our solar system is thus very isolated in the vastness of Infinitude. The
latest known planet of our system, Neptune, performs its revolutions in
space at 4 milliards, 470 million kilometers (2,771,400,000 miles) from our
Sun. Even this is a respectable distance! But beyond this world, an immense
gulf, almost a void abyss, extends to the nearest star, α of the Centaur.
Between Neptune and Centauris there is no star to cheer the black and cold
solitude of the immense vacuum. One or two unknown planets, some
wandering comets, and swarms of meteors, doubtless traverse those
unknown spaces, but all invisible to us.
Page 59
Later on we will discuss the methods that have been employed in
measuring these distances. Let us now continue our description.
Now that we have some notion of the distance of the stars we must
approach them with the telescope, and compare them one with another.
Let us, for example, get close to Sirius: in this star we admire a sun that
is several times heavier than our own, and of much greater mass,
accompanied by a second sun that revolves round it in fifty years. Its light is
exceedingly white, and it notably burns with hydrogen flames, like Vega
and Altaïr.
Now let us approach Arcturus, Capella, Aldebaran: these are yellow stars
with golden rays, like our Sun, and the vapor of iron, of sodium, and of
many other metals can be identified in their spectrum. These stars are older
than the first, and the ruddy ones, such as Antares, Betelgeuse, α of
Hercules, are still older; several of them are variable, and are on their way
to final extinction.
The Heavens afford us a perennial store of treasure, wherein the thinker,
poet or artist can find inexhaustible subjects of contemplation.
You have heard of the celestial jewels, the diamonds, rubies, emeralds,
sapphires, topazes, and other precious stones of the sidereal casket. These
marvels are met with especially among the double stars.
Our Sun, white and solitary, gives no idea of the real aspect of some of
its brothers in Infinitude. There are as many different types as there are
suns!
Stars, you will think, are like individuals: each has its distinct
characteristics: no two are comparable. And indeed this reflection is
justified. While human vanity does homage to Phœbus, divine King of the
measuring these distances. Let us now continue our description.
Now that we have some notion of the distance of the stars we must
approach them with the telescope, and compare them one with another.
Let us, for example, get close to Sirius: in this star we admire a sun that
is several times heavier than our own, and of much greater mass,
accompanied by a second sun that revolves round it in fifty years. Its light is
exceedingly white, and it notably burns with hydrogen flames, like Vega
and Altaïr.
Now let us approach Arcturus, Capella, Aldebaran: these are yellow stars
with golden rays, like our Sun, and the vapor of iron, of sodium, and of
many other metals can be identified in their spectrum. These stars are older
than the first, and the ruddy ones, such as Antares, Betelgeuse, α of
Hercules, are still older; several of them are variable, and are on their way
to final extinction.
The Heavens afford us a perennial store of treasure, wherein the thinker,
poet or artist can find inexhaustible subjects of contemplation.
You have heard of the celestial jewels, the diamonds, rubies, emeralds,
sapphires, topazes, and other precious stones of the sidereal casket. These
marvels are met with especially among the double stars.
Our Sun, white and solitary, gives no idea of the real aspect of some of
its brothers in Infinitude. There are as many different types as there are
suns!
Stars, you will think, are like individuals: each has its distinct
characteristics: no two are comparable. And indeed this reflection is
justified. While human vanity does homage to Phœbus, divine King of the
Page 60
Heavens, other suns of still greater magnificence form groups of two or
three splendid orbs, which roll the prodigious combinations of their double,
triple, or multiple systems through space, pouring on to the worlds that
accompany them a flood of changing light, now blue, now red, now violet,
etc.
In the inexhaustible variety of Creation there exist Suns that are united in
pairs, bound by a common destiny, cradled in the same attraction, and often
colored in the most delicate and entrancing shades conceivable. Here will
be a dazzling ruby, its glowing color shedding joy; there a deep blue
sapphire of tender tone; beyond, the finest emeralds, hue of hope.
Diamonds of translucent purity and whiteness sparkle from the abyss, and
shed their penetrating light into the vast space. What splendors are scattered
broadcast over the sky! what profusion!
To the naked eye, the groups appear like ordinary stars, mere luminous
points of greater or less brilliancy; but the telescope soon discovers the
beauty of these systems; the star is duplicated into two distinct suns, in
close proximity. These groups of two or several suns are not merely due to
an effect of perspective—i.e., the presence of two or more stars in our line
of sight; as a rule they constitute real physical systems, and these suns,
associated in a common lot, rotate round one another in a more or less rapid
period, that varies for each system.
One of the most splendid of these double stars, and at the same time one
of the easiest to perceive, is ζ in the Great Bear, or Mizar, mentioned above
in describing this constellation. It has no contrasting colors, but exactly
resembles twin diamonds of the finest water, which fascinate the gaze, even
through a small objective.
Its components are of the second and fourth magnitudes, their distance =
14″[6]. Some idea of their appearance in a small telescope may be obtained
from the subjoined figure (Fig. 17).
three splendid orbs, which roll the prodigious combinations of their double,
triple, or multiple systems through space, pouring on to the worlds that
accompany them a flood of changing light, now blue, now red, now violet,
etc.
In the inexhaustible variety of Creation there exist Suns that are united in
pairs, bound by a common destiny, cradled in the same attraction, and often
colored in the most delicate and entrancing shades conceivable. Here will
be a dazzling ruby, its glowing color shedding joy; there a deep blue
sapphire of tender tone; beyond, the finest emeralds, hue of hope.
Diamonds of translucent purity and whiteness sparkle from the abyss, and
shed their penetrating light into the vast space. What splendors are scattered
broadcast over the sky! what profusion!
To the naked eye, the groups appear like ordinary stars, mere luminous
points of greater or less brilliancy; but the telescope soon discovers the
beauty of these systems; the star is duplicated into two distinct suns, in
close proximity. These groups of two or several suns are not merely due to
an effect of perspective—i.e., the presence of two or more stars in our line
of sight; as a rule they constitute real physical systems, and these suns,
associated in a common lot, rotate round one another in a more or less rapid
period, that varies for each system.
One of the most splendid of these double stars, and at the same time one
of the easiest to perceive, is ζ in the Great Bear, or Mizar, mentioned above
in describing this constellation. It has no contrasting colors, but exactly
resembles twin diamonds of the finest water, which fascinate the gaze, even
through a small objective.
Its components are of the second and fourth magnitudes, their distance =
14″[6]. Some idea of their appearance in a small telescope may be obtained
from the subjoined figure (Fig. 17).
Page 61
Another very brilliant pair is Castor. Magnitudes second and third.
Distance 5.6″. Very easy to observe. γ in the Virgin resolves into two
splendid diamonds of third magnitude. Distance, 5.0″. Another double star
is γ of the Ram, of fourth magnitude. Distance, 8.9″.
Fig. 17.—The double star Mizar.
And here are two that are even more curious by reason of their coloring:
γ in Andromeda, composed of a fine orange star, and one emerald-green,
which again is accompanied by a tiny comrade of the deepest blue. This
group in a good telescope is most attractive. Magnitudes, second and fifth.
Distance, 10″.
β of the Swan, or Albireo, referred to in the last chapter, has been
analyzed into two stars: one golden-yellow, the other sapphire. Magnitudes,
third and fifth. Distance, 34″. α of the Greyhounds, known also as the Heart
Distance 5.6″. Very easy to observe. γ in the Virgin resolves into two
splendid diamonds of third magnitude. Distance, 5.0″. Another double star
is γ of the Ram, of fourth magnitude. Distance, 8.9″.
Fig. 17.—The double star Mizar.
And here are two that are even more curious by reason of their coloring:
γ in Andromeda, composed of a fine orange star, and one emerald-green,
which again is accompanied by a tiny comrade of the deepest blue. This
group in a good telescope is most attractive. Magnitudes, second and fifth.
Distance, 10″.
β of the Swan, or Albireo, referred to in the last chapter, has been
analyzed into two stars: one golden-yellow, the other sapphire. Magnitudes,
third and fifth. Distance, 34″. α of the Greyhounds, known also as the Heart
Page 62
of Charles II, is golden-yellow and lilac. Magnitudes, third and fifth.
Distance 20″.[7]
α of Hercules revolves a splendid emerald and a ruby in the skies; ζ of
the Lyre exhibits a yellow and a green star; Rigel, an electric sun, and a
small sapphire; Antares is ruddy and emerald-green; η of Perseus resolves
into a burning red star, and one smaller that is deep blue, and so on.
These exquisite double stars revolve in gracious and splendid couples
around one another, as in some majestic valse, marrying their multi-colored
fires in the midst of the starry firmament.
Here, we constantly receive a pure and dazzling white light from our
burning luminary. Its ray, indeed, contains the potentiality of every
conceivable color, but picture the fantastic illumination of the worlds that
gravitate round these multiple and colored suns as they shed floods of blue
and roseate, red, or orange light around them! What a fairy spectacle must
life present upon these distant universes!
Let us suppose that we inhabit a planet illuminated by two suns, one
blue, the other red.
It is morning. The sapphire sun climbs slowly up the Heavens, coloring
the atmosphere with a somber and almost melancholy hue. The blue disk
attains the zenith, and is beginning its descent toward the West, when the
East lights up with the flames of a scarlet sun, which in its turn ascends the
heights of the firmament. The West is plunged in the penumbra of the rays
of the blue sun, while the East is illuminated with the purple and burning
rays of the ruby orb.
The first sun is setting when the second noon shines for the inhabitants
of this strange world. But the red sun, too, accomplishes the law of its
destiny. Hardly has it disappeared in the conflagration of its last rays, with
Distance 20″.[7]
α of Hercules revolves a splendid emerald and a ruby in the skies; ζ of
the Lyre exhibits a yellow and a green star; Rigel, an electric sun, and a
small sapphire; Antares is ruddy and emerald-green; η of Perseus resolves
into a burning red star, and one smaller that is deep blue, and so on.
These exquisite double stars revolve in gracious and splendid couples
around one another, as in some majestic valse, marrying their multi-colored
fires in the midst of the starry firmament.
Here, we constantly receive a pure and dazzling white light from our
burning luminary. Its ray, indeed, contains the potentiality of every
conceivable color, but picture the fantastic illumination of the worlds that
gravitate round these multiple and colored suns as they shed floods of blue
and roseate, red, or orange light around them! What a fairy spectacle must
life present upon these distant universes!
Let us suppose that we inhabit a planet illuminated by two suns, one
blue, the other red.
It is morning. The sapphire sun climbs slowly up the Heavens, coloring
the atmosphere with a somber and almost melancholy hue. The blue disk
attains the zenith, and is beginning its descent toward the West, when the
East lights up with the flames of a scarlet sun, which in its turn ascends the
heights of the firmament. The West is plunged in the penumbra of the rays
of the blue sun, while the East is illuminated with the purple and burning
rays of the ruby orb.
The first sun is setting when the second noon shines for the inhabitants
of this strange world. But the red sun, too, accomplishes the law of its
destiny. Hardly has it disappeared in the conflagration of its last rays, with
Page 63
which the West is flushed, when the blue orb reappears on the opposite side,
shedding a pale azure light upon the world it illuminates, which knows no
night. And thus these two suns fraternize in the Heavens over the common
task of renewing a thousand effects of extra-terrestrial light for the globes
that are subject to their variations.
Scarlet, indigo, green, and golden suns; pearly and multi-colored Moons;
are these not fairy visions, dazzling to our poor sight, condemned while
here below to see and know but one white Sun?
As we have learned, there are not only double, but triple, and also
multiple stars. One of the finest ternary systems is that of γ in Andromeda,
above mentioned. Its large star is orange, its second green, its third blue, but
the two last are in close juxtaposition, and a powerful telescope is needed to
separate them. A triple star more easy to observe is ζ of Cancer, composed
of three orbs of fifth magnitude, at a distance of 1″ and 5″; the first two
revolve round their common center of gravity in fifty-nine years, the third
takes over three hundred years. The preceding figure shows this system in a
fairly powerful objective (Fig. 18).
shedding a pale azure light upon the world it illuminates, which knows no
night. And thus these two suns fraternize in the Heavens over the common
task of renewing a thousand effects of extra-terrestrial light for the globes
that are subject to their variations.
Scarlet, indigo, green, and golden suns; pearly and multi-colored Moons;
are these not fairy visions, dazzling to our poor sight, condemned while
here below to see and know but one white Sun?
As we have learned, there are not only double, but triple, and also
multiple stars. One of the finest ternary systems is that of γ in Andromeda,
above mentioned. Its large star is orange, its second green, its third blue, but
the two last are in close juxtaposition, and a powerful telescope is needed to
separate them. A triple star more easy to observe is ζ of Cancer, composed
of three orbs of fifth magnitude, at a distance of 1″ and 5″; the first two
revolve round their common center of gravity in fifty-nine years, the third
takes over three hundred years. The preceding figure shows this system in a
fairly powerful objective (Fig. 18).
Page 64
Fig. 18.—Triple star ζ in Cancer.
In the Lyre, a little above the dazzling Vega, ε is of fourth magnitude,
which seems a little elongated to the unaided eye, and can even be analyzed
into two contiguous stars by very sharp sight. But on examining this
attractive pair with a small glass, it is further obvious that each of these
stars is double; so that they form a splendid quadruple system of two
couples (Fig. 19): one of fifth and a half and sixth magnitudes, at a distance
of 2.4″, the other of sixth and seventh, 3.2″ distant. The distance between
the two pairs is 207″.
In the Lyre, a little above the dazzling Vega, ε is of fourth magnitude,
which seems a little elongated to the unaided eye, and can even be analyzed
into two contiguous stars by very sharp sight. But on examining this
attractive pair with a small glass, it is further obvious that each of these
stars is double; so that they form a splendid quadruple system of two
couples (Fig. 19): one of fifth and a half and sixth magnitudes, at a distance
of 2.4″, the other of sixth and seventh, 3.2″ distant. The distance between
the two pairs is 207″.
Page 65
Fig. 19.—Quadruple star ε of the Lyre.
In speaking of Orion, we referred to the marvelous star θ situated in the
no less famous Nebula, below the Belt; this star forms a dazzling sextuple
system, in the very heart of the nebula (Fig. 20). How different to our Sun,
sailing through Space in modest isolation!
Be it noted that all these stars are animated by prodigious motions that
impel them in every direction.
In speaking of Orion, we referred to the marvelous star θ situated in the
no less famous Nebula, below the Belt; this star forms a dazzling sextuple
system, in the very heart of the nebula (Fig. 20). How different to our Sun,
sailing through Space in modest isolation!
Be it noted that all these stars are animated by prodigious motions that
impel them in every direction.
Page 66
Fig. 20.—Sextuple star θ in the Nebula of Orion.
There are no fixed stars. On every side throughout Infinity, the burning
suns—enormous globes, blazing centers of light and heat—are flying at
giddy speed toward an unknown goal, traversing millions of miles each day,
crossing century by century such vast spaces as are inconceivable to the
human intellect.
If the stars appear motionless to us, it is because they are so remote, their
secular movements being only manifested on the celestial sphere by
imperceptible displacements. But in reality these suns are in perpetual
commotion in the abysses of the Heavens, which they quicken with an
extraordinary animation.
These perpetual and cumulative motions must eventually modify the
aspect of the Constellations: but these changes will only take effect very
slowly; and for thousands and thousands of years longer the heroes and
There are no fixed stars. On every side throughout Infinity, the burning
suns—enormous globes, blazing centers of light and heat—are flying at
giddy speed toward an unknown goal, traversing millions of miles each day,
crossing century by century such vast spaces as are inconceivable to the
human intellect.
If the stars appear motionless to us, it is because they are so remote, their
secular movements being only manifested on the celestial sphere by
imperceptible displacements. But in reality these suns are in perpetual
commotion in the abysses of the Heavens, which they quicken with an
extraordinary animation.
These perpetual and cumulative motions must eventually modify the
aspect of the Constellations: but these changes will only take effect very
slowly; and for thousands and thousands of years longer the heroes and
Page 67
heroines of mythology will keep their respective places in the Heavens, and
reign undisturbed beneath the starry vault.
Examination of these star motions reveals the fact that our Sun is
plunging with all his system (the Earth included) toward the Constellation
of Hercules. We are changing our position every moment: in an hour we
shall be 70,000 kilometers (43,500 miles) farther than we are at present.
The Sun and the Earth will never again traverse the space they have just
left, and which they have deserted forever.
And here let us pause for an instant to consider the variable stars. Our
Sun, which is constant and uniform in its light, does not set the type of all
the stars. A great number of them are variable—either periodically, in
regular cycles—or irregularly.
We are already acquainted with the variations of Algol, in Perseus, due
to its partial eclipse by a dark globe gravitating in the line of our vision.
There are several others of the same type: these are not, properly speaking,
variable stars. But there are many others the intrinsic light of which
undergoes actual variations.
In order to realize this, let us imagine that our Earth belongs to such a
sun, for example, to a star in the southern constellation of the Whale,
indicated by the letter ο, which has been named the "wonderful" (Mira
Ceti). Our new sun is shining to-day with a dazzling light, shedding the
gladness of his joyous beams upon nature and in our hearts. For two months
we admire the superb orb, sparkling in the azure illuminated with its
radiance. Then of a sudden, its light fades, and diminishes in intensity,
though the sky remains clear. Imperceptibly, our fine sun darkens; the
atmosphere becomes sad and dull, there is an anticipation of universal
death. For five long months our world is plunged in a kind of penumbra; all
nature is saddened in the general woe.
But while we are bewailing the cruelty of our lot, our cherished luminary
revives. The intensity of its light increases slowly. Its brilliancy augments,
reign undisturbed beneath the starry vault.
Examination of these star motions reveals the fact that our Sun is
plunging with all his system (the Earth included) toward the Constellation
of Hercules. We are changing our position every moment: in an hour we
shall be 70,000 kilometers (43,500 miles) farther than we are at present.
The Sun and the Earth will never again traverse the space they have just
left, and which they have deserted forever.
And here let us pause for an instant to consider the variable stars. Our
Sun, which is constant and uniform in its light, does not set the type of all
the stars. A great number of them are variable—either periodically, in
regular cycles—or irregularly.
We are already acquainted with the variations of Algol, in Perseus, due
to its partial eclipse by a dark globe gravitating in the line of our vision.
There are several others of the same type: these are not, properly speaking,
variable stars. But there are many others the intrinsic light of which
undergoes actual variations.
In order to realize this, let us imagine that our Earth belongs to such a
sun, for example, to a star in the southern constellation of the Whale,
indicated by the letter ο, which has been named the "wonderful" (Mira
Ceti). Our new sun is shining to-day with a dazzling light, shedding the
gladness of his joyous beams upon nature and in our hearts. For two months
we admire the superb orb, sparkling in the azure illuminated with its
radiance. Then of a sudden, its light fades, and diminishes in intensity,
though the sky remains clear. Imperceptibly, our fine sun darkens; the
atmosphere becomes sad and dull, there is an anticipation of universal
death. For five long months our world is plunged in a kind of penumbra; all
nature is saddened in the general woe.
But while we are bewailing the cruelty of our lot, our cherished luminary
revives. The intensity of its light increases slowly. Its brilliancy augments,
Page 68
and finally, at the end of three months, it has recovered its former splendors,
and showers its bright beams upon our world, flooding it with joy. But—we
must not rejoice too quickly! This splendid blaze will not endure. The
flaming star will pale once more; fade back to its minimum; and then again
revive. Such is the nature of this capricious sun. It varies in three hundred
and thirty-one days, and from yellow at the maximum, turns red at the
minimum. This star, Mira Ceti, which is one of the most curious of its type,
varies from the second to the ninth magnitudes: we cite it as one example;
hundreds of others might be instanced.
Thus the sky is no black curtain dotted with brilliant points, no empty
desert, silent and monotonous. It is a prodigious theater on which the most
fantastic plays are continually being acted. Only—there are no spectators.
Again, we must note the temporary stars, which shine for a certain time,
and then die out rapidly. Such was the star in Cassiopeia, in 1572, the light
of which exceeded Sirius in its visibility in full daylight, burning for five
months with unparalleled splendor, dominating all other stars of first
magnitude; after which it died out gradually, disappearing at the end of
seventeen months, to the terror of the peoples, who saw in it the harbinger
of the world's end: that of 1604, in the Constellation of the Serpent, which
shone for a year; of 1866, of second magnitude, in the Northern Crown,
which appeared for a few weeks only; of 1876, in the Swan; of 1885, in the
Nebula of Andromeda; of 1891, in the Charioteer; and quite recently, of
1901, in Perseus.
These temporary stars, which appear spontaneously to the observers on
the Earth, and quickly vanish again, are doubtless due to collisions,
conflagrations, or celestial cataclysms. But we only see them long after the
epoch at which the phenomena occurred, years upon years, and centuries
ago. For instance, the conflagration photographed by the author in 1901, in
Perseus, must have occurred in the time of Queen Elizabeth. It has taken all
this time for the rays of light to reach us.
and showers its bright beams upon our world, flooding it with joy. But—we
must not rejoice too quickly! This splendid blaze will not endure. The
flaming star will pale once more; fade back to its minimum; and then again
revive. Such is the nature of this capricious sun. It varies in three hundred
and thirty-one days, and from yellow at the maximum, turns red at the
minimum. This star, Mira Ceti, which is one of the most curious of its type,
varies from the second to the ninth magnitudes: we cite it as one example;
hundreds of others might be instanced.
Thus the sky is no black curtain dotted with brilliant points, no empty
desert, silent and monotonous. It is a prodigious theater on which the most
fantastic plays are continually being acted. Only—there are no spectators.
Again, we must note the temporary stars, which shine for a certain time,
and then die out rapidly. Such was the star in Cassiopeia, in 1572, the light
of which exceeded Sirius in its visibility in full daylight, burning for five
months with unparalleled splendor, dominating all other stars of first
magnitude; after which it died out gradually, disappearing at the end of
seventeen months, to the terror of the peoples, who saw in it the harbinger
of the world's end: that of 1604, in the Constellation of the Serpent, which
shone for a year; of 1866, of second magnitude, in the Northern Crown,
which appeared for a few weeks only; of 1876, in the Swan; of 1885, in the
Nebula of Andromeda; of 1891, in the Charioteer; and quite recently, of
1901, in Perseus.
These temporary stars, which appear spontaneously to the observers on
the Earth, and quickly vanish again, are doubtless due to collisions,
conflagrations, or celestial cataclysms. But we only see them long after the
epoch at which the phenomena occurred, years upon years, and centuries
ago. For instance, the conflagration photographed by the author in 1901, in
Perseus, must have occurred in the time of Queen Elizabeth. It has taken all
this time for the rays of light to reach us.
Page 69
The Heavens are full of surprises, on which we can bestow but a fleeting
glance within these limits. They present a field of infinite variety.
Who has not noticed the Milky Way, the pale belt that traverses the
entire firmament and is so luminous on clear evenings in the Constellations
of the Swan and the Lyre? It is indeed a swarm of stars. Each is individually
too small to excite our retina, but as a whole, curiously enough, they are
perfectly visible. With opera-glasses we divine the starry constitution: a
small telescope shows us marvels. Eighteen millions of stars were counted
there with the gauges of William Herschel.
Now this Milky Way is a symbol, not of the Universe, but of the
Universes that succeed each other through the vast spaces to Infinity.
Our Sun is a star of the Milky Way. It surrounds us like a great circle,
and if the Earth were transparent, we should see it pass beneath our feet as
well as over our heads. It consists of a very considerable mass of star-
clusters, varying greatly in extent and number, some projected in front of
others, while the whole forms an agglomeration.
glance within these limits. They present a field of infinite variety.
Who has not noticed the Milky Way, the pale belt that traverses the
entire firmament and is so luminous on clear evenings in the Constellations
of the Swan and the Lyre? It is indeed a swarm of stars. Each is individually
too small to excite our retina, but as a whole, curiously enough, they are
perfectly visible. With opera-glasses we divine the starry constitution: a
small telescope shows us marvels. Eighteen millions of stars were counted
there with the gauges of William Herschel.
Now this Milky Way is a symbol, not of the Universe, but of the
Universes that succeed each other through the vast spaces to Infinity.
Our Sun is a star of the Milky Way. It surrounds us like a great circle,
and if the Earth were transparent, we should see it pass beneath our feet as
well as over our heads. It consists of a very considerable mass of star-
clusters, varying greatly in extent and number, some projected in front of
others, while the whole forms an agglomeration.
Page 70
Fig. 21.—The Star-Cluster in Hercules.
Among this mass of star-groups, several thousands of which are already
known to us, we will select one of the most curious, the Cluster in Hercules,
which can be distinguished with the unaided eye, between the stars η and ζ
of that constellation. Many photographs of it have been taken in the author's
observatory at Juvisy, showing some thousands of stars; and one of these is
reproduced in the accompanying figure (Fig. 21). Is it not a veritable
universe?
Among this mass of star-groups, several thousands of which are already
known to us, we will select one of the most curious, the Cluster in Hercules,
which can be distinguished with the unaided eye, between the stars η and ζ
of that constellation. Many photographs of it have been taken in the author's
observatory at Juvisy, showing some thousands of stars; and one of these is
reproduced in the accompanying figure (Fig. 21). Is it not a veritable
universe?
Page 71
Fig. 22.—The Star-Cluster in the Centaur.
Another of the most beautiful, on account of its regularity, is that of the
Centaur (Fig. 22).
These groups often assume the most extraordinary shapes in the
telescope, such as crowns, fishes, crabs, open mouths, birds with outspread
wings, etc.
We must also note the gaseous nebulæ, universes in the making, e.g., the
famous Nebula in Orion, of which we obtained some notion a while ago in
connection with its sextuple star: and also that in Andromeda (Fig. 23).
Another of the most beautiful, on account of its regularity, is that of the
Centaur (Fig. 22).
These groups often assume the most extraordinary shapes in the
telescope, such as crowns, fishes, crabs, open mouths, birds with outspread
wings, etc.
We must also note the gaseous nebulæ, universes in the making, e.g., the
famous Nebula in Orion, of which we obtained some notion a while ago in
connection with its sextuple star: and also that in Andromeda (Fig. 23).
Page 72
Fig. 23.—The Nebula in Andromeda.
Page 73
Fig. 24.—Nebula in the Greyhounds.
Perhaps the most marvelous of all is that of the Greyhounds, which
evolves in gigantic spirals round a dazzling focus, and then loses itself far
off in the recesses of space. Fig. 24 gives a picture of it.
Perhaps the most marvelous of all is that of the Greyhounds, which
evolves in gigantic spirals round a dazzling focus, and then loses itself far
off in the recesses of space. Fig. 24 gives a picture of it.
Page 74
Fig. 25.—The Pleiades.
Without going thus far, and penetrating into telescopic depths, my
readers can get some notion of these star-clusters with the help of a small
telescope or opera-glasses, or even with the unaided eye, by looking at the
beautiful group of the Pleiades, already familiar to us on another page, and
using it as a test of vision. The little map subjoined (Fig. 25) will be an
assistance in recognizing them, and in estimating their magnitudes, which
are in the following order:
Alcyone 3.0.
Electra 4.5.
Atlas 4.6.
Maia 5.0.
Merope 5.5.
Taygeta 5.8.
Pleione 6.3.
Celæno 6.5.
Asterope 6.8.
Good eyes distinguish the first six, sharp sight detects the three others.
In the times of the ancient Greeks, seven were accounted of equal
brilliancy, and the poets related that the seventh star had fled at the time of
the Trojan War. Ovid adds that she was mortified at not being embraced by
Without going thus far, and penetrating into telescopic depths, my
readers can get some notion of these star-clusters with the help of a small
telescope or opera-glasses, or even with the unaided eye, by looking at the
beautiful group of the Pleiades, already familiar to us on another page, and
using it as a test of vision. The little map subjoined (Fig. 25) will be an
assistance in recognizing them, and in estimating their magnitudes, which
are in the following order:
Alcyone 3.0.
Electra 4.5.
Atlas 4.6.
Maia 5.0.
Merope 5.5.
Taygeta 5.8.
Pleione 6.3.
Celæno 6.5.
Asterope 6.8.
Good eyes distinguish the first six, sharp sight detects the three others.
In the times of the ancient Greeks, seven were accounted of equal
brilliancy, and the poets related that the seventh star had fled at the time of
the Trojan War. Ovid adds that she was mortified at not being embraced by
Page 75
a god, as were her six sisters. It is probable that only the best sight could
then distinguish Pleione, as in our own day. The angular distance from Atlas
to Pleione is 5′.
The length of this republic, from Atlas and Pleione to Celæno, is 4′/23″
of time, or 1°6′ of arc; the breadth, from Merope to Asterope, is 36′.[8]
In the quadrilateral, the length from Alcyone to Electra is 36′, and the
breadth from Merope to Maia 25′. To us it appears as though, if the Full
Moon were placed in front of this group of nine stars, she would cover it
entirely, for to the naked eye she appears much larger than all the Pleiades
together. But this is not so. She only measures 31′, less than half the
distance from Atlas to Celæno; she is hardly broader than the distance from
Alcyone to Atlas, and could pass between Merope and Taygeta without
touching either of these stars. This is a perennial and very curious optical
illusion. When the Moon passes in front of the Pleiades, and occults them
successively, it is hard to believe one's eyes. The fact occurred, e.g., on July
23, 1897, during a fine occultation observed at the author's laboratory of
Juvisy (Fig. 26).
then distinguish Pleione, as in our own day. The angular distance from Atlas
to Pleione is 5′.
The length of this republic, from Atlas and Pleione to Celæno, is 4′/23″
of time, or 1°6′ of arc; the breadth, from Merope to Asterope, is 36′.[8]
In the quadrilateral, the length from Alcyone to Electra is 36′, and the
breadth from Merope to Maia 25′. To us it appears as though, if the Full
Moon were placed in front of this group of nine stars, she would cover it
entirely, for to the naked eye she appears much larger than all the Pleiades
together. But this is not so. She only measures 31′, less than half the
distance from Atlas to Celæno; she is hardly broader than the distance from
Alcyone to Atlas, and could pass between Merope and Taygeta without
touching either of these stars. This is a perennial and very curious optical
illusion. When the Moon passes in front of the Pleiades, and occults them
successively, it is hard to believe one's eyes. The fact occurred, e.g., on July
23, 1897, during a fine occultation observed at the author's laboratory of
Juvisy (Fig. 26).
Page 76
Fig. 26.—Occultation of the Pleiades by the Moon.
Photography here discovers to us, not 6, 9, 12, 15, or 20 stars, but
hundreds and millions.
These are the most brilliant flowers of the celestial garden.
Photography here discovers to us, not 6, 9, 12, 15, or 20 stars, but
hundreds and millions.
These are the most brilliant flowers of the celestial garden.
Page 77
Fig. 27.—Stellar dial of the double star γ of the Virgin.
We, alas, can but glance at them rapidly. In contemplating them we are
transported into immensities both of space and time, for the stellar periods
measured by these distant universes often overpower in their magnitude the
rapid years in which our terrestrial days are estimated. For instance, one of
the double stars we spoke of above, γ of the Virgin, sees its two
components, translucent diamonds, revolve around their common center of
gravity, in one hundred and eighty years. How many events took place in
France, let us say, in a single year of this star!—The Regency, Louis XV,
Louis XVI, the Revolution, Napoleon, Louis XVIII, Louis Philippe, the
Second Republic, Napoleon III, the Franco-German War, the Third
Republic.... What revolutions here, during a single year of this radiant pair!
(Fig. 27.)
But the pageant of the Heavens is too vast, too overwhelming. We must
end our survey.
Our Milky Way, with its millions of stars, represents for us only a
portion of the Creation. The illimitable abysses of Infinitude are peopled by
other universes as vast, as imposing, as our own, which are renewed in all
directions through the depths of Space to endless distance. Where is our
We, alas, can but glance at them rapidly. In contemplating them we are
transported into immensities both of space and time, for the stellar periods
measured by these distant universes often overpower in their magnitude the
rapid years in which our terrestrial days are estimated. For instance, one of
the double stars we spoke of above, γ of the Virgin, sees its two
components, translucent diamonds, revolve around their common center of
gravity, in one hundred and eighty years. How many events took place in
France, let us say, in a single year of this star!—The Regency, Louis XV,
Louis XVI, the Revolution, Napoleon, Louis XVIII, Louis Philippe, the
Second Republic, Napoleon III, the Franco-German War, the Third
Republic.... What revolutions here, during a single year of this radiant pair!
(Fig. 27.)
But the pageant of the Heavens is too vast, too overwhelming. We must
end our survey.
Our Milky Way, with its millions of stars, represents for us only a
portion of the Creation. The illimitable abysses of Infinitude are peopled by
other universes as vast, as imposing, as our own, which are renewed in all
directions through the depths of Space to endless distance. Where is our
Page 78
little Earth? Where our Solar System? We are fain to fold our wings, and
return from the Immense and Infinite to our floating island.
return from the Immense and Infinite to our floating island.
Page 79
CHAPTER IV
OUR STAR THE SUN
In the incessant agitation of daily life in which we are involved by the
thousand superfluous wants of modern "civilization," one is prone to
assume that existence is complete only when it reckons to the good an
incalculable number of petty incidents, each more insignificant than the
last. Why lose time in thinking or dreaming? We must live at fever heat,
must agitate, and be infatuated for inanities, must create imaginary desires
and torments.
The thoughtful mind, prone to contemplation and admiration of the
beauties of Nature, is ill at ease in this perpetual vortex that swallows
everything—satisfaction, in a life that one has not time to relish; love of the
beautiful, that one views with indifference; it is a whirlpool that perpetually
hides Truth from us, forgotten forever at the bottom of her well.
And why are our lives thus absorbed in merely material interests? To
satisfy our pride and vanity! To make ourselves slaves to chimeras! If the
Moon were inhabited, and if her denizens could see us plainly enough to
note and analyze the details of human existence on the surface of our
planet, it would be curious and perhaps a little humiliating for us, to see
their statistics. What! we should say, is this the sum of our lives? Is it for
this that we struggle, and suffer, and die? Truly it is futile to give ourselves
such trouble.
And yet the remedy is simple, within the power of every one; but one
does not think of it just because it is too easy, although it has the immense
advantage of lifting us out of the miseries of this weary world toward the
inexpressible happiness that must always awaken in us with the knowledge
OUR STAR THE SUN
In the incessant agitation of daily life in which we are involved by the
thousand superfluous wants of modern "civilization," one is prone to
assume that existence is complete only when it reckons to the good an
incalculable number of petty incidents, each more insignificant than the
last. Why lose time in thinking or dreaming? We must live at fever heat,
must agitate, and be infatuated for inanities, must create imaginary desires
and torments.
The thoughtful mind, prone to contemplation and admiration of the
beauties of Nature, is ill at ease in this perpetual vortex that swallows
everything—satisfaction, in a life that one has not time to relish; love of the
beautiful, that one views with indifference; it is a whirlpool that perpetually
hides Truth from us, forgotten forever at the bottom of her well.
And why are our lives thus absorbed in merely material interests? To
satisfy our pride and vanity! To make ourselves slaves to chimeras! If the
Moon were inhabited, and if her denizens could see us plainly enough to
note and analyze the details of human existence on the surface of our
planet, it would be curious and perhaps a little humiliating for us, to see
their statistics. What! we should say, is this the sum of our lives? Is it for
this that we struggle, and suffer, and die? Truly it is futile to give ourselves
such trouble.
And yet the remedy is simple, within the power of every one; but one
does not think of it just because it is too easy, although it has the immense
advantage of lifting us out of the miseries of this weary world toward the
inexpressible happiness that must always awaken in us with the knowledge
Page 80
of the Truth: we need only open our eyes to see, and to look out. Only—one
hardly ever thinks of it, and it is easier to let one's self be blinded by the
illusion and false glamor of appearances.
Think what it would be to consecrate an hour each day to voluntary
participation in the harmonious Choir of Nature, to raise one's eyes toward
the Heavens, to share the lessons taught by the Pageant of the Universe!
But, no: there is no time, no time for the intellectual life, no time to become
attached to real interests, no time to pursue them.
Among the objects marshaled for us in the immense spectacle of Nature,
nothing without exception has struck the admiration and attention of man as
much as the Sun, the God of Light, the fecundating orb, without which our
planet and its life would never have issued from nonentity, the visible image
of the invisible god, as said Cicero, and the poets of antiquity. And yet how
many beyond the circle of those likely to read these pages know that this
Sun is a star in the Milky Way, and that every star is a sun? How many take
any account of the reality and grandeur of the Universe? Inquire, and you
will find that the number of people who have any notion, however
rudimentary, of its construction, is singularly restricted. Humanity is
content to vegetate, much after the fashion of a race of moles.
Henceforward, you will know that you are living in the rays of a star,
which, from its proximity, we term a sun. To the inhabitants of other
systems of worlds, our splendid Sun is only a more or less brilliant,
luminous point, according as the spot from which it is observed is nearer or
farther off. But to us its "terrestrial" importance renders it particularly
precious; we forget all the sister stars on its account, and even the most
ignorant hail it with enthusiasm without exactly knowing what its rôle in
the universe may be, simply because they feel that they depend on it, and
that without it life would become extinct on this globe. Yes, it is the
beneficent rays of the Sun that shed upon our Earth the floods of light and
heat to which Life owes its existence and its perpetual propagation.
hardly ever thinks of it, and it is easier to let one's self be blinded by the
illusion and false glamor of appearances.
Think what it would be to consecrate an hour each day to voluntary
participation in the harmonious Choir of Nature, to raise one's eyes toward
the Heavens, to share the lessons taught by the Pageant of the Universe!
But, no: there is no time, no time for the intellectual life, no time to become
attached to real interests, no time to pursue them.
Among the objects marshaled for us in the immense spectacle of Nature,
nothing without exception has struck the admiration and attention of man as
much as the Sun, the God of Light, the fecundating orb, without which our
planet and its life would never have issued from nonentity, the visible image
of the invisible god, as said Cicero, and the poets of antiquity. And yet how
many beyond the circle of those likely to read these pages know that this
Sun is a star in the Milky Way, and that every star is a sun? How many take
any account of the reality and grandeur of the Universe? Inquire, and you
will find that the number of people who have any notion, however
rudimentary, of its construction, is singularly restricted. Humanity is
content to vegetate, much after the fashion of a race of moles.
Henceforward, you will know that you are living in the rays of a star,
which, from its proximity, we term a sun. To the inhabitants of other
systems of worlds, our splendid Sun is only a more or less brilliant,
luminous point, according as the spot from which it is observed is nearer or
farther off. But to us its "terrestrial" importance renders it particularly
precious; we forget all the sister stars on its account, and even the most
ignorant hail it with enthusiasm without exactly knowing what its rôle in
the universe may be, simply because they feel that they depend on it, and
that without it life would become extinct on this globe. Yes, it is the
beneficent rays of the Sun that shed upon our Earth the floods of light and
heat to which Life owes its existence and its perpetual propagation.
Page 81
Hail, vast Sun! a little star in Infinitude, but for us a colossal and
portentous luminary. Hail, divine Benefactor! How should we not adore,
when we owe him the glow of the warm and cheery days of summer, the
gentle caresses by which his rays touch the undulating ears, and gild them
with the touch? The Sun sustains our globe in Space, and keeps it within his
rays by the mysteriously powerful and delicate cords of attraction. It is the
Sun that we inhale from the embalmed corollas of the flowers that uplift
their gracious heads toward his light, and reflect his splendors back to us. It
is the Sun that sparkles in the foam of the merry wine; that charms our gaze
in those first days of spring, when the home of the human race is adorned
with all the charms of verdant and flowering youth. Everywhere we find the
Sun; everywhere we recognize his work, extending from the infinitely great
to the infinitely little. We bow to his might, and admire his power. When in
the sad winter day he disappears behind the snowy eaves, we think his fiery
globe will never rise to mitigate the short December days which are
alleviated with his languid beams.
April restores him to superb majesty, and our hearts are filled with hope
in the illumination of those beauteous, sunny hours.
Our celestial journey carried us far indeed from our own Solar System.
Guided by the penetrating eye of the telescope, we reached such distant
creations that we lost sight of our cherished luminary.
But we remember that he burns yonder, in the midst of the pale cosmic
cloud we term the Milky Way. Let us approach him, now that we have
visited the Isles of Light in the Celestial Ocean; let us traverse the vast
plains strewn with the burning gold of the Suns of the Infinite.
We embark upon a ray of light, and glide rapidly to the portals of our
Universe. Soon we perceive a tiny speck, scintillating feebly in the depths
of Space, and recognize it as our own celestial quarters. This little star
portentous luminary. Hail, divine Benefactor! How should we not adore,
when we owe him the glow of the warm and cheery days of summer, the
gentle caresses by which his rays touch the undulating ears, and gild them
with the touch? The Sun sustains our globe in Space, and keeps it within his
rays by the mysteriously powerful and delicate cords of attraction. It is the
Sun that we inhale from the embalmed corollas of the flowers that uplift
their gracious heads toward his light, and reflect his splendors back to us. It
is the Sun that sparkles in the foam of the merry wine; that charms our gaze
in those first days of spring, when the home of the human race is adorned
with all the charms of verdant and flowering youth. Everywhere we find the
Sun; everywhere we recognize his work, extending from the infinitely great
to the infinitely little. We bow to his might, and admire his power. When in
the sad winter day he disappears behind the snowy eaves, we think his fiery
globe will never rise to mitigate the short December days which are
alleviated with his languid beams.
April restores him to superb majesty, and our hearts are filled with hope
in the illumination of those beauteous, sunny hours.
Our celestial journey carried us far indeed from our own Solar System.
Guided by the penetrating eye of the telescope, we reached such distant
creations that we lost sight of our cherished luminary.
But we remember that he burns yonder, in the midst of the pale cosmic
cloud we term the Milky Way. Let us approach him, now that we have
visited the Isles of Light in the Celestial Ocean; let us traverse the vast
plains strewn with the burning gold of the Suns of the Infinite.
We embark upon a ray of light, and glide rapidly to the portals of our
Universe. Soon we perceive a tiny speck, scintillating feebly in the depths
of Space, and recognize it as our own celestial quarters. This little star
Page 82
shines like the head of a gold pin, and increases in size as we advance
toward it. We traverse a few more trillion miles in our rapid course, and it
shines out like a fine star of the first magnitude. It grows larger and larger.
Soon we divine that it is our humble Earth that is shining before us, and
gladly alight upon her. In future we shall not quit our own province of the
Celestial Kingdom, but will enter into relations with this solar family, which
interests us the more in that it affects us so closely.
Fig. 28.—Comparative sizes of the Sun and Earth.
The Sun, which is manifested to us as a fine white disk at noon, while it
is fiery red in the evening, at its setting, is an immense globe, whose
toward it. We traverse a few more trillion miles in our rapid course, and it
shines out like a fine star of the first magnitude. It grows larger and larger.
Soon we divine that it is our humble Earth that is shining before us, and
gladly alight upon her. In future we shall not quit our own province of the
Celestial Kingdom, but will enter into relations with this solar family, which
interests us the more in that it affects us so closely.
Fig. 28.—Comparative sizes of the Sun and Earth.
The Sun, which is manifested to us as a fine white disk at noon, while it
is fiery red in the evening, at its setting, is an immense globe, whose
Page 83
colossal dimensions surpass those of our terrestrial atom beyond all
conceivable proportion.
In diameter, it is, in effect, 1081⁄2 times as large as the Earth; that is to
say, if our planet be represented by a globe 1 meter in diameter, the Sun
would figure as a sphere 1081⁄2 meters across. This is shown on the
accompanying figure (Fig. 28), which is in exact proportion.
If our world were set down upon the Sun, with all its magnificence, all
its wealth, its mountains, its seas, its monuments, and its inhabitants, it
would only be an imperceptible speck. It would occupy less space in the
central orb than one grain in a grenade. If the Earth were placed in the
center of the Sun, with the Moon still revolving round it at her proper
distance of 384,000 kilometers (238,500 miles), only half the solar surface
would be covered.
In volume the Sun is 1,280,000 times vaster than our abode, and 324,000
times heavier in mass. That the giant only appears to us as a small though
very brilliant disk, is solely on account of its distance. Its apparent
dimensions by no means reveal its majestic proportions to us.
When observed with astronomical instruments, or photographed, we
discover that its surface is not smooth, as might be supposed, but
granulated, presenting a number of luminous points dispersed over a more
somber background. These granulations are somewhat like the pores of a
fruit, e.g., a fine orange, the color of which recalls the hue of the Sun when
it sinks in the evening, and prepares to plunge us into darkness. At times
these pores open under the influence of disturbances that arise upon the
solar surface, and give birth to a Sun-Spot. For centuries scientists and lay
people alike refused to admit the existence of these spots, regarding them as
so many blemishes upon the King of the Heavens. Was not the Sun the
emblem of inviolable purity? To find any defect in him were to do him
grievous injury. Since the orb of day was incorruptible, those who threw
doubt on his immaculate splendor were fools and idiots. And so when
conceivable proportion.
In diameter, it is, in effect, 1081⁄2 times as large as the Earth; that is to
say, if our planet be represented by a globe 1 meter in diameter, the Sun
would figure as a sphere 1081⁄2 meters across. This is shown on the
accompanying figure (Fig. 28), which is in exact proportion.
If our world were set down upon the Sun, with all its magnificence, all
its wealth, its mountains, its seas, its monuments, and its inhabitants, it
would only be an imperceptible speck. It would occupy less space in the
central orb than one grain in a grenade. If the Earth were placed in the
center of the Sun, with the Moon still revolving round it at her proper
distance of 384,000 kilometers (238,500 miles), only half the solar surface
would be covered.
In volume the Sun is 1,280,000 times vaster than our abode, and 324,000
times heavier in mass. That the giant only appears to us as a small though
very brilliant disk, is solely on account of its distance. Its apparent
dimensions by no means reveal its majestic proportions to us.
When observed with astronomical instruments, or photographed, we
discover that its surface is not smooth, as might be supposed, but
granulated, presenting a number of luminous points dispersed over a more
somber background. These granulations are somewhat like the pores of a
fruit, e.g., a fine orange, the color of which recalls the hue of the Sun when
it sinks in the evening, and prepares to plunge us into darkness. At times
these pores open under the influence of disturbances that arise upon the
solar surface, and give birth to a Sun-Spot. For centuries scientists and lay
people alike refused to admit the existence of these spots, regarding them as
so many blemishes upon the King of the Heavens. Was not the Sun the
emblem of inviolable purity? To find any defect in him were to do him
grievous injury. Since the orb of day was incorruptible, those who threw
doubt on his immaculate splendor were fools and idiots. And so when
Page 84
Scheiner, one of the first who studied the solar spots with the telescope,
published the result of his experiments in 1610, no one would believe his
statements.
Yet, from the observations of Galileo and other astronomers, it became
necessary to accept the evidence, and stranger still to recognize that it is by
these very spots that we are enabled to study the physical constitution of the
Sun.
They are generally rounded or oval in shape, and exhibit two distinct
parts; first, the central portion, which is black, and is called the nucleus, or
umbra; second, a clearer region, half shaded, which has received the name
of penumbra. These parts are sharply defined in outline; the penumbra is
gray, the nucleus looks black in relation to the dazzling brilliancy of the
solar surface; but as a matter of fact it radiates a light 2,000 times superior
in intensity to that of the full moon.
published the result of his experiments in 1610, no one would believe his
statements.
Yet, from the observations of Galileo and other astronomers, it became
necessary to accept the evidence, and stranger still to recognize that it is by
these very spots that we are enabled to study the physical constitution of the
Sun.
They are generally rounded or oval in shape, and exhibit two distinct
parts; first, the central portion, which is black, and is called the nucleus, or
umbra; second, a clearer region, half shaded, which has received the name
of penumbra. These parts are sharply defined in outline; the penumbra is
gray, the nucleus looks black in relation to the dazzling brilliancy of the
solar surface; but as a matter of fact it radiates a light 2,000 times superior
in intensity to that of the full moon.
Page 85
Fig. 29.—Direct photograph of the Sun.
Some idea of the aspect of these spots may be obtained from the
accompanying reproduction of a photograph of the Sun (taken September 8,
1898, at the author's observatory at Juvisy), and from the detailed drawing
of the large spot that broke out some days later (September 13), crossed by
a bridge, and furrowed with flames. As a rule, the spots undergo rapid
transformations.
Some idea of the aspect of these spots may be obtained from the
accompanying reproduction of a photograph of the Sun (taken September 8,
1898, at the author's observatory at Juvisy), and from the detailed drawing
of the large spot that broke out some days later (September 13), crossed by
a bridge, and furrowed with flames. As a rule, the spots undergo rapid
transformations.
Page 86
Fig. 30.—Telescopic aspect of a Sun-Spot.
These spots, which appear of insignificant dimensions to the observers
on the Earth, are in reality absolutely gigantic. Some that have been
measured are ten times as large as the Earth's diameter, i.e., 120,000
kilometers (74,500 miles).
Sometimes the spots are so large that they can be seen with the unaided
eye (protected with black or dark-blue glasses). They are not formed
instantaneously, but are heralded by a vast commotion on the solar surface,
exhibiting, as it were, luminous waves or faculæ. Out of this agitation arises
a little spot, that is usually round, and enlarges progressively to reach a
maximum, after which it diminishes, with frequent segmentation and
shrinkage. Some are visible only for a few days; others last for months.
These spots, which appear of insignificant dimensions to the observers
on the Earth, are in reality absolutely gigantic. Some that have been
measured are ten times as large as the Earth's diameter, i.e., 120,000
kilometers (74,500 miles).
Sometimes the spots are so large that they can be seen with the unaided
eye (protected with black or dark-blue glasses). They are not formed
instantaneously, but are heralded by a vast commotion on the solar surface,
exhibiting, as it were, luminous waves or faculæ. Out of this agitation arises
a little spot, that is usually round, and enlarges progressively to reach a
maximum, after which it diminishes, with frequent segmentation and
shrinkage. Some are visible only for a few days; others last for months.
Page 87
Some appear, only to be instantly swallowed in the boiling turmoil of the
flaming orb. Sometimes, again, white incandescent waves emerge, and
seem to throw luminous bridges across the central umbra. As a rule the
spots are not very profound. They are funnel-shaped depressions, inferior in
depth to the diameter of the Earth, which, as we have seen, is 108 times
smaller than that of the Sun.
The Sun-Spots are not devoid of motion, and from their movements we
learn that the radiant orb revolves upon itself in about twenty-five days.
This rotation was determined in 1611, by Galileo, who, while observing the
spots, saw that they traversed the solar disk from east to west, following
lines that are oblique to the plane of the ecliptic, and that they disappear at
the western border fourteen days after their arrival at the eastern edge.
Sometimes the same spot, after being invisible for fourteen days, reappears
upon the eastern edge, where it was observed twenty-eight days previously.
It progresses toward the center of the Sun, which is reached in seven days,
disappears anew in the west, and continues its journey on the hemisphere
opposed to us, to reappear under observation two weeks later, if it has not
meantime been extinguished. This observation proves that the Sun revolves
upon itself. The reappearance of the spots occurs in about twenty-seven
days, because the Earth is not stationary, and in its movement round the
burning focus, a motion effected in the same direction as the solar rotation,
the spots are still visible two and a half days after they disappeared from the
point at which they had been twenty-five days previously. In reality, the
rotation of the Sun occupies twenty-five and a half days, but strangely
enough this globe does not rotate in one uniform period, like the Earth; the
rotation periods, or movements of the different parts of the solar surface,
diminish from the Sun's equator toward its poles. The period is twenty-five
days at the equator, twenty-six at the twenty-fourth degree of latitude, north
or south, twenty-seven at the thirty-seventh degree, twenty-eight at the
forty-eighth. The spots are usually formed between the equator and this
flaming orb. Sometimes, again, white incandescent waves emerge, and
seem to throw luminous bridges across the central umbra. As a rule the
spots are not very profound. They are funnel-shaped depressions, inferior in
depth to the diameter of the Earth, which, as we have seen, is 108 times
smaller than that of the Sun.
The Sun-Spots are not devoid of motion, and from their movements we
learn that the radiant orb revolves upon itself in about twenty-five days.
This rotation was determined in 1611, by Galileo, who, while observing the
spots, saw that they traversed the solar disk from east to west, following
lines that are oblique to the plane of the ecliptic, and that they disappear at
the western border fourteen days after their arrival at the eastern edge.
Sometimes the same spot, after being invisible for fourteen days, reappears
upon the eastern edge, where it was observed twenty-eight days previously.
It progresses toward the center of the Sun, which is reached in seven days,
disappears anew in the west, and continues its journey on the hemisphere
opposed to us, to reappear under observation two weeks later, if it has not
meantime been extinguished. This observation proves that the Sun revolves
upon itself. The reappearance of the spots occurs in about twenty-seven
days, because the Earth is not stationary, and in its movement round the
burning focus, a motion effected in the same direction as the solar rotation,
the spots are still visible two and a half days after they disappeared from the
point at which they had been twenty-five days previously. In reality, the
rotation of the Sun occupies twenty-five and a half days, but strangely
enough this globe does not rotate in one uniform period, like the Earth; the
rotation periods, or movements of the different parts of the solar surface,
diminish from the Sun's equator toward its poles. The period is twenty-five
days at the equator, twenty-six at the twenty-fourth degree of latitude, north
or south, twenty-seven at the thirty-seventh degree, twenty-eight at the
forty-eighth. The spots are usually formed between the equator and this
Page 88
latitude, more especially between the tenth and thirtieth degrees. They have
never been seen round the poles.
Toward the edges of the Sun, again, are very brilliant and highly
luminous regions, which generally surround the spots, and have been
termed faculæ (facula, a little torch). These faculæ, which frequently
occupy a very extensive surface, seem to be the seat of formidable
commotions that incessantly revolutionize the face of our monarch, often,
as we said, preceding the spots. They can be detected right up to the poles.
Our Sun, that appears so calm and majestic, is in reality the seat of fierce
conflagrations. Volcanic eruptions, the most appalling storms, the worst
cataclysms that sometimes disturb our little world, are gentle zephyrs
compared with the solar tempests that engender clouds of fire capable at
one burst of engulfing globes of the dimensions of our planet.
To compare terrestrial volcanoes with solar eruptions is like comparing
the modest night-light that consumes a midge with the flames of the fire
that destroys a town.
The solar spots vary in a fairly regular period of eleven to twelve years.
In certain years, e.g., 1893, they are vast, numerous and frequent; in other
years, e.g., 1901, they are few and insignificant. The statistics are very
carefully preserved. Here, for instance, is the surface showing sun-spots
expressed in millionths of the extent of the visible solar surface:
1889 78
1890 99
1891 569
1892 1,214
1893 1,464
1895 974
1896 543
1897 514
1898 375
never been seen round the poles.
Toward the edges of the Sun, again, are very brilliant and highly
luminous regions, which generally surround the spots, and have been
termed faculæ (facula, a little torch). These faculæ, which frequently
occupy a very extensive surface, seem to be the seat of formidable
commotions that incessantly revolutionize the face of our monarch, often,
as we said, preceding the spots. They can be detected right up to the poles.
Our Sun, that appears so calm and majestic, is in reality the seat of fierce
conflagrations. Volcanic eruptions, the most appalling storms, the worst
cataclysms that sometimes disturb our little world, are gentle zephyrs
compared with the solar tempests that engender clouds of fire capable at
one burst of engulfing globes of the dimensions of our planet.
To compare terrestrial volcanoes with solar eruptions is like comparing
the modest night-light that consumes a midge with the flames of the fire
that destroys a town.
The solar spots vary in a fairly regular period of eleven to twelve years.
In certain years, e.g., 1893, they are vast, numerous and frequent; in other
years, e.g., 1901, they are few and insignificant. The statistics are very
carefully preserved. Here, for instance, is the surface showing sun-spots
expressed in millionths of the extent of the visible solar surface:
1889 78
1890 99
1891 569
1892 1,214
1893 1,464
1895 974
1896 543
1897 514
1898 375
Page 89
1899 111
1900 75
1901 29
1902 62
The years 1889 and 1901 were minima; the year 1893 a maximum.
It is a curious fact that terrestrial magnetism and the boreal auroras
exhibit an oscillation parallel to that of the solar spots, and apparently the
same occurs with regard to temperature.
We must regard our sun as a globe of gas in a state of combustion,
burning at high temperature, and giving off a prodigious amount of heat and
light. The dazzling surface of this globe is called a photosphere (light
sphere). It is in perpetual motion, like the waves of an ocean of fire, whose
roseate and transparent flames measure some 15,000 kilometers (9,300
miles) in height. This stratum of rose-colored flames has received the name
of chromosphere (color sphere). It is transparent; it is not directly visible,
but is seen only during the total eclipses of the Sun, when the dazzling disk
of that luminary is entirely concealed by the Moon; or with the aid of the
spectroscope. The part of the Sun that we see is its luminous surface, or
photosphere.
From this agitated surface there is a constant ejection of gigantic
eruptions, immense jets of flame, geysers of fire, projected at a terrific
speed to prodigious heights.
For years astronomers were greatly perplexed as to the nature of these
incandescent masses, known as prominences, which shot out like fireworks,
and were only visible during the total eclipses of the Sun. But now, thanks
to an ingenious invention of Janssen and Lockyer, these eruptions can be
observed every day in the spectroscope, and have been registered since
1868, more particularly in Rome and in Catania, where the Society of
Spectroscopists was founded with this especial object, and publishes
monthly bulletins in statistics of the health of the Sun.
1900 75
1901 29
1902 62
The years 1889 and 1901 were minima; the year 1893 a maximum.
It is a curious fact that terrestrial magnetism and the boreal auroras
exhibit an oscillation parallel to that of the solar spots, and apparently the
same occurs with regard to temperature.
We must regard our sun as a globe of gas in a state of combustion,
burning at high temperature, and giving off a prodigious amount of heat and
light. The dazzling surface of this globe is called a photosphere (light
sphere). It is in perpetual motion, like the waves of an ocean of fire, whose
roseate and transparent flames measure some 15,000 kilometers (9,300
miles) in height. This stratum of rose-colored flames has received the name
of chromosphere (color sphere). It is transparent; it is not directly visible,
but is seen only during the total eclipses of the Sun, when the dazzling disk
of that luminary is entirely concealed by the Moon; or with the aid of the
spectroscope. The part of the Sun that we see is its luminous surface, or
photosphere.
From this agitated surface there is a constant ejection of gigantic
eruptions, immense jets of flame, geysers of fire, projected at a terrific
speed to prodigious heights.
For years astronomers were greatly perplexed as to the nature of these
incandescent masses, known as prominences, which shot out like fireworks,
and were only visible during the total eclipses of the Sun. But now, thanks
to an ingenious invention of Janssen and Lockyer, these eruptions can be
observed every day in the spectroscope, and have been registered since
1868, more particularly in Rome and in Catania, where the Society of
Spectroscopists was founded with this especial object, and publishes
monthly bulletins in statistics of the health of the Sun.
Page 90
These prominences assume all imaginable forms, and often resemble our
own storm-clouds; they rise above the chromosphere with incredible
velocity, often exceeding 200 kilometers (124 miles) per second, and are
carried up to the amazing height of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles).
Fig. 31.—Rose-colored solar flames 228,000 kilometers (141,500 miles)
in height, i.e., 18 times the diameter of the Earth.
The Sun is surrounded with these enormous flames on every side;
sometimes they shoot out into space like splendid curving roseate plumes;
at others they rear their luminous heads in the Heavens, like the cleft and
waving leaves of giant palm-trees. Having illustrated a remarkable type of
solar spot, it is interesting to submit to the reader a precise observation of
own storm-clouds; they rise above the chromosphere with incredible
velocity, often exceeding 200 kilometers (124 miles) per second, and are
carried up to the amazing height of 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles).
Fig. 31.—Rose-colored solar flames 228,000 kilometers (141,500 miles)
in height, i.e., 18 times the diameter of the Earth.
The Sun is surrounded with these enormous flames on every side;
sometimes they shoot out into space like splendid curving roseate plumes;
at others they rear their luminous heads in the Heavens, like the cleft and
waving leaves of giant palm-trees. Having illustrated a remarkable type of
solar spot, it is interesting to submit to the reader a precise observation of
Page 91
these curious solar flames. That reproduced here was observed in Rome,
January 30, 1885. It measured 228,000 kilometers (141,500 miles) in
height, eighteen times the diameter of the earth (represented alongside in its
relative magnitude). (Fig. 31.)
Solar eruptions have been seen to reach, in a few minutes, a height of
more than 100,000 kilometers (62,000 miles), and then to fall back in a
flaming torrent into that burning and inextinguishable ocean.
Observation, in conjunction with spectral analysis, shows these
prominences to be due to formidable explosions produced within the actual
substance of the Sun, and projecting masses of incandescent hydrogen into
space with considerable force.
Nor is this all. During an eclipse one sees around the black disk of the
Moon as it passes in front of the Sun and intercepts its light, a brilliant and
rosy aureole with long, luminous, branching feathers streaming out, like
aigrettes, which extend a very considerable distance from the solar surface.
This aureole, the nature of which is still unknown to us, has received the
name of corona. It is a sort of immense atmosphere, extremely rarefied. Our
superb torch, accordingly, is a brazier of unparalleled activity—a globe of
gas, agitated by phenomenal tempests whose flaming streamers extend afar.
The smallest of these flames is so potent that it would swallow up our world
at a single breath, like the bombs shot out by Vesuvius, that fall back within
the crater.
What now is the real heat of this incandescent focus? The most accurate
researches estimate the temperature of the surface of the Sun at 7,000°C.
The internal temperature must be considerably higher. A crucible of molten
iron poured out upon the Sun would be as a stream of ice and snow.
We can form some idea of this calorific force by making certain
comparisons. Thus, the heat given out appears to be equal to that which
would be emitted by a colossal globe of the same dimensions (that is, as
voluminous as twelve hundred and eighty thousand terrestrial globes),
January 30, 1885. It measured 228,000 kilometers (141,500 miles) in
height, eighteen times the diameter of the earth (represented alongside in its
relative magnitude). (Fig. 31.)
Solar eruptions have been seen to reach, in a few minutes, a height of
more than 100,000 kilometers (62,000 miles), and then to fall back in a
flaming torrent into that burning and inextinguishable ocean.
Observation, in conjunction with spectral analysis, shows these
prominences to be due to formidable explosions produced within the actual
substance of the Sun, and projecting masses of incandescent hydrogen into
space with considerable force.
Nor is this all. During an eclipse one sees around the black disk of the
Moon as it passes in front of the Sun and intercepts its light, a brilliant and
rosy aureole with long, luminous, branching feathers streaming out, like
aigrettes, which extend a very considerable distance from the solar surface.
This aureole, the nature of which is still unknown to us, has received the
name of corona. It is a sort of immense atmosphere, extremely rarefied. Our
superb torch, accordingly, is a brazier of unparalleled activity—a globe of
gas, agitated by phenomenal tempests whose flaming streamers extend afar.
The smallest of these flames is so potent that it would swallow up our world
at a single breath, like the bombs shot out by Vesuvius, that fall back within
the crater.
What now is the real heat of this incandescent focus? The most accurate
researches estimate the temperature of the surface of the Sun at 7,000°C.
The internal temperature must be considerably higher. A crucible of molten
iron poured out upon the Sun would be as a stream of ice and snow.
We can form some idea of this calorific force by making certain
comparisons. Thus, the heat given out appears to be equal to that which
would be emitted by a colossal globe of the same dimensions (that is, as
voluminous as twelve hundred and eighty thousand terrestrial globes),
Page 92
entirely covered with a layer of incandescent coal 28 kilometers (18 miles)
in depth, all burning at equal combustion. The heat emitted by the Sun, at
each second, is equal to that which would result from the combustion of
eleven quadrillions six hundred thousand milliards of tons of coal, all
burning together. This same heat would bring to the boil in an hour, two
trillions nine hundred milliards of cubic kilometers of water at freezing-
point.
Our little planet, gravitating at 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000
miles) from the Sun, arrests on the way, and utilizes, only the half of a
milliard part of this total radiation.
How is this heat maintained? One of the principal causes of the heat of
the Sun is its condensation. According to all probabilities, the solar globe
represents for us the nucleus of a vast nebula, that extended in primitive
times beyond the orbit of Neptune, and which in its contraction has finally
produced this central focus. In virtue of the law of transformation of motion
into heat, this condensation, which has not yet reached its limit, suffices to
raise this colossal globe to its level of temperature, and to maintain it there
for millions of years. In addition, a substantial number of meteors is forever
falling into it. This furnace is a true pandemonium.
The Sun weighs three hundred and twenty-four thousand times more
than the Earth—that is to say, eighteen hundred and seventy octillions of
kilograms:
1,870,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
(1,842,364,532,019,704,433,497,536,945 tons).
In Chapter XI we shall explain the methods by which it has been found
possible to weigh the Sun and determine its exact distance.
in depth, all burning at equal combustion. The heat emitted by the Sun, at
each second, is equal to that which would result from the combustion of
eleven quadrillions six hundred thousand milliards of tons of coal, all
burning together. This same heat would bring to the boil in an hour, two
trillions nine hundred milliards of cubic kilometers of water at freezing-
point.
Our little planet, gravitating at 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000
miles) from the Sun, arrests on the way, and utilizes, only the half of a
milliard part of this total radiation.
How is this heat maintained? One of the principal causes of the heat of
the Sun is its condensation. According to all probabilities, the solar globe
represents for us the nucleus of a vast nebula, that extended in primitive
times beyond the orbit of Neptune, and which in its contraction has finally
produced this central focus. In virtue of the law of transformation of motion
into heat, this condensation, which has not yet reached its limit, suffices to
raise this colossal globe to its level of temperature, and to maintain it there
for millions of years. In addition, a substantial number of meteors is forever
falling into it. This furnace is a true pandemonium.
The Sun weighs three hundred and twenty-four thousand times more
than the Earth—that is to say, eighteen hundred and seventy octillions of
kilograms:
1,870,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
(1,842,364,532,019,704,433,497,536,945 tons).
In Chapter XI we shall explain the methods by which it has been found
possible to weigh the Sun and determine its exact distance.
Page 93
I trust these figures will convey some notion of the importance and
nature of the Sun, the stupendous orb on whose rays our very existence
depends. Its apparent dimension (which is only half a degree, 32′, and
would be hidden from sight, like that of the full moon, which is about the
same, by the tip of the little finger held out at arm's length), represents, as
we have seen, a real dimension that is colossal, i.e., 1,383,000 kilometers
(more than 857,000 miles), and this is owing to the enormous distance that
separates us from it. This distance of 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000
miles) is sufficiently hard to appreciate. Let us say that 11,640 terrestrial
globes would be required to throw a bridge from here to the Sun, while 30
would suffice from the Earth to the Moon. The Moon is 388 times nearer to
us than the Sun. We may perhaps conceive of this distance by calculating
that a train, moving at constant speed of 1 kilometer (0.6214 mile) a minute,
would take 149,000,000 minutes, that is to say 103,472 days, or 283 years,
to cross the distance that separates us from this orb. Given the normal
duration of life, neither the travelers who set out for the Sun, nor their
children, nor their grandchildren, would arrive there: only the seventh
generation would reach the goal, and only the fourteenth could bring us
back news of it.
Children often cry for the Moon. If one of these inquisitive little beings
could stretch out its arms to touch the Sun, and burn its fingers there, it
would not feel the burn for one hundred and sixty-seven years (when it
would no longer be an infant), for the nervous impulse of sensation can
only be transmitted from the ends of the fingers to the brain at a velocity of
28 meters per second.
'Tis long. A cannon-ball would reach the Sun in ten years. Light, that
rapid arrow that flies through space at a velocity of 300,000 kilometers
(186,000 miles per second), takes only eight minutes seventeen seconds to
traverse this distance.
nature of the Sun, the stupendous orb on whose rays our very existence
depends. Its apparent dimension (which is only half a degree, 32′, and
would be hidden from sight, like that of the full moon, which is about the
same, by the tip of the little finger held out at arm's length), represents, as
we have seen, a real dimension that is colossal, i.e., 1,383,000 kilometers
(more than 857,000 miles), and this is owing to the enormous distance that
separates us from it. This distance of 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000
miles) is sufficiently hard to appreciate. Let us say that 11,640 terrestrial
globes would be required to throw a bridge from here to the Sun, while 30
would suffice from the Earth to the Moon. The Moon is 388 times nearer to
us than the Sun. We may perhaps conceive of this distance by calculating
that a train, moving at constant speed of 1 kilometer (0.6214 mile) a minute,
would take 149,000,000 minutes, that is to say 103,472 days, or 283 years,
to cross the distance that separates us from this orb. Given the normal
duration of life, neither the travelers who set out for the Sun, nor their
children, nor their grandchildren, would arrive there: only the seventh
generation would reach the goal, and only the fourteenth could bring us
back news of it.
Children often cry for the Moon. If one of these inquisitive little beings
could stretch out its arms to touch the Sun, and burn its fingers there, it
would not feel the burn for one hundred and sixty-seven years (when it
would no longer be an infant), for the nervous impulse of sensation can
only be transmitted from the ends of the fingers to the brain at a velocity of
28 meters per second.
'Tis long. A cannon-ball would reach the Sun in ten years. Light, that
rapid arrow that flies through space at a velocity of 300,000 kilometers
(186,000 miles per second), takes only eight minutes seventeen seconds to
traverse this distance.
Page 94
This brilliant Sun is not only sovereign of the Earth; he is also the head
of a vast planetary system.
The orbs that circle round the Sun are opaque bodies, spherical in shape,
receiving their light and heat from the central star, on which they absolutely
depend. The name of planets given to them signifies "wandering" stars. If
you observe the Heavens on a fine starry night, and are sufficiently
acquainted with the principal stars of the Zodiac as described in a preceding
chapter, you may be surprised on certain evenings to see the figure of some
zodiacal constellation slightly modified by the temporary presence of a
brilliant orb perhaps surpassing in its luminosity the finest stars of the first
magnitude.
If you watch this apparition for some weeks, and examine its position
carefully in regard to the adjacent stars, you will observe that it changes its
position more or less slowly in the Heavens. These wandering orbs, or
planets, do not shine with intrinsic light; they are illuminated by the Sun.
The planets, in effect, are bodies as opaque as the Earth, traveling round
the God of Day at a speed proportional to their distance. They number eight
principal orbs, and may be divided into two quite distinct groups by which
we may recognize them: the first comprises four planets, of relatively small
dimensions in comparison with those of the second group, which are so
voluminous that the least important of them is larger than the other four put
together.
In order of distance from the Sun, we first encounter:
MERCURY, VENUS, THE EARTH, AND MARS
These are the worlds that are nearest to the orb of day.
The four following, and much more remote, are, still in order of
distance:
JUPITER, SATURN, URANUS, AND NEPTUNE
of a vast planetary system.
The orbs that circle round the Sun are opaque bodies, spherical in shape,
receiving their light and heat from the central star, on which they absolutely
depend. The name of planets given to them signifies "wandering" stars. If
you observe the Heavens on a fine starry night, and are sufficiently
acquainted with the principal stars of the Zodiac as described in a preceding
chapter, you may be surprised on certain evenings to see the figure of some
zodiacal constellation slightly modified by the temporary presence of a
brilliant orb perhaps surpassing in its luminosity the finest stars of the first
magnitude.
If you watch this apparition for some weeks, and examine its position
carefully in regard to the adjacent stars, you will observe that it changes its
position more or less slowly in the Heavens. These wandering orbs, or
planets, do not shine with intrinsic light; they are illuminated by the Sun.
The planets, in effect, are bodies as opaque as the Earth, traveling round
the God of Day at a speed proportional to their distance. They number eight
principal orbs, and may be divided into two quite distinct groups by which
we may recognize them: the first comprises four planets, of relatively small
dimensions in comparison with those of the second group, which are so
voluminous that the least important of them is larger than the other four put
together.
In order of distance from the Sun, we first encounter:
MERCURY, VENUS, THE EARTH, AND MARS
These are the worlds that are nearest to the orb of day.
The four following, and much more remote, are, still in order of
distance:
JUPITER, SATURN, URANUS, AND NEPTUNE
Page 95
This second group is separated from the first by a vast space occupied by
quite a little army of minute planets, tiny cosmic bodies, the largest of
which measures little more than 100 kilometers (62 miles) in diameter, and
the smallest some few miles only.
The planets which form these three groups represent the principal
members of the solar family. But the Sun is a patriarch, and each of his
daughters has her own children who, while obeying the paternal influence
of the fiery orb, are also obedient to the world that governs them. These
secondary asters, or satellites, follow the planets in their course, and
revolve round them in an ellipse, just as the others rotate round the Sun.
Every one knows the satellite of the Earth, the Moon. All the other planets
of our system have their own moons, some being even more favored than
ourselves in this respect, and having several. Mars has two; Jupiter, five;
Saturn, eight; Uranus, four; and Neptune, one (at least as yet discovered).
In order to realize the relations between these worlds, we must
appreciate their distances by arranging them in a little table:
Distance in Distance in
Millions of Millions of
Kilometers. Miles.
Mercury 57 35
Venus 108 67
The Earth 149 93
Mars 226 140
Jupiter 775 481
Saturn 1,421 882
Uranus 2,831 1,755
Neptune 4,470 2,771
The Sun is at the center (or, more properly speaking, at the focus, for the
planets describe an ellipse) of this system, and controls them. Neptune is
thirty times farther from the Sun than the Earth. These disparities of
distance produce a vast difference in the periods of the planetary
revolutions; for while the Earth revolves round the Sun in a year, Venus in
quite a little army of minute planets, tiny cosmic bodies, the largest of
which measures little more than 100 kilometers (62 miles) in diameter, and
the smallest some few miles only.
The planets which form these three groups represent the principal
members of the solar family. But the Sun is a patriarch, and each of his
daughters has her own children who, while obeying the paternal influence
of the fiery orb, are also obedient to the world that governs them. These
secondary asters, or satellites, follow the planets in their course, and
revolve round them in an ellipse, just as the others rotate round the Sun.
Every one knows the satellite of the Earth, the Moon. All the other planets
of our system have their own moons, some being even more favored than
ourselves in this respect, and having several. Mars has two; Jupiter, five;
Saturn, eight; Uranus, four; and Neptune, one (at least as yet discovered).
In order to realize the relations between these worlds, we must
appreciate their distances by arranging them in a little table:
Distance in Distance in
Millions of Millions of
Kilometers. Miles.
Mercury 57 35
Venus 108 67
The Earth 149 93
Mars 226 140
Jupiter 775 481
Saturn 1,421 882
Uranus 2,831 1,755
Neptune 4,470 2,771
The Sun is at the center (or, more properly speaking, at the focus, for the
planets describe an ellipse) of this system, and controls them. Neptune is
thirty times farther from the Sun than the Earth. These disparities of
distance produce a vast difference in the periods of the planetary
revolutions; for while the Earth revolves round the Sun in a year, Venus in
Page 96
224 days, and Mercury in 88, Mars takes nearly 2 years to accomplish his
journey, Jupiter 12 years, Saturn 29, Uranus 84, and Neptune 165.
Even the planets and their moons do not represent the Sun's complete
paternity. There are further, in the solar republic, certain vagabond and
irregular orbs that travel at a speed that is often most immoderate,
occasionally approaching the Sun, not to be consumed therein, but, as it
appears, to draw from its radiant source the provision of forces necessary
for their perigrinations through space. These are the Comets, which pursue
an extremely elongated orbit round the Sun, to which at times they
approximate very closely, at other times being excessively distant.
And now to recapitulate our knowledge of the Solar Empire. In the first
place, we see a colossal globe of fire dominating and governing the worlds
that belong to him. Around him are grouped planets, in number eight
principal, formed of solid and obscure matter, gravitating round the central
orb. Other secondary orbs, the satellites, revolve round the planets, which
keep them within the sphere of their attraction. And lastly, the comets,
irregular celestial bodies, track the whole extent of the great solar province.
To these might be added the whirlwinds of meteors, as it were
disaggregated comets, which also circle round the Sun, and give origin to
shooting stars, when they come into collision with the Earth.
Having now a general idea of our celestial family, and an appreciation of
the potent focus that controls it, let us make direct acquaintance with the
several members of which it is composed.
journey, Jupiter 12 years, Saturn 29, Uranus 84, and Neptune 165.
Even the planets and their moons do not represent the Sun's complete
paternity. There are further, in the solar republic, certain vagabond and
irregular orbs that travel at a speed that is often most immoderate,
occasionally approaching the Sun, not to be consumed therein, but, as it
appears, to draw from its radiant source the provision of forces necessary
for their perigrinations through space. These are the Comets, which pursue
an extremely elongated orbit round the Sun, to which at times they
approximate very closely, at other times being excessively distant.
And now to recapitulate our knowledge of the Solar Empire. In the first
place, we see a colossal globe of fire dominating and governing the worlds
that belong to him. Around him are grouped planets, in number eight
principal, formed of solid and obscure matter, gravitating round the central
orb. Other secondary orbs, the satellites, revolve round the planets, which
keep them within the sphere of their attraction. And lastly, the comets,
irregular celestial bodies, track the whole extent of the great solar province.
To these might be added the whirlwinds of meteors, as it were
disaggregated comets, which also circle round the Sun, and give origin to
shooting stars, when they come into collision with the Earth.
Having now a general idea of our celestial family, and an appreciation of
the potent focus that controls it, let us make direct acquaintance with the
several members of which it is composed.
Page 97
CHAPTER V
THE PLANETS
A.—Mercury, Venus, the Earth, Mars
And now we are in the Solar System, at the center, or, better, at the focus
of which burns the immense and dazzling orb. We have appreciated the
grandeur and potency of the solar globe, whose rays spread out in active
waves that bear a fecundating illumination to the worlds that gravitate
round him; we have appreciated the distance that separates the Sun from the
Earth, the third of the planets retained within his domain, or at least I trust
that the comparisons of the times required by certain moving objects to
traverse this distance have enabled us to conceive it.
We said that the four planets nearest to the Sun are Mercury, at a
distance of 57 million kilometers (35,000,000 miles); Venus, at 108 million
(67,000,000 miles); the Earth, at 149 million (93,000,000 miles); and Mars
at 226 million (140,000,000 miles). Let us begin our planetary journey with
these four stations.
MERCURY
A little above the Sun one sometimes sees, now in the West, in the
lingering shimmer of the twilight, now in the East, when the tender roseate
dawn announces the advent of a clear day, a small star of the first
magnitude which remains but a very short time above the horizon, and then
plunges back into the flaming sun. This is Mercury, the agile and active
messenger of Olympus, the god of eloquence, of medicine, of commerce,
and of thieves. One only sees him furtively, from time to time, at the
periods of his greatest elongations, either after the setting or before the
THE PLANETS
A.—Mercury, Venus, the Earth, Mars
And now we are in the Solar System, at the center, or, better, at the focus
of which burns the immense and dazzling orb. We have appreciated the
grandeur and potency of the solar globe, whose rays spread out in active
waves that bear a fecundating illumination to the worlds that gravitate
round him; we have appreciated the distance that separates the Sun from the
Earth, the third of the planets retained within his domain, or at least I trust
that the comparisons of the times required by certain moving objects to
traverse this distance have enabled us to conceive it.
We said that the four planets nearest to the Sun are Mercury, at a
distance of 57 million kilometers (35,000,000 miles); Venus, at 108 million
(67,000,000 miles); the Earth, at 149 million (93,000,000 miles); and Mars
at 226 million (140,000,000 miles). Let us begin our planetary journey with
these four stations.
MERCURY
A little above the Sun one sometimes sees, now in the West, in the
lingering shimmer of the twilight, now in the East, when the tender roseate
dawn announces the advent of a clear day, a small star of the first
magnitude which remains but a very short time above the horizon, and then
plunges back into the flaming sun. This is Mercury, the agile and active
messenger of Olympus, the god of eloquence, of medicine, of commerce,
and of thieves. One only sees him furtively, from time to time, at the
periods of his greatest elongations, either after the setting or before the
Page 98
rising of the radiant orb, when he presents the aspect of a somewhat reddish
star.
This planet, like the others, shines only by the reflection of the Sun
whose illumination he receives, and as he is in close juxtaposition with it,
his light is bright enough, though his volume is inconsiderable. He is
smaller than the Earth. His revolution round the Sun being accomplished in
about three months, he passes rapidly, in a month and a half, from one side
to the other of the orb of day, and is alternately a morning and an evening
star. The ancients originally regarded it as two separate planets; but with
attentive observation, they soon perceived its identity. In our somewhat
foggy climates, it can only be discovered once or twice a year, and then
only by looking for it according to the indications given in the astronomic
almanacs.
Fig. 32.—Orbits of the four Planets nearest to the Sun.
star.
This planet, like the others, shines only by the reflection of the Sun
whose illumination he receives, and as he is in close juxtaposition with it,
his light is bright enough, though his volume is inconsiderable. He is
smaller than the Earth. His revolution round the Sun being accomplished in
about three months, he passes rapidly, in a month and a half, from one side
to the other of the orb of day, and is alternately a morning and an evening
star. The ancients originally regarded it as two separate planets; but with
attentive observation, they soon perceived its identity. In our somewhat
foggy climates, it can only be discovered once or twice a year, and then
only by looking for it according to the indications given in the astronomic
almanacs.
Fig. 32.—Orbits of the four Planets nearest to the Sun.
Page 99
Mercury courses round the Sun at a distance of 57,000,000 kilometers
(35,000,000 miles), and accomplishes his revolution in 87 days, 23 hours,
15 minutes; i.e., 2 months, 27 days, 23 hours, or a little less than three of
our months. If the conditions of life are the same there as here, the existence
of the Mercurians must be four times as short as our own. A youth of
twenty, awaking to the promise of the life he is just beginning in this world,
is an octogenarian in Mercury. There the fair sex would indeed be justified
in bewailing the transitory nature of life, and might regret the years that
pass too quickly away. Perhaps, however, they are more philosophic than
with us.
Fig. 33.—Orbits of the four Planets farthest from the Sun.
The orbit of Mercury, which of course is within that of the Earth, is not
circular, but elliptical, and very eccentric, so elongated that at certain times
of the year this planet is extremely remote from the solar focus, and
(35,000,000 miles), and accomplishes his revolution in 87 days, 23 hours,
15 minutes; i.e., 2 months, 27 days, 23 hours, or a little less than three of
our months. If the conditions of life are the same there as here, the existence
of the Mercurians must be four times as short as our own. A youth of
twenty, awaking to the promise of the life he is just beginning in this world,
is an octogenarian in Mercury. There the fair sex would indeed be justified
in bewailing the transitory nature of life, and might regret the years that
pass too quickly away. Perhaps, however, they are more philosophic than
with us.
Fig. 33.—Orbits of the four Planets farthest from the Sun.
The orbit of Mercury, which of course is within that of the Earth, is not
circular, but elliptical, and very eccentric, so elongated that at certain times
of the year this planet is extremely remote from the solar focus, and
Page 100
receives only half as much heat and light as at the opposite period; and, in
consequence, his distance from the Earth varies considerably.
This globe exhibits
phases, discovered in
the seventeenth century
by Galileo, which
recall those of the
Moon. They are due to
the motions of the
planet round the Sun,
and are invisible to the
unaided eye, but with
even a small
instrument, one can
follow the gradations
and study Mercury
under every aspect.
Sometimes, again, he
passes exactly in front Fig. 34.—Mercury near quadrature.
of the Sun, and his disk
is projected like a black point upon the luminous surface of the flaming orb.
This occurred, notably, on May 10, 1891, and November 10, 1894; and the
phenomenon will recur on November 12, 1907, and November 6, 1914.
Mercury is the least of all the worlds in our system (with the exception
of the cosmic fragments that circulate between the orbit of Mars and that of
Jupiter). His volume equals only 5/100 that of the Earth. His diameter, in
comparison with that of our planet, is in the ratio of 373 to 1,000 (a little
more than 1⁄3) and measures 4,750 kilometers (2,946 miles). His density is
the highest of all the worlds in the great solar family, and exceeds that of
our Earth by about 1⁄3; but weight there is less by almost 1⁄2.
consequence, his distance from the Earth varies considerably.
This globe exhibits
phases, discovered in
the seventeenth century
by Galileo, which
recall those of the
Moon. They are due to
the motions of the
planet round the Sun,
and are invisible to the
unaided eye, but with
even a small
instrument, one can
follow the gradations
and study Mercury
under every aspect.
Sometimes, again, he
passes exactly in front Fig. 34.—Mercury near quadrature.
of the Sun, and his disk
is projected like a black point upon the luminous surface of the flaming orb.
This occurred, notably, on May 10, 1891, and November 10, 1894; and the
phenomenon will recur on November 12, 1907, and November 6, 1914.
Mercury is the least of all the worlds in our system (with the exception
of the cosmic fragments that circulate between the orbit of Mars and that of
Jupiter). His volume equals only 5/100 that of the Earth. His diameter, in
comparison with that of our planet, is in the ratio of 373 to 1,000 (a little
more than 1⁄3) and measures 4,750 kilometers (2,946 miles). His density is
the highest of all the worlds in the great solar family, and exceeds that of
our Earth by about 1⁄3; but weight there is less by almost 1⁄2.
Page 101
Mercury is enveloped in a very dense, thick atmosphere, which
doubtless sensibly tempers the solar heat, for the Sun exhibits to the
Mercurians a luminous disk about seven times more extensive than that
with which we are familiar on the Earth, and when Mercury is at perihelion
(that is, nearest to the Sun), his inhabitants receive ten times more light and
heat than we obtain at midsummer. In all probability, it would be impossible
for us to set foot on this planet without being shattered by a sunstroke.
Yet we may well imagine that Nature's fecundity can have engendered
beings there of an organization different from our own, adapted to an
existence in the proximity of fire. What magnificent landscapes may there
be adorned with the luxuriant vegetation that develops rapidly under an
ardent and generous sun?
doubtless sensibly tempers the solar heat, for the Sun exhibits to the
Mercurians a luminous disk about seven times more extensive than that
with which we are familiar on the Earth, and when Mercury is at perihelion
(that is, nearest to the Sun), his inhabitants receive ten times more light and
heat than we obtain at midsummer. In all probability, it would be impossible
for us to set foot on this planet without being shattered by a sunstroke.
Yet we may well imagine that Nature's fecundity can have engendered
beings there of an organization different from our own, adapted to an
existence in the proximity of fire. What magnificent landscapes may there
be adorned with the luxuriant vegetation that develops rapidly under an
ardent and generous sun?
Page 102
Fig. 35.—The Earth viewed from Mercury.
Observations of Mercury are taken under great difficulties, just because
of the immediate proximity of the solar furnace; yet some have detected
patches that might be seas. In any case, these observations are contradictory
and uncertain.
Up to the present it has been impossible to determine the duration of the
rotation. Some astronomers even think that the Sun's close proximity must
have produced strong tides, that would, as it were, have immobilized the
Observations of Mercury are taken under great difficulties, just because
of the immediate proximity of the solar furnace; yet some have detected
patches that might be seas. In any case, these observations are contradictory
and uncertain.
Up to the present it has been impossible to determine the duration of the
rotation. Some astronomers even think that the Sun's close proximity must
have produced strong tides, that would, as it were, have immobilized the
Page 103
globe of Mercury, just as the Earth has immobilized the Moon, forcing it
perpetually to present the same side to the Sun. From the point of view of
habitation, this situation would be somewhat peculiar; perpetual day upon
the illumined half, perpetual night upon the other hemisphere, and a fairly
large zone of twilight between the two. Such a condition would indeed be
different from the succession of terrestrial days and nights.
As seen from Mercury, the Earth we inhabit would shine out in the starry
sky[9] as a magnificent orb of first magnitude, with the Moon alongside, a
faithful little companion. They should form a fine double star, the Earth
being a brilliant orb of first magnitude, and the Moon of third, a charming
couple, and admired doubtless as an enchanted and privileged abode.
It is at midnight during the oppositions of the Earth with the Sun that our
planet is the most beautiful and brilliant, as is Jupiter for ourselves. The
constellations are the same, viewed from Mercury or from the Earth.
But is this little solar planet inhabited? We do not yet know. We can only
reply: why not?
VENUS
When the sunset atmosphere is crimson with the glorious rays of the
King of Orbs, and all Nature assumes the brooding veil of twilight, the most
indifferent eyes are often attracted and captivated by the presence of a star
that is almost dazzling, and illuminates with its white and limpid light the
heavens darkened by the disappearance of the God of Day.
Hail, Venus, Queen of the Heavens! the "Shepherd's Star," gentle mother
of the loves, goddess of beauty, eternally adored and cherished, sung and
immortalized upon Earth, by poets and artists. Her splendid brilliancy
attracted notice from earliest antiquity, and we find her, radiant and
charming, in the works of the ancients, who erected altars to her and
adorned their poetry with her grace and beauty. Homer calls her Callisto the
Beautiful; Cicero names her Vesper, the evening star, and Lucifer, the star
perpetually to present the same side to the Sun. From the point of view of
habitation, this situation would be somewhat peculiar; perpetual day upon
the illumined half, perpetual night upon the other hemisphere, and a fairly
large zone of twilight between the two. Such a condition would indeed be
different from the succession of terrestrial days and nights.
As seen from Mercury, the Earth we inhabit would shine out in the starry
sky[9] as a magnificent orb of first magnitude, with the Moon alongside, a
faithful little companion. They should form a fine double star, the Earth
being a brilliant orb of first magnitude, and the Moon of third, a charming
couple, and admired doubtless as an enchanted and privileged abode.
It is at midnight during the oppositions of the Earth with the Sun that our
planet is the most beautiful and brilliant, as is Jupiter for ourselves. The
constellations are the same, viewed from Mercury or from the Earth.
But is this little solar planet inhabited? We do not yet know. We can only
reply: why not?
VENUS
When the sunset atmosphere is crimson with the glorious rays of the
King of Orbs, and all Nature assumes the brooding veil of twilight, the most
indifferent eyes are often attracted and captivated by the presence of a star
that is almost dazzling, and illuminates with its white and limpid light the
heavens darkened by the disappearance of the God of Day.
Hail, Venus, Queen of the Heavens! the "Shepherd's Star," gentle mother
of the loves, goddess of beauty, eternally adored and cherished, sung and
immortalized upon Earth, by poets and artists. Her splendid brilliancy
attracted notice from earliest antiquity, and we find her, radiant and
charming, in the works of the ancients, who erected altars to her and
adorned their poetry with her grace and beauty. Homer calls her Callisto the
Beautiful; Cicero names her Vesper, the evening star, and Lucifer, the star
Page 104
of the morning—for it was with this divinity as with Mercury. For a long
while she was regarded as two separate planets, and it was only when it
came to be observed that the evening and the morning star were always in
periodic succession, that the identity of the orb was recognized.
Her radiant splendor created her mythological personality, just as the
agility of Mercury created that of the messenger of the gods.
We do not see her aerial chariot in the Heavens drawn by a flight of
doves with white and fluttering wings, but we follow the lustrous orb led on
through space by solar attraction. And in the beautiful evenings when she is
at her greatest distance from our Sun, the whole world admires this white
and dazzling Venus reigning as sovereign over our twilight[10] for hours
after sunset, and in addition to the savants who are practically occupied
with astronomy, millions of eyes are raised to this celestial splendor, and for
a moment millions of human beings feel some curiosity about the mysteries
of the Infinite. The brutalities of daily life would fain petrify our dreams,
but thought is not yet stifled to the point of checking all aspirations after
eternal truth, and when we gaze at the starry sky it is hard not to ask
ourselves the nature of those other worlds, and the place occupied by our
own planet in the vast concert of sidereal harmony.
while she was regarded as two separate planets, and it was only when it
came to be observed that the evening and the morning star were always in
periodic succession, that the identity of the orb was recognized.
Her radiant splendor created her mythological personality, just as the
agility of Mercury created that of the messenger of the gods.
We do not see her aerial chariot in the Heavens drawn by a flight of
doves with white and fluttering wings, but we follow the lustrous orb led on
through space by solar attraction. And in the beautiful evenings when she is
at her greatest distance from our Sun, the whole world admires this white
and dazzling Venus reigning as sovereign over our twilight[10] for hours
after sunset, and in addition to the savants who are practically occupied
with astronomy, millions of eyes are raised to this celestial splendor, and for
a moment millions of human beings feel some curiosity about the mysteries
of the Infinite. The brutalities of daily life would fain petrify our dreams,
but thought is not yet stifled to the point of checking all aspirations after
eternal truth, and when we gaze at the starry sky it is hard not to ask
ourselves the nature of those other worlds, and the place occupied by our
own planet in the vast concert of sidereal harmony.
Page 105
Fig. 36.—The Evening Star.
Even through a small telescope, Venus offers remarkable phases.
Even through a small telescope, Venus offers remarkable phases.
Page 106
Fig. 37.—Successive phases of Venus.
Fig. 37 gives some notion of the succession of these, and of the planet's
variations in magnitude during its journey round the Sun. Imagine it to be
rotating in a year of 224 days, 16 hours, 49 minutes, 8 seconds at a distance
of 108 million kilometers (67,000,000 miles), the Earth being at 149 million
kilometers (93,000,000 miles). Like Mercury, at certain periods it passes
between the Sun and ourselves, and as its illuminated hemisphere is of
course turned toward the orb of day, we at those times perceive only a sharp
and very luminous crescent. At such periods Venus is entirely, so to say,
against the Sun, and presents to us her greatest apparent dimension (Fig.
38). Sometimes, again, like Mercury, she passes immediately in front of the
Sun, forming a perfectly round black spot; this happened on December 8,
1874, and December 6, 1882; and will recur on June 7, 2004, and June 5,
2012. These transits have been utilized in celestial geometry in measuring
the distance of the Sun.
You will readily divine that the distance of Venus varies considerably
according to her position in relation to the Earth: when she is between the
Sun and ourselves she is nearest to our world; but it is just at those times
that we see least of her surface, because she exhibits to us only a slender
crescent. Terrestrial astronomers are accordingly very badly placed for the
study of her physical constitution. The best observations can be made when
she is situated to right or left of the Sun, and shows us about half her
Fig. 37 gives some notion of the succession of these, and of the planet's
variations in magnitude during its journey round the Sun. Imagine it to be
rotating in a year of 224 days, 16 hours, 49 minutes, 8 seconds at a distance
of 108 million kilometers (67,000,000 miles), the Earth being at 149 million
kilometers (93,000,000 miles). Like Mercury, at certain periods it passes
between the Sun and ourselves, and as its illuminated hemisphere is of
course turned toward the orb of day, we at those times perceive only a sharp
and very luminous crescent. At such periods Venus is entirely, so to say,
against the Sun, and presents to us her greatest apparent dimension (Fig.
38). Sometimes, again, like Mercury, she passes immediately in front of the
Sun, forming a perfectly round black spot; this happened on December 8,
1874, and December 6, 1882; and will recur on June 7, 2004, and June 5,
2012. These transits have been utilized in celestial geometry in measuring
the distance of the Sun.
You will readily divine that the distance of Venus varies considerably
according to her position in relation to the Earth: when she is between the
Sun and ourselves she is nearest to our world; but it is just at those times
that we see least of her surface, because she exhibits to us only a slender
crescent. Terrestrial astronomers are accordingly very badly placed for the
study of her physical constitution. The best observations can be made when
she is situated to right or left of the Sun, and shows us about half her
Page 107
illuminated disk—during the day for choice, because at night there is too
much irradiation from her dazzling light.
These phases were discovered by Galileo, in 1610. His observations
were among the first that confirmed the veracity of the system of
Copernicus, affording an evident example of the movement of the planets
round the sun. They are often visible to the unaided eye with good sight,
either at dusk, or through light clouds.
Venus, surrounded
by a highly dense and
rarefied atmosphere,
which increases the
difficulties of
observing her surface,
might be called the
twin sister of the Earth,
so similar are the
dimensions of the two
worlds. But, strange as
it may seem to the
many admirers, who
are ready to hail in her
an abode of joy and
happiness, it is most
Fig. 38.—Venus at greatest brilliancy. probable that this
planet, attractive as she
is at a distance, would be a less desirable habitation than our floating island.
In fact, the atmosphere of Venus is perpetually covered with cloud, so that
the weather there must be always foggy. No definite geographical
configuration can be discovered on her, despite the hopes of the eighteenth-
century astronomers. We are not even sure that she rotates upon herself, so
contradictory are the observations, and so hard is it to distinguish anything
clearly upon her surface. A single night of observation suffices to show the
much irradiation from her dazzling light.
These phases were discovered by Galileo, in 1610. His observations
were among the first that confirmed the veracity of the system of
Copernicus, affording an evident example of the movement of the planets
round the sun. They are often visible to the unaided eye with good sight,
either at dusk, or through light clouds.
Venus, surrounded
by a highly dense and
rarefied atmosphere,
which increases the
difficulties of
observing her surface,
might be called the
twin sister of the Earth,
so similar are the
dimensions of the two
worlds. But, strange as
it may seem to the
many admirers, who
are ready to hail in her
an abode of joy and
happiness, it is most
Fig. 38.—Venus at greatest brilliancy. probable that this
planet, attractive as she
is at a distance, would be a less desirable habitation than our floating island.
In fact, the atmosphere of Venus is perpetually covered with cloud, so that
the weather there must be always foggy. No definite geographical
configuration can be discovered on her, despite the hopes of the eighteenth-
century astronomers. We are not even sure that she rotates upon herself, so
contradictory are the observations, and so hard is it to distinguish anything
clearly upon her surface. A single night of observation suffices to show the
Page 108
rotation of Mars or of Jupiter; but the beautiful Evening Star remains
obstinately veiled from our curiosity.
Several astronomers, and not the least considerable, think that the tides
produced by the Sun upon her seas, or globe in its state of pristine fluidity,
must have been strong enough to seize and fix her, as the Earth did for the
Moon, thus obliging her to present always the same face to the Sun. Certain
telescopic observations would even seem to confirm this theoretical
deduction from the calculations of celestial mechanics.
The author ventures to disagree with this opinion, its apparent
probability notwithstanding, because he has invariably received a contrary
impression from all his telescopic observations. He has quite recently
(spring of 1903) repeated these observations. Choosing a remarkably clear
and perfectly calm atmosphere, he examined the splendid planet several
times with great attention in the field of the telescope. The right or eastern
border (reversed image) was dulled by the atmosphere of Venus; this is the
line of separation between day and night. Beneath, at the extreme northern
edge, he was attracted on each occasion by a small white patch, a little
whiter than the rest of the surface of the planet, surrounded by a light-gray
penumbra, giving the exact effect of a polar snow, very analogous to that
observed at the poles of Mars. To the author this white spot on the boreal
horn of Venus does not appear to be due to an effect of contrast, as has
sometimes been supposed.
Now, if the globe of Venus has poles, it must turn upon itself.
Unfortunately it has proved impossible to distinguish any sign upon the
disk, indicative of the direction and speed of its rotary movement, although
these observations were made, with others, under excellent conditions.—
Three o'clock in the afternoon, brilliant sun, sky clear blue, the planet but
little removed from the meridian—at which time it is less dazzling than in
the evening.
obstinately veiled from our curiosity.
Several astronomers, and not the least considerable, think that the tides
produced by the Sun upon her seas, or globe in its state of pristine fluidity,
must have been strong enough to seize and fix her, as the Earth did for the
Moon, thus obliging her to present always the same face to the Sun. Certain
telescopic observations would even seem to confirm this theoretical
deduction from the calculations of celestial mechanics.
The author ventures to disagree with this opinion, its apparent
probability notwithstanding, because he has invariably received a contrary
impression from all his telescopic observations. He has quite recently
(spring of 1903) repeated these observations. Choosing a remarkably clear
and perfectly calm atmosphere, he examined the splendid planet several
times with great attention in the field of the telescope. The right or eastern
border (reversed image) was dulled by the atmosphere of Venus; this is the
line of separation between day and night. Beneath, at the extreme northern
edge, he was attracted on each occasion by a small white patch, a little
whiter than the rest of the surface of the planet, surrounded by a light-gray
penumbra, giving the exact effect of a polar snow, very analogous to that
observed at the poles of Mars. To the author this white spot on the boreal
horn of Venus does not appear to be due to an effect of contrast, as has
sometimes been supposed.
Now, if the globe of Venus has poles, it must turn upon itself.
Unfortunately it has proved impossible to distinguish any sign upon the
disk, indicative of the direction and speed of its rotary movement, although
these observations were made, with others, under excellent conditions.—
Three o'clock in the afternoon, brilliant sun, sky clear blue, the planet but
little removed from the meridian—at which time it is less dazzling than in
the evening.
Page 109
There is merely the impression; but it is so definite as to prevent the
author from adopting the new hypothesis, in virtue of which the planet, as it
gravitates round the Sun, presents always the same hemisphere.
If this hypothesis were a reality, Venus would certainly be a very
peculiar world. Eternal day on the one side; eternal night on the other.
Maximum light and heat at the center of the hemisphere perpetually turned
to the Sun; maximum cold and center of night at the antipodes. This icy
hemisphere would possibly be uninhabitable, but the resources of Nature
are so prodigious, and the law of Life is so imperious, so persistent, under
the most disadvantageous and deplorable terrestrial conditions, that it would
be transcending our rights to declare an impossibility of existence, even in
this eternal night. The currents of the atmosphere would no doubt suffice to
set up perpetual changes of temperature between the two hemispheres, in
comparison with which our trade-winds would be the lightest of breezes.
Yes, mystery still reigns upon this adjacent earth, and the most powerful
instruments of the observatories of the whole world have been unable to
solve it. All we know is that the diameter, surface, volume and mass of this
planet, and its weight at the surface, do not differ sensibly from those that
characterize our own globe: that this planet is sister to our own, and of the
same order, hence probably formed of the same elements. We further know
that, as seen from Venus (Fig. 39), the Earth on which we live is a
magnificent star, a double orb more brilliant even than when viewed from
Mercury. It is a dazzling orb of first magnitude, accompanied by its moon, a
star of the second and a half magnitude.
And thus the worlds float on in space, distant symbols of hopes not
realized on any one of them, all at different stages of their degree of
evolution, representing an ever-growing progress in the sequence of the
ages.
author from adopting the new hypothesis, in virtue of which the planet, as it
gravitates round the Sun, presents always the same hemisphere.
If this hypothesis were a reality, Venus would certainly be a very
peculiar world. Eternal day on the one side; eternal night on the other.
Maximum light and heat at the center of the hemisphere perpetually turned
to the Sun; maximum cold and center of night at the antipodes. This icy
hemisphere would possibly be uninhabitable, but the resources of Nature
are so prodigious, and the law of Life is so imperious, so persistent, under
the most disadvantageous and deplorable terrestrial conditions, that it would
be transcending our rights to declare an impossibility of existence, even in
this eternal night. The currents of the atmosphere would no doubt suffice to
set up perpetual changes of temperature between the two hemispheres, in
comparison with which our trade-winds would be the lightest of breezes.
Yes, mystery still reigns upon this adjacent earth, and the most powerful
instruments of the observatories of the whole world have been unable to
solve it. All we know is that the diameter, surface, volume and mass of this
planet, and its weight at the surface, do not differ sensibly from those that
characterize our own globe: that this planet is sister to our own, and of the
same order, hence probably formed of the same elements. We further know
that, as seen from Venus (Fig. 39), the Earth on which we live is a
magnificent star, a double orb more brilliant even than when viewed from
Mercury. It is a dazzling orb of first magnitude, accompanied by its moon, a
star of the second and a half magnitude.
And thus the worlds float on in space, distant symbols of hopes not
realized on any one of them, all at different stages of their degree of
evolution, representing an ever-growing progress in the sequence of the
ages.
Page 110
Fig. 39.—The Earth viewed from Venus.
When we contemplate this radiant Venus, it is difficult, even if we can
not form any definite idea as to her actual state as regards habitation, to
assume that she must be a dreary desert, and not, on the contrary, to hail in
her a celestial land, differing more or less from our own dwelling-place,
travailing with her sisters in the accomplishment of the general plan of
Nature.
Such are the characteristic features of our celestial neighbor. In quitting
her, we reach the Earth, which comes immediately next her in order of
When we contemplate this radiant Venus, it is difficult, even if we can
not form any definite idea as to her actual state as regards habitation, to
assume that she must be a dreary desert, and not, on the contrary, to hail in
her a celestial land, differing more or less from our own dwelling-place,
travailing with her sisters in the accomplishment of the general plan of
Nature.
Such are the characteristic features of our celestial neighbor. In quitting
her, we reach the Earth, which comes immediately next her in order of
Page 111
distance, 149 million kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from the Sun, but as we
shall devote an entire chapter to our own planet, we will not halt at this
point, but cross in one step the distance that separates Mars from Venus.
Let us only remark in passing, that our planet is the largest of the four
spheres adjacent to the Sun. Here are their comparative diameters:
The Earth = 1. In Kilometers. In Miles.
Mercury 0.373 4,750 2,946
Venus 0.999 12,730 7,894
Earth 1.000 12,742 7,926
Mars 0.528 6,728 4,172
It will be seen that Venus is almost identical with the Earth.
MARS
Two hundred and twenty-six millions of kilometers (140,000,000 miles)
from the Sun is the planet Mars, gravitating in an orbit exterior to that
which the Earth takes annually round the same center.
Unfortunate Mars! What evil fairy presided at his birth? From antiquity,
all curses seem to have fallen upon him. He is the god of war and of
carnage, the protector of armies, the inspirer of hatred among the peoples, it
is he who pours out the blood of Humanity in international hecatombs.
Here, again, as in the case of Mercury and Venus, the appearance has
originated the idea. Mars, in fact, burns like a drop of blood in the depths of
the firmament, and it is this ruddy color that inspired its name and
attributes, just as the dazzling whiteness of Venus made her the goddess of
love and beauty. Why, indeed, should the origins of mythology be sought
elsewhere than in astronomy?
While Humanity was attributing to the presumptive influence of Mars
the defects inherent in its own terrestrial nature, this world, unwitting of our
sorrows, pursued the celestial path marked out for it in space by destiny.
shall devote an entire chapter to our own planet, we will not halt at this
point, but cross in one step the distance that separates Mars from Venus.
Let us only remark in passing, that our planet is the largest of the four
spheres adjacent to the Sun. Here are their comparative diameters:
The Earth = 1. In Kilometers. In Miles.
Mercury 0.373 4,750 2,946
Venus 0.999 12,730 7,894
Earth 1.000 12,742 7,926
Mars 0.528 6,728 4,172
It will be seen that Venus is almost identical with the Earth.
MARS
Two hundred and twenty-six millions of kilometers (140,000,000 miles)
from the Sun is the planet Mars, gravitating in an orbit exterior to that
which the Earth takes annually round the same center.
Unfortunate Mars! What evil fairy presided at his birth? From antiquity,
all curses seem to have fallen upon him. He is the god of war and of
carnage, the protector of armies, the inspirer of hatred among the peoples, it
is he who pours out the blood of Humanity in international hecatombs.
Here, again, as in the case of Mercury and Venus, the appearance has
originated the idea. Mars, in fact, burns like a drop of blood in the depths of
the firmament, and it is this ruddy color that inspired its name and
attributes, just as the dazzling whiteness of Venus made her the goddess of
love and beauty. Why, indeed, should the origins of mythology be sought
elsewhere than in astronomy?
While Humanity was attributing to the presumptive influence of Mars
the defects inherent in its own terrestrial nature, this world, unwitting of our
sorrows, pursued the celestial path marked out for it in space by destiny.
Page 112
This planet is, as we have said, the first encountered after the Earth. Its
orbit is very elongated, very eccentric. Mars accomplishes it in a period of 1
year, 321 days, 22 hours, i.e., 1 year, 10 months, 21 days, or 687 days. The
velocity of its transit is 23 kilometers (14.5 miles) per second; that of the
Earth is 30 (19 miles). Our planet, traveling through space at an average
distance of 149 million kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from the central
focus, is separated from Mars by an average distance of 76 million
kilometers (47,000,000 miles); but as its orbit is equally elliptic and
elongated it follows that at certain epochs the two planets approach one
another by something less than 60 million kilometers (37,000,000 miles).
These are the periods selected for making the best observations upon our
neighbor of the ruddy rays. The oppositions of Mars arrive about every
twenty-six months, but the periods of its greatest proximity, when this
planet approaches to within 56 million kilometers (34,700,000 miles) of the
Earth, occur only every fifteen years.
Mars is then passing perihelion, while our world is at aphelion (or
greatest distance from the Sun). At such epochs this globe presents to us an
apparent diameter 63 times smaller than that of the Moon, i.e., a telescope
that magnifies 63 times would show him to us of the same magnitude as our
satellite viewed with the unaided eye, and an instrument that magnified 630
times would show him ten times larger in diameter.
In dimensions he differs considerably from our world, being almost half
the size of the Earth. In diameter he measures only 6,728 kilometers (4,172
miles), and his circumference is 21,125 kilometers (13,000 miles). His
surface is only 29⁄100 of the terrestrial surface, and his volume only 15⁄100 of
our own.
This difference in volume causes Mars to be an earth in miniature. When
we study his aspects, his geography, his meteorology, we seem to see in
space a reduction of our own abode, with certain dissimilarities that excite
our curiosity, and make him even more interesting to us.
orbit is very elongated, very eccentric. Mars accomplishes it in a period of 1
year, 321 days, 22 hours, i.e., 1 year, 10 months, 21 days, or 687 days. The
velocity of its transit is 23 kilometers (14.5 miles) per second; that of the
Earth is 30 (19 miles). Our planet, traveling through space at an average
distance of 149 million kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from the central
focus, is separated from Mars by an average distance of 76 million
kilometers (47,000,000 miles); but as its orbit is equally elliptic and
elongated it follows that at certain epochs the two planets approach one
another by something less than 60 million kilometers (37,000,000 miles).
These are the periods selected for making the best observations upon our
neighbor of the ruddy rays. The oppositions of Mars arrive about every
twenty-six months, but the periods of its greatest proximity, when this
planet approaches to within 56 million kilometers (34,700,000 miles) of the
Earth, occur only every fifteen years.
Mars is then passing perihelion, while our world is at aphelion (or
greatest distance from the Sun). At such epochs this globe presents to us an
apparent diameter 63 times smaller than that of the Moon, i.e., a telescope
that magnifies 63 times would show him to us of the same magnitude as our
satellite viewed with the unaided eye, and an instrument that magnified 630
times would show him ten times larger in diameter.
In dimensions he differs considerably from our world, being almost half
the size of the Earth. In diameter he measures only 6,728 kilometers (4,172
miles), and his circumference is 21,125 kilometers (13,000 miles). His
surface is only 29⁄100 of the terrestrial surface, and his volume only 15⁄100 of
our own.
This difference in volume causes Mars to be an earth in miniature. When
we study his aspects, his geography, his meteorology, we seem to see in
space a reduction of our own abode, with certain dissimilarities that excite
our curiosity, and make him even more interesting to us.
Page 113
The Martian world weighs nine times and a half less than our own. If we
represent the weight of the Earth by 1,000, that of Mars would be
represented by 105. His density is much less than our own; it is only 7⁄10
that of the Earth. A man weighing 70 kilograms, transported to the adjacent
globe, would weigh only 26 kilograms.
The earliest telescopic observations revealed the existence of more or
less accentuated markings upon the surface of Mars. The progress of optics,
admitting of greater magnifications, exhibited the form of these patches
more clearly, while the study of their motions enabled the astronomers to
determine with remarkable precision the diurnal rotation of this planet. It
occurs in 24 hours, 37 minutes, 23.65 seconds. Day and night are
accordingly a little longer on Mars than on the Earth, but the difference is
obviously inconsiderable. The year of Mars consists of 668 Martian days.
The inclination of the axis of rotation of this globe upon the plane of its
orbit is much the same as our own. In consequence, its seasons are
analogous to ours in intensity, while twice the length, the Martian year
being almost equal to two of our years. The intensity of the seasons is
indeed more accentuated than upon the Earth, since the orbit of Mars is
very elongated. But there, as here, are three quite distinct zones: the torrid,
the temperate, and the glacial.
By means of the telescope we can follow the variations of the Martian
seasons, especially in what concerns the polar snows, which regularly
aggregate during the winter, and melt no less regularly during the heat of
the summer. These snows are very easily observed, and stand out clearly
with dazzling whiteness. The reader can judge of them by the
accompanying figure, which sums up the author's observations during one
of the recent oppositions of Mars (1900–1901). The size of the polar cap
diminished from 4,680 kilometers to 840. The solstice of the Martian
summer was on April 11th. The snows were still melting on July 6th.
Sometimes they disappear almost entirely during the Martian month that
corresponds to our month of August, as never happens with our polar ice.
represent the weight of the Earth by 1,000, that of Mars would be
represented by 105. His density is much less than our own; it is only 7⁄10
that of the Earth. A man weighing 70 kilograms, transported to the adjacent
globe, would weigh only 26 kilograms.
The earliest telescopic observations revealed the existence of more or
less accentuated markings upon the surface of Mars. The progress of optics,
admitting of greater magnifications, exhibited the form of these patches
more clearly, while the study of their motions enabled the astronomers to
determine with remarkable precision the diurnal rotation of this planet. It
occurs in 24 hours, 37 minutes, 23.65 seconds. Day and night are
accordingly a little longer on Mars than on the Earth, but the difference is
obviously inconsiderable. The year of Mars consists of 668 Martian days.
The inclination of the axis of rotation of this globe upon the plane of its
orbit is much the same as our own. In consequence, its seasons are
analogous to ours in intensity, while twice the length, the Martian year
being almost equal to two of our years. The intensity of the seasons is
indeed more accentuated than upon the Earth, since the orbit of Mars is
very elongated. But there, as here, are three quite distinct zones: the torrid,
the temperate, and the glacial.
By means of the telescope we can follow the variations of the Martian
seasons, especially in what concerns the polar snows, which regularly
aggregate during the winter, and melt no less regularly during the heat of
the summer. These snows are very easily observed, and stand out clearly
with dazzling whiteness. The reader can judge of them by the
accompanying figure, which sums up the author's observations during one
of the recent oppositions of Mars (1900–1901). The size of the polar cap
diminished from 4,680 kilometers to 840. The solstice of the Martian
summer was on April 11th. The snows were still melting on July 6th.
Sometimes they disappear almost entirely during the Martian month that
corresponds to our month of August, as never happens with our polar ice.
Page 114
Hence, though this planet is farther away from the Sun than ourselves, it
does not appear to be colder, or, at any rate, it is certain that the polar snows
are much less thick.
On the other hand, there are hardly ever clouds on Mars; the Martian
atmosphere is almost always limpid, and one can say that fine weather is
the chronic state of the planet. At times, light fogs or a little vapor will
appear in certain regions, but they are soon dissipated, and the sky clears up
again.
Since the invention of the telescope, a considerable number of drawings
have been made, depicting Mars under every aspect, and the agreement
between these numerous observations gives us a sufficient acquaintance
with the planet to admit of our indicating the characteristic features of its
geography, and of drawing out areographic maps (Ares, Mars). Its
appearance can be judged of from the two drawings here reproduced, as
made (February, 1901) at the Observatory of Juvisy, and from the general
chart drawn from the total sum of observations (Figs. 41, 42 and 43).
It will be seen at the first glance that the geography of Mars is very
different from that of our own globe: while three-quarters of the Earth are
covered with the liquid element, Mars seems to be more evenly divided,
and must indeed have rather more land than water. We find no immense
oceans surrounding the continents, and separating them like islands; on the
contrary, the seas are reduced to long gulfs compressed between the shores,
like the Mediterranean for example, nor is it even certain that these gray
spots do all represent true seas. It has been agreed to term sea the parts that
are lightly tinged with green, and to give the name of continent to the spots
colored yellow. That is the hue of the Martian soil, due either to the soil
itself, which would resemble that of the Sahara, or, to take a less arid
region, that seen on the line between Marseilles and Nice, in the vicinity of
the Esterels; or perhaps to some peculiar vegetation. During ascents in a
balloon, the author has often remarked that the hue of the ripe corn, with the
does not appear to be colder, or, at any rate, it is certain that the polar snows
are much less thick.
On the other hand, there are hardly ever clouds on Mars; the Martian
atmosphere is almost always limpid, and one can say that fine weather is
the chronic state of the planet. At times, light fogs or a little vapor will
appear in certain regions, but they are soon dissipated, and the sky clears up
again.
Since the invention of the telescope, a considerable number of drawings
have been made, depicting Mars under every aspect, and the agreement
between these numerous observations gives us a sufficient acquaintance
with the planet to admit of our indicating the characteristic features of its
geography, and of drawing out areographic maps (Ares, Mars). Its
appearance can be judged of from the two drawings here reproduced, as
made (February, 1901) at the Observatory of Juvisy, and from the general
chart drawn from the total sum of observations (Figs. 41, 42 and 43).
It will be seen at the first glance that the geography of Mars is very
different from that of our own globe: while three-quarters of the Earth are
covered with the liquid element, Mars seems to be more evenly divided,
and must indeed have rather more land than water. We find no immense
oceans surrounding the continents, and separating them like islands; on the
contrary, the seas are reduced to long gulfs compressed between the shores,
like the Mediterranean for example, nor is it even certain that these gray
spots do all represent true seas. It has been agreed to term sea the parts that
are lightly tinged with green, and to give the name of continent to the spots
colored yellow. That is the hue of the Martian soil, due either to the soil
itself, which would resemble that of the Sahara, or, to take a less arid
region, that seen on the line between Marseilles and Nice, in the vicinity of
the Esterels; or perhaps to some peculiar vegetation. During ascents in a
balloon, the author has often remarked that the hue of the ripe corn, with the
Page 115
Sun shining on it, is precisely that
presented to us by the continents of
Mars in the best hours for
observation.
As to the "seas," it is pretty
certain that there must be water, or
some kind of liquid, deriving above
all from the melting of the polar
snows in spring and summer; but it
may possibly be in conjunction with
some vegetation, aquatic plants, or
perhaps vast meadows, which
appear to us from here to be the
more considerable in proportion as
the water that nourishes them has
been more abundant.
Mars, like our globe, is
surrounded with a protective
atmosphere, which retains the rays
of the Sun, and must preserve a
medium temperature favorable to
the conservation of life upon the
surface of the planet. But the
circulation of the water, so
important to terrestrial life, whether
animal or vegetable, which is
effected upon our planet by the
evaporation of the seas, clouds,
winds, rains, wells, rivers and
streams, comes about quite
differently on Mars; for, as was
remarked above, it is rarely that any
presented to us by the continents of
Mars in the best hours for
observation.
As to the "seas," it is pretty
certain that there must be water, or
some kind of liquid, deriving above
all from the melting of the polar
snows in spring and summer; but it
may possibly be in conjunction with
some vegetation, aquatic plants, or
perhaps vast meadows, which
appear to us from here to be the
more considerable in proportion as
the water that nourishes them has
been more abundant.
Mars, like our globe, is
surrounded with a protective
atmosphere, which retains the rays
of the Sun, and must preserve a
medium temperature favorable to
the conservation of life upon the
surface of the planet. But the
circulation of the water, so
important to terrestrial life, whether
animal or vegetable, which is
effected upon our planet by the
evaporation of the seas, clouds,
winds, rains, wells, rivers and
streams, comes about quite
differently on Mars; for, as was
remarked above, it is rarely that any
Page 116
clouds are observed there. Instead
of being vertical, as here, this
circulation is horizontal: the water
coming from the source of the polar
snows finds its way into the canals
and seas, and returns to be
condensed at the poles by a light
drift of invisible vapors directed
from the equator to the poles. There
is never any rain.
We have spoken of canals. One
of the great puzzles of the Martian
world is incontestably the
appearance of straight lines that
furrow its surface in all directions,
and seem to connect the seas. M.
Schiaparelli, the distinguished
Director of the Observatory of
Milan, who discovered them in
1877, called them canals, without,
however, postulating anything as to
their real nature. Are they indeed
canals? These straight lines,
measuring sometimes 600
kilometers (372 miles) in length,
and more than 100 kilometers (62
miles) in breadth, have much the
same hue as the seas on which they
open. For a quarter of a century
they have been surveyed by the
greater number of our observers.
But it must be confessed that, even
Fig. 40.—
of being vertical, as here, this
circulation is horizontal: the water
coming from the source of the polar
snows finds its way into the canals
and seas, and returns to be
condensed at the poles by a light
drift of invisible vapors directed
from the equator to the poles. There
is never any rain.
We have spoken of canals. One
of the great puzzles of the Martian
world is incontestably the
appearance of straight lines that
furrow its surface in all directions,
and seem to connect the seas. M.
Schiaparelli, the distinguished
Director of the Observatory of
Milan, who discovered them in
1877, called them canals, without,
however, postulating anything as to
their real nature. Are they indeed
canals? These straight lines,
measuring sometimes 600
kilometers (372 miles) in length,
and more than 100 kilometers (62
miles) in breadth, have much the
same hue as the seas on which they
open. For a quarter of a century
they have been surveyed by the
greater number of our observers.
But it must be confessed that, even
Fig. 40.—
Page 117
g. 0.
Diminution of the polar snows of Mars during the with the best instruments, we only
summer. approach Mars at a distance of
60,000 kilometers (37,200
miles), which is still a little
far off, and we may be sure
that we do not distinguish the
true details of the surface.[11]
These details at the limits of
visibility produce the
appearance of canals to our
eyes. They may possibly be
lines of lakes, or oases. The
future will no doubt clear up
this mystery for us.
Fig. 41.—Telescopic aspect of the planet Mars (Feb.,
1901).
Fig. 43.—Chart of Mars.
Diminution of the polar snows of Mars during the with the best instruments, we only
summer. approach Mars at a distance of
60,000 kilometers (37,200
miles), which is still a little
far off, and we may be sure
that we do not distinguish the
true details of the surface.[11]
These details at the limits of
visibility produce the
appearance of canals to our
eyes. They may possibly be
lines of lakes, or oases. The
future will no doubt clear up
this mystery for us.
Fig. 41.—Telescopic aspect of the planet Mars (Feb.,
1901).
Fig. 43.—Chart of Mars.
Page 118
As to the inhabitants of
Mars, this world is in a
situation as favorable as our
Earth for habitation, and it
would be difficult to discover
any reason for perpetual
sterility there. It appears to
us, on the contrary, by its
rapid and frequent variations
of aspect, to be a very living
world. Its atmosphere, which
is always clear, has not the
density of our own, and
resembles that of the highest
mountains. The conditions of Fig. 42.—Telescopic aspect of the planet Mars (Feb.,
existence there vary from 1901).
ours, and appear to be more
delicate, more ethereal.
There as here, day succeeds to night, spring softens the rigors of winter;
the seasons unfold, less disparate than our own, of which we have such
frequent reason to complain. The sky is perpetually clear. There are never
tempests, hurricanes, nor cyclones, the wind never gets up any force there,
on account of the rarity of the atmosphere, and the low intensity of weight.
Differing from ours, this world may well be a more congenial habitation.
It is more ancient than the Earth, smaller, less massive. It has run more
quickly through the phases of its evolution. Its astral life is more advanced,
and its Humanity should be superior to our own, just as our successors a
million years hence, for example, will be less coarse and barbarous than we
are at present: the law of progress governs all the worlds, and, moreover,
the physical constitution of the planet Mars is less dense than our own.
Mars, this world is in a
situation as favorable as our
Earth for habitation, and it
would be difficult to discover
any reason for perpetual
sterility there. It appears to
us, on the contrary, by its
rapid and frequent variations
of aspect, to be a very living
world. Its atmosphere, which
is always clear, has not the
density of our own, and
resembles that of the highest
mountains. The conditions of Fig. 42.—Telescopic aspect of the planet Mars (Feb.,
existence there vary from 1901).
ours, and appear to be more
delicate, more ethereal.
There as here, day succeeds to night, spring softens the rigors of winter;
the seasons unfold, less disparate than our own, of which we have such
frequent reason to complain. The sky is perpetually clear. There are never
tempests, hurricanes, nor cyclones, the wind never gets up any force there,
on account of the rarity of the atmosphere, and the low intensity of weight.
Differing from ours, this world may well be a more congenial habitation.
It is more ancient than the Earth, smaller, less massive. It has run more
quickly through the phases of its evolution. Its astral life is more advanced,
and its Humanity should be superior to our own, just as our successors a
million years hence, for example, will be less coarse and barbarous than we
are at present: the law of progress governs all the worlds, and, moreover,
the physical constitution of the planet Mars is less dense than our own.
Page 119
There is no need to despair of entering some day into communication
with these unknown beings. The luminous points that have been observed
are no signals, but high summits or light clouds illuminated by the rising or
setting sun. But the idea of communication with them in the future is no
more audacious and no less scientific than the invention of spectral
analysis, X-rays, or wireless telegraphy.
We may suppose that the study of astronomy is further advanced in Mars
than on the Earth, because humanity itself has advanced further, and
because the starry sky is far finer there, far easier to study, owing to the
limpidity of its pure, clear atmosphere.
Two small moons (hardly larger than the city of Paris) revolve rapidly
round Mars; they are called Phobos and Deimos. The former, at a distance
of 6,000 kilometers (3,730 miles) from the surface, accomplishes its
revolution rapidly, in seven hours, thirty-nine minutes, and thus makes the
entire circle of the Heavens three times a day. The second gravitates at
20,000 kilometers (12,400 miles), and turns round its center of attraction in
thirty hours and eighteen minutes. These two satellites were discovered by
Mr. Hall, at the University of Washington, in the month of August, 1877.
Among the finest and most interesting of the celestial phenomena
admired by the Martians, at certain epochs of the year,—now at night when
the Sun has plunged into his fiery bed, now in the morning, a little before
the aurora,—is a magnificent star of first magnitude, never far removed
from the orb of day, which presents to them the same aspects as does Venus
to ourselves. This splendid orb, which has doubtless received the most
flattering names from those who contemplate it, this radiant star of a
beautiful greenish blue, courses in space accompanied by a little satellite,
sparkling like some splendid diamond, after sunset, in the clear sky of Mars.
This superb orb is the Earth, and the little star accompanying it is the Moon.
with these unknown beings. The luminous points that have been observed
are no signals, but high summits or light clouds illuminated by the rising or
setting sun. But the idea of communication with them in the future is no
more audacious and no less scientific than the invention of spectral
analysis, X-rays, or wireless telegraphy.
We may suppose that the study of astronomy is further advanced in Mars
than on the Earth, because humanity itself has advanced further, and
because the starry sky is far finer there, far easier to study, owing to the
limpidity of its pure, clear atmosphere.
Two small moons (hardly larger than the city of Paris) revolve rapidly
round Mars; they are called Phobos and Deimos. The former, at a distance
of 6,000 kilometers (3,730 miles) from the surface, accomplishes its
revolution rapidly, in seven hours, thirty-nine minutes, and thus makes the
entire circle of the Heavens three times a day. The second gravitates at
20,000 kilometers (12,400 miles), and turns round its center of attraction in
thirty hours and eighteen minutes. These two satellites were discovered by
Mr. Hall, at the University of Washington, in the month of August, 1877.
Among the finest and most interesting of the celestial phenomena
admired by the Martians, at certain epochs of the year,—now at night when
the Sun has plunged into his fiery bed, now in the morning, a little before
the aurora,—is a magnificent star of first magnitude, never far removed
from the orb of day, which presents to them the same aspects as does Venus
to ourselves. This splendid orb, which has doubtless received the most
flattering names from those who contemplate it, this radiant star of a
beautiful greenish blue, courses in space accompanied by a little satellite,
sparkling like some splendid diamond, after sunset, in the clear sky of Mars.
This superb orb is the Earth, and the little star accompanying it is the Moon.
Page 120
Fig. 44.—The Earth viewed from Mars.
Yes, to the Martians our Earth is a star of the morning and evening;
doubtless they have determined her phases. Many a vow, and many a hope
must have been wafted toward her, more than one broken heart must have
permitted its unrealized dreams to wander forth to our planet as to an abode
of happiness where all who have suffered in their native world might find a
haven. But our planet, alas! is not as perfect as they imagine.
We must not dally upon Mars, but hasten our celestial excursion toward
Jupiter.
Yes, to the Martians our Earth is a star of the morning and evening;
doubtless they have determined her phases. Many a vow, and many a hope
must have been wafted toward her, more than one broken heart must have
permitted its unrealized dreams to wander forth to our planet as to an abode
of happiness where all who have suffered in their native world might find a
haven. But our planet, alas! is not as perfect as they imagine.
We must not dally upon Mars, but hasten our celestial excursion toward
Jupiter.
Page 121
Page 122
CHAPTER VI
THE PLANETS
B.—Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune.
Before we attack the giant world of our system, we must halt for a few
moments upon the minor planets which circulate between the orbit of Mars
and that of Jupiter. These minute asters, little worlds, the largest of which
measures scarcely more than 100 kilometers (62 miles) in diameter, are
fragments of cosmic matter that once belonged to a vast ring, formed at the
time when the solar system was only an immense nebula; and which,
instead of condensing into a single globe coursing between Mars and
Jupiter, split up into a considerable quantity of particles constituting at the
present time the curious and highly interesting Republic of the Asteroids.
These lilliputian worlds at first received the names of the more
celebrated of the minor mythological divinities—Ceres, Pallas, Juno, Vesta,
etc., but as they rapidly increased in number, it was found necessary to call
them by modern, terrestrial names, and more than one daughter of Eve, the
Egeria of some astronomer, now has her name inscribed in the Heavens.
The first minor planet was discovered on the first day of the nineteenth
century, January 1, 1801, by Piazzi, astronomer at Palermo. While he was
observing the small stars in the constellation of the Bull beneath the clear
Sicilian skies, this famous astronomer noticed one that he had never seen
before.
The next night, directing his telescope to the same part of the Heavens,
he perceived that the fair unknown had moved her station, and the
observations of the following days left him no doubt as to the nature of the
visitor: she was a planet, a wandering star among the constellations,
THE PLANETS
B.—Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune.
Before we attack the giant world of our system, we must halt for a few
moments upon the minor planets which circulate between the orbit of Mars
and that of Jupiter. These minute asters, little worlds, the largest of which
measures scarcely more than 100 kilometers (62 miles) in diameter, are
fragments of cosmic matter that once belonged to a vast ring, formed at the
time when the solar system was only an immense nebula; and which,
instead of condensing into a single globe coursing between Mars and
Jupiter, split up into a considerable quantity of particles constituting at the
present time the curious and highly interesting Republic of the Asteroids.
These lilliputian worlds at first received the names of the more
celebrated of the minor mythological divinities—Ceres, Pallas, Juno, Vesta,
etc., but as they rapidly increased in number, it was found necessary to call
them by modern, terrestrial names, and more than one daughter of Eve, the
Egeria of some astronomer, now has her name inscribed in the Heavens.
The first minor planet was discovered on the first day of the nineteenth
century, January 1, 1801, by Piazzi, astronomer at Palermo. While he was
observing the small stars in the constellation of the Bull beneath the clear
Sicilian skies, this famous astronomer noticed one that he had never seen
before.
The next night, directing his telescope to the same part of the Heavens,
he perceived that the fair unknown had moved her station, and the
observations of the following days left him no doubt as to the nature of the
visitor: she was a planet, a wandering star among the constellations,
Page 123
revolving round the Sun. This newcomer was registered under the name of
Ceres.
Since that epoch several hundreds of them have been discovered,
occupying a zone that extends over a space of more than 400 million
kilometers (249,000,000 miles). These celestial globules are invisible to the
naked eye, but no year passes without new and numerous recruits being
added to the already important catalogue of these minute asters by the
patient observers of the Heavens. To-day, they are most frequently
discovered by the photographic method of following the displacement of
the tiny moving points upon an exposed sensitive plate.
JUPITER
And now let us bow respectfully before Jupiter, the giant of the worlds.
This glorious planet is indeed King of the Solar System.
While Mercury measures only 4,750 kilometers (2,946 miles) in
diameter, and Mars 6,728 kilometers (4,172), Jupiter is no less than 140,920
kilometers (87,400 miles) in breadth; that is to say, eleven times larger than
the Earth. He is 442,500 kilometers (274,357 miles) in circumference.
In volume he is equivalent to 1,279 terrestrial globes; hence he is only a
million times smaller than the Sun. The previously described planets of our
system, Mercury, Venus, the Earth, and Mars combined, would form only
an insignificant mass in comparison with this colossus. A hundred and
twenty-six Earths joined into one group would present a surface whose
extent would still not be quite as vast as the superficies of this titanic world.
This immense globe weighs 310 times more than that which we inhabit. Its
density is only the quarter of our own; but weight is twice and a half times
as great there as here. The constituents of things and beings are thus
composed of materials lighter than those upon the Earth; but, as the planet
exerts a force of attraction twice and a half times as powerful, they are in
reality heavier and weigh more. A graceful maiden weighing fifty kilograms
Ceres.
Since that epoch several hundreds of them have been discovered,
occupying a zone that extends over a space of more than 400 million
kilometers (249,000,000 miles). These celestial globules are invisible to the
naked eye, but no year passes without new and numerous recruits being
added to the already important catalogue of these minute asters by the
patient observers of the Heavens. To-day, they are most frequently
discovered by the photographic method of following the displacement of
the tiny moving points upon an exposed sensitive plate.
JUPITER
And now let us bow respectfully before Jupiter, the giant of the worlds.
This glorious planet is indeed King of the Solar System.
While Mercury measures only 4,750 kilometers (2,946 miles) in
diameter, and Mars 6,728 kilometers (4,172), Jupiter is no less than 140,920
kilometers (87,400 miles) in breadth; that is to say, eleven times larger than
the Earth. He is 442,500 kilometers (274,357 miles) in circumference.
In volume he is equivalent to 1,279 terrestrial globes; hence he is only a
million times smaller than the Sun. The previously described planets of our
system, Mercury, Venus, the Earth, and Mars combined, would form only
an insignificant mass in comparison with this colossus. A hundred and
twenty-six Earths joined into one group would present a surface whose
extent would still not be quite as vast as the superficies of this titanic world.
This immense globe weighs 310 times more than that which we inhabit. Its
density is only the quarter of our own; but weight is twice and a half times
as great there as here. The constituents of things and beings are thus
composed of materials lighter than those upon the Earth; but, as the planet
exerts a force of attraction twice and a half times as powerful, they are in
reality heavier and weigh more. A graceful maiden weighing fifty kilograms
Page 124
would if transported to Jupiter immediately be included in the imposing
society of the "Hundred Kilos."
Jupiter rotates upon himself with prodigious rapidity. He accomplishes
his diurnal revolution in less than ten hours! There the day lasts half as long
as here, and while we reckoned fifteen days upon our calendar, the Jovian
would count thirty-six. As Jupiter's year equals nearly twelve of ours, the
almanac of that planet would contain 10,455 days! Obviously, our pretty
little pocket calendars would never serve to enumerate all the dates in this
vast world.
This splendid globe courses in space at a distance of 775,000,000
kilometers (480,500,000 miles) from the Sun. Hence it is five times (5.2) as
remote from the orb of day as our Earth, and its orbit is five times vaster
than our own. At that distance the Sun subtends a diameter five times
smaller than that which we see, and its surface is twenty-seven times less
extensive; accordingly this planetary abode receives on an average twenty-
seven times less light and heat than we obtain.
In the telescope Jupiter presents an aspect analogous to that likely to be
exhibited by a world covered with clouds, and enveloped in dense vapors
(Fig. 45).
It is, in fact, the seat of formidable perturbations, of strange revolutions
by which it is perpetually convulsed, for although of more ancient
formation than the Earth, this celestial giant has not yet arrived at the stable
condition of our dwelling-place. Owing to its considerable volume, this
globe has probably preserved its original heat, revolving in space as an
obscure Sun, but perhaps still burning. In it we see what our own planet
must have been in its primordial epoch, in the pristine times of terrestrial
genesis.
society of the "Hundred Kilos."
Jupiter rotates upon himself with prodigious rapidity. He accomplishes
his diurnal revolution in less than ten hours! There the day lasts half as long
as here, and while we reckoned fifteen days upon our calendar, the Jovian
would count thirty-six. As Jupiter's year equals nearly twelve of ours, the
almanac of that planet would contain 10,455 days! Obviously, our pretty
little pocket calendars would never serve to enumerate all the dates in this
vast world.
This splendid globe courses in space at a distance of 775,000,000
kilometers (480,500,000 miles) from the Sun. Hence it is five times (5.2) as
remote from the orb of day as our Earth, and its orbit is five times vaster
than our own. At that distance the Sun subtends a diameter five times
smaller than that which we see, and its surface is twenty-seven times less
extensive; accordingly this planetary abode receives on an average twenty-
seven times less light and heat than we obtain.
In the telescope Jupiter presents an aspect analogous to that likely to be
exhibited by a world covered with clouds, and enveloped in dense vapors
(Fig. 45).
It is, in fact, the seat of formidable perturbations, of strange revolutions
by which it is perpetually convulsed, for although of more ancient
formation than the Earth, this celestial giant has not yet arrived at the stable
condition of our dwelling-place. Owing to its considerable volume, this
globe has probably preserved its original heat, revolving in space as an
obscure Sun, but perhaps still burning. In it we see what our own planet
must have been in its primordial epoch, in the pristine times of terrestrial
genesis.
Page 125
Fig. 45.—Telescopic aspect of Jupiter.
Since its orbital revolution occupies nearly twelve years, Jupiter comes
back into opposition with the Sun every 399 days, i.e., 1 year, 34 days, that
is with one month and four days' delay each year. At these periods it is
located at the extremity of a straight line which, passing by the Earth, is
prolonged to the Sun. These are the epochs to be selected for observation. It
shines then, all night, like some dazzling star of the first magnitude, of
excessive whiteness: nor can it be confounded either with Venus, more
luminous still (for she is never visible at midnight, in the full South, but is
South-west in the evening, or South-east in the morning), nor with Mars,
whose fires are ruddy.
In the telescope, the immense planet presents a superb disk that an
enlargement of forty times shows us to be the same size to all appearance as
that of the Moon seen with the unaided eye. Its shape is not absolutely
spherical, but spheroid—that is, flattened at the poles. The flattening is 1⁄17.
We know that the Earth's axis dips a certain quantity on the plane of her
orbit, and that it is this inclination that produces the seasons. Now it is not
Since its orbital revolution occupies nearly twelve years, Jupiter comes
back into opposition with the Sun every 399 days, i.e., 1 year, 34 days, that
is with one month and four days' delay each year. At these periods it is
located at the extremity of a straight line which, passing by the Earth, is
prolonged to the Sun. These are the epochs to be selected for observation. It
shines then, all night, like some dazzling star of the first magnitude, of
excessive whiteness: nor can it be confounded either with Venus, more
luminous still (for she is never visible at midnight, in the full South, but is
South-west in the evening, or South-east in the morning), nor with Mars,
whose fires are ruddy.
In the telescope, the immense planet presents a superb disk that an
enlargement of forty times shows us to be the same size to all appearance as
that of the Moon seen with the unaided eye. Its shape is not absolutely
spherical, but spheroid—that is, flattened at the poles. The flattening is 1⁄17.
We know that the Earth's axis dips a certain quantity on the plane of her
orbit, and that it is this inclination that produces the seasons. Now it is not
Page 126
the same for Jupiter. His axis of rotation remains almost vertical throughout
the course of his year, and results in the complete absence of climates and
seasons. There is neither glacial zone, nor tropic zone; the position of
Jupiter is eternally that of the Earth at the season of the equinox, and the
vast world enjoys, as it were, perpetual spring. It knows neither the hoar-
frost nor the snows of winter. The heat received from the Sun diminishes
gradually from the equator to the poles without abrupt transitions, and the
duration of day and night is equal there throughout the entire year, under
every latitude. A privileged world, indeed!
It is surrounded by a very dense, thick atmosphere, which undergoes
more extensive variations than could be produced by the Sun at such a
distance. Spectral analysis detects a large amount of water-vapor, showing
that this planet still possesses a very considerable quantity of intrinsic heat.
Most conspicuous upon this globe are the larger or smaller bands or
markings (gray and white, sometimes tinted yellow, or of a maroon or
chocolate hue) by which its surface is streaked, particularly in the vicinity
of the equator. These different belts vary, and are constantly modified,
either in form or color. Sometimes, they are irregular, and cut up; at others
they are interspersed with more or less brilliant patches. These patches are
not affixed to the surface of the globe, like the seas and continents of the
Earth; nor do they circulate round the planet like the satellites, in more or
less elongated and regular revolutions, but are relatively mobile, like our
clouds in the atmosphere, while observation of their motion does not give
the exact period of the rotation of Jupiter. Some only appear upon the
agitated disk to vanish very quickly; others subsist for a considerable
period.
One has been observed for over a quarter of a century, and appears to be
almost immobile upon this colossal globe. This spot, which was red at its
first appearance, is now pale and ghostly. It is oval (vide Fig. 45) and
measures 42,000 kilometers (26,040 miles) in length by 15,000 kilometers
(9,300 miles) in width. Hence it is about four times as long as the diameter
the course of his year, and results in the complete absence of climates and
seasons. There is neither glacial zone, nor tropic zone; the position of
Jupiter is eternally that of the Earth at the season of the equinox, and the
vast world enjoys, as it were, perpetual spring. It knows neither the hoar-
frost nor the snows of winter. The heat received from the Sun diminishes
gradually from the equator to the poles without abrupt transitions, and the
duration of day and night is equal there throughout the entire year, under
every latitude. A privileged world, indeed!
It is surrounded by a very dense, thick atmosphere, which undergoes
more extensive variations than could be produced by the Sun at such a
distance. Spectral analysis detects a large amount of water-vapor, showing
that this planet still possesses a very considerable quantity of intrinsic heat.
Most conspicuous upon this globe are the larger or smaller bands or
markings (gray and white, sometimes tinted yellow, or of a maroon or
chocolate hue) by which its surface is streaked, particularly in the vicinity
of the equator. These different belts vary, and are constantly modified,
either in form or color. Sometimes, they are irregular, and cut up; at others
they are interspersed with more or less brilliant patches. These patches are
not affixed to the surface of the globe, like the seas and continents of the
Earth; nor do they circulate round the planet like the satellites, in more or
less elongated and regular revolutions, but are relatively mobile, like our
clouds in the atmosphere, while observation of their motion does not give
the exact period of the rotation of Jupiter. Some only appear upon the
agitated disk to vanish very quickly; others subsist for a considerable
period.
One has been observed for over a quarter of a century, and appears to be
almost immobile upon this colossal globe. This spot, which was red at its
first appearance, is now pale and ghostly. It is oval (vide Fig. 45) and
measures 42,000 kilometers (26,040 miles) in length by 15,000 kilometers
(9,300 miles) in width. Hence it is about four times as long as the diameter
Page 127
of our Earth; that is, relatively to the size of Jupiter, as are the dimensions of
Australia in proportion to our globe. The discussion of a larger number of
observations leads us to see in it a sort of continent in the making, a scoria
recently ejected from the mobile and still liquid and heated surface of the
giant Jupiter. The patch, however, oscillates perceptibly, and appears to be a
floating island.
We must add that this vast world, like the Sun, does not rotate all in one
period. Eight different currents can be perceived upon its surface. The most
rapid is that of the equatorial zone, which accomplishes its revolution in 9
hours, 50 minutes, 29 seconds. A point situated on the equator is therefore
carried forward at a speed of 12,500 meters (7 miles) per second, and it is
this giddy velocity of Jupiter that has produced the flattening of the poles.
From the equator to the poles, the swiftness of the currents diminishes
irregularly, and the difference amounts to about five minutes between the
movement of the equatorial stream, and that of the northern and southern
currents. But what is more curious still is that the velocity of one and the
same stream is subject to certain fluctuations; thus, in the last quarter of a
century, the speed of the equatorial current has progressively diminished. In
1879, the velocity was 9 hours, 49 minutes, 59 seconds, and now it is, as we
have already seen, 9 hours, 50 minutes, 29 seconds, which represents a
substantial reduction. The rotation of the red patch, at 25 degrees of the
southern latitude, is effected in 9 hours, 55 minutes, 40 seconds.
We are confronted with a strange and mysterious world. It is the world
of the future.
This giant gravitates in space accompanied by a suite of five satellites.
These are:
Names. Distance from surface of Jupiter. Time of revolution.
Kilometers. Miles. Days. Hours.
5. 200,000 124,000 11
1. Io 430,000 266,000 1 18
2. Europa 682,000 422,840 3 13
3. Ganymede 1,088,000 674,560 7 4
Australia in proportion to our globe. The discussion of a larger number of
observations leads us to see in it a sort of continent in the making, a scoria
recently ejected from the mobile and still liquid and heated surface of the
giant Jupiter. The patch, however, oscillates perceptibly, and appears to be a
floating island.
We must add that this vast world, like the Sun, does not rotate all in one
period. Eight different currents can be perceived upon its surface. The most
rapid is that of the equatorial zone, which accomplishes its revolution in 9
hours, 50 minutes, 29 seconds. A point situated on the equator is therefore
carried forward at a speed of 12,500 meters (7 miles) per second, and it is
this giddy velocity of Jupiter that has produced the flattening of the poles.
From the equator to the poles, the swiftness of the currents diminishes
irregularly, and the difference amounts to about five minutes between the
movement of the equatorial stream, and that of the northern and southern
currents. But what is more curious still is that the velocity of one and the
same stream is subject to certain fluctuations; thus, in the last quarter of a
century, the speed of the equatorial current has progressively diminished. In
1879, the velocity was 9 hours, 49 minutes, 59 seconds, and now it is, as we
have already seen, 9 hours, 50 minutes, 29 seconds, which represents a
substantial reduction. The rotation of the red patch, at 25 degrees of the
southern latitude, is effected in 9 hours, 55 minutes, 40 seconds.
We are confronted with a strange and mysterious world. It is the world
of the future.
This giant gravitates in space accompanied by a suite of five satellites.
These are:
Names. Distance from surface of Jupiter. Time of revolution.
Kilometers. Miles. Days. Hours.
5. 200,000 124,000 11
1. Io 430,000 266,000 1 18
2. Europa 682,000 422,840 3 13
3. Ganymede 1,088,000 674,560 7 4
Page 128
4. Callisto 1,914,000 1,186,680 16 16
The four principal satellites of Jupiter were discovered at the same time,
on the same evenings (January 7 and 8, 1610), by the two astronomers who
were pointing their telescopes at Jupiter: Galileo in Italy, and Simon Marius
in Germany.
On September 9, 1892, Mr. Barnard, astronomer of the Lick
Observatory, California, discovered a new satellite, extremely minute, and
very near the enormous planet. It has so far received no name, and is known
as the fifth, although the four principal are numbered in the order of their
distances.
Fig. 46.—Jupiter and his four principal satellites.
The four classical satellites are visible in the smallest instruments (Fig.
46): the third is the most voluminous.
Such is the splendid system of the mighty Jupiter. Once, doubtless, this
fine planet illuminated the troop of worlds that derived their treasure of
vitality from him with his intrinsic light: to-day, however, these moons in
their turn shed upon the extinct central globe the pale soft light which they
receive from our solar focus, illuminating the brief Jovian nights (which last
less than five hours, on account of the twilight) with their variable
brilliancy.
At the distance of the first satellite, Jupiter exhibits a disk fourteen
hundred times vaster than that of the Full Moon! What a dazzling spectacle,
what a fairy scene must the enormous star afford to the inhabitants of that
The four principal satellites of Jupiter were discovered at the same time,
on the same evenings (January 7 and 8, 1610), by the two astronomers who
were pointing their telescopes at Jupiter: Galileo in Italy, and Simon Marius
in Germany.
On September 9, 1892, Mr. Barnard, astronomer of the Lick
Observatory, California, discovered a new satellite, extremely minute, and
very near the enormous planet. It has so far received no name, and is known
as the fifth, although the four principal are numbered in the order of their
distances.
Fig. 46.—Jupiter and his four principal satellites.
The four classical satellites are visible in the smallest instruments (Fig.
46): the third is the most voluminous.
Such is the splendid system of the mighty Jupiter. Once, doubtless, this
fine planet illuminated the troop of worlds that derived their treasure of
vitality from him with his intrinsic light: to-day, however, these moons in
their turn shed upon the extinct central globe the pale soft light which they
receive from our solar focus, illuminating the brief Jovian nights (which last
less than five hours, on account of the twilight) with their variable
brilliancy.
At the distance of the first satellite, Jupiter exhibits a disk fourteen
hundred times vaster than that of the Full Moon! What a dazzling spectacle,
what a fairy scene must the enormous star afford to the inhabitants of that
Page 129
tiny world! And what a shabby figure must our Earth and Moon present in
the face of such a body, a real miniature of the great solar system!
Our ancestors were well inspired when they attributed the sovereignty of
Olympus to this majestic planet. His brilliancy corresponds with his real
grandeur. His dominion in the midnight Heavens is unique. Here again, as
for Venus, Mars, and Mercury, astronomy has created the legend of the
fables of mythology.
Let us repeat in conclusion that our Earth becomes practically invisible
for the inhabitants of the other worlds beyond the distance of Jupiter.
SATURN
Turn back now for a moment to the plan of the Solar System.
We had to cross 775 million kilometers (480,000,000 miles) when we
left the Sun, in order to reach the immense orb of Jupiter, which courses in
space at 626 million kilometers (388,000,000 miles) from the terrestrial
orbit. From Jupiter we had to traverse a distance of 646 million kilometers
(400,000,000 miles) in order to reach the marvelous system of Saturn,
where our eyes and thoughts must next alight.
Son of Uranus and Vesta, Saturn was the God of Time and Fate. He is
generally represented as an aged man bearing a scythe. His mythological
character is only the expression of his celestial aspect, as we have seen for
the brilliant Jupiter, for the pale Venus, the ruddy Mars, and the agile
Mercury. The revolution of Saturn is the slowest of any among the planets
known to the ancients. It takes almost thirty years for its accomplishment,
and at that distance the Saturnian world, though it still shines with the
brilliancy of a star of the first magnitude, exhibits to our eyes a pale and
leaden hue. Here is, indeed, the god of Time, with slow and almost funereal
gait.
Poor Saturn won no favor with the poets and astrologers. He bore the
horrid reputation of being the inexhaustible source of misfortune and evil
the face of such a body, a real miniature of the great solar system!
Our ancestors were well inspired when they attributed the sovereignty of
Olympus to this majestic planet. His brilliancy corresponds with his real
grandeur. His dominion in the midnight Heavens is unique. Here again, as
for Venus, Mars, and Mercury, astronomy has created the legend of the
fables of mythology.
Let us repeat in conclusion that our Earth becomes practically invisible
for the inhabitants of the other worlds beyond the distance of Jupiter.
SATURN
Turn back now for a moment to the plan of the Solar System.
We had to cross 775 million kilometers (480,000,000 miles) when we
left the Sun, in order to reach the immense orb of Jupiter, which courses in
space at 626 million kilometers (388,000,000 miles) from the terrestrial
orbit. From Jupiter we had to traverse a distance of 646 million kilometers
(400,000,000 miles) in order to reach the marvelous system of Saturn,
where our eyes and thoughts must next alight.
Son of Uranus and Vesta, Saturn was the God of Time and Fate. He is
generally represented as an aged man bearing a scythe. His mythological
character is only the expression of his celestial aspect, as we have seen for
the brilliant Jupiter, for the pale Venus, the ruddy Mars, and the agile
Mercury. The revolution of Saturn is the slowest of any among the planets
known to the ancients. It takes almost thirty years for its accomplishment,
and at that distance the Saturnian world, though it still shines with the
brilliancy of a star of the first magnitude, exhibits to our eyes a pale and
leaden hue. Here is, indeed, the god of Time, with slow and almost funereal
gait.
Poor Saturn won no favor with the poets and astrologers. He bore the
horrid reputation of being the inexhaustible source of misfortune and evil
Page 130
fates,—whereof he is wholly innocent, troubling himself not at all with our
world nor its inhabitants.
This world travels in the vastness of the Heavens at a distance of 1,421
million kilometers (881,000,000 miles) from the Sun. Hence it is ten times
farther from the orb of day than the Earth, though still illuminated and
governed by the Sun-God. Its gigantic orbit is ten times larger than our
own.
Its revolution round the Sun is accomplished in 10,759 days, i.e., 29
years, 167 days, and as this strange planet rotates upon itself with great
rapidity in 10 hours, 15 minutes, its year comprises no less than 25,217
days. What a calendar! The Saturnians must needs have a prodigious
memory not to get hopelessly involved in this interminable number of days.
A curious world, where each year stands for almost thirty of our own, and
where the day is more than half as short again as ours. But we shall
presently find other and more extraordinary differences on this planet.
In the first place it is nearly nine and a half times larger than our world.
It is a globe, not spherical, but spheroidal, and the flattening of its poles,
which is one-tenth, exceeds that of all the other planets, even Jupiter. It
follows that its equatorial diameter is 112,500 kilometers (69,750 miles),
while its polar diameter measures only 110,000 kilometers (68,200 miles).
In volume, Saturn is 719 times larger than the Earth, but its density is
only 128⁄1,000 of our own; i.e., the materials of which it is composed are
much less heavy, so that it weighs only 92 times more than our Earth. Its
surface is 85 times vaster than that of the Earth, no insignificant proportion.
world nor its inhabitants.
This world travels in the vastness of the Heavens at a distance of 1,421
million kilometers (881,000,000 miles) from the Sun. Hence it is ten times
farther from the orb of day than the Earth, though still illuminated and
governed by the Sun-God. Its gigantic orbit is ten times larger than our
own.
Its revolution round the Sun is accomplished in 10,759 days, i.e., 29
years, 167 days, and as this strange planet rotates upon itself with great
rapidity in 10 hours, 15 minutes, its year comprises no less than 25,217
days. What a calendar! The Saturnians must needs have a prodigious
memory not to get hopelessly involved in this interminable number of days.
A curious world, where each year stands for almost thirty of our own, and
where the day is more than half as short again as ours. But we shall
presently find other and more extraordinary differences on this planet.
In the first place it is nearly nine and a half times larger than our world.
It is a globe, not spherical, but spheroidal, and the flattening of its poles,
which is one-tenth, exceeds that of all the other planets, even Jupiter. It
follows that its equatorial diameter is 112,500 kilometers (69,750 miles),
while its polar diameter measures only 110,000 kilometers (68,200 miles).
In volume, Saturn is 719 times larger than the Earth, but its density is
only 128⁄1,000 of our own; i.e., the materials of which it is composed are
much less heavy, so that it weighs only 92 times more than our Earth. Its
surface is 85 times vaster than that of the Earth, no insignificant proportion.
Page 131
Fig. 47.—Saturn.
The dipping of Saturn's axis of rotation is much the same as our own.
Hence we conclude that the seasons of this planet are analogous to ours in
relative intensity. Only upon this far-off world each season lasts for seven
years. At the distance at which it gravitates in space, the heat and light
which it receives from the Sun are 90 times less active than such as reach
our selves; but it apparently possesses an atmosphere of great density,
which may be constituted so that the heat is preserved, and the planet
maintained in a calorific condition but little inferior to our own.
In the telescope, the disk of Saturn exhibits large belts that recall those
of Jupiter, though they are broader and less accentuated (Fig. 47). There are
doubtless zones of clouds or rapid currents circulating in the atmosphere.
Spots are also visible whose displacement assists in calculating the diurnal
motions of this globe.
The most extraordinary characteristic of this strange world is, however,
the existence of a vast ring, which is almost flat and very large, and entirely
envelops the body of the planet. It is suspended in the Saturnian sky, like a
gigantic triumphal arch, at a height of some 20,000 kilometers (12,400
miles) above the equator. This splendid arch is circular, like an immense
crown illuminated by the Sun. From here we only see it obliquely, and it
appears to us elliptical; a part of the ring seems to pass in front of Saturn,
The dipping of Saturn's axis of rotation is much the same as our own.
Hence we conclude that the seasons of this planet are analogous to ours in
relative intensity. Only upon this far-off world each season lasts for seven
years. At the distance at which it gravitates in space, the heat and light
which it receives from the Sun are 90 times less active than such as reach
our selves; but it apparently possesses an atmosphere of great density,
which may be constituted so that the heat is preserved, and the planet
maintained in a calorific condition but little inferior to our own.
In the telescope, the disk of Saturn exhibits large belts that recall those
of Jupiter, though they are broader and less accentuated (Fig. 47). There are
doubtless zones of clouds or rapid currents circulating in the atmosphere.
Spots are also visible whose displacement assists in calculating the diurnal
motions of this globe.
The most extraordinary characteristic of this strange world is, however,
the existence of a vast ring, which is almost flat and very large, and entirely
envelops the body of the planet. It is suspended in the Saturnian sky, like a
gigantic triumphal arch, at a height of some 20,000 kilometers (12,400
miles) above the equator. This splendid arch is circular, like an immense
crown illuminated by the Sun. From here we only see it obliquely, and it
appears to us elliptical; a part of the ring seems to pass in front of Saturn,
Page 132
and its shadow is visible on the planet, while the opposite part passes
behind.
This ring, which measures 284,000 kilometers (176,080 miles) in
diameter, and less than 100 kilometers (62 miles) in breadth, is divided into
three distinct zones: the exterior is less luminous than the center, which is
always brighter than the planet itself; the interior is very dark, and spreads
out like a dusky and faintly transparent veil, through which Saturn can be
distinguished.
What is the nature of these vast concentric circles that surround the
planet with a luminous halo? They are composed of an innumerable number
of particles, of a quantity of cosmic fragments, which are swept off in a
rapid revolution, and gravitate round the planet at variable speed and
distance. The nearer particles must accomplish their revolution in 5 hours,
50 minutes, and the most distant in about 12 hours, 5 minutes, to prevent
them from being merged in the surface of Saturn: their own centrifugal
force sustains them in space.
Fig. 48.—Varying perspective of Saturn's Rings, as seen from the Earth.
With a good glass the effect of these rings is most striking, and one can
not refrain from emotion on contemplating this marvel, whereby one of the
behind.
This ring, which measures 284,000 kilometers (176,080 miles) in
diameter, and less than 100 kilometers (62 miles) in breadth, is divided into
three distinct zones: the exterior is less luminous than the center, which is
always brighter than the planet itself; the interior is very dark, and spreads
out like a dusky and faintly transparent veil, through which Saturn can be
distinguished.
What is the nature of these vast concentric circles that surround the
planet with a luminous halo? They are composed of an innumerable number
of particles, of a quantity of cosmic fragments, which are swept off in a
rapid revolution, and gravitate round the planet at variable speed and
distance. The nearer particles must accomplish their revolution in 5 hours,
50 minutes, and the most distant in about 12 hours, 5 minutes, to prevent
them from being merged in the surface of Saturn: their own centrifugal
force sustains them in space.
Fig. 48.—Varying perspective of Saturn's Rings, as seen from the Earth.
With a good glass the effect of these rings is most striking, and one can
not refrain from emotion on contemplating this marvel, whereby one of the
Page 133
brothers of our terrestrial country is crowned with a golden diadem. Its
aspects vary with its perspective relative to the Earth, as may be seen from
the subjoined figure (Fig. 48).
We must not quit the Saturnian province without mentioning the eight
satellites that form his splendid suite:
Names. Distance from the planet. Time of revolution.
Kilometers. Miles. Days. Hours. Minutes.
1. Mimas 207,000 128,340 22 37
2. Enceladus 257,600 159,712 1 8 53
3. Tethys 328,800 203,856 1 21 18
4. Dione 421,200 261,144 2 17 41
5. Rhea 588,400 364,808 4 12 25
6. Titan 1,364,000 845,680 15 22 41
7. Hyperion 1,650,000 1,023,000 21 6 39
8. Japhet 3,964,000 2,457,680 79 7 54
Here is a marvelous system, with, what is more, eight different kinds of
months for the inhabitants of Saturn; eight moons with constantly varying
phases juggling above the rings!
Now we shall cross at a bound the 1,400 million kilometers
(868,000,000 miles) that separate us from the last station but one of the
immense solar system.
URANUS
On March 13, 1781, William Herschel, a Hanoverian astronomer who
had emigrated to England, having abandoned the study of music to devote
himself to the sublime science of the Heavens, was observing the vast fields
with their constellations of golden stars, when he perceived a luminous
point that appeared to him to exceed that of the other celestial luminaries in
diameter. He replaced the magnification of his telescope by more powerful
eye-pieces, and found that the apparent diameter of the orb increased
proportionately with the amplification of the power, which does not happen
in the case of stars at infinite distance. His observations on the following
evenings enabled him to note the slow and imperceptible movement of this
aspects vary with its perspective relative to the Earth, as may be seen from
the subjoined figure (Fig. 48).
We must not quit the Saturnian province without mentioning the eight
satellites that form his splendid suite:
Names. Distance from the planet. Time of revolution.
Kilometers. Miles. Days. Hours. Minutes.
1. Mimas 207,000 128,340 22 37
2. Enceladus 257,600 159,712 1 8 53
3. Tethys 328,800 203,856 1 21 18
4. Dione 421,200 261,144 2 17 41
5. Rhea 588,400 364,808 4 12 25
6. Titan 1,364,000 845,680 15 22 41
7. Hyperion 1,650,000 1,023,000 21 6 39
8. Japhet 3,964,000 2,457,680 79 7 54
Here is a marvelous system, with, what is more, eight different kinds of
months for the inhabitants of Saturn; eight moons with constantly varying
phases juggling above the rings!
Now we shall cross at a bound the 1,400 million kilometers
(868,000,000 miles) that separate us from the last station but one of the
immense solar system.
URANUS
On March 13, 1781, William Herschel, a Hanoverian astronomer who
had emigrated to England, having abandoned the study of music to devote
himself to the sublime science of the Heavens, was observing the vast fields
with their constellations of golden stars, when he perceived a luminous
point that appeared to him to exceed that of the other celestial luminaries in
diameter. He replaced the magnification of his telescope by more powerful
eye-pieces, and found that the apparent diameter of the orb increased
proportionately with the amplification of the power, which does not happen
in the case of stars at infinite distance. His observations on the following
evenings enabled him to note the slow and imperceptible movement of this
Page 134
star upon the celestial sphere, and left him in no further doubt: there was no
star, but some much nearer orb, in all probability a comet, for the great
astronomer dared not predict the discovery of a new planet. And it was thus,
under the name of cometary orb, that the seventh child of the Sun was
announced. The astronomers sought to determine the motions of the new
arrival, to discover for it an elliptical orbit such as most comets have. But
their efforts were vain, and after several months' study the conclusion was
reached that here was a new planet, throwing back the limits of the solar
system to a point far beyond that of the Saturnian frontier, as admitted from
antiquity.
This new world received the name of Uranus, father of Saturn, his
nearest neighbor in the solar empire. Uranus shines in the firmament as a
small star of sixth magnitude, invisible to the unaided eye for normal sight,
at a distance of 2,831,000,000 kilometers (1,755,000,000 miles) from the
Sun. Smaller than Jupiter and Saturn, this planet is yet larger than Mercury,
Venus, Mars, and the Earth together, thus presenting proportions that claim
our respect and admiration.
His diameter may be taken at about 55,000 kilometers (34,200 miles),
that is, rather more than four times the breadth of the terrestrial diameter.
Sixty-nine times more voluminous than the Earth, and seventeen times
more extensive in surface, this new world is much less than our own in
density. The matter of which it is composed is nearly five times lighter than
that of our globe.
Spectral analysis shows that this distant planet is surrounded with an
atmosphere very different from that which we breathe, enclosing gases that
do not exist in ours.
The Uranian globe courses over the fields of infinity in a vast orbit
seventeen times larger than our own, and its revolution lasts 36,688 days,
i.e., 84 years, 8 days. It travels slowly and sadly under the pale and
languishing rays of the Sun, which sends it nearly three hundred times less
star, but some much nearer orb, in all probability a comet, for the great
astronomer dared not predict the discovery of a new planet. And it was thus,
under the name of cometary orb, that the seventh child of the Sun was
announced. The astronomers sought to determine the motions of the new
arrival, to discover for it an elliptical orbit such as most comets have. But
their efforts were vain, and after several months' study the conclusion was
reached that here was a new planet, throwing back the limits of the solar
system to a point far beyond that of the Saturnian frontier, as admitted from
antiquity.
This new world received the name of Uranus, father of Saturn, his
nearest neighbor in the solar empire. Uranus shines in the firmament as a
small star of sixth magnitude, invisible to the unaided eye for normal sight,
at a distance of 2,831,000,000 kilometers (1,755,000,000 miles) from the
Sun. Smaller than Jupiter and Saturn, this planet is yet larger than Mercury,
Venus, Mars, and the Earth together, thus presenting proportions that claim
our respect and admiration.
His diameter may be taken at about 55,000 kilometers (34,200 miles),
that is, rather more than four times the breadth of the terrestrial diameter.
Sixty-nine times more voluminous than the Earth, and seventeen times
more extensive in surface, this new world is much less than our own in
density. The matter of which it is composed is nearly five times lighter than
that of our globe.
Spectral analysis shows that this distant planet is surrounded with an
atmosphere very different from that which we breathe, enclosing gases that
do not exist in ours.
The Uranian globe courses over the fields of infinity in a vast orbit
seventeen times larger than our own, and its revolution lasts 36,688 days,
i.e., 84 years, 8 days. It travels slowly and sadly under the pale and
languishing rays of the Sun, which sends it nearly three hundred times less
Page 135
of light and heat than we receive. At this distance the solar disk would
present a diameter seventeen times smaller than that which we admire, and
a surface three hundred times less vast. A dull world indeed! And what an
interminable year! The idle people who are in the habit of being bored must
find time even longer upon Uranus than upon our little Earth, where the
days pass so rapidly. And if matters are arranged there as here, a babe of a
year old, beginning to babble in its nurse's arms, would already have lived
as long as an old man of eighty-four in this world.
But what most seriously complicates the Calendar of the Uranians is the
fact that the four moons which accompany the planet accomplish their
revolution in four different kinds of months, in two, four, eight, and thirteen
days, as is shown in the following table:
Distance from the planet. Time of revolution.
Kilometers. Miles. Days. Hours. Minutes.
1. Ariel 196,000 121,520 2 12 29
2. Umbriel 276,000 171,120 4 3 27
3. Titania 450,000 279,000 8 16 56
4. Oberon 600,000 372,000 13 11 7
The most curious fact is that these satellites do not rotate like those of
the other planets. While the moons of the Earth, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn
accomplish their revolution from east to west, the satellites of Uranus rotate
in a plane almost perpendicular to the ecliptic, and it is doubtless the same
for the rotation of the planet.
If we had to quit the Earth, and fixate ourselves upon another world, we
should prefer Mars to Uranus, where everything must be so different from
terrestrial arrangements? But who knows? Perhaps, after all, this planet
might afford us some agreeable surprises. Il ne faut jurer de rien.
NEPTUNE
And here we reach the frontier of the Solar System, as actually known to
us. In landing on the world of Neptune, which circles through the Heavens
in eternal twilight at a distance of more than four milliard kilometers
present a diameter seventeen times smaller than that which we admire, and
a surface three hundred times less vast. A dull world indeed! And what an
interminable year! The idle people who are in the habit of being bored must
find time even longer upon Uranus than upon our little Earth, where the
days pass so rapidly. And if matters are arranged there as here, a babe of a
year old, beginning to babble in its nurse's arms, would already have lived
as long as an old man of eighty-four in this world.
But what most seriously complicates the Calendar of the Uranians is the
fact that the four moons which accompany the planet accomplish their
revolution in four different kinds of months, in two, four, eight, and thirteen
days, as is shown in the following table:
Distance from the planet. Time of revolution.
Kilometers. Miles. Days. Hours. Minutes.
1. Ariel 196,000 121,520 2 12 29
2. Umbriel 276,000 171,120 4 3 27
3. Titania 450,000 279,000 8 16 56
4. Oberon 600,000 372,000 13 11 7
The most curious fact is that these satellites do not rotate like those of
the other planets. While the moons of the Earth, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn
accomplish their revolution from east to west, the satellites of Uranus rotate
in a plane almost perpendicular to the ecliptic, and it is doubtless the same
for the rotation of the planet.
If we had to quit the Earth, and fixate ourselves upon another world, we
should prefer Mars to Uranus, where everything must be so different from
terrestrial arrangements? But who knows? Perhaps, after all, this planet
might afford us some agreeable surprises. Il ne faut jurer de rien.
NEPTUNE
And here we reach the frontier of the Solar System, as actually known to
us. In landing on the world of Neptune, which circles through the Heavens
in eternal twilight at a distance of more than four milliard kilometers
Page 136
(2,480,000,000 miles) from the common center of attraction of the
planetary orbs, we once again admire the prodigies of science.
Uranus was discovered with the telescope, Neptune by calculation. In
addition to the solar influence, the worlds exert a mutual attraction upon
each other that slightly deranges the harmony ordered by the Sun. The
stronger act upon the weaker, and the colossal Jupiter alone causes many of
the perturbations in our great solar family. Now during regular observations
of the position of Uranus in space, some inexplicable irregularities were
soon perceived. The astronomers having full faith in the universality of the
law of attraction, could not do otherwise than attribute these irregularities to
the influence of some unknown planet situated even farther off. But at what
distance?
A very simple proportion, known as Bode's law, has been observed,
which indicates approximately the relative distances of the planets from the
Sun. It is as follows: Starting from 0, write the number 3, and double
successively,
0 3 6 12 24 48 96 192 384.
Then, add the number 4 to each of the preceding figures, which gives the
following series:
4 7 10 16 28 52 100 196 388.
Now it is a very curious fact that if the distance between the Earth and
the Sun be represented by 10, the figure 4 represents the orbit of Mercury, 7
that of Venus, 16 of Mars; the figure 28 stands for the medium distance of
the minor planets; the distances of Jupiter, Saturn, and Uranus agree with
52, 100, and 196.
The immortal French mathematician Le Verrier, who pursued the
solution of the Uranian problem, supposed naturally that the disturbing
planet must be at the distance of 388, and made his calculations
accordingly. Its direction in the Heavens was indicated by the form of the
planetary orbs, we once again admire the prodigies of science.
Uranus was discovered with the telescope, Neptune by calculation. In
addition to the solar influence, the worlds exert a mutual attraction upon
each other that slightly deranges the harmony ordered by the Sun. The
stronger act upon the weaker, and the colossal Jupiter alone causes many of
the perturbations in our great solar family. Now during regular observations
of the position of Uranus in space, some inexplicable irregularities were
soon perceived. The astronomers having full faith in the universality of the
law of attraction, could not do otherwise than attribute these irregularities to
the influence of some unknown planet situated even farther off. But at what
distance?
A very simple proportion, known as Bode's law, has been observed,
which indicates approximately the relative distances of the planets from the
Sun. It is as follows: Starting from 0, write the number 3, and double
successively,
0 3 6 12 24 48 96 192 384.
Then, add the number 4 to each of the preceding figures, which gives the
following series:
4 7 10 16 28 52 100 196 388.
Now it is a very curious fact that if the distance between the Earth and
the Sun be represented by 10, the figure 4 represents the orbit of Mercury, 7
that of Venus, 16 of Mars; the figure 28 stands for the medium distance of
the minor planets; the distances of Jupiter, Saturn, and Uranus agree with
52, 100, and 196.
The immortal French mathematician Le Verrier, who pursued the
solution of the Uranian problem, supposed naturally that the disturbing
planet must be at the distance of 388, and made his calculations
accordingly. Its direction in the Heavens was indicated by the form of the
Page 137
disturbances; the orbit of Uranus bulging, as it were, on the side of the
disturbing factor.
On August 31, 1846, Le Verrier announced the position of the ultra-
Uranian planet, and on September 23d following, a German astronomer,
Galle, at the Observatory of Berlin, who had just received this intelligence,
pointed his telescope toward the quarter of the Heavens designated, and, in
fact, attested the presence of the new orb. Without quitting his study table,
Le Verrier, by the sole use of mathematics, had detected, and, as it were,
touched at pen's point the mysterious stranger.
Only, it is proved by observation and calculation that it is less remote
than was expected from the preceding law, for it gravitates at a distance of
300, given that from the Earth to the Sun as 10.
This planet was called Neptune, god of the seas, son of Saturn, brother
of Jupiter. The name is well chosen, since the King of the Ocean lives in
darkness in the depths of the sea, and Le Verrier's orb is also plunged in the
semi-obscurity of the depths of the celestial element. But it was primarily
selected to do justice to an English astronomer, Adams, who had
simultaneously made the same calculations as Le Verrier, and obtained the
same results—without publishing them. His work remained in the records
of the Greenwich Observatory.
The English command the seas, and wherever they dip their finger into
the water and find it salt, they feel themselves "at home," and know that
"Neptune's trident is the scepter of the world," hence this complimentary
nomenclature.
Neptune is separated by a distance of four milliards, four hundred
million kilometers from the solar center.
At such a distance, thirty times greater than that which exists between
the Sun and our world, Neptune receives nine hundred times less light and
heat than ourselves; i.e., Spitzbergen and the polar regions of our globe are
disturbing factor.
On August 31, 1846, Le Verrier announced the position of the ultra-
Uranian planet, and on September 23d following, a German astronomer,
Galle, at the Observatory of Berlin, who had just received this intelligence,
pointed his telescope toward the quarter of the Heavens designated, and, in
fact, attested the presence of the new orb. Without quitting his study table,
Le Verrier, by the sole use of mathematics, had detected, and, as it were,
touched at pen's point the mysterious stranger.
Only, it is proved by observation and calculation that it is less remote
than was expected from the preceding law, for it gravitates at a distance of
300, given that from the Earth to the Sun as 10.
This planet was called Neptune, god of the seas, son of Saturn, brother
of Jupiter. The name is well chosen, since the King of the Ocean lives in
darkness in the depths of the sea, and Le Verrier's orb is also plunged in the
semi-obscurity of the depths of the celestial element. But it was primarily
selected to do justice to an English astronomer, Adams, who had
simultaneously made the same calculations as Le Verrier, and obtained the
same results—without publishing them. His work remained in the records
of the Greenwich Observatory.
The English command the seas, and wherever they dip their finger into
the water and find it salt, they feel themselves "at home," and know that
"Neptune's trident is the scepter of the world," hence this complimentary
nomenclature.
Neptune is separated by a distance of four milliards, four hundred
million kilometers from the solar center.
At such a distance, thirty times greater than that which exists between
the Sun and our world, Neptune receives nine hundred times less light and
heat than ourselves; i.e., Spitzbergen and the polar regions of our globe are
Page 138
furnaces compared with what must be the Neptunian temperature.
Absolutely invisible to the unaided eye, this world presents in the telescope
the aspect of a star of the eighth magnitude. With powerful magnifications it
is possible to measure its disk, which appears to be slightly tinged with
blue. Its diameter is four times larger than our own, and measures about
48,000 kilometers (29,900 miles), its surface is sixteen times vaster than
that of the Earth, and to attain its volume we should have to put together
fifty-five globes similar to our own. Weight at its surface must be about the
same as here, but its medium density is only 1⁄3 that of the Earth.
It gravitates slowly, dragging itself along an orbit thirty times vaster than
that of our globe, and its revolution takes 164 years, 281 days, i.e., 164
years, 9 months. A single year of Neptune thus covers several generations
of terrestrial life. Existence must, indeed, be strange in that tortoise-footed
world!
While in their rotation period, Mercury accomplishes 47 kilometers
(293⁄8 miles) per second, and the Earth 291⁄2 (181⁄8 miles), Neptune rolls
along his immense orbit at a rate of only 51⁄2 kilometers (about 31⁄4 miles)
per second.
The vast distance that separates us prevents our distinguishing any
details of his surface, but spectral analysis reveals the presence of an
absorbent atmosphere in which are gases unknown to the air of our planet,
and of which the chemical composition resembles that of the atmosphere of
Uranus.
One satellite has been discovered for Neptune. It has a considerable
inclination, and rotates from east to west.
Absolutely invisible to the unaided eye, this world presents in the telescope
the aspect of a star of the eighth magnitude. With powerful magnifications it
is possible to measure its disk, which appears to be slightly tinged with
blue. Its diameter is four times larger than our own, and measures about
48,000 kilometers (29,900 miles), its surface is sixteen times vaster than
that of the Earth, and to attain its volume we should have to put together
fifty-five globes similar to our own. Weight at its surface must be about the
same as here, but its medium density is only 1⁄3 that of the Earth.
It gravitates slowly, dragging itself along an orbit thirty times vaster than
that of our globe, and its revolution takes 164 years, 281 days, i.e., 164
years, 9 months. A single year of Neptune thus covers several generations
of terrestrial life. Existence must, indeed, be strange in that tortoise-footed
world!
While in their rotation period, Mercury accomplishes 47 kilometers
(293⁄8 miles) per second, and the Earth 291⁄2 (181⁄8 miles), Neptune rolls
along his immense orbit at a rate of only 51⁄2 kilometers (about 31⁄4 miles)
per second.
The vast distance that separates us prevents our distinguishing any
details of his surface, but spectral analysis reveals the presence of an
absorbent atmosphere in which are gases unknown to the air of our planet,
and of which the chemical composition resembles that of the atmosphere of
Uranus.
One satellite has been discovered for Neptune. It has a considerable
inclination, and rotates from east to west.
Page 139
And here we have reached the goal of our interplanetary journey. After
visiting the vast provinces of the solar republic, we feel yet greater
admiration and gratitude toward the luminary that governs, warms, and
illuminates the worlds of his system.
In conclusion, let us again insist that the Earth,—a splendid orb as
viewed from Mercury, Venus, and Mars,—begins to disappear from Jupiter,
where she becomes no more than a tiny spark oscillating from side to side
of the Sun, and occasionally passing in front of him as a small black dot.
From Saturn the visibility of our planet is even more reduced. As to Uranus
and Neptune, we are invisible there, at least to eyes constructed like our
own. We do not possess in the Universe the importance with which we
would endow ourselves.
Neptune up to the present guards the portals of our celestial system; we
will leave him to watch over the distant frontier; but before returning to the
Earth, we must glance at certain eccentric orbs, at the mad, capricious
comets, which imprint their airy flight upon the realms of space.
visiting the vast provinces of the solar republic, we feel yet greater
admiration and gratitude toward the luminary that governs, warms, and
illuminates the worlds of his system.
In conclusion, let us again insist that the Earth,—a splendid orb as
viewed from Mercury, Venus, and Mars,—begins to disappear from Jupiter,
where she becomes no more than a tiny spark oscillating from side to side
of the Sun, and occasionally passing in front of him as a small black dot.
From Saturn the visibility of our planet is even more reduced. As to Uranus
and Neptune, we are invisible there, at least to eyes constructed like our
own. We do not possess in the Universe the importance with which we
would endow ourselves.
Neptune up to the present guards the portals of our celestial system; we
will leave him to watch over the distant frontier; but before returning to the
Earth, we must glance at certain eccentric orbs, at the mad, capricious
comets, which imprint their airy flight upon the realms of space.
Page 140
CHAPTER VII
THE COMETS
Shooting Stars, Bolides, Uranoliths or Meteoric Stones
What marvels have been reviewed by our dazzled eyes since the outset
of these discussions! We first surveyed the magnificent host of stars that
people the vast firmament of Heaven; next we admired and wondered at
suns very differently constituted from our own; then returning from the
depths of space, crossing at a bound the abyss that separates us from these
mysterious luminaries, the distant torches of our somber night, terrible suns
of infinity, we landed on our own beloved orb, the superb and brilliant day-
star. Thence we visited his celestial family, his system, in which our Earth is
a floating island. But the journey would be incomplete if we omitted certain
more or less vagabond orbs, that occasionally approach the Sun and Earth,
some of which may even collide with us upon their celestial path. These are
in the first place the comets, then the shooting stars, the fire-balls, and
meteorites.
Glittering, swift-footed heralds of Immensity, these comets with golden
wings glide lightly through Space, shedding a momentary illumination by
their presence. Whence come they? Whither are they bound?
What problems they propound to us, when, as in some beautiful display
of pyrotechnics, the arch of Heaven is illuminated with their fantastic light!
But first of all—what is a Comet?
If instead of living in these days of the telescope, of spectrum analysis,
and of astral photography, we were anterior to Galileo, and to the liberation
of the human spirit by Astronomy, we should reply that the comet is an
THE COMETS
Shooting Stars, Bolides, Uranoliths or Meteoric Stones
What marvels have been reviewed by our dazzled eyes since the outset
of these discussions! We first surveyed the magnificent host of stars that
people the vast firmament of Heaven; next we admired and wondered at
suns very differently constituted from our own; then returning from the
depths of space, crossing at a bound the abyss that separates us from these
mysterious luminaries, the distant torches of our somber night, terrible suns
of infinity, we landed on our own beloved orb, the superb and brilliant day-
star. Thence we visited his celestial family, his system, in which our Earth is
a floating island. But the journey would be incomplete if we omitted certain
more or less vagabond orbs, that occasionally approach the Sun and Earth,
some of which may even collide with us upon their celestial path. These are
in the first place the comets, then the shooting stars, the fire-balls, and
meteorites.
Glittering, swift-footed heralds of Immensity, these comets with golden
wings glide lightly through Space, shedding a momentary illumination by
their presence. Whence come they? Whither are they bound?
What problems they propound to us, when, as in some beautiful display
of pyrotechnics, the arch of Heaven is illuminated with their fantastic light!
But first of all—what is a Comet?
If instead of living in these days of the telescope, of spectrum analysis,
and of astral photography, we were anterior to Galileo, and to the liberation
of the human spirit by Astronomy, we should reply that the comet is an
Page 141
object of terror, a dangerous menace that appears to mortals in the purity of
the immaculate Heavens, to announce the most fatal misfortunes to the
inhabitants of our planet. Is a comet visible in the Heavens? The reigning
prince may make his testament and prepare to die. Another apparition in the
firmament bodes war, famine, the advent of grievous pestilence. The
astrologers had an open field, and their fertile imagination might hazard
every possible conjecture, seeing that misfortunes, great or small, are not
altogether rare in this sublunar world.
How many intellects, and those not the most vulgar, from antiquity to
the middle of the last century cursed the apparition of these hirsute stars,
which brought desolation to the heart of man, and poured their fatal effluvia
upon the head of poor Humanity. The history of the superstitions and fears
that they inspired of old would furnish matter for the most thrilling of
romances. But, on the other hand, the volume would be little flattering to
the common-sense of our ancestors. Despite the respect we owe our
forefathers, let us recall for a moment the prejudices attaching to the most
famous comets whose passage, as observed from the Earth, has been
preserved to us in history.
Fig. 49.—Great Comet of 1858.
the immaculate Heavens, to announce the most fatal misfortunes to the
inhabitants of our planet. Is a comet visible in the Heavens? The reigning
prince may make his testament and prepare to die. Another apparition in the
firmament bodes war, famine, the advent of grievous pestilence. The
astrologers had an open field, and their fertile imagination might hazard
every possible conjecture, seeing that misfortunes, great or small, are not
altogether rare in this sublunar world.
How many intellects, and those not the most vulgar, from antiquity to
the middle of the last century cursed the apparition of these hirsute stars,
which brought desolation to the heart of man, and poured their fatal effluvia
upon the head of poor Humanity. The history of the superstitions and fears
that they inspired of old would furnish matter for the most thrilling of
romances. But, on the other hand, the volume would be little flattering to
the common-sense of our ancestors. Despite the respect we owe our
forefathers, let us recall for a moment the prejudices attaching to the most
famous comets whose passage, as observed from the Earth, has been
preserved to us in history.
Fig. 49.—Great Comet of 1858.
Page 142
Without going back to the Deluge, we note that the Romans established
a relation between the Great Comet of 43 b.c. and the death of Cæsar, who
had been assassinated a few months previously. It was, they asserted, the
soul of their great Captain, transported to Heaven to reign in the empyrean
after ruling here below. Were not the Emperors Lords of both Earth and
Heaven?
We must in justice recognize that certain more independent spirits
emancipated themselves from these superstitions, and we may cite the reply
of Vespasian to his friends, who were alarmed at the evil presage of a
flaming comet: "Fear nothing," he said, "this bearded star concerns me not;
rather should it threaten my neighbor the King of the Parthians, since he is
hairy and I am bald."
In the year 837 one of these mysterious visitants appeared in the
Heavens. It was in the reign of Lewis the Debonair. Directly the King
perceived the comet, he sent for an astrologer, and asked what he was to
conclude from the apparition. As the answers were unsatisfactory he tried to
avert the augury by prayers to Heaven, by ordaining a general fast to all his
Court, and by building churches. Notwithstanding, he died three years later,
and the historians profited by this slender coincidence to set up a correlation
between the fatal star and the death of the Sovereign. This comet, famous in
history, is no other than that of Halley, in one of its appearances.
This comet returned to explore the realms near the Sun in 1066, at the
moment when William of Normandy was undertaking the Conquest of
England, and was misguided enough to go across and reign in London,
instead of staying at home and annexing England, thus by his action
founding the everlasting rivalry between France and this island. A beneficial
influence was attributed to the comet in the Battle of Hastings.
A few centuries later it again came into sight from the Earth, in 1456,
three years after the capture of Constantinople by the Turks. Feeling ran
a relation between the Great Comet of 43 b.c. and the death of Cæsar, who
had been assassinated a few months previously. It was, they asserted, the
soul of their great Captain, transported to Heaven to reign in the empyrean
after ruling here below. Were not the Emperors Lords of both Earth and
Heaven?
We must in justice recognize that certain more independent spirits
emancipated themselves from these superstitions, and we may cite the reply
of Vespasian to his friends, who were alarmed at the evil presage of a
flaming comet: "Fear nothing," he said, "this bearded star concerns me not;
rather should it threaten my neighbor the King of the Parthians, since he is
hairy and I am bald."
In the year 837 one of these mysterious visitants appeared in the
Heavens. It was in the reign of Lewis the Debonair. Directly the King
perceived the comet, he sent for an astrologer, and asked what he was to
conclude from the apparition. As the answers were unsatisfactory he tried to
avert the augury by prayers to Heaven, by ordaining a general fast to all his
Court, and by building churches. Notwithstanding, he died three years later,
and the historians profited by this slender coincidence to set up a correlation
between the fatal star and the death of the Sovereign. This comet, famous in
history, is no other than that of Halley, in one of its appearances.
This comet returned to explore the realms near the Sun in 1066, at the
moment when William of Normandy was undertaking the Conquest of
England, and was misguided enough to go across and reign in London,
instead of staying at home and annexing England, thus by his action
founding the everlasting rivalry between France and this island. A beneficial
influence was attributed to the comet in the Battle of Hastings.
A few centuries later it again came into sight from the Earth, in 1456,
three years after the capture of Constantinople by the Turks. Feeling ran
Page 143
high in Europe, and this celestial omen was taken for a proof of the anger of
the Almighty. The moment was decisive; the Christians had to be rescued
from a struggle in which they were being worsted. At this conjuncture, Pope
Calixtus resuscitated a prayer that had fallen into disuse, the Angelus; and
ordered that the bells of the churches should be rung each day at noon, that
the Faithful might join at the same hour in prayer against the Turks and the
Comet. This custom has lasted down to our own day.
Again, to the comet of 1500 was attributed the tempest that caused the
death of Bartholomew Diaz, a celebrated Portuguese navigator, who
discovered the Cape of Good Hope.
In 1528 a bearded star of terrific aspect alarmed the world, and the more
serious spirits were influenced by this menacing comet, which burned in the
Heavens like "a great and gory sword." In a chapter on Celestial Monsters
the celebrated surgeon Ambroise Paré describes this awful phenomenon in
terms anything but seductive, or reassuring, showing us the menacing
sword surrounded by the heads it had cut off (Fig. 50).
the Almighty. The moment was decisive; the Christians had to be rescued
from a struggle in which they were being worsted. At this conjuncture, Pope
Calixtus resuscitated a prayer that had fallen into disuse, the Angelus; and
ordered that the bells of the churches should be rung each day at noon, that
the Faithful might join at the same hour in prayer against the Turks and the
Comet. This custom has lasted down to our own day.
Again, to the comet of 1500 was attributed the tempest that caused the
death of Bartholomew Diaz, a celebrated Portuguese navigator, who
discovered the Cape of Good Hope.
In 1528 a bearded star of terrific aspect alarmed the world, and the more
serious spirits were influenced by this menacing comet, which burned in the
Heavens like "a great and gory sword." In a chapter on Celestial Monsters
the celebrated surgeon Ambroise Paré describes this awful phenomenon in
terms anything but seductive, or reassuring, showing us the menacing
sword surrounded by the heads it had cut off (Fig. 50).
Page 144
Fig. 50.—What our Ancestors saw in a Comet.
After Ambroise Paré (1528).
After Ambroise Paré (1528).
Page 145
Page 146
Fig. 51.—Prodigies seen in the Heavens by our Forefathers.
Omens of battle, 1547.
Deer and warriors, July 19, 1550.
Cavalry, and a bloody branch crossing the sun, June 11, 1554.]
Our fathers saw many other prodigies in the skies; their descendants, less
credulous, can study the facsimile reproduced in Fig. 51, of the drawings
published in the year 1557 by Conrad Lycosthenes in his curious Book of
Prodigies.
So, too, it is asserted that Charles V renounced the jurisdiction of his
Estates, which were so vast that "the Sun never slept upon them," because
he was terrified by the comet of 1556 which burned in the skies with an
alarming brilliancy, into passing the rest of his days in prayer and devotion.
It is certain that comets often exhibit very strange characteristics, but the
imagination that sees in them such dramatic figures must indeed be lively.
In the Middle Ages and the Renaissance these were swords of fire, bloody
crosses, flaming daggers, etc., all horrible objects ready to destroy our poor
human race!
At the time of the Romans, Pliny made some curious distinctions
between them: "The Bearded Ones let loose their hair like a majestic beard;
the Javelin darts forth like an arrow; if the tail is shorter and ends in a point,
it is called the Sword; this is the palest of all the Comets; it shines like a
sword, without rays; the Plate or Disk is named in conformity with its
figure; its color is amber, the Barrel is actually shaped like a barrel, as it
might be in smoke, with light streaming through it; the Horn imitates the
figure of a horn erected in the sky, and the Lamp that of a burning flame;
the Equine represents a horse's mane, shaken violently with a circular
motion. There are bristled comets; these resemble the skins of beasts with
the fur on them, and are surrounded by a nebulosity. Lastly, the tails of
certain comets have been seen to menace the sky in the form of a lance."
Omens of battle, 1547.
Deer and warriors, July 19, 1550.
Cavalry, and a bloody branch crossing the sun, June 11, 1554.]
Our fathers saw many other prodigies in the skies; their descendants, less
credulous, can study the facsimile reproduced in Fig. 51, of the drawings
published in the year 1557 by Conrad Lycosthenes in his curious Book of
Prodigies.
So, too, it is asserted that Charles V renounced the jurisdiction of his
Estates, which were so vast that "the Sun never slept upon them," because
he was terrified by the comet of 1556 which burned in the skies with an
alarming brilliancy, into passing the rest of his days in prayer and devotion.
It is certain that comets often exhibit very strange characteristics, but the
imagination that sees in them such dramatic figures must indeed be lively.
In the Middle Ages and the Renaissance these were swords of fire, bloody
crosses, flaming daggers, etc., all horrible objects ready to destroy our poor
human race!
At the time of the Romans, Pliny made some curious distinctions
between them: "The Bearded Ones let loose their hair like a majestic beard;
the Javelin darts forth like an arrow; if the tail is shorter and ends in a point,
it is called the Sword; this is the palest of all the Comets; it shines like a
sword, without rays; the Plate or Disk is named in conformity with its
figure; its color is amber, the Barrel is actually shaped like a barrel, as it
might be in smoke, with light streaming through it; the Horn imitates the
figure of a horn erected in the sky, and the Lamp that of a burning flame;
the Equine represents a horse's mane, shaken violently with a circular
motion. There are bristled comets; these resemble the skins of beasts with
the fur on them, and are surrounded by a nebulosity. Lastly, the tails of
certain comets have been seen to menace the sky in the form of a lance."
Page 147
These hairy orbs that appear in all directions, and whose trajectories are
sometimes actually perpendicular to the plane of the ecliptic, appear to obey
no regular law. Even in the seventeenth century the perspicacious Kepler
had not divined their true character, seeing in them, like most of his
contemporaries, emanations from the earth, a sort of vapor, losing itself in
space. These erratic orbs could not be assimilated with the other members
of our grand solar family where, generally speaking, everything goes on in
regular order.
And even in our own times, have we not seen the people terrified at the
sight of a flaming comet? Has not the end of the world by the agency of
comets been often enough predicted? These predictions are so to speak
periodic; they crop up each time that the return of these cosmical
formations is announced by the astronomers, and always meet with a
certain number of timid souls who are troubled as to our destinies.
To-day we know that these wanderers are subject to the general laws that
govern the universe. The great Newton announced that, like the planets,
they were obedient to universal attraction; that they must follow an
extremely elongated curve, and return periodically to the focus of the
ellipse. From the basis of these data Halley calculated the progress of the
comet of 1682, and ascertained that its motions presented such similarity
with the apparitions of 1531 and 1607, that he believed himself justified in
identifying them and in announcing its return about the year 1759. Faithful
to the call made upon it, irresistibly attracted by the Orb of Day, the comet,
at first pale, then ardent and incandescent, returned at the date assigned to it
by calculation, three years after the death of the illustrious astronomer.
Shining upon his grave it bore witness to the might of human thought, able
to snatch the profoundest secrets from the Heavens!
sometimes actually perpendicular to the plane of the ecliptic, appear to obey
no regular law. Even in the seventeenth century the perspicacious Kepler
had not divined their true character, seeing in them, like most of his
contemporaries, emanations from the earth, a sort of vapor, losing itself in
space. These erratic orbs could not be assimilated with the other members
of our grand solar family where, generally speaking, everything goes on in
regular order.
And even in our own times, have we not seen the people terrified at the
sight of a flaming comet? Has not the end of the world by the agency of
comets been often enough predicted? These predictions are so to speak
periodic; they crop up each time that the return of these cosmical
formations is announced by the astronomers, and always meet with a
certain number of timid souls who are troubled as to our destinies.
To-day we know that these wanderers are subject to the general laws that
govern the universe. The great Newton announced that, like the planets,
they were obedient to universal attraction; that they must follow an
extremely elongated curve, and return periodically to the focus of the
ellipse. From the basis of these data Halley calculated the progress of the
comet of 1682, and ascertained that its motions presented such similarity
with the apparitions of 1531 and 1607, that he believed himself justified in
identifying them and in announcing its return about the year 1759. Faithful
to the call made upon it, irresistibly attracted by the Orb of Day, the comet,
at first pale, then ardent and incandescent, returned at the date assigned to it
by calculation, three years after the death of the illustrious astronomer.
Shining upon his grave it bore witness to the might of human thought, able
to snatch the profoundest secrets from the Heavens!
Page 148
This fine comet returns every seventy-six years, to be visible from the
Earth, and has already been seen twenty-four times by the astonished eyes
of man. It appears, however, to be diminishing in magnitude. Its last
appearance was in 1835, and we shall see it again in 1910, a little sooner
than its average period, the attraction of Jupiter having this time slightly
accelerated its course, while in 1759 it retarded it.
The comets thus follow a very elongated orbit, either elliptic, turning
round the Sun, or parabolic, dashing out into space. In the first case, they
are periodic (Fig. 52), and their return can be calculated. In the second they
surprise us unannounced, and return to the abysses of eternity to reappear
no more.
Fig. 52.—The orbit of a Periodic Comet.
Their speed is even greater than that of the planets, it is equivalent to
this, multiplied by the square root of 2, that is to say by 1.414. Thus at the
distance of the Earth from the Sun this velocity = 29,500 meters (18 miles)
per second, multiplied by the above number, that is, 41,700 meters (over 25
miles). At the distance of Mercury it = 47 × 1.414 or 66,400 meters (over 40
miles) per second.
Among the numerous comets observed, we do not as yet know more
than some twenty of which the orbit has been determined. Periodicity in
these bearded orbs is thus exceptional, if we think of the innumerable
multitude of comets that circle through the Heavens. Kepler did not
exaggerate when he said "there are as many comets in the skies as there are
Earth, and has already been seen twenty-four times by the astonished eyes
of man. It appears, however, to be diminishing in magnitude. Its last
appearance was in 1835, and we shall see it again in 1910, a little sooner
than its average period, the attraction of Jupiter having this time slightly
accelerated its course, while in 1759 it retarded it.
The comets thus follow a very elongated orbit, either elliptic, turning
round the Sun, or parabolic, dashing out into space. In the first case, they
are periodic (Fig. 52), and their return can be calculated. In the second they
surprise us unannounced, and return to the abysses of eternity to reappear
no more.
Fig. 52.—The orbit of a Periodic Comet.
Their speed is even greater than that of the planets, it is equivalent to
this, multiplied by the square root of 2, that is to say by 1.414. Thus at the
distance of the Earth from the Sun this velocity = 29,500 meters (18 miles)
per second, multiplied by the above number, that is, 41,700 meters (over 25
miles). At the distance of Mercury it = 47 × 1.414 or 66,400 meters (over 40
miles) per second.
Among the numerous comets observed, we do not as yet know more
than some twenty of which the orbit has been determined. Periodicity in
these bearded orbs is thus exceptional, if we think of the innumerable
multitude of comets that circle through the Heavens. Kepler did not
exaggerate when he said "there are as many comets in the skies as there are
Page 149
fishes in the sea." These scouts of the sidereal world constitute a regular
army, and if we are only acquainted with the dazzling generals clad in gold,
it is because the more modest privates can only be detected in the telescope.
Long before the invention of the latter, these wanderers in the firmament
roamed through space as in our own day, but they defied the human eye, too
weak to detect them. Then they were regarded as rare and terrible objects
that no one dared to contemplate. To-day they may be counted by hundreds.
They have lost in prestige and in originality; but science is the gainer, since
she has thus endowed the solar system with new members. No year passes
without the announcement of three or four new arrivals. But the fine
apparitions that attract general attention by their splendor are rare enough.
These eccentric visitors do not resemble the planets, for they have no
opaque body like the Earth, Venus, Mars, or any of the rest. They are
transparent nebulosities, of extreme lightness, without mass nor density. We
have just photographed the comet of the moment, July, 1903: the smallest
stars are visible through its tail, and even through the nucleus.
They arrive in every direction from the depths of space, as though to
reanimate themselves in the burning, luminous, electric solar center.
Attracted by some potent charm toward this dazzling focus, they come
inquisitive and ardent, to warm themselves at its furnace. At first pale and
feeble, they are born again when the Sun caresses them with his fervid heat.
Their motions accelerate, they haste to plunge wholly into the radiant light.
At length they burst out luminous and superb, when the day-star penetrates
them with his burning splendor, illuminates them with a marvelous
radiance, and crowns them with glory. But the Sun is generous. Having
showered benefits upon these gorgeous celestial butterflies that flutter
round him as round some altar of the gods, he grants them liberty to visit
other heavens, to seek fresh universes....
The original parabola is converted into an ellipse, if the imprudent
adventurer in returning to the Sun passes near some great planet, such as
army, and if we are only acquainted with the dazzling generals clad in gold,
it is because the more modest privates can only be detected in the telescope.
Long before the invention of the latter, these wanderers in the firmament
roamed through space as in our own day, but they defied the human eye, too
weak to detect them. Then they were regarded as rare and terrible objects
that no one dared to contemplate. To-day they may be counted by hundreds.
They have lost in prestige and in originality; but science is the gainer, since
she has thus endowed the solar system with new members. No year passes
without the announcement of three or four new arrivals. But the fine
apparitions that attract general attention by their splendor are rare enough.
These eccentric visitors do not resemble the planets, for they have no
opaque body like the Earth, Venus, Mars, or any of the rest. They are
transparent nebulosities, of extreme lightness, without mass nor density. We
have just photographed the comet of the moment, July, 1903: the smallest
stars are visible through its tail, and even through the nucleus.
They arrive in every direction from the depths of space, as though to
reanimate themselves in the burning, luminous, electric solar center.
Attracted by some potent charm toward this dazzling focus, they come
inquisitive and ardent, to warm themselves at its furnace. At first pale and
feeble, they are born again when the Sun caresses them with his fervid heat.
Their motions accelerate, they haste to plunge wholly into the radiant light.
At length they burst out luminous and superb, when the day-star penetrates
them with his burning splendor, illuminates them with a marvelous
radiance, and crowns them with glory. But the Sun is generous. Having
showered benefits upon these gorgeous celestial butterflies that flutter
round him as round some altar of the gods, he grants them liberty to visit
other heavens, to seek fresh universes....
The original parabola is converted into an ellipse, if the imprudent
adventurer in returning to the Sun passes near some great planet, such as
Page 150
Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, or Neptune, and suffers its attraction. It is then
imprisoned by our system, and can no longer escape from it. After
reenforcement at the solar focus, it must return to the identical point at
which it felt the first pangs of a new destiny. Henceforward, it belongs to
our celestial family, and circles in a closed curve. Otherwise, it is free to
continue its rapid course toward other suns and other systems.
As a rule, the telescope shows three distinct parts in a comet. There is
first the more brilliant central point, or nucleus, surrounded by a nebulosity
called the hair, or brush, and prolonged in a luminous appendix stretching
out into the tail. The head of the comet is the brush and the nucleus
combined.
imprisoned by our system, and can no longer escape from it. After
reenforcement at the solar focus, it must return to the identical point at
which it felt the first pangs of a new destiny. Henceforward, it belongs to
our celestial family, and circles in a closed curve. Otherwise, it is free to
continue its rapid course toward other suns and other systems.
As a rule, the telescope shows three distinct parts in a comet. There is
first the more brilliant central point, or nucleus, surrounded by a nebulosity
called the hair, or brush, and prolonged in a luminous appendix stretching
out into the tail. The head of the comet is the brush and the nucleus
combined.
Page 151
Fig. 53.—The tails of Comets are opposed to the Sun.
It is usually supposed that the tail of a comet follows it throughout the
course of its peregrinations. Nothing of the kind. The appendix may even
precede the nucleus; it is always opposite the Sun,—that is to say, it is
situated on the prolongation of a straight line, starting from the Sun, and
passing through the nucleus (Fig. 53). The tail does not exist, so long as the
comet is at a distance from the orb of day; but in approaching the Sun, the
nebulosity is heated and dilates, giving birth to those mysterious tails and
fantastic streamers whose dimensions vary considerably for each comet.
The dilations and transformations undergone by the tail suggest that they
may be due to a repulsive force emanating from the Sun, an electric charge
transmitted doubtless through the ether. It is as though Phœbus blew upon
them with unprecedented force.
Telescopic comets are usually devoid of tail, even when they reach the
vicinity of the Sun. They appear as pale nebulosities, rounded or oval, more
condensed toward the center, without, however, showing any distinct
nucleus. These stars are only visible for a minute fraction of their course,
when they reach a point not far from the Sun and the terrestrial orbit.
The finest comets of the last century were those of 1811, 1843, 1858,
1861, 1874, 1880, 1881, and 1882. The Great Comet of 1811, after
spreading terror over certain peoples, notably in Russia, became the
providence of the vine-growers. As the wine was particularly good and
abundant that year, the peasants attributed this happy result to the influence
of the celestial visitant.
It is usually supposed that the tail of a comet follows it throughout the
course of its peregrinations. Nothing of the kind. The appendix may even
precede the nucleus; it is always opposite the Sun,—that is to say, it is
situated on the prolongation of a straight line, starting from the Sun, and
passing through the nucleus (Fig. 53). The tail does not exist, so long as the
comet is at a distance from the orb of day; but in approaching the Sun, the
nebulosity is heated and dilates, giving birth to those mysterious tails and
fantastic streamers whose dimensions vary considerably for each comet.
The dilations and transformations undergone by the tail suggest that they
may be due to a repulsive force emanating from the Sun, an electric charge
transmitted doubtless through the ether. It is as though Phœbus blew upon
them with unprecedented force.
Telescopic comets are usually devoid of tail, even when they reach the
vicinity of the Sun. They appear as pale nebulosities, rounded or oval, more
condensed toward the center, without, however, showing any distinct
nucleus. These stars are only visible for a minute fraction of their course,
when they reach a point not far from the Sun and the terrestrial orbit.
The finest comets of the last century were those of 1811, 1843, 1858,
1861, 1874, 1880, 1881, and 1882. The Great Comet of 1811, after
spreading terror over certain peoples, notably in Russia, became the
providence of the vine-growers. As the wine was particularly good and
abundant that year, the peasants attributed this happy result to the influence
of the celestial visitant.
Page 152
In 1843 one of these strange messengers from the Infinite appeared in
our Heavens. It was so brilliant that it was visible in full daylight on
February 28th, alongside of the Sun. This splendid comet was accompanied
by a marvelous rectilinear tail measuring 300,000,000 kilometers
(186,000,000 miles) in length, and its flight was so rapid that it turned the
solar hemisphere at perihelion in two hours, representing a speed of 550
kilometers (342 miles) a second.
But the most curious fact is that this radiant apparition passed so near the
Sun that it must have traversed its flames, and yet emerged from them safe
and sound.
Noteworthy also was the comet of 1858 (Fig. 49), discovered at Florence
by Donati. Its tail extended to a length of 90,000,000 kilometers
(55,900,000 miles), and its nucleus had a diameter of at least 900 kilometers
(559 miles). It is a curious coincidence that the wine was remarkably
excellent and abundant in that year also.
The comet of 1861 almost rivaled the preceding.
Coggia's Comet, in 1874, was also remarkable for its brilliancy, but was
very inferior to the last two. Finally, the latest worthy of mention appeared
in 1882. This magnificent comet also touched the Sun, traveling at a speed
of 480 kilometers (299 miles) per second. It crossed the gaseous
atmosphere of the orb of day, and then continued its course through infinity.
On the day of, and that following, its perihelion, it could be detected with
the unaided eye in full daylight, enthroned in the Heavens beside the
dazzling solar luminary. For the rest, it was neither that of 1858 nor of
1861.
Since 1882 we have not been favored with a visit from any fine comet;
but we are prepared to give any such a reception worthy of their
magnificence: first, because now that we have fathomed them we are no
longer awestruck; second, because we would gladly study them more
closely.
our Heavens. It was so brilliant that it was visible in full daylight on
February 28th, alongside of the Sun. This splendid comet was accompanied
by a marvelous rectilinear tail measuring 300,000,000 kilometers
(186,000,000 miles) in length, and its flight was so rapid that it turned the
solar hemisphere at perihelion in two hours, representing a speed of 550
kilometers (342 miles) a second.
But the most curious fact is that this radiant apparition passed so near the
Sun that it must have traversed its flames, and yet emerged from them safe
and sound.
Noteworthy also was the comet of 1858 (Fig. 49), discovered at Florence
by Donati. Its tail extended to a length of 90,000,000 kilometers
(55,900,000 miles), and its nucleus had a diameter of at least 900 kilometers
(559 miles). It is a curious coincidence that the wine was remarkably
excellent and abundant in that year also.
The comet of 1861 almost rivaled the preceding.
Coggia's Comet, in 1874, was also remarkable for its brilliancy, but was
very inferior to the last two. Finally, the latest worthy of mention appeared
in 1882. This magnificent comet also touched the Sun, traveling at a speed
of 480 kilometers (299 miles) per second. It crossed the gaseous
atmosphere of the orb of day, and then continued its course through infinity.
On the day of, and that following, its perihelion, it could be detected with
the unaided eye in full daylight, enthroned in the Heavens beside the
dazzling solar luminary. For the rest, it was neither that of 1858 nor of
1861.
Since 1882 we have not been favored with a visit from any fine comet;
but we are prepared to give any such a reception worthy of their
magnificence: first, because now that we have fathomed them we are no
longer awestruck; second, because we would gladly study them more
closely.
Page 153
In short, these hirsute stars, whose fantastic appearance impressed the
imagination of our ancestors so vividly, are no longer formidable. Their
mass is inconsiderable; they seem to consist mainly of the lightest of gases.
Analysis of their incandescence reveals a spectrum closely resembling that
of many nebulæ; the presence of carbon is more particularly obvious. Even
the nucleus is not solid, and is often transparent.
It is fair to say that the action of a comet might be deleterious if one of
these orbs were to arrive directly upon us. The transformation of motion
into heat, and the combination of the cometary gases with the oxygen of our
atmosphere might produce a conflagration, or a general poisoning of the
atmosphere.
But the collision of a comet with a planet is almost an impossibility. This
phenomenon could only occur if the comet crossed the planetary orbit at the
exact moment at which the planet was passing. When we think of the
immensity of space, of the extraordinary length of way traversed by a world
in its annual journey round the Sun, and the speed of its rotation, we see
why this coincidence is hardly likely to occur. Thus, among the hundreds of
comets catalogued, a few only cut the terrestrial orbit. One of them, that of
1832, traversed the path of our globe in the nights of October 29 and 30 in
that year; but the Earth only passed the same point thirty days later, and at
the critical period was more than 80,000,000 kilometers (50,000,000 miles)
away from the comet.
On June 30, 1861, however, the Earth passed through the extremity of
the tail of the Great Comet of that year. No one even noticed it. The effects
were doubtless quite immaterial.
In 1872 we were to collide with Biela's Comet, lost since 1852; now, as
we shall presently see, we came with flying colors out of that disagreeable
situation, because the comet had disintegrated, and was reduced to powder.
So we may sleep in peace as regards future danger likely to come to us from
imagination of our ancestors so vividly, are no longer formidable. Their
mass is inconsiderable; they seem to consist mainly of the lightest of gases.
Analysis of their incandescence reveals a spectrum closely resembling that
of many nebulæ; the presence of carbon is more particularly obvious. Even
the nucleus is not solid, and is often transparent.
It is fair to say that the action of a comet might be deleterious if one of
these orbs were to arrive directly upon us. The transformation of motion
into heat, and the combination of the cometary gases with the oxygen of our
atmosphere might produce a conflagration, or a general poisoning of the
atmosphere.
But the collision of a comet with a planet is almost an impossibility. This
phenomenon could only occur if the comet crossed the planetary orbit at the
exact moment at which the planet was passing. When we think of the
immensity of space, of the extraordinary length of way traversed by a world
in its annual journey round the Sun, and the speed of its rotation, we see
why this coincidence is hardly likely to occur. Thus, among the hundreds of
comets catalogued, a few only cut the terrestrial orbit. One of them, that of
1832, traversed the path of our globe in the nights of October 29 and 30 in
that year; but the Earth only passed the same point thirty days later, and at
the critical period was more than 80,000,000 kilometers (50,000,000 miles)
away from the comet.
On June 30, 1861, however, the Earth passed through the extremity of
the tail of the Great Comet of that year. No one even noticed it. The effects
were doubtless quite immaterial.
In 1872 we were to collide with Biela's Comet, lost since 1852; now, as
we shall presently see, we came with flying colors out of that disagreeable
situation, because the comet had disintegrated, and was reduced to powder.
So we may sleep in peace as regards future danger likely to come to us from
Page 154
comets. There is little fear of the destruction of humanity by these windy
bags.
These ethereal beauties whose blond locks float carelessly upon the
azure night are not concerned with us; they seem to have no other
preoccupation than to race from sun to sun, visiting new Heavens,
indifferent to the astonishment they produce in us. They speed restlessly
and tirelessly through infinity; they are the Amazons of space.
What suns, what worlds must they have visited since the moment of
their birth! If these splendid fugitives could relate the story of their
wanderings, how gladly should we listen to the enchanting descriptions of
the various abodes they have journeyed to! But alas! these mysterious
explorers are dumb; they tell none of their secrets, and we must needs
respect their enigmatic silence.
Yet, some of them have left us a modest token of remembrance, an
almost impalpable nothing, sufficient, however, to enable us to address our
thanks to the considerate messenger.
Can there be any one upon the Earth who has not been struck by the
phosphorescent lights that glide through the somber night, leaving a
brilliant silver or golden track—the luminous, ephemeral trail of a meteor?
Sometimes, when Night has silently spread the immensity of her wings
above the weary Earth, a shining speck is seen to detach itself in the shades
of evening from the starry vault, shooting lightly through the constellations
to lose itself in the infinitude of space.
bags.
These ethereal beauties whose blond locks float carelessly upon the
azure night are not concerned with us; they seem to have no other
preoccupation than to race from sun to sun, visiting new Heavens,
indifferent to the astonishment they produce in us. They speed restlessly
and tirelessly through infinity; they are the Amazons of space.
What suns, what worlds must they have visited since the moment of
their birth! If these splendid fugitives could relate the story of their
wanderings, how gladly should we listen to the enchanting descriptions of
the various abodes they have journeyed to! But alas! these mysterious
explorers are dumb; they tell none of their secrets, and we must needs
respect their enigmatic silence.
Yet, some of them have left us a modest token of remembrance, an
almost impalpable nothing, sufficient, however, to enable us to address our
thanks to the considerate messenger.
Can there be any one upon the Earth who has not been struck by the
phosphorescent lights that glide through the somber night, leaving a
brilliant silver or golden track—the luminous, ephemeral trail of a meteor?
Sometimes, when Night has silently spread the immensity of her wings
above the weary Earth, a shining speck is seen to detach itself in the shades
of evening from the starry vault, shooting lightly through the constellations
to lose itself in the infinitude of space.
Page 155
Fig. 54.—A Meteor.
These bewitching sparks attract our eyes and chain our senses.
Fascinating celestial fireflies, their dainty flames dart in every direction
through space, sowing the fine dust of their gilded wings upon the fields of
Heaven. They are born to die; their life is only a breath; yet the impression
which they make upon the imagination of mortals is of the profoundest.
These bewitching sparks attract our eyes and chain our senses.
Fascinating celestial fireflies, their dainty flames dart in every direction
through space, sowing the fine dust of their gilded wings upon the fields of
Heaven. They are born to die; their life is only a breath; yet the impression
which they make upon the imagination of mortals is of the profoundest.
Page 156
The young girl dreaming in the delicious tranquillity of the transparent
night smiles at this charming sister in the Heavens (Fig. 54). What can not
this adorable star announce to the tender and loving heart? Is it the shy
messenger of the happiness so long desired? Its unpremeditated appearance
fills the soul with a ray of hope and makes it tremble. It is a golden beam
that glides into the heart, expanding it in the thrills of a sudden and
ephemeral pleasure.... The radiant meteor seems to quit the velvet of the
deep blue sky to respond to the appeal of the imploring voice that seeks its
succor.
What secrets has it not surprised! And who bears malice against it? It is
the friend of the betrothed who invoke its passage to confide their wishes,
and associate it with their dreams. Tradition holds that if a wish be
formulated during the visible passage of a meteor it will certainly be
fulfilled before the year is out. Between ourselves, however, this is but a
surviving figment of the ancestral imagination, for this celestial jewel takes
no such active part in the doings of Humanity.... Besides, try to express a
wish distinctly in a second!
It is a curious fact that while comets have so often spread terror on the
Earth, shooting stars should on the contrary have been regarded with
benevolent feelings at all times. And what is a shooting star? These dainty
excursionists from the celestial shores are not, as is supposed, true stars.
They are atoms, nothings, minute fragments deriving in general from the
disintegration of comets. They come to us from a vast distance, from
millions on millions of miles, and circle in swarms around the Sun,
following a very elongated ellipse which closely resembles that of the
cometary orbit. Their flight is extremely rapid, reaching sometimes more
than 40 kilometers (25 miles) per second, a cometary speed that is, as we
have seen, greatly above that of our terrestrial vehicle, which amounts to 29
to 30 kilometers (about 19 miles).
These little corpuscles are not intrinsically luminous; but when the orbit
of a swarm of meteors crosses our planet, a violent shock arises, the speed
night smiles at this charming sister in the Heavens (Fig. 54). What can not
this adorable star announce to the tender and loving heart? Is it the shy
messenger of the happiness so long desired? Its unpremeditated appearance
fills the soul with a ray of hope and makes it tremble. It is a golden beam
that glides into the heart, expanding it in the thrills of a sudden and
ephemeral pleasure.... The radiant meteor seems to quit the velvet of the
deep blue sky to respond to the appeal of the imploring voice that seeks its
succor.
What secrets has it not surprised! And who bears malice against it? It is
the friend of the betrothed who invoke its passage to confide their wishes,
and associate it with their dreams. Tradition holds that if a wish be
formulated during the visible passage of a meteor it will certainly be
fulfilled before the year is out. Between ourselves, however, this is but a
surviving figment of the ancestral imagination, for this celestial jewel takes
no such active part in the doings of Humanity.... Besides, try to express a
wish distinctly in a second!
It is a curious fact that while comets have so often spread terror on the
Earth, shooting stars should on the contrary have been regarded with
benevolent feelings at all times. And what is a shooting star? These dainty
excursionists from the celestial shores are not, as is supposed, true stars.
They are atoms, nothings, minute fragments deriving in general from the
disintegration of comets. They come to us from a vast distance, from
millions on millions of miles, and circle in swarms around the Sun,
following a very elongated ellipse which closely resembles that of the
cometary orbit. Their flight is extremely rapid, reaching sometimes more
than 40 kilometers (25 miles) per second, a cometary speed that is, as we
have seen, greatly above that of our terrestrial vehicle, which amounts to 29
to 30 kilometers (about 19 miles).
These little corpuscles are not intrinsically luminous; but when the orbit
of a swarm of meteors crosses our planet, a violent shock arises, the speed
Page 157
of which may be as great as 72 kilometers (45 miles) in the first second if
we meet the star shower directly; the average rate, however, does not
exceed 30 to 40 kilometers (19 to 25 miles), for these meteors nearly
always cross our path obliquely. The height at which they arrive is usually
110 kilometers (68 miles), and 80 kilometers (50 miles) at the moment of
disappearance of the meteor; but shooting stars have been observed at 300
kilometers (186 miles).
The friction caused by this collision high up in the atmosphere
transforms the motion into heat. The molecules incandesce, and burn like
true stars with a brilliancy that is often magnificent.
But their glory is of short duration. The excessive heat resulting from the
shock consumes the poor firefly; its remains evaporate, and drop slowly to
the Earth, where they are deposited on the surface of the soil in a sort of
ferruginous dust mixed with carbon and nickel. Some one hundred and
forty-six milliards of them reach us annually, as seen by the unaided eye,
and many more in the telescope; the effect of these showers of meteoric
matter is an insensible increase in the mass of our globe, a slight lessening
of its rotary motion, and the acceleration of the lunar movements of
revolution.
Although the appearance of shooting stars is a common enough
phenomenon, visible every night of the year, there are certain times when
they arrive in swarms, from different quarters of the sky. The most
remarkable dates in this connection are the night of August 10th and the
morning of November 14th. Every one knows the shooting stars of August
10th, because they arrive in the fine warm summer evenings so favorable to
general contemplation of the Heavens. The phenomenon lasts till the 12th,
and even beyond, but the maximum is on the 10th. When the sky is very
clear, and there is no moon, hundreds of shooting stars can be counted on
those three nights, sometimes thousands. They all seem to come from the
same quarter of the Heavens, which is called the radiant, and is situated for
the August swarm in the constellation of Perseus, whence they have
we meet the star shower directly; the average rate, however, does not
exceed 30 to 40 kilometers (19 to 25 miles), for these meteors nearly
always cross our path obliquely. The height at which they arrive is usually
110 kilometers (68 miles), and 80 kilometers (50 miles) at the moment of
disappearance of the meteor; but shooting stars have been observed at 300
kilometers (186 miles).
The friction caused by this collision high up in the atmosphere
transforms the motion into heat. The molecules incandesce, and burn like
true stars with a brilliancy that is often magnificent.
But their glory is of short duration. The excessive heat resulting from the
shock consumes the poor firefly; its remains evaporate, and drop slowly to
the Earth, where they are deposited on the surface of the soil in a sort of
ferruginous dust mixed with carbon and nickel. Some one hundred and
forty-six milliards of them reach us annually, as seen by the unaided eye,
and many more in the telescope; the effect of these showers of meteoric
matter is an insensible increase in the mass of our globe, a slight lessening
of its rotary motion, and the acceleration of the lunar movements of
revolution.
Although the appearance of shooting stars is a common enough
phenomenon, visible every night of the year, there are certain times when
they arrive in swarms, from different quarters of the sky. The most
remarkable dates in this connection are the night of August 10th and the
morning of November 14th. Every one knows the shooting stars of August
10th, because they arrive in the fine warm summer evenings so favorable to
general contemplation of the Heavens. The phenomenon lasts till the 12th,
and even beyond, but the maximum is on the 10th. When the sky is very
clear, and there is no moon, hundreds of shooting stars can be counted on
those three nights, sometimes thousands. They all seem to come from the
same quarter of the Heavens, which is called the radiant, and is situated for
the August swarm in the constellation of Perseus, whence they have
Page 158
received the name of Perseids. Our forefathers also called them the tears of
St. Lawrence, because the feast of that saint is on the same date. These
shooting stars describe a very elongated ellipse, and their orbit has been
identified with that of the Great Comet of 1862.
The shower of incandescent asteroids on November 14th is often much
more abundant than the preceding. In 1799, 1833, and 1866, the meteors
were so numerous that they were described as showers of rain, especially on
the first two dates. For several hours the sky was furrowed with falling
stars. An English mariner, Andrew Ellicot, who made the drawing we
reproduce (Fig. 55), described the phenomenon as stupendous and alarming
(November 12, 1799, 3 a.m.). The same occurred on November 13, 1833.
The meteors that scarred the Heavens on that night were reckoned at
240,000. These shooting stars received the name of Leonids, because their
radiant is situated in the constellation of the Lion.
St. Lawrence, because the feast of that saint is on the same date. These
shooting stars describe a very elongated ellipse, and their orbit has been
identified with that of the Great Comet of 1862.
The shower of incandescent asteroids on November 14th is often much
more abundant than the preceding. In 1799, 1833, and 1866, the meteors
were so numerous that they were described as showers of rain, especially on
the first two dates. For several hours the sky was furrowed with falling
stars. An English mariner, Andrew Ellicot, who made the drawing we
reproduce (Fig. 55), described the phenomenon as stupendous and alarming
(November 12, 1799, 3 a.m.). The same occurred on November 13, 1833.
The meteors that scarred the Heavens on that night were reckoned at
240,000. These shooting stars received the name of Leonids, because their
radiant is situated in the constellation of the Lion.
Page 159
Fig. 55.—Shooting Stars of November 12, 1799.
From a contemporary drawing.
This swarm follows the same orbit as the comet of 1866, which travels
as far as Uranus, and comes back to the vicinity of the Sun every thirty-
three years. Hence we were entitled to expect another splendid apparition in
1899, but the expectations of the astronomers were disappointed. All the
preparations for the appropriate reception of these celestial visitors failed to
From a contemporary drawing.
This swarm follows the same orbit as the comet of 1866, which travels
as far as Uranus, and comes back to the vicinity of the Sun every thirty-
three years. Hence we were entitled to expect another splendid apparition in
1899, but the expectations of the astronomers were disappointed. All the
preparations for the appropriate reception of these celestial visitors failed to
Page 160
bring about the desired result. The notes made in observatories, or in
balloons, admitted of the registration of only a very small number of
meteors. The maximum was thirteen. During that night, some 200 shooting
stars were counted. There were more in 1900, 1901, and, above all, in 1902.
This swarm has become displaced.
The night of November 27th again is visited by a number of shooting
stars that are the disaggregated remains of the Comet of Biela. This comet,
discovered by Biela in 1827, accomplished its revolution in six and a half
years, and down to 1846 it responded punctually to the astronomers who
expected its return as fixed by calculation. But on January 13, 1846, the
celestial wanderer broke in half: each fragment went its own way, side by
side, to return within sight from the Earth in 1852. It was their last
appearance. That year the twin comets could still be seen, though pale and
insignificant. Soon they vanished into the depths of night, and never
appeared again. They were looked for in vain, and were despaired of, when
on November 27, 1872, instead of the shattered comet, came a magnificent
rain of shooting stars. They fell through the Heavens, numerous as the
flakes of a shower of snow.
The same phenomenon recurred on November 27, 1885, and confirmed
the hypothesis of the demolition and disaggregation of Biela's Comet into
shooting stars.
There is an immense variety in the brilliancy of the shooting stars, from
the weak telescopic sparks that vanish like a flash of lightning, to the
incandescent bolides or fire-balls that explode in the atmosphere.
Fig. 56 shows an example of these, and it represents a fire-ball observed
at the Observatory of Juvisy on the night of August 10, 1899. It arrived
from Cassiopeia, and burst in Cepheus.
balloons, admitted of the registration of only a very small number of
meteors. The maximum was thirteen. During that night, some 200 shooting
stars were counted. There were more in 1900, 1901, and, above all, in 1902.
This swarm has become displaced.
The night of November 27th again is visited by a number of shooting
stars that are the disaggregated remains of the Comet of Biela. This comet,
discovered by Biela in 1827, accomplished its revolution in six and a half
years, and down to 1846 it responded punctually to the astronomers who
expected its return as fixed by calculation. But on January 13, 1846, the
celestial wanderer broke in half: each fragment went its own way, side by
side, to return within sight from the Earth in 1852. It was their last
appearance. That year the twin comets could still be seen, though pale and
insignificant. Soon they vanished into the depths of night, and never
appeared again. They were looked for in vain, and were despaired of, when
on November 27, 1872, instead of the shattered comet, came a magnificent
rain of shooting stars. They fell through the Heavens, numerous as the
flakes of a shower of snow.
The same phenomenon recurred on November 27, 1885, and confirmed
the hypothesis of the demolition and disaggregation of Biela's Comet into
shooting stars.
There is an immense variety in the brilliancy of the shooting stars, from
the weak telescopic sparks that vanish like a flash of lightning, to the
incandescent bolides or fire-balls that explode in the atmosphere.
Fig. 56 shows an example of these, and it represents a fire-ball observed
at the Observatory of Juvisy on the night of August 10, 1899. It arrived
from Cassiopeia, and burst in Cepheus.
Page 161
This phenomenon may occur by day as well as by night. It is often
accompanied by one or several explosions, the report of which is sometimes
perceptible to a considerable distance, and by a shower of meteorites. The
globe of fire bursts, and splits up into luminous fragments, scattered in all
directions. The different parts of the fire-ball fall to the surface of the Earth,
under the name of aerolites, or rather of uranoliths, since they arrive from
the depths of space, and not from our atmosphere.
From the most ancient times we hear of showers of uranoliths to which
popular superstitions were attached; and the Greeks even gave the name of
Sideros to iron, the first iron used having been sidereal.
accompanied by one or several explosions, the report of which is sometimes
perceptible to a considerable distance, and by a shower of meteorites. The
globe of fire bursts, and splits up into luminous fragments, scattered in all
directions. The different parts of the fire-ball fall to the surface of the Earth,
under the name of aerolites, or rather of uranoliths, since they arrive from
the depths of space, and not from our atmosphere.
From the most ancient times we hear of showers of uranoliths to which
popular superstitions were attached; and the Greeks even gave the name of
Sideros to iron, the first iron used having been sidereal.
Page 162
Fig. 56.—Fire-Ball seen from the Observatory at Juvisy, August 10, 1899.
Page 163
Fig. 57.—Explosion of a Fire-Ball above Madrid, February 10, 1896.
No year passes without the announcement of several showers of
uranoliths, and the phenomenon sometimes causes great alarm to those who
witness it. One of the most remarkable explosions is that which occurred
above Madrid, February 10, 1896, a fragment from which, sent me by M.
Arcimis, Director of the Meteorological Institute, fell immediately in front
of the National Museum (Fig. 57). The phenomenon occurred at 9.30 a.m.,
in brilliant sunshine. The flash of the explosion was so dazzling that it even
illuminated the interior of the houses; an alarming clap of thunder was
heard seventy seconds after, and it was believed that an explosion of
No year passes without the announcement of several showers of
uranoliths, and the phenomenon sometimes causes great alarm to those who
witness it. One of the most remarkable explosions is that which occurred
above Madrid, February 10, 1896, a fragment from which, sent me by M.
Arcimis, Director of the Meteorological Institute, fell immediately in front
of the National Museum (Fig. 57). The phenomenon occurred at 9.30 a.m.,
in brilliant sunshine. The flash of the explosion was so dazzling that it even
illuminated the interior of the houses; an alarming clap of thunder was
heard seventy seconds after, and it was believed that an explosion of
Page 164
dynamite had occurred. The fire-ball burst at a height of fourteen miles, and
was seen as far as 435 miles from Madrid!
In one of Raphael's finest pictures (The Madonna of Foligno) a fire-ball
may be seen beneath a rainbow (Fig. 58), the painter wishing to preserve
the remembrance of it, as it fell near Milan, on September 4, 1511. This
picture dates from 1512.
The dimensions of these meteorites vary considerably; they are of all
sizes, from the impalpable dust that floats in the air, to the enormous blocks
exposed in the Museum of Natural History in Paris. Many of them weigh
several million pounds. That represented below fell in Mexico during the
shower of meteors of November 27, 1885. It weighed about four pounds.
was seen as far as 435 miles from Madrid!
In one of Raphael's finest pictures (The Madonna of Foligno) a fire-ball
may be seen beneath a rainbow (Fig. 58), the painter wishing to preserve
the remembrance of it, as it fell near Milan, on September 4, 1511. This
picture dates from 1512.
The dimensions of these meteorites vary considerably; they are of all
sizes, from the impalpable dust that floats in the air, to the enormous blocks
exposed in the Museum of Natural History in Paris. Many of them weigh
several million pounds. That represented below fell in Mexico during the
shower of meteors of November 27, 1885. It weighed about four pounds.
Page 165
Fig. 58.—Raphael's Fire-Ball (The Madonna of Foligno).
These bolides and uranoliths come to us from the depths of space; but
they do not appear to have the same origin as the shooting stars. They may
arise from worlds destroyed by explosion or shock, or even from planetary
volcanoes. The lightest of them may have been expelled from the volcanoes
of the Moon. Some of the most massive, in which iron predominates, may
These bolides and uranoliths come to us from the depths of space; but
they do not appear to have the same origin as the shooting stars. They may
arise from worlds destroyed by explosion or shock, or even from planetary
volcanoes. The lightest of them may have been expelled from the volcanoes
of the Moon. Some of the most massive, in which iron predominates, may
Page 166
even have issued from the bowels of the Earth, projected into space by
some volcanic explosion, at an epoch when our globe was perpetually
convulsed by cataclysms of extraordinary violence. They return to us to-day
after being removed from the Earth to distances proportional to the initial
speed imparted to them. This origin seems the more admissible as the
stones that fall from the skies exhibit a mineral composition identical with
that of the terrestrial materials.
Fig. 59.—A Uranolith.
In any case, these uranoliths bring us back at least by their fall to our
Earth, and from henceforward we will remain upon it, to study its position
in space, and to take account of the place it fills in the Universe, and of the
astronomical laws that govern our destiny.
some volcanic explosion, at an epoch when our globe was perpetually
convulsed by cataclysms of extraordinary violence. They return to us to-day
after being removed from the Earth to distances proportional to the initial
speed imparted to them. This origin seems the more admissible as the
stones that fall from the skies exhibit a mineral composition identical with
that of the terrestrial materials.
Fig. 59.—A Uranolith.
In any case, these uranoliths bring us back at least by their fall to our
Earth, and from henceforward we will remain upon it, to study its position
in space, and to take account of the place it fills in the Universe, and of the
astronomical laws that govern our destiny.
Page 167
CHAPTER VIII
THE EARTH
Our grand celestial journey lands us upon our own little planet, on this
globe that gravitates between Mars and Venus (between War and Love),
circulating like her brothers of the solar system, around the colossal Sun.
The Earth! The name evokes in us the image of Life, and calls up the
theater of our activities, our ambitions, our joys and sorrows. Does it not, in
fact, to ignorant eyes, represent the whole of the universe?
And yet, what is the Earth?
The Earth is a star in the Heavens. We learned this much in our first
lesson. It is a globe of opaque material, similar to the planets Mercury,
Venus, Mars, Jupiter, etc., as previously described. Isolated on all sides in
space, it revolves round the Sun, along a vast orbit that it accomplishes in a
year. And while it thus glides along the lines of solar attraction, the
terrestrial ball rotates rapidly upon itself in twenty-four hours.
These statements may appear dubious at first sight, and contradictory to
the evidence of our senses.
Now that the surface of the Earth has been explored in all directions,
there is no longer room to doubt that it is a globe, a sort of ball that we
adhere to. A journey round the world is common enough to-day, and always
yields the most complete evidence of the spherical nature of the Earth. On
the other hand, the curvature of the seas is a no less certain proof. When a
ship reaches the dark-blue line that appears to separate the sky from the
ocean, it seems to be hanging on the horizon. Little by little, however, as it
recedes, it drops below the horizon line; the tops of the masts being the last
THE EARTH
Our grand celestial journey lands us upon our own little planet, on this
globe that gravitates between Mars and Venus (between War and Love),
circulating like her brothers of the solar system, around the colossal Sun.
The Earth! The name evokes in us the image of Life, and calls up the
theater of our activities, our ambitions, our joys and sorrows. Does it not, in
fact, to ignorant eyes, represent the whole of the universe?
And yet, what is the Earth?
The Earth is a star in the Heavens. We learned this much in our first
lesson. It is a globe of opaque material, similar to the planets Mercury,
Venus, Mars, Jupiter, etc., as previously described. Isolated on all sides in
space, it revolves round the Sun, along a vast orbit that it accomplishes in a
year. And while it thus glides along the lines of solar attraction, the
terrestrial ball rotates rapidly upon itself in twenty-four hours.
These statements may appear dubious at first sight, and contradictory to
the evidence of our senses.
Now that the surface of the Earth has been explored in all directions,
there is no longer room to doubt that it is a globe, a sort of ball that we
adhere to. A journey round the world is common enough to-day, and always
yields the most complete evidence of the spherical nature of the Earth. On
the other hand, the curvature of the seas is a no less certain proof. When a
ship reaches the dark-blue line that appears to separate the sky from the
ocean, it seems to be hanging on the horizon. Little by little, however, as it
recedes, it drops below the horizon line; the tops of the masts being the last
Page 168
to disappear. The observer on board ship witnesses the same phenomenon.
The low shores are first to disappear, while the high coasts and mountains
are much longer visible.
The aspect of the Heavens gives another proof of the Earth's rotundity.
As one travels North or South, new stars rise higher and higher above the
horizon in the one direction or the other, and those which shine in the
latitude one is leaving, gradually disappear. If the surface of the Earth were
flat, the ships on the sea would be visible as long as our sight could pierce
the distance, and all the stars of the Heavens would be equally visible from
the different quarters of the world.
Lastly, during the eclipses of the Moon, the shadow projected by the
Earth upon our satellite is always round. This is another proof of the
spherical nature of the terrestrial globe.
We described the Earth as an orb in the Heavens, similar to all the other
planets of the great solar family. We see these sister planets of our world
circulating under the starry vault, like luminous points whose brilliancy is
sometimes dazzling. For us they are marvelous celestial birds hovering in
the ether, upheld by invisible wings. The Earth is just the same. It is
supported by nothing. Like the soap-bubble that assumes a lovely
iridescence in the rays of the Sun, or, better, like the balloon rapidly
cleaving the air, it is isolated from every kind of support.
Some minds have difficulty in conceiving this isolation, because they
form a false notion of weight.
The astronomers of antiquity, who divined it, knew not how to prevent
the Earth from falling. They asked anxiously what the strong bands capable
of holding up this block of no inconsiderable weight could be. At first they
thought it floated on the waters like an island. Then they postulated solid
pillars, or even supposed it might turn on pivots placed at the poles. But on
what would all these imaginary supports have rested? All these fanciful
foundations of the Earth had to be given up, and it was recognized as a
The low shores are first to disappear, while the high coasts and mountains
are much longer visible.
The aspect of the Heavens gives another proof of the Earth's rotundity.
As one travels North or South, new stars rise higher and higher above the
horizon in the one direction or the other, and those which shine in the
latitude one is leaving, gradually disappear. If the surface of the Earth were
flat, the ships on the sea would be visible as long as our sight could pierce
the distance, and all the stars of the Heavens would be equally visible from
the different quarters of the world.
Lastly, during the eclipses of the Moon, the shadow projected by the
Earth upon our satellite is always round. This is another proof of the
spherical nature of the terrestrial globe.
We described the Earth as an orb in the Heavens, similar to all the other
planets of the great solar family. We see these sister planets of our world
circulating under the starry vault, like luminous points whose brilliancy is
sometimes dazzling. For us they are marvelous celestial birds hovering in
the ether, upheld by invisible wings. The Earth is just the same. It is
supported by nothing. Like the soap-bubble that assumes a lovely
iridescence in the rays of the Sun, or, better, like the balloon rapidly
cleaving the air, it is isolated from every kind of support.
Some minds have difficulty in conceiving this isolation, because they
form a false notion of weight.
The astronomers of antiquity, who divined it, knew not how to prevent
the Earth from falling. They asked anxiously what the strong bands capable
of holding up this block of no inconsiderable weight could be. At first they
thought it floated on the waters like an island. Then they postulated solid
pillars, or even supposed it might turn on pivots placed at the poles. But on
what would all these imaginary supports have rested? All these fanciful
foundations of the Earth had to be given up, and it was recognized as a
Page 169
globe, isolated in every part. This illusion of the ancients, which still
obtains for a great many citizens of our globule, arises, as we said, from a
false conception of weight.
Weight and attraction are one and the same force.
A body can only fall when it is attracted, drawn by a more important
body. Now, in whatever direction we may wander upon the globe, our feet
are always downward. Down is therefore the center of the Earth.
The terrestrial globe may be regarded as an immense ball of magnet, and
its attraction holds us at its surface. We weigh toward the center. We may
travel over this surface in all directions; our feet will always be below,
whatever the direction of our steps. For us, "below" is the inside of our
planet, and "above" is the immensity of the Heavens that extend above our
heads, right round the globe.
This once understood, where could the Earth fall to? The question is an
absurdity. "Below" being toward the center, it would have to fall out of
itself.
Let us then picture the Earth as a vast sphere, detached from all that
exists around it, in the infinity of the Heavens. A point diametrically
opposed to another is called its antipodes. New Zealand is approximately
the antipodes to France. Well, for the inhabitants of New Zealand and of
France the top is reciprocally opposed, and the bottom, or the feet, are
diametrically in opposition. And yet, for one as for the other, the bottom is
the soil they are held to, and the top is space above their heads.
The Earth turns on itself in twenty-four hours. Whatever is above us,
e.g., at midday, we call high; twelve hours later, at midnight, we give the
same qualification to the part of space that was under our feet at noon. What
is in the sky, and over our heads, at a given hour, is under our feet, and yet
always in the sky, twelve hours later. Our position, in relation to the space
obtains for a great many citizens of our globule, arises, as we said, from a
false conception of weight.
Weight and attraction are one and the same force.
A body can only fall when it is attracted, drawn by a more important
body. Now, in whatever direction we may wander upon the globe, our feet
are always downward. Down is therefore the center of the Earth.
The terrestrial globe may be regarded as an immense ball of magnet, and
its attraction holds us at its surface. We weigh toward the center. We may
travel over this surface in all directions; our feet will always be below,
whatever the direction of our steps. For us, "below" is the inside of our
planet, and "above" is the immensity of the Heavens that extend above our
heads, right round the globe.
This once understood, where could the Earth fall to? The question is an
absurdity. "Below" being toward the center, it would have to fall out of
itself.
Let us then picture the Earth as a vast sphere, detached from all that
exists around it, in the infinity of the Heavens. A point diametrically
opposed to another is called its antipodes. New Zealand is approximately
the antipodes to France. Well, for the inhabitants of New Zealand and of
France the top is reciprocally opposed, and the bottom, or the feet, are
diametrically in opposition. And yet, for one as for the other, the bottom is
the soil they are held to, and the top is space above their heads.
The Earth turns on itself in twenty-four hours. Whatever is above us,
e.g., at midday, we call high; twelve hours later, at midnight, we give the
same qualification to the part of space that was under our feet at noon. What
is in the sky, and over our heads, at a given hour, is under our feet, and yet
always in the sky, twelve hours later. Our position, in relation to the space
Page 170
that surrounds us, changes from hour to hour, and "top" and "bottom" vary
also, relatively to our position.
Our planet is thus a ball, slightly flattened at the poles (by about 1⁄292).
Its diameter, at the equator, is 12,742 kilometers (7,926 miles); from one
pole to the other is a little less, owing to the flattening of the polar caps. The
difference is some 43 kilometers (about 27 miles).
Its circumference is 40,000 kilometers (24,900 miles). This ball is
surrounded by an aerial envelope, the atmosphere, the height of which can
not be less than 300 kilometers (186 miles), according to the observations
made on certain shooting stars.
We all know that this layer of air, at the bottom of which we live, is a
beautiful azure blue that seems to separate us from the sidereal abyss,
spreading over our heads in a kind of vault that is often filled with clouds,
and giving the illusion of resting far off on the circle of the horizon. But this
is only an illusion. In reality, there is neither vault nor horizon; space is
open in all directions. If the atmosphere did not exist, or if it were
completely transparent, we should see the stars by day as by night, for they
are continually round us, at noon as at midnight, and we can see them in the
full daylight, with the help of astronomical instruments. In fact, certain stars
(the radiant Venus and the dazzling Jupiter) pierce the veil of the
atmosphere, and are visible with the unaided eye in full daylight.
The terrestrial surface is 510,000,000 square kilometers (200,000,000
square miles). The waters of the ocean cover three-quarters of this surface,
i.e., 383,200,000 square kilometers (150,000,000 square miles), and the
continents only occupy 136,600,000 square kilometers (55,000 square
miles). France represents about the thousandth part of the total superficies
of the globe.
Despite the asperities of mountain ranges, and the abysses hollowed out
by the waters, the terrestrial globe is fairly regular, and in relation to its
volume its surface is smoother than that of an orange. The highest summits
also, relatively to our position.
Our planet is thus a ball, slightly flattened at the poles (by about 1⁄292).
Its diameter, at the equator, is 12,742 kilometers (7,926 miles); from one
pole to the other is a little less, owing to the flattening of the polar caps. The
difference is some 43 kilometers (about 27 miles).
Its circumference is 40,000 kilometers (24,900 miles). This ball is
surrounded by an aerial envelope, the atmosphere, the height of which can
not be less than 300 kilometers (186 miles), according to the observations
made on certain shooting stars.
We all know that this layer of air, at the bottom of which we live, is a
beautiful azure blue that seems to separate us from the sidereal abyss,
spreading over our heads in a kind of vault that is often filled with clouds,
and giving the illusion of resting far off on the circle of the horizon. But this
is only an illusion. In reality, there is neither vault nor horizon; space is
open in all directions. If the atmosphere did not exist, or if it were
completely transparent, we should see the stars by day as by night, for they
are continually round us, at noon as at midnight, and we can see them in the
full daylight, with the help of astronomical instruments. In fact, certain stars
(the radiant Venus and the dazzling Jupiter) pierce the veil of the
atmosphere, and are visible with the unaided eye in full daylight.
The terrestrial surface is 510,000,000 square kilometers (200,000,000
square miles). The waters of the ocean cover three-quarters of this surface,
i.e., 383,200,000 square kilometers (150,000,000 square miles), and the
continents only occupy 136,600,000 square kilometers (55,000 square
miles). France represents about the thousandth part of the total superficies
of the globe.
Despite the asperities of mountain ranges, and the abysses hollowed out
by the waters, the terrestrial globe is fairly regular, and in relation to its
volume its surface is smoother than that of an orange. The highest summits
Page 171
of the Himalaya, the profoundest depths of the somber ocean, do not attain
to the millionth part of its diameter.
In weight, the Earth is five and a half times heavier than would be a
globe of water of the same dimensions. That is to say:
6,957,930,000,000,000,000,000,000 kilograms
(6,833,000,000,000,000,000,000 tons).
The atmospheric atmosphere with which it is surrounded represents.
6,263,000,000,000,000,000 kilograms
(6,151,000,000,000,000 tons).
Each of us carries an average weight of some 17,000 kilograms (16 tons)
upon his shoulders. Perhaps some one will ask how it is that we are not
crushed by this weight, which is out of all proportion with our strength, but
to which, nevertheless, we appear insensible. It is because the aerial fluid
enclosed within our bodies exerts a pressure equal and opposite to the
external atmospheric pressure, and these pressures are at equilibrium.
The Earth is characterized by no essential or particular differences
relatively to the other worlds of our system. Like Venus of the limpid rays,
like the dazzling Jupiter, like all the planets, she courses through space,
carrying into Infinitude our hopes and destinies. Bigger than Mercury,
Venus, and Mars, she presents a very modest figure in comparison with the
enormous Jupiter, the strange system of Saturn, of Uranus, and even of
Neptune. For us her greatest interest is that she serves as our residence, and
if she were not our habitation we should scarcely notice her. Dark in herself,
she burns at a distance like a star, returning to space the light she receives
from the Sun. At the distance of our satellite, she shines like an enormous
moon, fourteen times larger and more luminous than our gentle Phœbe.
Observed from Mercury or Venus, she embellishes the midnight sky with
her sparkling purity as Jupiter does for us. Seen from Mars, she is a brilliant
morning and evening star, presenting phases similar to those which Mars
to the millionth part of its diameter.
In weight, the Earth is five and a half times heavier than would be a
globe of water of the same dimensions. That is to say:
6,957,930,000,000,000,000,000,000 kilograms
(6,833,000,000,000,000,000,000 tons).
The atmospheric atmosphere with which it is surrounded represents.
6,263,000,000,000,000,000 kilograms
(6,151,000,000,000,000 tons).
Each of us carries an average weight of some 17,000 kilograms (16 tons)
upon his shoulders. Perhaps some one will ask how it is that we are not
crushed by this weight, which is out of all proportion with our strength, but
to which, nevertheless, we appear insensible. It is because the aerial fluid
enclosed within our bodies exerts a pressure equal and opposite to the
external atmospheric pressure, and these pressures are at equilibrium.
The Earth is characterized by no essential or particular differences
relatively to the other worlds of our system. Like Venus of the limpid rays,
like the dazzling Jupiter, like all the planets, she courses through space,
carrying into Infinitude our hopes and destinies. Bigger than Mercury,
Venus, and Mars, she presents a very modest figure in comparison with the
enormous Jupiter, the strange system of Saturn, of Uranus, and even of
Neptune. For us her greatest interest is that she serves as our residence, and
if she were not our habitation we should scarcely notice her. Dark in herself,
she burns at a distance like a star, returning to space the light she receives
from the Sun. At the distance of our satellite, she shines like an enormous
moon, fourteen times larger and more luminous than our gentle Phœbe.
Observed from Mercury or Venus, she embellishes the midnight sky with
her sparkling purity as Jupiter does for us. Seen from Mars, she is a brilliant
morning and evening star, presenting phases similar to those which Mars
Page 172
and Venus show from here. From Jupiter, the terrestrial globe is little more
than an insignificant point, nearly always swallowed up in the solar rays. As
to the Saturnians, Uranians, and Neptunians, if such people exist, they
probably ignore our existence altogether. And in all likelihood it is the same
for the rest of the universe.
We must cherish no illusions as to the importance of our natal world. It
is true that the Earth is not wanting in charm, with its verdant plains
enameled in the delicious tones of a robust and varied vegetation, its plants
and flowers, its spring-time and its birds, its limpid rivers winding through
the meadows, its mountains covered with forests, its vast and profound seas
animated with an infinite variety of living creatures. The spectacle of
Nature is magnificent, superb, admirable and marvelous, and we imagine
that this Earth fills the universe, and suffices for it. The Sun, the Moon, the
stars, the boundless Heavens, seem to have been created for us, to charm
our eyes and thoughts, to illumine our days, and shed a gentle radiance
upon our nights. This is an agreeable illusion of our senses. If our Humanity
were extinguished, the other worlds of the Heavens, Venus, Mars, etc.,
would none the less continue to gravitate in the Heavens along with our
defunct planet, and the close of human life (for which everything seems to
us to have been created) would not even be perceived by those other
worlds, that nevertheless are our neighbors. There would be no revolution,
no cataclysm. The stars would go on shining in the firmament, just as they
do to-day, shedding their divine light over the immensity of the Heavens.
Nothing would be changed in the general aspect of the Universe. The Earth
is only a modest atom, lost in the innumerable army of the worlds and suns
that people the universe.
Every morning the Sun rises in the East, setting fire with his ardent rays
to the sky, which is dazzling with his splendor. He ascends through space,
than an insignificant point, nearly always swallowed up in the solar rays. As
to the Saturnians, Uranians, and Neptunians, if such people exist, they
probably ignore our existence altogether. And in all likelihood it is the same
for the rest of the universe.
We must cherish no illusions as to the importance of our natal world. It
is true that the Earth is not wanting in charm, with its verdant plains
enameled in the delicious tones of a robust and varied vegetation, its plants
and flowers, its spring-time and its birds, its limpid rivers winding through
the meadows, its mountains covered with forests, its vast and profound seas
animated with an infinite variety of living creatures. The spectacle of
Nature is magnificent, superb, admirable and marvelous, and we imagine
that this Earth fills the universe, and suffices for it. The Sun, the Moon, the
stars, the boundless Heavens, seem to have been created for us, to charm
our eyes and thoughts, to illumine our days, and shed a gentle radiance
upon our nights. This is an agreeable illusion of our senses. If our Humanity
were extinguished, the other worlds of the Heavens, Venus, Mars, etc.,
would none the less continue to gravitate in the Heavens along with our
defunct planet, and the close of human life (for which everything seems to
us to have been created) would not even be perceived by those other
worlds, that nevertheless are our neighbors. There would be no revolution,
no cataclysm. The stars would go on shining in the firmament, just as they
do to-day, shedding their divine light over the immensity of the Heavens.
Nothing would be changed in the general aspect of the Universe. The Earth
is only a modest atom, lost in the innumerable army of the worlds and suns
that people the universe.
Every morning the Sun rises in the East, setting fire with his ardent rays
to the sky, which is dazzling with his splendor. He ascends through space,
Page 173
reaches a culminating point at noon, and then descends toward the West, to
sink at night into the purple of the sunset.
And then the stars, grand lighthouses of the Heavens, in their turn
incandesce. They too rise in the East, ascend the vault of Heaven, and then
descend to the West, and vanish. All the orbs, Sun, Moon, planets, stars,
appear to revolve round us in twenty-four hours.
This journey of the orbs around us is only an illusion of the senses.
Whether the Earth be at rest, and the sky animated with a rotary
movement round her, or whether, on the contrary, the stars are fixed, and
the Earth in motion, in either case, for us appearances are the same. If the
Earth turns, carrying all that pertains to it in its motion—the seas, the
atmosphere, the clouds, and ourselves,—we are unable to perceive it,
because all the objects that surround us keep their respective positions
among themselves. Hence we must resort to logic, and reason out the two
hypotheses.
For the accomplishment of this rapid journey of the Sun and stars around
the Earth, it would be necessary that all the orbs of the sky should be in
some way attached to a vault, or to circles, as was formerly supposed. This
conception is childish. The peoples of antiquity had no notion of the size of
the universe, and their error is almost excusable. The distance separating
Heaven from the Infernal Regions has been measured, according to Hesiod,
by Vulcan's anvil, which fell from the skies to the Earth in nine days and
nine nights, and it would have taken as long again to continue its journey
from the surface of the Earth to the bowels of Hades.
To-day we have a more exact notion of the grandeur of the Universe. We
know that millions and trillions of miles separate the stars from one another.
And by representing these distances, we can form some idea of the
difficulty there would be in admitting the rotation of the universe round the
Earth.
sink at night into the purple of the sunset.
And then the stars, grand lighthouses of the Heavens, in their turn
incandesce. They too rise in the East, ascend the vault of Heaven, and then
descend to the West, and vanish. All the orbs, Sun, Moon, planets, stars,
appear to revolve round us in twenty-four hours.
This journey of the orbs around us is only an illusion of the senses.
Whether the Earth be at rest, and the sky animated with a rotary
movement round her, or whether, on the contrary, the stars are fixed, and
the Earth in motion, in either case, for us appearances are the same. If the
Earth turns, carrying all that pertains to it in its motion—the seas, the
atmosphere, the clouds, and ourselves,—we are unable to perceive it,
because all the objects that surround us keep their respective positions
among themselves. Hence we must resort to logic, and reason out the two
hypotheses.
For the accomplishment of this rapid journey of the Sun and stars around
the Earth, it would be necessary that all the orbs of the sky should be in
some way attached to a vault, or to circles, as was formerly supposed. This
conception is childish. The peoples of antiquity had no notion of the size of
the universe, and their error is almost excusable. The distance separating
Heaven from the Infernal Regions has been measured, according to Hesiod,
by Vulcan's anvil, which fell from the skies to the Earth in nine days and
nine nights, and it would have taken as long again to continue its journey
from the surface of the Earth to the bowels of Hades.
To-day we have a more exact notion of the grandeur of the Universe. We
know that millions and trillions of miles separate the stars from one another.
And by representing these distances, we can form some idea of the
difficulty there would be in admitting the rotation of the universe round the
Earth.
Page 174
The distance from here to the Sun is 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000
miles). In order to turn in twenty-four hours round the Earth, that orb would
have to fly through Space at a velocity of more than 10,000 kilometers
(6,200 miles) a second.
Yes! the Sun, splendid orb, source of our existence and of that of all the
planets, a colossal globe, over a million times more voluminous than the
Earth, and 324 thousand times heavier, would have to accomplish this
immense revolution in order to turn round the minute point that is our
lilliputian world!
This in itself would suffice to convince us of the want of logic in such an
argument. But the Sun is not alone in the Heavens. We should have to
suppose that all the planets and all the stars were engaged in the same
fantastic motions.
Jupiter is about five times as far off as the Sun; his velocity would have
to be 53,000 kilometers (32,860 miles) per second.
Neptune, thirty times farther off, would have to execute 320,000
kilometers (198,000 miles) per second.
The nearest star, α of the Centaur, situated at a distance 275,000 times
that of the Sun, would have to run, to fly through space, at a rate of
2,941,000,000 kilometers (1,823,420,000 miles) per second.
All the other stars are incomparably farther off, at infinity.
And this fantastic rotation would all be accomplished round a minute
point!
To put the problem in this way is to solve it. Unless we deny the
astronomic measures, and the most convincing geometric operations, the
Earth's diurnal motion of rotation is a certainty.
To suppose that the stars revolve round the Earth is to suppose, as one
author humorously suggests, that in order to roast a pheasant the chimney,
miles). In order to turn in twenty-four hours round the Earth, that orb would
have to fly through Space at a velocity of more than 10,000 kilometers
(6,200 miles) a second.
Yes! the Sun, splendid orb, source of our existence and of that of all the
planets, a colossal globe, over a million times more voluminous than the
Earth, and 324 thousand times heavier, would have to accomplish this
immense revolution in order to turn round the minute point that is our
lilliputian world!
This in itself would suffice to convince us of the want of logic in such an
argument. But the Sun is not alone in the Heavens. We should have to
suppose that all the planets and all the stars were engaged in the same
fantastic motions.
Jupiter is about five times as far off as the Sun; his velocity would have
to be 53,000 kilometers (32,860 miles) per second.
Neptune, thirty times farther off, would have to execute 320,000
kilometers (198,000 miles) per second.
The nearest star, α of the Centaur, situated at a distance 275,000 times
that of the Sun, would have to run, to fly through space, at a rate of
2,941,000,000 kilometers (1,823,420,000 miles) per second.
All the other stars are incomparably farther off, at infinity.
And this fantastic rotation would all be accomplished round a minute
point!
To put the problem in this way is to solve it. Unless we deny the
astronomic measures, and the most convincing geometric operations, the
Earth's diurnal motion of rotation is a certainty.
To suppose that the stars revolve round the Earth is to suppose, as one
author humorously suggests, that in order to roast a pheasant the chimney,
Page 175
the kitchen, the house, and all the countryside must needs turn round it.
If the Earth turns in twenty-four hours upon itself, a point upon the
equator would simply travel at a rate of 465 meters (1,525 feet) per second.
This speed, while considerable in comparison with the movements observed
upon the surface of our planet, is as nothing compared with the fantastic
rapidity at which the Sun and stars would have to move, in order to rotate
round our globe.
Thus we have to choose between these two hypotheses: either to make
the entire Heavens turn round us in twenty-four hours, or to suppose our
globe to be animated by a motion of rotation upon itself. For us, the
impression is the same, and as we are insensible to the motion of the Earth,
its immobility would seem almost natural to us. So that, in last resort, here
as in many other instances, the decision must be made by simple common
sense. Science long ago made its choice. Moreover, all the progress of
Astronomy has confirmed the rotary movement of the Earth in twenty-four
hours, and its movement of revolution round the Sun in a year; while at the
same time a great number of other motions have been discovered for our
wandering planet.
The learned philosophers of antiquity divined the double movement of
our planet. The disciples of Pythagoras taught it more than two thousand
years ago, and the ancient authors quote among others Nicetas of Syracuse,
and Aristarchus of Samos, as being among the first to promote the doctrine
of the Earth's movement. But at that remote period no one had any idea of
the real distances of the stars, and the argument did not seem to be based on
any adequate evidence. Ptolemy, after a long discussion of the diurnal
motion of our planet, refutes it, giving as his principal reason that if the
Earth turned, the objects that were not fixed to its surface would appear to
move in a contrary direction, and that a body shot into the air would fall
back to the West of its starting-point, the Earth having turned meantime
from West to East. This objection has no weight, because the Earth controls
not only all the objects fixed to the soil, but also the atmosphere, and the
If the Earth turns in twenty-four hours upon itself, a point upon the
equator would simply travel at a rate of 465 meters (1,525 feet) per second.
This speed, while considerable in comparison with the movements observed
upon the surface of our planet, is as nothing compared with the fantastic
rapidity at which the Sun and stars would have to move, in order to rotate
round our globe.
Thus we have to choose between these two hypotheses: either to make
the entire Heavens turn round us in twenty-four hours, or to suppose our
globe to be animated by a motion of rotation upon itself. For us, the
impression is the same, and as we are insensible to the motion of the Earth,
its immobility would seem almost natural to us. So that, in last resort, here
as in many other instances, the decision must be made by simple common
sense. Science long ago made its choice. Moreover, all the progress of
Astronomy has confirmed the rotary movement of the Earth in twenty-four
hours, and its movement of revolution round the Sun in a year; while at the
same time a great number of other motions have been discovered for our
wandering planet.
The learned philosophers of antiquity divined the double movement of
our planet. The disciples of Pythagoras taught it more than two thousand
years ago, and the ancient authors quote among others Nicetas of Syracuse,
and Aristarchus of Samos, as being among the first to promote the doctrine
of the Earth's movement. But at that remote period no one had any idea of
the real distances of the stars, and the argument did not seem to be based on
any adequate evidence. Ptolemy, after a long discussion of the diurnal
motion of our planet, refutes it, giving as his principal reason that if the
Earth turned, the objects that were not fixed to its surface would appear to
move in a contrary direction, and that a body shot into the air would fall
back to the West of its starting-point, the Earth having turned meantime
from West to East. This objection has no weight, because the Earth controls
not only all the objects fixed to the soil, but also the atmosphere, and the
Page 176
clouds that surround it like a light veil, and all that exists upon its surface.
The atmosphere, the clouds, the waters of the ocean, things and beings, all
are adherent to it and make one body with it, participating in its movement,
as sometimes happens to ourselves in the compartment of a train, or the car
of an aerostat. When, for instance, we drop an object out of such a car, this
object, animated with the acquired velocity, does not fall to a point below
the aerostat, but follows the balloon, as though it were gliding along a
thread. The author has made this experiment more than once in aerial
journeys.
Thus, the hypothesis of the Earth's motion has become a certainty. But in
addition to reasoning, direct proof is not wanting.
1. The spheroidal shape of the Earth, slightly flattened at the poles and
swollen at the equator, has been produced by the rotary motion, by the
centrifugal force that it engenders.
2. In virtue of this centrifugal force, which is at its maximum at the
equator, objects lose a little of their weight in proportion as they are farther
removed from the polar regions where centrifugal force is almost nil.
3. In virtue of this same centrifugal force, the length of the pendulum in
seconds is shorter at the equator than in Paris, and the difference is one of 3
millimeters.
4. A weight abandoned to itself and falling from a certain height, should
follow the vertical if the Earth were motionless. Experiment, frequently
repeated, shows a slight deviation to the East, of the plumb-line that marks
the vertical. We more especially observed this at the Pantheon during the
recent experiments.
5. The magnificent experiment of Foucault at the Pantheon, just renewed
under the auspices of the Astronomical Society of France, demonstrates the
rotary motion of the Earth to all beholders. A sufficiently heavy ball (28
kilograms, about 60 pounds) is suspended from the dome of the edifice by
The atmosphere, the clouds, the waters of the ocean, things and beings, all
are adherent to it and make one body with it, participating in its movement,
as sometimes happens to ourselves in the compartment of a train, or the car
of an aerostat. When, for instance, we drop an object out of such a car, this
object, animated with the acquired velocity, does not fall to a point below
the aerostat, but follows the balloon, as though it were gliding along a
thread. The author has made this experiment more than once in aerial
journeys.
Thus, the hypothesis of the Earth's motion has become a certainty. But in
addition to reasoning, direct proof is not wanting.
1. The spheroidal shape of the Earth, slightly flattened at the poles and
swollen at the equator, has been produced by the rotary motion, by the
centrifugal force that it engenders.
2. In virtue of this centrifugal force, which is at its maximum at the
equator, objects lose a little of their weight in proportion as they are farther
removed from the polar regions where centrifugal force is almost nil.
3. In virtue of this same centrifugal force, the length of the pendulum in
seconds is shorter at the equator than in Paris, and the difference is one of 3
millimeters.
4. A weight abandoned to itself and falling from a certain height, should
follow the vertical if the Earth were motionless. Experiment, frequently
repeated, shows a slight deviation to the East, of the plumb-line that marks
the vertical. We more especially observed this at the Pantheon during the
recent experiments.
5. The magnificent experiment of Foucault at the Pantheon, just renewed
under the auspices of the Astronomical Society of France, demonstrates the
rotary motion of the Earth to all beholders. A sufficiently heavy ball (28
kilograms, about 60 pounds) is suspended from the dome of the edifice by
Page 177
an excessively fine steel thread. When the pendulum is in motion, a point
attached to the bottom of the ball marks its passage upon two little heaps of
sand arranged some yards away from the center. At each oscillation this
point cuts the sand, and the furrow gets gradually longer to the right hand of
an observer placed at the center of the pendulum. The plane of the
oscillations remains fixed, but the Earth revolves beneath, from West to
East. The fundamental principle of this experiment is that the plane in
which any pendulum is made to oscillate remains invariable even when the
point of suspension is turned. This demonstration enables us in some
measure to see the Earth turning under our feet.
The annual displacements of the stars are again confirmatory of the
Earth's motion round the Sun. During the course of the year, the stars that
are least remote from our solar province appear to describe minute ellipses,
in perspective, in the Heavens. These small apparent variations in the
position of the nearest stars reproduce the annual rotation of the Earth round
the Sun, in perspective.
We could adduce further observations in favor of this double movement,
but the proofs just given are sufficiently convincing to leave no doubt in the
mind of the reader.
Nor are these two the only motions by which our globe is rocked in
space. To its diurnal rotation and its annual rotation we may add another
series of ten more motions: some very slow, fulfilling themselves in
thousands of years, others, more rapid, being constantly renewed. It is,
however, impossible in these restricted pages to enter into the detail
reserved for more complete works. We must not forget that our present aim
is to sum up the essentials of astronomical knowledge as simply as possible,
and to offer our readers only the "best of the picking."
attached to the bottom of the ball marks its passage upon two little heaps of
sand arranged some yards away from the center. At each oscillation this
point cuts the sand, and the furrow gets gradually longer to the right hand of
an observer placed at the center of the pendulum. The plane of the
oscillations remains fixed, but the Earth revolves beneath, from West to
East. The fundamental principle of this experiment is that the plane in
which any pendulum is made to oscillate remains invariable even when the
point of suspension is turned. This demonstration enables us in some
measure to see the Earth turning under our feet.
The annual displacements of the stars are again confirmatory of the
Earth's motion round the Sun. During the course of the year, the stars that
are least remote from our solar province appear to describe minute ellipses,
in perspective, in the Heavens. These small apparent variations in the
position of the nearest stars reproduce the annual rotation of the Earth round
the Sun, in perspective.
We could adduce further observations in favor of this double movement,
but the proofs just given are sufficiently convincing to leave no doubt in the
mind of the reader.
Nor are these two the only motions by which our globe is rocked in
space. To its diurnal rotation and its annual rotation we may add another
series of ten more motions: some very slow, fulfilling themselves in
thousands of years, others, more rapid, being constantly renewed. It is,
however, impossible in these restricted pages to enter into the detail
reserved for more complete works. We must not forget that our present aim
is to sum up the essentials of astronomical knowledge as simply as possible,
and to offer our readers only the "best of the picking."
Page 178
The two principal motions of which we have just spoken give us the
measure of time, the day of twenty-four hours, and the year of 3651⁄4 days.
The Earth turning upon itself in twenty-four hours from West to East,
presents all its parts in succession to the Sun fixed in space. Illuminated
countries have the day, those opposite, in the shadow of the Earth, are
plunged into night. The countries carried by the Earth toward the Sun have
morning, those borne toward his shadow, evening. Those which receive the
rays of the day-star directly have noon; those which are just opposite have
midnight.
The rotation of our planet in this way gives us the measure of time; it has
been divided arbitrarily into twenty-four periods called hours; each hour
into sixty minutes; each minute into sixty seconds.
In consequence, each country turns in twenty-four hours round the axis
of the Earth. The difference in hours between the different regions of the
globe is therefore regulated by the difference of geographical position. The
countries situated to the West are behind us; the Sun only gets there after it
has shone upon our meridian. When it is midday in Paris, it is only 11.51
a.m. in London; 11.36 a.m. in Madrid; 11.14 a.m. at Lisbon; 11.12 a.m. at
Mogador; 7.06 a.m. at Quebec; 6.55 a.m. at New York; 5.14 a.m. in Mexico;
and so on. The countries situated to the East are, on the contrary, ahead of
us. When it is noon in Paris, it is already 56 minutes after midday at Vienna;
1.25 p.m. at Athens; 2.21 p.m. at Moscow; 3.16 p.m. at Teheran; 4.42 p.m. at
Bombay; and so on. We are here speaking of real times, and not of the
conventional times.
measure of time, the day of twenty-four hours, and the year of 3651⁄4 days.
The Earth turning upon itself in twenty-four hours from West to East,
presents all its parts in succession to the Sun fixed in space. Illuminated
countries have the day, those opposite, in the shadow of the Earth, are
plunged into night. The countries carried by the Earth toward the Sun have
morning, those borne toward his shadow, evening. Those which receive the
rays of the day-star directly have noon; those which are just opposite have
midnight.
The rotation of our planet in this way gives us the measure of time; it has
been divided arbitrarily into twenty-four periods called hours; each hour
into sixty minutes; each minute into sixty seconds.
In consequence, each country turns in twenty-four hours round the axis
of the Earth. The difference in hours between the different regions of the
globe is therefore regulated by the difference of geographical position. The
countries situated to the West are behind us; the Sun only gets there after it
has shone upon our meridian. When it is midday in Paris, it is only 11.51
a.m. in London; 11.36 a.m. in Madrid; 11.14 a.m. at Lisbon; 11.12 a.m. at
Mogador; 7.06 a.m. at Quebec; 6.55 a.m. at New York; 5.14 a.m. in Mexico;
and so on. The countries situated to the East are, on the contrary, ahead of
us. When it is noon in Paris, it is already 56 minutes after midday at Vienna;
1.25 p.m. at Athens; 2.21 p.m. at Moscow; 3.16 p.m. at Teheran; 4.42 p.m. at
Bombay; and so on. We are here speaking of real times, and not of the
conventional times.
Page 179
Fig. 60.—Motion of the Earth round the Sun.
If we could make the tour of the world in twenty-four hours, starting at
midday from some place to go round the globe, and traveling westward
with the Sun, we should have him always over our heads. In traveling round
the world from West to East, one goes in front of the Sun, and gains by one
day; in taking the opposite direction, from East to West, one loses a day.
In reality, the exact duration of the Earth's diurnal rotation is twenty-
three hours, fifty-six minutes, four seconds. That is the sidereal day. But,
while turning upon itself, the Earth circulates upon its orbit, and at the end
of a diurnal rotation it is still obliged to turn during three minutes, fifty-six
seconds in order to present exactly the same meridian to the fixed Sun
which, in consequence of the rotary period of our planet, is a little behind.
If we could make the tour of the world in twenty-four hours, starting at
midday from some place to go round the globe, and traveling westward
with the Sun, we should have him always over our heads. In traveling round
the world from West to East, one goes in front of the Sun, and gains by one
day; in taking the opposite direction, from East to West, one loses a day.
In reality, the exact duration of the Earth's diurnal rotation is twenty-
three hours, fifty-six minutes, four seconds. That is the sidereal day. But,
while turning upon itself, the Earth circulates upon its orbit, and at the end
of a diurnal rotation it is still obliged to turn during three minutes, fifty-six
seconds in order to present exactly the same meridian to the fixed Sun
which, in consequence of the rotary period of our planet, is a little behind.
Page 180
The solar day is thus one of twenty-four hours. There are 366 rotations in
the year.
And now let us come back to the consequences of the Earth's motion. In
the first place our planet does not turn vertically nor on its side, but is
tipped or inclined a certain quantity: 23° 27′.
Now, throughout its annual journey round the Sun, the inclination
remains the same. That is what produces the seasons and climates. The
countries which have a larger circle to travel over in the hemisphere of the
solar illumination have the longer days, those which have a smaller circle,
shorter days. At the equator there is constantly, and all through the year, a
twelve-hour day, and a night of twelve hours.
Fig. 61.—Inclination of the Earth.
In summer, the pole dips toward the Sun, and the rays of the orb of day
cover the corresponding hemisphere with their light. Six months later this
same hemisphere is in winter, and the opposite hemisphere is in its turn
presented to the Sun. June 21 is the summer solstice for the northern
hemisphere, and is at the same time winter for the southern pole. Six
months later, on December 21, we have winter, while the southern
hemisphere is completely exposed to the Sun. Between these two epochs,
when the radiant orb shines exactly upon the equator, that is on March 21,
we have the spring equinox, that delicious flowering season when all nature
the year.
And now let us come back to the consequences of the Earth's motion. In
the first place our planet does not turn vertically nor on its side, but is
tipped or inclined a certain quantity: 23° 27′.
Now, throughout its annual journey round the Sun, the inclination
remains the same. That is what produces the seasons and climates. The
countries which have a larger circle to travel over in the hemisphere of the
solar illumination have the longer days, those which have a smaller circle,
shorter days. At the equator there is constantly, and all through the year, a
twelve-hour day, and a night of twelve hours.
Fig. 61.—Inclination of the Earth.
In summer, the pole dips toward the Sun, and the rays of the orb of day
cover the corresponding hemisphere with their light. Six months later this
same hemisphere is in winter, and the opposite hemisphere is in its turn
presented to the Sun. June 21 is the summer solstice for the northern
hemisphere, and is at the same time winter for the southern pole. Six
months later, on December 21, we have winter, while the southern
hemisphere is completely exposed to the Sun. Between these two epochs,
when the radiant orb shines exactly upon the equator, that is on March 21,
we have the spring equinox, that delicious flowering season when all nature
Page 181
is enchanting and enchanted; on September 21 we have the autumn
equinox, melancholy, but not devoid of charm.
The terrestrial sphere has been divided into different zones, with which
the different climates are in relation:
1. The tropical zone, which extends 23° 27′ from one part to the other of
the equator. This is the hottest region. It is limited by the circle of the
tropics.
2. The temperate zones, which extend from 23° 27′ to 66° 23′ of latitude,
and where the Sun sets every day.
3. The glacial zones, drawn round the poles, at 66° 33′ latitude, where
the Sun remains constantly above or below the horizon for several days, or
even several months. These glacial zones are limited by the polar circles.
We must add that the axis of the Earth is a straight line that is supposed
to pass through the center of the globe and come out at two diametrically
opposite points called the poles. The diurnal rotation of the Earth is effected
round this axis.
The name equator is given to a great circle situated between the two
poles, at equal distance, which divides the globe into two hemispheres. The
equator is divided into 360 parts or degrees, by other circles that go from
one pole to the other. These are the longitudes or meridians (see Fig. 62).
The distance between the equator and the pole is divided into larger or
smaller circles, which have received the name of latitudes, 90 degrees are
reckoned on the one side and the other of the equator, in the direction of the
North and South poles, respectively. The longitudes are reckoned from
some point either to East or West: the latitudes are reckoned North and
South, from the equator. In going from East to West, or inversely, the
longitude changes, but in passing from North to South of any spot, it is the
latitude that alters.
equinox, melancholy, but not devoid of charm.
The terrestrial sphere has been divided into different zones, with which
the different climates are in relation:
1. The tropical zone, which extends 23° 27′ from one part to the other of
the equator. This is the hottest region. It is limited by the circle of the
tropics.
2. The temperate zones, which extend from 23° 27′ to 66° 23′ of latitude,
and where the Sun sets every day.
3. The glacial zones, drawn round the poles, at 66° 33′ latitude, where
the Sun remains constantly above or below the horizon for several days, or
even several months. These glacial zones are limited by the polar circles.
We must add that the axis of the Earth is a straight line that is supposed
to pass through the center of the globe and come out at two diametrically
opposite points called the poles. The diurnal rotation of the Earth is effected
round this axis.
The name equator is given to a great circle situated between the two
poles, at equal distance, which divides the globe into two hemispheres. The
equator is divided into 360 parts or degrees, by other circles that go from
one pole to the other. These are the longitudes or meridians (see Fig. 62).
The distance between the equator and the pole is divided into larger or
smaller circles, which have received the name of latitudes, 90 degrees are
reckoned on the one side and the other of the equator, in the direction of the
North and South poles, respectively. The longitudes are reckoned from
some point either to East or West: the latitudes are reckoned North and
South, from the equator. In going from East to West, or inversely, the
longitude changes, but in passing from North to South of any spot, it is the
latitude that alters.
Page 182
The circles of latitude are
smaller in proportion as one
approaches the poles. The
circumference of the world is
40,076,600 meters at the
equator. At the latitude of
Paris (48° 50′) it is only
26,431,900 meters. A point
situated at the equator has
more ground to travel over in
order to accomplish its
rotation in twenty-four hours
than a point nearer the pole.
We have already stated
Fig. 62.—The divisions of the globe. Longitudes and that this velocity of rotation is
latitudes. 465 meters per second at the
equator. At the latitude of
Paris it is not more than 305 meters. At the poles it is nil.
The longitudes, or meridians, are great circles of equal length, dividing
the Earth into quarters, like the parts of an orange or a melon. These
circumvent the globe, and measure some 40,000,000 (40,008,032) meters.
We may remember in passing that the length of the meter has been
determined as, by definition, the ten-millionth part of the quarter of a
celestial meridian.
Thus, while rotating upon itself, the Earth spins round the Sun, along a
vast orbit traced at 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from the
central focus, a sensibly elliptical orbit, as we have already pointed out. It is
a little nearer the Sun on January 1st than on July 1st, at its perihelion (peri,
near, helios, Sun), than at its aphelion (apo, far, helios, Sun). The difference
= 6,000,000 kilometers (3,720,000 miles), and its velocity is a little greater
at perihelion than at aphelion.
smaller in proportion as one
approaches the poles. The
circumference of the world is
40,076,600 meters at the
equator. At the latitude of
Paris (48° 50′) it is only
26,431,900 meters. A point
situated at the equator has
more ground to travel over in
order to accomplish its
rotation in twenty-four hours
than a point nearer the pole.
We have already stated
Fig. 62.—The divisions of the globe. Longitudes and that this velocity of rotation is
latitudes. 465 meters per second at the
equator. At the latitude of
Paris it is not more than 305 meters. At the poles it is nil.
The longitudes, or meridians, are great circles of equal length, dividing
the Earth into quarters, like the parts of an orange or a melon. These
circumvent the globe, and measure some 40,000,000 (40,008,032) meters.
We may remember in passing that the length of the meter has been
determined as, by definition, the ten-millionth part of the quarter of a
celestial meridian.
Thus, while rotating upon itself, the Earth spins round the Sun, along a
vast orbit traced at 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from the
central focus, a sensibly elliptical orbit, as we have already pointed out. It is
a little nearer the Sun on January 1st than on July 1st, at its perihelion (peri,
near, helios, Sun), than at its aphelion (apo, far, helios, Sun). The difference
= 6,000,000 kilometers (3,720,000 miles), and its velocity is a little greater
at perihelion than at aphelion.
Page 183
This second motion produces the year. It is accomplished in three
hundred and sixty-five days, six hours, nine minutes, nine seconds. Such is
the complete revolution of our planet round the orb of day. It has received
the name of sidereal year. But this is not how we calculate the year in
practical life. The civil year, known also as the tropical year, is not
equivalent to the Earth's revolution, because a very slow gyratory motion,
called "the precession of the equinoxes," the cycle of which occupies
25,765 years, drags the spring equinox back some twenty minutes in each
year.
The civil year is, accordingly, three hundred and sixty-five days, five
hours, forty-eight minutes, forty-six seconds.
In order to simplify the calendar, this accumulating fraction of five
hours, forty-eight minutes, forty-six seconds (about a quarter day) is added
every four years to a bissextile year (leap-year), and thus we have uneven
years of three hundred and sixty-five, and three hundred and sixty-six days.
Every year of which the figure is divisible by four is a leap-year. By adding
a quarter day to each year, there is a surplus of eleven minutes, fourteen
seconds. These are subtracted every hundred years by not taking as
bissextile those secular years of which the radical is not divisible by four.
The year 1600 was leap-year: 1700, 1800, and 1900 were not; 2000 will be.
The agreement between the calendar and nature has thus been fairly perfect,
since the establishment of the Gregorian Calendar in 1582.
Since the terrestrial orbit measures not less than 930,000,000 kilometers
(576,600,000 miles), which must be traversed in a year, the Earth flies
through Space at 2,544,000 kilometers (1,577,280 miles) a day, or 106,000
kilometers (65,720 miles) an hour, or 29,500 meters (18 miles) per second
on an average, a little faster at perihelion, a little slower at aphelion. This
giddy course, a thousand times more rapid than the speed of an express-
train, is effected without commotion, shock, or noise. Reasoning alone
enables us to divine the prodigious movement that carries us along in the
vast fields of the Infinite, in mid-heaven.
hundred and sixty-five days, six hours, nine minutes, nine seconds. Such is
the complete revolution of our planet round the orb of day. It has received
the name of sidereal year. But this is not how we calculate the year in
practical life. The civil year, known also as the tropical year, is not
equivalent to the Earth's revolution, because a very slow gyratory motion,
called "the precession of the equinoxes," the cycle of which occupies
25,765 years, drags the spring equinox back some twenty minutes in each
year.
The civil year is, accordingly, three hundred and sixty-five days, five
hours, forty-eight minutes, forty-six seconds.
In order to simplify the calendar, this accumulating fraction of five
hours, forty-eight minutes, forty-six seconds (about a quarter day) is added
every four years to a bissextile year (leap-year), and thus we have uneven
years of three hundred and sixty-five, and three hundred and sixty-six days.
Every year of which the figure is divisible by four is a leap-year. By adding
a quarter day to each year, there is a surplus of eleven minutes, fourteen
seconds. These are subtracted every hundred years by not taking as
bissextile those secular years of which the radical is not divisible by four.
The year 1600 was leap-year: 1700, 1800, and 1900 were not; 2000 will be.
The agreement between the calendar and nature has thus been fairly perfect,
since the establishment of the Gregorian Calendar in 1582.
Since the terrestrial orbit measures not less than 930,000,000 kilometers
(576,600,000 miles), which must be traversed in a year, the Earth flies
through Space at 2,544,000 kilometers (1,577,280 miles) a day, or 106,000
kilometers (65,720 miles) an hour, or 29,500 meters (18 miles) per second
on an average, a little faster at perihelion, a little slower at aphelion. This
giddy course, a thousand times more rapid than the speed of an express-
train, is effected without commotion, shock, or noise. Reasoning alone
enables us to divine the prodigious movement that carries us along in the
vast fields of the Infinite, in mid-heaven.
Page 184
Returning to the calendar, it must be remarked in conclusion, that the
human race has not exhibited great sense in fixing the New Year on January
1. No more disagreeable season could have been selected. And further, as
the ancient Roman names of the months have been preserved, which in the
time of Romulus began with March, the "seventh" month, "September," is
our ninth month; October (the eighth) is the tenth; November (the ninth) has
become the eleventh; and December (the tenth) has taken the place of the
twelfth. Verily, we are not hard to please!
These months, again, are unequal, as every one knows. Witness the
simple expedient of remembering the long and short months, by closing the
left hand and counting the knobs and hollows of the fist, the former
corresponding to the long months, the latter to the short: first knob =
January; first hollow, February; second knob, March; and so on.[12]
Fig. 63.—To find the long and short months.
Should not the real renewal of the year coincide with the awakening of
Nature, with the spring on the terrestrial hemisphere occupied by the greater
human race has not exhibited great sense in fixing the New Year on January
1. No more disagreeable season could have been selected. And further, as
the ancient Roman names of the months have been preserved, which in the
time of Romulus began with March, the "seventh" month, "September," is
our ninth month; October (the eighth) is the tenth; November (the ninth) has
become the eleventh; and December (the tenth) has taken the place of the
twelfth. Verily, we are not hard to please!
These months, again, are unequal, as every one knows. Witness the
simple expedient of remembering the long and short months, by closing the
left hand and counting the knobs and hollows of the fist, the former
corresponding to the long months, the latter to the short: first knob =
January; first hollow, February; second knob, March; and so on.[12]
Fig. 63.—To find the long and short months.
Should not the real renewal of the year coincide with the awakening of
Nature, with the spring on the terrestrial hemisphere occupied by the greater
Page 185
portion of Humanity, with the date of March 21st? Should not the months
be equalized, and their names modified? Why should we not follow the
beautiful evolution dictated by the Sun and by the movement of our planet?
But our poor Earth may roll on a long time yet before its inhabitants will
become reasonable.
be equalized, and their names modified? Why should we not follow the
beautiful evolution dictated by the Sun and by the movement of our planet?
But our poor Earth may roll on a long time yet before its inhabitants will
become reasonable.
Page 186
CHAPTER IX
THE MOON
It is the delightful hour when all Nature pauses in the tranquil calm of
the silent night.
The Sun has cast his farewell gleams upon the weary Earth. All sound is
hushed. And soon the stars will shine out one by one in the bosom of the
somber firmament. Opposite to the sunset, in the east, the Full Moon rises
slowly, as it were calling our thoughts toward the mysteries of eternity,
while her limpid night spreads over space like a dew from Heaven.
In the odorous woods, the trees are silhouetted strangely upon the sky,
seeming to stretch their knotted arms toward this celestial beauty. On the
river, smooth as a mirror, wherein the pale Phœbe reflects her splendor, the
maidens go to seek the floating image of their future spouse. And in
response to their prayers, she rends the veil of cloud that hides her from
their eyes, and pours the reflection of her gentle beams upon the sleeping
waters.
From all time the Moon has had the privilege of charming the gaze, and
attracting the particular attention of mortals. What thoughts have not been
wafted to her pale, yet luminous disk? Orb of mystery and of solitude,
brooding over our silent nights, this celestial luminary is at once sad and
splendid in her glacial purity, and her limpid rays provoke a reverie full of
charm and melancholy. Mute witness of terrestrial destinies, her nocturnal
flame watches over our planet, following it in its course as a faithful
satellite.
The human eye first uplifted to the Heavens was struck, above all, with
the brilliancy of this solitary globe, straying among the stars. The Moon
THE MOON
It is the delightful hour when all Nature pauses in the tranquil calm of
the silent night.
The Sun has cast his farewell gleams upon the weary Earth. All sound is
hushed. And soon the stars will shine out one by one in the bosom of the
somber firmament. Opposite to the sunset, in the east, the Full Moon rises
slowly, as it were calling our thoughts toward the mysteries of eternity,
while her limpid night spreads over space like a dew from Heaven.
In the odorous woods, the trees are silhouetted strangely upon the sky,
seeming to stretch their knotted arms toward this celestial beauty. On the
river, smooth as a mirror, wherein the pale Phœbe reflects her splendor, the
maidens go to seek the floating image of their future spouse. And in
response to their prayers, she rends the veil of cloud that hides her from
their eyes, and pours the reflection of her gentle beams upon the sleeping
waters.
From all time the Moon has had the privilege of charming the gaze, and
attracting the particular attention of mortals. What thoughts have not been
wafted to her pale, yet luminous disk? Orb of mystery and of solitude,
brooding over our silent nights, this celestial luminary is at once sad and
splendid in her glacial purity, and her limpid rays provoke a reverie full of
charm and melancholy. Mute witness of terrestrial destinies, her nocturnal
flame watches over our planet, following it in its course as a faithful
satellite.
The human eye first uplifted to the Heavens was struck, above all, with
the brilliancy of this solitary globe, straying among the stars. The Moon
Page 187
first suggested an easy division of time into months and weeks, and the first
astronomical observations were limited to the study of her phases.
Daughter of the Earth, the Moon was born at the limits of the terrestrial
nebula, when our world was still no more than a vast gaseous sphere, and
was detached from her at some critical period of colossal solar tide.
Separating with regret from her cradle, but attached to the Earth by
indissoluble ties of attraction, she rotates round us in a month, from west to
east, and this movement keeps her back a little each day in relation to the
stars. If we watch, evening by evening, beginning from the new moon, we
shall observe that she is each night a little farther to the left, or east, than on
the preceding evening. This revolution of the Moon around our planet
produces the phases, and gives the measure of our months.
astronomical observations were limited to the study of her phases.
Daughter of the Earth, the Moon was born at the limits of the terrestrial
nebula, when our world was still no more than a vast gaseous sphere, and
was detached from her at some critical period of colossal solar tide.
Separating with regret from her cradle, but attached to the Earth by
indissoluble ties of attraction, she rotates round us in a month, from west to
east, and this movement keeps her back a little each day in relation to the
stars. If we watch, evening by evening, beginning from the new moon, we
shall observe that she is each night a little farther to the left, or east, than on
the preceding evening. This revolution of the Moon around our planet
produces the phases, and gives the measure of our months.
Page 188
Fig. 64.—The Full Moon slowly rises.
During her monthly journey she always presents the same face to us.
One might think that the fear of losing us had immobilized her globe, and
prevented her from turning. And so we only know of her the vague sketch
of a human face that has been observed through all the ages.
It seems, in fact, as though she were looking down upon us from the
Heavens, the more so as the principal spots of her disk vaguely recall the
During her monthly journey she always presents the same face to us.
One might think that the fear of losing us had immobilized her globe, and
prevented her from turning. And so we only know of her the vague sketch
of a human face that has been observed through all the ages.
It seems, in fact, as though she were looking down upon us from the
Heavens, the more so as the principal spots of her disk vaguely recall the
Page 189
aspect of a face. If we try to draw it without the aid of instruments we
observe dark regions and clear regions that each interprets in his own
fashion. To the author, for instance, the full Moon has the appearance
represented in the following figure. The spots resemble two eyes and the
sketch of a nose; resulting in a vague human figure, as indicated on the
lower disk. Others see a man carrying a bundle of wood, a hare, a lion, a
dog, a kangaroo, a sickle, two heads embracing, etc.[13] But generally
speaking, there is a tendency to see a human figure in it.
If this appearance is helped a little by drawing, it gives the profile of a
man's head fairly well sketched, and furnished with an abundant crop of
hair (Fig. 66). Others go much more into detail, and draw a woman's head
that is certainly too definite, like this of M. Jean Sardou (Fig. 67). Others,
again, like M. Zamboni, see behind the man's profile the likeness of a
young girl being embraced by him (Fig. 68). There is certainly some
imagination about these. And yet, on the first suitable occasion, look at the
Moon through an opera-glass, a few days after the first quarter, and you will
not fail to see the masculine profile just described, and even to imagine the
"kiss in the Moon."
observe dark regions and clear regions that each interprets in his own
fashion. To the author, for instance, the full Moon has the appearance
represented in the following figure. The spots resemble two eyes and the
sketch of a nose; resulting in a vague human figure, as indicated on the
lower disk. Others see a man carrying a bundle of wood, a hare, a lion, a
dog, a kangaroo, a sickle, two heads embracing, etc.[13] But generally
speaking, there is a tendency to see a human figure in it.
If this appearance is helped a little by drawing, it gives the profile of a
man's head fairly well sketched, and furnished with an abundant crop of
hair (Fig. 66). Others go much more into detail, and draw a woman's head
that is certainly too definite, like this of M. Jean Sardou (Fig. 67). Others,
again, like M. Zamboni, see behind the man's profile the likeness of a
young girl being embraced by him (Fig. 68). There is certainly some
imagination about these. And yet, on the first suitable occasion, look at the
Moon through an opera-glass, a few days after the first quarter, and you will
not fail to see the masculine profile just described, and even to imagine the
"kiss in the Moon."
Page 190
Fig. 65.—The Moon viewed with the unaided eye.
Page 191
Fig. 66.—The Man's head in the Moon.
These vague aspects disappear as soon as the Moon is examined with
even the least powerful instruments: the spots are better defined, and the
illusions of indistinct vision vanish. Compare this direct photograph of the
Moon, taken by the author some years ago (Fig. 69): here is neither a
human figure, man, dog, hare, nor faggot; simply deep geographical
configurations, and in the lower region, a luminous point whence certain
light bands spread out, some being prolonged to a considerable distance.
And yet, from a little way off, does it not form the man's face above
indicated?
These vague aspects disappear as soon as the Moon is examined with
even the least powerful instruments: the spots are better defined, and the
illusions of indistinct vision vanish. Compare this direct photograph of the
Moon, taken by the author some years ago (Fig. 69): here is neither a
human figure, man, dog, hare, nor faggot; simply deep geographical
configurations, and in the lower region, a luminous point whence certain
light bands spread out, some being prolonged to a considerable distance.
And yet, from a little way off, does it not form the man's face above
indicated?
Page 192
Fig. 67.—Woman's head in the Moon.
From the earliest astronomical observations made with the aid of
instruments by Galileo, in 1609, people tried to find out what the dark spots
could represent, and they were called seas, because water absorbs light, and
reflects it less than terra firma. The Moon of itself possesses no intrinsic
light, any more than our planet, and only shines by the light of the Sun that
illuminates it. As it rotates round the Earth, and constantly changes its
position with respect to the Sun, we see more or less of its illuminated
hemisphere, and the result is the phases that every one knows so well.
From the earliest astronomical observations made with the aid of
instruments by Galileo, in 1609, people tried to find out what the dark spots
could represent, and they were called seas, because water absorbs light, and
reflects it less than terra firma. The Moon of itself possesses no intrinsic
light, any more than our planet, and only shines by the light of the Sun that
illuminates it. As it rotates round the Earth, and constantly changes its
position with respect to the Sun, we see more or less of its illuminated
hemisphere, and the result is the phases that every one knows so well.
Page 193
Fig. 68.—The kiss in the Moon.
Page 194
Fig. 69.—Photograph of the Moon.
At the commencement of each lunation, the Moon is between the Sun
and the Earth, and its non-illuminated hemisphere is turned toward us. This
is the New Moon, invisible to us; but two days later, the slim crescent of
Diana sheds a gentle radiance upon the Earth. Gradually the crescent
enlarges. When the Moon arrives at right angles with ourselves and with the
Sun, half the illuminated hemisphere is presented to us. This is the first
quarter. At the time of Full Moon, it is opposite the Sun, and we see the
whole of the hemisphere illuminated. Then comes the decline: the brilliant
disk is slightly corroded at first; it diminishes from day to day, and about a
week before the New Moon our fair friend only shows her profile before
she once more passes in front of the Sun: this is the last quarter.
At the commencement of each lunation, the Moon is between the Sun
and the Earth, and its non-illuminated hemisphere is turned toward us. This
is the New Moon, invisible to us; but two days later, the slim crescent of
Diana sheds a gentle radiance upon the Earth. Gradually the crescent
enlarges. When the Moon arrives at right angles with ourselves and with the
Sun, half the illuminated hemisphere is presented to us. This is the first
quarter. At the time of Full Moon, it is opposite the Sun, and we see the
whole of the hemisphere illuminated. Then comes the decline: the brilliant
disk is slightly corroded at first; it diminishes from day to day, and about a
week before the New Moon our fair friend only shows her profile before
she once more passes in front of the Sun: this is the last quarter.
Page 195
Fig. 70.—The Moon's Phases.
When the Moon is crescent, in the first evenings of the lunation, and
after the last quarter, the rest of the disk is visible, illuminated feebly by a
pale luminosity. This is known as the ashy light. It is due to the shine of the
Earth, reflecting the light received from the Sun into space. Accordingly the
ashy light is the reflection of our own sent back to us by the Moon. It is the
reflection of a reflection.
This rotation of the Moon round the Earth is accomplished in twenty-
seven days, seven hours, forty-three minutes, eleven seconds; but as the
Earth is simultaneously revolving round the Sun, when the Moon returns to
the same point (the Earth having become displaced relatively to the Sun),
the Moon has to travel two days longer to recover its position between the
Sun and the Earth, so that the lunar month is longer than the sidereal
revolution of the Moon, and takes twenty-nine days, twelve hours, forty-
four minutes, three seconds. This is the duration of the sequence of phases.
This revolution is accomplished at a distance of 384,000 kilometers
(238,000 miles). The velocity of the Moon in its orbit is more than 1
kilometer (0.6214 mile) per second. But our planet sweeps it through space
at a velocity almost thirty times greater.
When the Moon is crescent, in the first evenings of the lunation, and
after the last quarter, the rest of the disk is visible, illuminated feebly by a
pale luminosity. This is known as the ashy light. It is due to the shine of the
Earth, reflecting the light received from the Sun into space. Accordingly the
ashy light is the reflection of our own sent back to us by the Moon. It is the
reflection of a reflection.
This rotation of the Moon round the Earth is accomplished in twenty-
seven days, seven hours, forty-three minutes, eleven seconds; but as the
Earth is simultaneously revolving round the Sun, when the Moon returns to
the same point (the Earth having become displaced relatively to the Sun),
the Moon has to travel two days longer to recover its position between the
Sun and the Earth, so that the lunar month is longer than the sidereal
revolution of the Moon, and takes twenty-nine days, twelve hours, forty-
four minutes, three seconds. This is the duration of the sequence of phases.
This revolution is accomplished at a distance of 384,000 kilometers
(238,000 miles). The velocity of the Moon in its orbit is more than 1
kilometer (0.6214 mile) per second. But our planet sweeps it through space
at a velocity almost thirty times greater.
Page 196
The diameter of the Moon represents 273⁄1,000 that of the Earth, i.e., 3,480
kilometers (2,157 miles).
Its surface = 38,000,000 square kilometers (15,000,000 square miles), a
little more than the thirteenth part of the terrestrial surface, which =
510,000,000 (200,000,000 square miles).
In volume, the Moon is fifty times less than the Earth. Its mass or weight
is only 1⁄81 that of the terrestrial globe. Its density = 0.615, relatively to that
of the Earth, i.e., a little more than three times that of water. Weight at its
surface is very little: 0.174. A kilogram transported thither would only
weigh 174 grams.
At the meager distance of 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles) that
separates us from it (about thirty times the diameter of the Earth), the Moon
is a suburb of our terrestrial habitation. What does this small distance
amount to? It is a mere step in the universe.
A telegraphic message would get there in one and a half second; a
projectile fired from a gun would arrive in eight days, five hours; an
express-train would be due in eight months, twenty-two days. It is only the
1⁄388 part of the distance that separates us from the Sun, and only the
100⁄1,000,000 part of the distance of the stars nearest to us. Many men have
tramped the distance that separates us from the Moon. A bridge of thirty
terrestrial globes would suffice to unite the two worlds.
Owing to this great proximity, the Moon is the best known of all the
celestial spheres. Its geographical (or more correctly, selenographical,
Selene, moon) map was drawn out more than two centuries ago, at first in a
vague sketch, and afterward with more details, until to-day it is as precise
and accurate as any of our terrestrial maps of geography.
kilometers (2,157 miles).
Its surface = 38,000,000 square kilometers (15,000,000 square miles), a
little more than the thirteenth part of the terrestrial surface, which =
510,000,000 (200,000,000 square miles).
In volume, the Moon is fifty times less than the Earth. Its mass or weight
is only 1⁄81 that of the terrestrial globe. Its density = 0.615, relatively to that
of the Earth, i.e., a little more than three times that of water. Weight at its
surface is very little: 0.174. A kilogram transported thither would only
weigh 174 grams.
At the meager distance of 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles) that
separates us from it (about thirty times the diameter of the Earth), the Moon
is a suburb of our terrestrial habitation. What does this small distance
amount to? It is a mere step in the universe.
A telegraphic message would get there in one and a half second; a
projectile fired from a gun would arrive in eight days, five hours; an
express-train would be due in eight months, twenty-two days. It is only the
1⁄388 part of the distance that separates us from the Sun, and only the
100⁄1,000,000 part of the distance of the stars nearest to us. Many men have
tramped the distance that separates us from the Moon. A bridge of thirty
terrestrial globes would suffice to unite the two worlds.
Owing to this great proximity, the Moon is the best known of all the
celestial spheres. Its geographical (or more correctly, selenographical,
Selene, moon) map was drawn out more than two centuries ago, at first in a
vague sketch, and afterward with more details, until to-day it is as precise
and accurate as any of our terrestrial maps of geography.
Page 197
Before the invention of the telescope, from antiquity to the seventeenth
century, people lost themselves in conjectures as to the nature of this
strange lunar figure. It was held to be a mysterious world, the more
extraordinary in that it always presented the same face to us. Some
compared it to an immense mirror reflecting the image of the Earth. Others
pictured it as a silver star, an enchanted abode where all was wealth and
happiness. For many a long day it was the fashion to think, quite
irrationally, that the inhabitants of the Moon were fifteen times bigger than
ourselves.
The invention of telescopes, however, brought a little order and a grain
of truth into these fantastic assumptions. The first observations of Galileo
revolutionized science, and his discoveries filled the best-ordered minds
with enthusiasm. Thenceforward, the Moon became our property, a
terrestrial suburb, where the whole world would gladly have installed itself,
had the means of getting there been as swift as the wings of the
imagination. It became easy enough to invent a thousand enchanting
descriptions of the charms of our fair sister, and no one scrupled to do so.
Soon, it was observed that the Moon closely resembled the Earth in its
geological features; its surface bristles with sharp mountain peaks that light
up in so many luminous points beneath the rays of the Sun. Alongside, dark
and shaded parts indicate the plains; moreover, there are large gray patches
that were supposed to be seas because they reflect the solar light less
perfectly than the adjacent countries. At that epoch hardly anything was
known of the physical constitution of the Moon, and it was figured as
enveloped with an atmospheric layer, analogous to that at the bottom of
which we carry on our respiration.
To-day we know that these "seas" are destitute of water, and that if the
lunar globe possesses an atmosphere, it must be excessively light.
The Moon became the favorite object of astronomers, and the numerous
observations made of it authorized the delineation of very interesting
selenographic charts. In order to find one's way among the seas, plains, and
century, people lost themselves in conjectures as to the nature of this
strange lunar figure. It was held to be a mysterious world, the more
extraordinary in that it always presented the same face to us. Some
compared it to an immense mirror reflecting the image of the Earth. Others
pictured it as a silver star, an enchanted abode where all was wealth and
happiness. For many a long day it was the fashion to think, quite
irrationally, that the inhabitants of the Moon were fifteen times bigger than
ourselves.
The invention of telescopes, however, brought a little order and a grain
of truth into these fantastic assumptions. The first observations of Galileo
revolutionized science, and his discoveries filled the best-ordered minds
with enthusiasm. Thenceforward, the Moon became our property, a
terrestrial suburb, where the whole world would gladly have installed itself,
had the means of getting there been as swift as the wings of the
imagination. It became easy enough to invent a thousand enchanting
descriptions of the charms of our fair sister, and no one scrupled to do so.
Soon, it was observed that the Moon closely resembled the Earth in its
geological features; its surface bristles with sharp mountain peaks that light
up in so many luminous points beneath the rays of the Sun. Alongside, dark
and shaded parts indicate the plains; moreover, there are large gray patches
that were supposed to be seas because they reflect the solar light less
perfectly than the adjacent countries. At that epoch hardly anything was
known of the physical constitution of the Moon, and it was figured as
enveloped with an atmospheric layer, analogous to that at the bottom of
which we carry on our respiration.
To-day we know that these "seas" are destitute of water, and that if the
lunar globe possesses an atmosphere, it must be excessively light.
The Moon became the favorite object of astronomers, and the numerous
observations made of it authorized the delineation of very interesting
selenographic charts. In order to find one's way among the seas, plains, and
Page 198
mountains that make up the lunar territory, it was necessary to name them.
The seas were the first to be baptized, in accordance with their reputed
astrological influences. Accordingly, we find on the Moon, the Sea of
Fecundity, the Lake of Death, the Sea of Humors, the Ocean of Tempests,
the Sea of Tranquillity, the Marsh of Mists, the Lake of Dreams, the Sea of
Putrefaction, the Peninsula of Reverie, the Sea of Rains, etc.
With regard to the luminous parts and the mountains, it was at first
proposed to call them after the most illustrious astronomers, but the fear of
giving offense acted as a check on Hevelius and Riccioli, authors of the first
lunar maps (1647, 1651), and they judged it more prudent to transfer the
names of the terrestrial mountains to the Moon. The Alps, the Apennines,
the Pyrenees, the Carpathians, are all to be found up there; then, as the
vocabulary of the mountains was not adequate, the scientists reasserted their
rights, and we meet in the Moon, Aristotle, Plato, Hipparchus, Ptolemy,
Copernicus, Kepler, Newton, as well as other more modern and even
contemporaneous celebrities.
We have not space to reproduce the general chart of the Moon (that
published by the author measures not less than a meter, with the
nomenclature); but the figure subjoined gives a summary sufficient for the
limits of this little book. Here are the names of the principal lunar
mountains, with the numbers corresponding to them upon the map.
The seas were the first to be baptized, in accordance with their reputed
astrological influences. Accordingly, we find on the Moon, the Sea of
Fecundity, the Lake of Death, the Sea of Humors, the Ocean of Tempests,
the Sea of Tranquillity, the Marsh of Mists, the Lake of Dreams, the Sea of
Putrefaction, the Peninsula of Reverie, the Sea of Rains, etc.
With regard to the luminous parts and the mountains, it was at first
proposed to call them after the most illustrious astronomers, but the fear of
giving offense acted as a check on Hevelius and Riccioli, authors of the first
lunar maps (1647, 1651), and they judged it more prudent to transfer the
names of the terrestrial mountains to the Moon. The Alps, the Apennines,
the Pyrenees, the Carpathians, are all to be found up there; then, as the
vocabulary of the mountains was not adequate, the scientists reasserted their
rights, and we meet in the Moon, Aristotle, Plato, Hipparchus, Ptolemy,
Copernicus, Kepler, Newton, as well as other more modern and even
contemporaneous celebrities.
We have not space to reproduce the general chart of the Moon (that
published by the author measures not less than a meter, with the
nomenclature); but the figure subjoined gives a summary sufficient for the
limits of this little book. Here are the names of the principal lunar
mountains, with the numbers corresponding to them upon the map.
Page 199
Fig. 71.—Map of the Moon.
(From Fowler's "Telescopic Astronomy.")
1 Furnerius 14 Albategnius 27 Arzachel
2 Petavius 15 Hipparchus 28 Walter
3 Langrenus 16 Manilius 29 Clavius
4 Macrobius 17 Eudoxus 30 Tycho
5 Cleomedes 18 Aristotle 31 Bullialdus
6 Endymion 19 Cassini 32 Schiller
7 Altas 20 Aristillus 33 Schickard
8 Hercules 21 Plato 34 Gassendi
9 Romer 22 Archimedes 35 Kepler
10 Posidonius 23 Eratosthenes 36 Grimaldi
11 Fracastorius 24 Copernicus 37 Aristarchus
12 Theophilus 25 Ptolemy
(From Fowler's "Telescopic Astronomy.")
1 Furnerius 14 Albategnius 27 Arzachel
2 Petavius 15 Hipparchus 28 Walter
3 Langrenus 16 Manilius 29 Clavius
4 Macrobius 17 Eudoxus 30 Tycho
5 Cleomedes 18 Aristotle 31 Bullialdus
6 Endymion 19 Cassini 32 Schiller
7 Altas 20 Aristillus 33 Schickard
8 Hercules 21 Plato 34 Gassendi
9 Romer 22 Archimedes 35 Kepler
10 Posidonius 23 Eratosthenes 36 Grimaldi
11 Fracastorius 24 Copernicus 37 Aristarchus
12 Theophilus 25 Ptolemy
Page 200
13 Piccolomini 26 Alphonsus
A Mare Crisum F Mare Imbrium V Altai Mountains
B Mare Fercunditatis G Sinus Iridum W Mare Vaporum
C Mare Nectaris H Oceanus Procellarum X Apennine Mountains
D Mare Tranquilitatis I Mare Humorum Y Caucasus Mountains
E Mare Serenitatis K Mare Nubium Z Alps
The constantly growing progress of optics leads to perpetual new
discoveries in science, and at the present time we can say that we know the
geography of the Moon as well as, and even better than, that of our own
planet. The heights of all the mountains of the Moon are measured to within
a few feet. (One cannot say as much for the mountains of the Earth.) The
highest are over 7,000 meters (nearly 25,000 feet). Relatively to its
proportions, the satellite is much more mountainous than the planet, and the
plutonian giants are much more numerous there than here. If we have
peaks, like the Gaorisankar, the highest of the Himalayas and of the whole
Earth, whose elevation of 8,840 meters (29,000 feet) is equivalent to 1⁄1,140
the diameter of our globe, there are peaks on the Moon of 7,700 meters
(25,264 feet), e.g., those of Doerfel and Leibniz, the height of which is
equivalent to 1⁄470 the lunar diameter.
Tycho's Mountain is one of the finest upon our satellite. It is visible with
the naked eye (and perfectly with opera-glasses) as a white point shining
like a kind of star upon the lower portion of the disk. At the time of full
moon it is dazzling, and projects long rays from afar upon the lunar globe.
So, too, Mount Copernicus, whose brilliant whiteness sparkles in space. But
the strangest thing about these lunar mountains is that they are all hollow,
and can be measured as well in depth as in height. A type of mountain as
A Mare Crisum F Mare Imbrium V Altai Mountains
B Mare Fercunditatis G Sinus Iridum W Mare Vaporum
C Mare Nectaris H Oceanus Procellarum X Apennine Mountains
D Mare Tranquilitatis I Mare Humorum Y Caucasus Mountains
E Mare Serenitatis K Mare Nubium Z Alps
The constantly growing progress of optics leads to perpetual new
discoveries in science, and at the present time we can say that we know the
geography of the Moon as well as, and even better than, that of our own
planet. The heights of all the mountains of the Moon are measured to within
a few feet. (One cannot say as much for the mountains of the Earth.) The
highest are over 7,000 meters (nearly 25,000 feet). Relatively to its
proportions, the satellite is much more mountainous than the planet, and the
plutonian giants are much more numerous there than here. If we have
peaks, like the Gaorisankar, the highest of the Himalayas and of the whole
Earth, whose elevation of 8,840 meters (29,000 feet) is equivalent to 1⁄1,140
the diameter of our globe, there are peaks on the Moon of 7,700 meters
(25,264 feet), e.g., those of Doerfel and Leibniz, the height of which is
equivalent to 1⁄470 the lunar diameter.
Tycho's Mountain is one of the finest upon our satellite. It is visible with
the naked eye (and perfectly with opera-glasses) as a white point shining
like a kind of star upon the lower portion of the disk. At the time of full
moon it is dazzling, and projects long rays from afar upon the lunar globe.
So, too, Mount Copernicus, whose brilliant whiteness sparkles in space. But
the strangest thing about these lunar mountains is that they are all hollow,
and can be measured as well in depth as in height. A type of mountain as
Page 201
strange to us as are the seas without water! In effect, these mountains of the
moon are ancient volcanic craters, with no summits, nor covers.
At the top of the highest peaks, there is a large circular depression,
prolonged into the heart of the mountain, sometimes far below the level of
the surrounding plains, and as these craters often measure several hundred
kilometers, one is obliged, if one does not want to go all round them in
crossing the mountain, to descend almost perpendicularly into the depths
and cross there, to reascend the opposite side, and return to the plain. These
alpine excursions incontestably deserve the name of perilous ascents!
No country on the Earth can give us any notion of the state of the lunar
soil: never was ground so tormented; never globe so profoundly shattered to
its very bowels. The mountains are accumulations of enormous rocks
tumbled one upon the other, and round the awful labyrinth of craters one
sees nothing but dismantled ramparts, or columns of pointed rocks like
cathedral spires issuing from the chaos.
As we said, there is no atmosphere, or at least so little at the bottom of
the valleys that it is imperceptible. No clouds, no fog, no rain nor snow. The
sky is an eternally black space, vaultless, jeweled with stars by day as by
night.
Let us suppose that we arrive among these savage steppes at daybreak:
the lunar day is fifteen times longer than our own, because the Sun takes a
month to illuminate the entire circuit of the Moon; there are no less than
354 hours from the rising to the setting of the Sun. If we arrive before the
sunrise, there is no aurora to herald it, for in the absence of atmosphere
there can be no sort of twilight. Of a sudden on the dark horizon come
flashes of the solar light, striking the summits of the mountains, while the
plains and valleys are still in darkness. The light spreads slowly, for while
on the Earth in central latitudes the Sun takes only two minutes and a
quarter to rise, on the Moon it takes nearly an hour, and in consequence the
light it sends out is very weak for some minutes, and increases excessively
moon are ancient volcanic craters, with no summits, nor covers.
At the top of the highest peaks, there is a large circular depression,
prolonged into the heart of the mountain, sometimes far below the level of
the surrounding plains, and as these craters often measure several hundred
kilometers, one is obliged, if one does not want to go all round them in
crossing the mountain, to descend almost perpendicularly into the depths
and cross there, to reascend the opposite side, and return to the plain. These
alpine excursions incontestably deserve the name of perilous ascents!
No country on the Earth can give us any notion of the state of the lunar
soil: never was ground so tormented; never globe so profoundly shattered to
its very bowels. The mountains are accumulations of enormous rocks
tumbled one upon the other, and round the awful labyrinth of craters one
sees nothing but dismantled ramparts, or columns of pointed rocks like
cathedral spires issuing from the chaos.
As we said, there is no atmosphere, or at least so little at the bottom of
the valleys that it is imperceptible. No clouds, no fog, no rain nor snow. The
sky is an eternally black space, vaultless, jeweled with stars by day as by
night.
Let us suppose that we arrive among these savage steppes at daybreak:
the lunar day is fifteen times longer than our own, because the Sun takes a
month to illuminate the entire circuit of the Moon; there are no less than
354 hours from the rising to the setting of the Sun. If we arrive before the
sunrise, there is no aurora to herald it, for in the absence of atmosphere
there can be no sort of twilight. Of a sudden on the dark horizon come
flashes of the solar light, striking the summits of the mountains, while the
plains and valleys are still in darkness. The light spreads slowly, for while
on the Earth in central latitudes the Sun takes only two minutes and a
quarter to rise, on the Moon it takes nearly an hour, and in consequence the
light it sends out is very weak for some minutes, and increases excessively
Page 202
slowly. It is a kind of aurora, but lasts a very short time, for when at the end
of half an hour, the solar disk has half risen, the light appears as intense to
the eye as when it is entirely above the horizon; the radiant orb is seen with
its protuberances and its burning atmosphere. It rises slowly, like a
luminous god, in the depths of the black sky, a profound and formless sky
in which the stars shine all day, since they are not hidden by any
atmospheric veil such as conceals them from us during the daylight.
Fig. 72.—The Lunar Apennines.
The absence of sensible atmosphere must produce an effect on the
temperature of the Moon analogous to that perceived on the high mountains
of half an hour, the solar disk has half risen, the light appears as intense to
the eye as when it is entirely above the horizon; the radiant orb is seen with
its protuberances and its burning atmosphere. It rises slowly, like a
luminous god, in the depths of the black sky, a profound and formless sky
in which the stars shine all day, since they are not hidden by any
atmospheric veil such as conceals them from us during the daylight.
Fig. 72.—The Lunar Apennines.
The absence of sensible atmosphere must produce an effect on the
temperature of the Moon analogous to that perceived on the high mountains
Page 203
of our globe, where the rarefaction of the air does not permit the solar heat
to concentrate itself upon the surface of the soil, as it does below the
atmosphere, which acts as a forcing-house: the Sun's heat is not kept in by
anything, and incessantly radiates out toward space. In all probability the
cold is extremely and constantly rigorous, not only during the nights, which
are fifteen times longer than our own, but even during the long days of
sunshine.
We give two different drawings to represent these curious aspects of
lunar topography. The first (Fig. 72) is taken in the neighborhood of the
Apennines, and shows a long chain of mountains beneath which are three
deep rings, Archimedes, Aristillus, and Autolycus: the second (Fig. 73)
depicts the lunar ring of Flammarion,[14] whose outline is constructed of
dismantled ramparts, and whose depths are sprinkled with little craters. The
first of these two drawings was made in England by Nasmyth, the second in
Germany by Krieger: they both give an exact idea of what one sees in the
telescope with different modes of solar illumination.
In the Moon's always black and starry sky a majestic star that is not
visible from the Earth, and exhibits this peculiarity that it is stationary in the
Heavens, while all the others pass behind it, may constantly be admired, by
day as well as by night; and it is also of considerable apparent magnitude.
This orb, some four times as large as the Moon in diameter, and thirteen to
fourteen times more extensive in surface, is our Earth, which presents to the
Moon a sequence of phases similar to those which our satellite presents to
us, but in the inverse direction. At the moment of New Moon, the Sun fully
illuminates the terrestrial hemisphere turned toward our satellite, and we get
"Full Earth"; at the time of Full Moon, on the contrary, the non-illuminated
hemisphere of the Earth is turned toward the satellite, and we get "New
Earth": when the Moon shows us first quarter, the Earth is in last quarter,
and so on. The drawing subjoined gives an idea of these aspects.
to concentrate itself upon the surface of the soil, as it does below the
atmosphere, which acts as a forcing-house: the Sun's heat is not kept in by
anything, and incessantly radiates out toward space. In all probability the
cold is extremely and constantly rigorous, not only during the nights, which
are fifteen times longer than our own, but even during the long days of
sunshine.
We give two different drawings to represent these curious aspects of
lunar topography. The first (Fig. 72) is taken in the neighborhood of the
Apennines, and shows a long chain of mountains beneath which are three
deep rings, Archimedes, Aristillus, and Autolycus: the second (Fig. 73)
depicts the lunar ring of Flammarion,[14] whose outline is constructed of
dismantled ramparts, and whose depths are sprinkled with little craters. The
first of these two drawings was made in England by Nasmyth, the second in
Germany by Krieger: they both give an exact idea of what one sees in the
telescope with different modes of solar illumination.
In the Moon's always black and starry sky a majestic star that is not
visible from the Earth, and exhibits this peculiarity that it is stationary in the
Heavens, while all the others pass behind it, may constantly be admired, by
day as well as by night; and it is also of considerable apparent magnitude.
This orb, some four times as large as the Moon in diameter, and thirteen to
fourteen times more extensive in surface, is our Earth, which presents to the
Moon a sequence of phases similar to those which our satellite presents to
us, but in the inverse direction. At the moment of New Moon, the Sun fully
illuminates the terrestrial hemisphere turned toward our satellite, and we get
"Full Earth"; at the time of Full Moon, on the contrary, the non-illuminated
hemisphere of the Earth is turned toward the satellite, and we get "New
Earth": when the Moon shows us first quarter, the Earth is in last quarter,
and so on. The drawing subjoined gives an idea of these aspects.
Page 204
Fig. 73.—Flammarion's Lunar Ring.
What a curious sight our globe must be during this long night of fourteen
times twenty-four hours! Independent of its phases, which bring it from first
quarter to full earth for the middle of the night, and from full earth to last
quarter for sunrise, how interested we should be to see it thus stationary in
the sky, and turning on itself in twenty-four hours.
What a curious sight our globe must be during this long night of fourteen
times twenty-four hours! Independent of its phases, which bring it from first
quarter to full earth for the middle of the night, and from full earth to last
quarter for sunrise, how interested we should be to see it thus stationary in
the sky, and turning on itself in twenty-four hours.
Page 205
Fig. 74.—Lunar landscape with the Earth in the sky.
Yes, thanks to us, the inhabitants of the lunar hemisphere turned toward
us are gratified by the sight of a splendid nocturnal torch, doubtless less
white than our own despite the clouds with which the terrestrial globe is
studded, and shaded in a tender tone of bluish emerald-green. The royal orb
of their long nights, the Earth, gives them moonlight of unparalleled beauty,
and we may say without false modesty that our presence in the lunar sky
must produce marvelous and absolutely fairy-like effects.
Maybe, they envy us our globe, a dazzling dwelling-place whose
splendor radiates through space; they see its greenish clarity varying with
the extent of cloud that veils its seas and continents, and they observe its
motion of rotation, by which all the countries of our planet are revealed in
succession to its admirers.
We are talking of these pageants seen from the Moon, and of the
inhabitants of our satellite as if they really existed. The sterile and desolate
aspect of the lunar world, however, rather brings us to the conclusion that
such inhabitants are non-existent, although we have no authorization for
affirming this. That they have existed seems to me beyond doubt. The lunar
volcanoes had a considerable activity, in an atmosphere that allowed the
Yes, thanks to us, the inhabitants of the lunar hemisphere turned toward
us are gratified by the sight of a splendid nocturnal torch, doubtless less
white than our own despite the clouds with which the terrestrial globe is
studded, and shaded in a tender tone of bluish emerald-green. The royal orb
of their long nights, the Earth, gives them moonlight of unparalleled beauty,
and we may say without false modesty that our presence in the lunar sky
must produce marvelous and absolutely fairy-like effects.
Maybe, they envy us our globe, a dazzling dwelling-place whose
splendor radiates through space; they see its greenish clarity varying with
the extent of cloud that veils its seas and continents, and they observe its
motion of rotation, by which all the countries of our planet are revealed in
succession to its admirers.
We are talking of these pageants seen from the Moon, and of the
inhabitants of our satellite as if they really existed. The sterile and desolate
aspect of the lunar world, however, rather brings us to the conclusion that
such inhabitants are non-existent, although we have no authorization for
affirming this. That they have existed seems to me beyond doubt. The lunar
volcanoes had a considerable activity, in an atmosphere that allowed the
Page 206
white volcanic ashes to be carried a long way by the winds, figuring round
the craters the stellar rays that are still so striking. These cinders were
spread over the soil, preserving all its asperities of outline, a little heaped up
on the side to which they were impelled. The magnificent photographs
recently made at the Paris Observatory by MM. Loewy and Puiseux are
splendid evidence of these projections. In this era of planetary activity there
were liquids and gases on the surface of the lunar globe, which appear
subsequently to have been entirely absorbed. Now the teaching of our own
planet is that Nature nowhere remains infertile, and that the production of
Life is a law so general and so imperious that life develops at its own
expense, sooner than abstain from developing. Accordingly, it is difficult to
suppose that the lunar elements can have remained inactive, when only next
door they exhibited such fecundity upon our globe. Yes, the Moon has been
inhabited by beings doubtless very different from ourselves, and perhaps
may still be, although this globe has run through the phases of its astral life
more rapidly than our own, and the daughter is relatively older than the
mother.
The duration of the life of the worlds appears to have been in proportion
with their masses. The Moon cooled and mineralized more quickly than the
Earth. Jupiter is still fluid.
The progress of optics brings us already very close to this neighboring
province. 'Tis a pity we can not get a little nearer!
A telescopic magnification of 2,000 puts the Moon at 384,000⁄2,000 or 192
kilometers (some 120 miles) from our eye. Practically we can obtain no
more, either from the most powerful instruments, or from photographic
enlargements. Sometimes, exceptionally, enlargements of 3,000 can be
used. This = 384,000⁄3,000 or 128 kilometers (some 80 miles). Undoubtedly,
this is an admirable result, which does the greatest honor to human
intelligence. But it is still too far to enable us to determine anything in
regard to lunar life.
the craters the stellar rays that are still so striking. These cinders were
spread over the soil, preserving all its asperities of outline, a little heaped up
on the side to which they were impelled. The magnificent photographs
recently made at the Paris Observatory by MM. Loewy and Puiseux are
splendid evidence of these projections. In this era of planetary activity there
were liquids and gases on the surface of the lunar globe, which appear
subsequently to have been entirely absorbed. Now the teaching of our own
planet is that Nature nowhere remains infertile, and that the production of
Life is a law so general and so imperious that life develops at its own
expense, sooner than abstain from developing. Accordingly, it is difficult to
suppose that the lunar elements can have remained inactive, when only next
door they exhibited such fecundity upon our globe. Yes, the Moon has been
inhabited by beings doubtless very different from ourselves, and perhaps
may still be, although this globe has run through the phases of its astral life
more rapidly than our own, and the daughter is relatively older than the
mother.
The duration of the life of the worlds appears to have been in proportion
with their masses. The Moon cooled and mineralized more quickly than the
Earth. Jupiter is still fluid.
The progress of optics brings us already very close to this neighboring
province. 'Tis a pity we can not get a little nearer!
A telescopic magnification of 2,000 puts the Moon at 384,000⁄2,000 or 192
kilometers (some 120 miles) from our eye. Practically we can obtain no
more, either from the most powerful instruments, or from photographic
enlargements. Sometimes, exceptionally, enlargements of 3,000 can be
used. This = 384,000⁄3,000 or 128 kilometers (some 80 miles). Undoubtedly,
this is an admirable result, which does the greatest honor to human
intelligence. But it is still too far to enable us to determine anything in
regard to lunar life.
Page 207
Any one who likes to be impressed by grand and magnificent sights may
turn even a modest field-glass upon our luminous satellite, at about first
quarter, when the relief of its surface, illuminated obliquely by the Sun, is at
its greatest value. If you examine our neighbor world at this period, for
choice at the hour of sunset, you will be astonished at its brilliancy and
beauty. Its outlines, its laces, and embroideries, give the image of a jewel of
shining silver, translucent, fluid, palpitating in the ether. Nothing could be
more beautiful, nothing purer, and more celestial, than this lunar globe
floating in the silence of space, and sending back to us as in some fairy
dream the solar illumination that floods it. But yesterday I received the
same impression, watching a great ring half standing out, and following the
progress of the Sun as it mounted the lunar horizon to touch these silvered
peaks. And I reflected that it is indeed inconceivable that 999,999⁄1,000,000 of
the inhabitants of our planet should pass their lives without ever having
attended to this pageant, nor to any of those others which the divine Urania
scatters so profusely beneath the wondering gaze of the observers of the
Heavens.
turn even a modest field-glass upon our luminous satellite, at about first
quarter, when the relief of its surface, illuminated obliquely by the Sun, is at
its greatest value. If you examine our neighbor world at this period, for
choice at the hour of sunset, you will be astonished at its brilliancy and
beauty. Its outlines, its laces, and embroideries, give the image of a jewel of
shining silver, translucent, fluid, palpitating in the ether. Nothing could be
more beautiful, nothing purer, and more celestial, than this lunar globe
floating in the silence of space, and sending back to us as in some fairy
dream the solar illumination that floods it. But yesterday I received the
same impression, watching a great ring half standing out, and following the
progress of the Sun as it mounted the lunar horizon to touch these silvered
peaks. And I reflected that it is indeed inconceivable that 999,999⁄1,000,000 of
the inhabitants of our planet should pass their lives without ever having
attended to this pageant, nor to any of those others which the divine Urania
scatters so profusely beneath the wondering gaze of the observers of the
Heavens.
Page 208
CHAPTER X
THE ECLIPSES
Among all the celestial phenomena at which it may be our lot to assist
during our contemplation of the universe, one of the most magnificent and
imposing is undoubtedly that which we are now going to consider.
The hirsute comets, and shooting stars with their graceful flight,
captivate us with a mysterious and sometimes fantastic attraction. We gladly
allow our thoughts, mute questioners of the mysteries of the firmament, to
rest upon the brilliant, golden trail they leave behind them. These unknown
travelers bring a message from eternity; they tell us the tale of their distant
journeys. Children of space, their ethereal beauty speaks of the immensity
of the universe.
The eclipses, on the other hand, are phenomena that touch us more
nearly, and take place in our vicinity.
In treating of them, we remain between the Earth and the Moon, in our
little province, and witness the picturesque effects of the combined
movements of our satellite around us.
Have you ever seen a total eclipse of the Sun?
The sky is absolutely clear: no fraction of cloud shadows the solar rays.
The azure vault of the firmament crowns the Earth with a dome of dazzling
light. The fires of the orb of day shed their beneficent influence generally
upon the world.
Yet, see! The radiance diminishes. The luminous disk of the Sun is
gradually corroded. Another disk, as black as ink, creeps in front of it, and
THE ECLIPSES
Among all the celestial phenomena at which it may be our lot to assist
during our contemplation of the universe, one of the most magnificent and
imposing is undoubtedly that which we are now going to consider.
The hirsute comets, and shooting stars with their graceful flight,
captivate us with a mysterious and sometimes fantastic attraction. We gladly
allow our thoughts, mute questioners of the mysteries of the firmament, to
rest upon the brilliant, golden trail they leave behind them. These unknown
travelers bring a message from eternity; they tell us the tale of their distant
journeys. Children of space, their ethereal beauty speaks of the immensity
of the universe.
The eclipses, on the other hand, are phenomena that touch us more
nearly, and take place in our vicinity.
In treating of them, we remain between the Earth and the Moon, in our
little province, and witness the picturesque effects of the combined
movements of our satellite around us.
Have you ever seen a total eclipse of the Sun?
The sky is absolutely clear: no fraction of cloud shadows the solar rays.
The azure vault of the firmament crowns the Earth with a dome of dazzling
light. The fires of the orb of day shed their beneficent influence generally
upon the world.
Yet, see! The radiance diminishes. The luminous disk of the Sun is
gradually corroded. Another disk, as black as ink, creeps in front of it, and
Page 209
little by little invades it entirely. The atmosphere takes on a wan, sepulchral
hue; astonished nature is hushed in profound silence; an immense veil of
sadness spreads over the world. Night comes on suddenly, and the stars
shine out in the Heavens. It seems as though by some mysterious cataclysm
the Sun had disappeared forever. But this tribulation is soon over. The
divine orb is not extinct. A flaming jet emerges from the shadow,
announcing his return, and when he reappears we see that he has lost
nothing in splendor or beauty. He is still the radiant Apollo, King of Day,
watching over the life of the planetary worlds.
This sudden night, darkening the Heavens in the midst of a fine day, can
not fail to produce a vivid impression upon the spectators of the superb
phenomenon.
The eclipse lasts only for a few moments, but long enough to make a
deep impression upon our minds, and indeed to inspire anxious spirits with
terror and agitation—even at this epoch, when we know that there is
nothing supernatural or formidable about it.
In former days, Humanity would have trembled, in uneasy consternation.
Was it a judgment from Heaven? Must it not be the work of some invisible
hand throwing the somber veil of night over the celestial torch?
Had not the Earth strayed off her appointed path, and were we not all to
be deprived eternally of the light of our good Sun? Was some monstrous
dragon perhaps preparing to devour the orb of day?
The fable of the dragon devouring the Sun or Moon during the eclipses
is universal in Asia as in Africa, and still finds acceptance under more than
one latitude. But our readers already know that we may identify the terrible
celestial dragon with our gentle friend the Moon, who would not be greatly
flattered by the comparison.
We saw in the preceding lesson that the Moon revolves round us,
describing an almost circular orbit that she travels over in about a month. In
hue; astonished nature is hushed in profound silence; an immense veil of
sadness spreads over the world. Night comes on suddenly, and the stars
shine out in the Heavens. It seems as though by some mysterious cataclysm
the Sun had disappeared forever. But this tribulation is soon over. The
divine orb is not extinct. A flaming jet emerges from the shadow,
announcing his return, and when he reappears we see that he has lost
nothing in splendor or beauty. He is still the radiant Apollo, King of Day,
watching over the life of the planetary worlds.
This sudden night, darkening the Heavens in the midst of a fine day, can
not fail to produce a vivid impression upon the spectators of the superb
phenomenon.
The eclipse lasts only for a few moments, but long enough to make a
deep impression upon our minds, and indeed to inspire anxious spirits with
terror and agitation—even at this epoch, when we know that there is
nothing supernatural or formidable about it.
In former days, Humanity would have trembled, in uneasy consternation.
Was it a judgment from Heaven? Must it not be the work of some invisible
hand throwing the somber veil of night over the celestial torch?
Had not the Earth strayed off her appointed path, and were we not all to
be deprived eternally of the light of our good Sun? Was some monstrous
dragon perhaps preparing to devour the orb of day?
The fable of the dragon devouring the Sun or Moon during the eclipses
is universal in Asia as in Africa, and still finds acceptance under more than
one latitude. But our readers already know that we may identify the terrible
celestial dragon with our gentle friend the Moon, who would not be greatly
flattered by the comparison.
We saw in the preceding lesson that the Moon revolves round us,
describing an almost circular orbit that she travels over in about a month. In
Page 210
consequence of this motion, the nocturnal orb is sometimes between the
Sun and the Earth, sometimes behind us, sometimes at a right angle in
relation to the Sun and the Earth. Now, the eclipses of the Sun occur
invariably at the time of New Moon, when our satellite passes between the
Sun and ourselves, and the eclipses of the Moon, at the moment of Full
Moon, when the latter is opposite to the Sun, and behind us.
This fact soon enabled the astronomers of antiquity to discover the
causes to which eclipses are due.
The Moon, passing at the beginning of its revolution between the Sun
and the Earth, may conceal a greater or lesser portion of the orb of day. In
this case there is an eclipse of the Sun. On the other hand, when it is on the
other side of the Earth in relation to the Sun, at the moment of Full Moon,
our planet may intercept the solar rays, and prevent them from reaching our
satellite. The Moon is plunged into the shadow of the Earth, and is then
eclipsed. Such is the very simple explanation of the phenomenon. But why
is there not an eclipse of the Sun at each New Moon, and an eclipse of the
Moon at each Full Moon?
If the Moon revolved round us in the same plane as the Earth round the
Sun, it would eclipse the Sun at each New Moon, and would be itself
eclipsed in our shadow at each Full Moon. But the plane of the lunar orbit
dips a little upon the plane of the terrestrial orbit, and the eclipses can only
be produced when the New Moon or the Full Moon occur at the line of
intersection of these two planes, i.e., when the Sun, the Moon, and the Earth
are upon the same straight line. In the majority of cases, instead of
interposing itself directly in front of the sovereign of our system, our
satellite passes a little above or a little below him, just as its passage behind
us is nearly always effected a little above or below the cone of shadow that
accompanies our planet, opposite the Sun.
When the Moon intervenes directly in front of the Sun, she arrests the
light of the radiant orb, and conceals a greater or less portion of the solar
Sun and the Earth, sometimes behind us, sometimes at a right angle in
relation to the Sun and the Earth. Now, the eclipses of the Sun occur
invariably at the time of New Moon, when our satellite passes between the
Sun and ourselves, and the eclipses of the Moon, at the moment of Full
Moon, when the latter is opposite to the Sun, and behind us.
This fact soon enabled the astronomers of antiquity to discover the
causes to which eclipses are due.
The Moon, passing at the beginning of its revolution between the Sun
and the Earth, may conceal a greater or lesser portion of the orb of day. In
this case there is an eclipse of the Sun. On the other hand, when it is on the
other side of the Earth in relation to the Sun, at the moment of Full Moon,
our planet may intercept the solar rays, and prevent them from reaching our
satellite. The Moon is plunged into the shadow of the Earth, and is then
eclipsed. Such is the very simple explanation of the phenomenon. But why
is there not an eclipse of the Sun at each New Moon, and an eclipse of the
Moon at each Full Moon?
If the Moon revolved round us in the same plane as the Earth round the
Sun, it would eclipse the Sun at each New Moon, and would be itself
eclipsed in our shadow at each Full Moon. But the plane of the lunar orbit
dips a little upon the plane of the terrestrial orbit, and the eclipses can only
be produced when the New Moon or the Full Moon occur at the line of
intersection of these two planes, i.e., when the Sun, the Moon, and the Earth
are upon the same straight line. In the majority of cases, instead of
interposing itself directly in front of the sovereign of our system, our
satellite passes a little above or a little below him, just as its passage behind
us is nearly always effected a little above or below the cone of shadow that
accompanies our planet, opposite the Sun.
When the Moon intervenes directly in front of the Sun, she arrests the
light of the radiant orb, and conceals a greater or less portion of the solar
Page 211
disk. The eclipse is partial if the Moon covers only a portion of the Sun;
total if she covers it entirely; annular, if the solar disk is visible all round the
lunar disk, as appears when the Moon, in her elliptical orbit, is beyond
medium distance, toward the apogee.
On the other hand, when the Moon arrives immediately within the cone
of shadow that the Earth projects behind it, it is her turn to be eclipsed. She
no longer receives the rays of the Sun, and this deprivation is the more
marked in that she owes all her brilliancy to the light of the orb of day. The
Moon's obscurity is complete if she is entirely plunged into the cone of
shadow. In this case, the eclipse is total. But if a portion of her disk emerges
from the cone, that part remains illuminated while the light of the other dies
out. In that case there is a partial eclipse, and the rounded form of the
Earth's shadow can be seen projected upon our satellite, a celestial witness
to the spherical nature of our globe.
Under certain conditions, then, the Moon can deprive us of the luminous
rays of the Sun, by concealing the orb of day, and in other cases is herself
effaced in crossing our shadow. Despite the fables, fears, and anxieties it
has engendered, this phenomenon is perfectly natural: the Moon is only
playing hide-and-seek with us—a very harmless amusement, as regards the
safety of our planet.
But as we said just now, these phenomena formerly had the power of
terrifying ignorant mortals, either when the orb of light and life seemed on
the verge of extinction, or when the beautiful Phœbus was covered with a
veil of crape and woe, or took on a deep coppery hue.
It would take a volume to describe all the notable events which have
been influenced by eclipses, sometimes for good, more often with
disastrous consequences. The recital of these tragic stories would not be
devoid of interest; it would illustrate the possibilities of ignorance and
superstition, and the power man gains from intellectual culture and
scientific study.
total if she covers it entirely; annular, if the solar disk is visible all round the
lunar disk, as appears when the Moon, in her elliptical orbit, is beyond
medium distance, toward the apogee.
On the other hand, when the Moon arrives immediately within the cone
of shadow that the Earth projects behind it, it is her turn to be eclipsed. She
no longer receives the rays of the Sun, and this deprivation is the more
marked in that she owes all her brilliancy to the light of the orb of day. The
Moon's obscurity is complete if she is entirely plunged into the cone of
shadow. In this case, the eclipse is total. But if a portion of her disk emerges
from the cone, that part remains illuminated while the light of the other dies
out. In that case there is a partial eclipse, and the rounded form of the
Earth's shadow can be seen projected upon our satellite, a celestial witness
to the spherical nature of our globe.
Under certain conditions, then, the Moon can deprive us of the luminous
rays of the Sun, by concealing the orb of day, and in other cases is herself
effaced in crossing our shadow. Despite the fables, fears, and anxieties it
has engendered, this phenomenon is perfectly natural: the Moon is only
playing hide-and-seek with us—a very harmless amusement, as regards the
safety of our planet.
But as we said just now, these phenomena formerly had the power of
terrifying ignorant mortals, either when the orb of light and life seemed on
the verge of extinction, or when the beautiful Phœbus was covered with a
veil of crape and woe, or took on a deep coppery hue.
It would take a volume to describe all the notable events which have
been influenced by eclipses, sometimes for good, more often with
disastrous consequences. The recital of these tragic stories would not be
devoid of interest; it would illustrate the possibilities of ignorance and
superstition, and the power man gains from intellectual culture and
scientific study.
Page 212
Herodotus records that the Scythians, having some grievance against
Cyaxarus, King of the Medes, revenged themselves by serving up the limbs
of one of his children, whom they had murdered, at a banquet as rare game.
The scoundrels who committed this atrocious crime took refuge at the Court
of the King of Lydia, who was ill judged enough to protect them. War was
accordingly declared between the Medes and Lydians, but a total eclipse of
the Sun occurring just when the battle was imminent, had the happy effect
of disarming the combatants, who prudently retired each to their own
country. This eclipse, which seems to have occurred on May 28, 584 b.c.,
had been predicted by Thales. The French painter Rochegrosse has painted
a striking picture of the scene (Fig. 75).
In the year 413 b.c. the Athenian General Nicias prepared to return to
Greece after an expedition to Sicily. But, terrified by an eclipse of the
Moon, and fearing the malign influence of the phenomenon, he put off his
departure, and lost the chance of retreat. This superstition cost him his life.
The Greek army was destroyed, and this event marks the commencement of
the decadence of Athens.
In 331 b.c. an eclipse of the Moon disorganized the troops of Alexander,
near Arbela, and the great Macedonian Captain had need of all his address
to reassure his panic-stricken soldiers.
Agathocles, King of Syracuse, blocked by the Carthaginians in the port
of this city, had the good fortune to escape, but was disturbed on the second
day of his flight by the arrival of a total eclipse of the Sun which alarmed
his companions. "What are you afraid of?" said he, spreading his cloak in
front of the Sun. "Are you alarmed at a shadow?" (This eclipse seems to be
that of August 15, 309, rather than that of March 2, 310.)
Cyaxarus, King of the Medes, revenged themselves by serving up the limbs
of one of his children, whom they had murdered, at a banquet as rare game.
The scoundrels who committed this atrocious crime took refuge at the Court
of the King of Lydia, who was ill judged enough to protect them. War was
accordingly declared between the Medes and Lydians, but a total eclipse of
the Sun occurring just when the battle was imminent, had the happy effect
of disarming the combatants, who prudently retired each to their own
country. This eclipse, which seems to have occurred on May 28, 584 b.c.,
had been predicted by Thales. The French painter Rochegrosse has painted
a striking picture of the scene (Fig. 75).
In the year 413 b.c. the Athenian General Nicias prepared to return to
Greece after an expedition to Sicily. But, terrified by an eclipse of the
Moon, and fearing the malign influence of the phenomenon, he put off his
departure, and lost the chance of retreat. This superstition cost him his life.
The Greek army was destroyed, and this event marks the commencement of
the decadence of Athens.
In 331 b.c. an eclipse of the Moon disorganized the troops of Alexander,
near Arbela, and the great Macedonian Captain had need of all his address
to reassure his panic-stricken soldiers.
Agathocles, King of Syracuse, blocked by the Carthaginians in the port
of this city, had the good fortune to escape, but was disturbed on the second
day of his flight by the arrival of a total eclipse of the Sun which alarmed
his companions. "What are you afraid of?" said he, spreading his cloak in
front of the Sun. "Are you alarmed at a shadow?" (This eclipse seems to be
that of August 15, 309, rather than that of March 2, 310.)
Page 213
Fig. 75.—Battle between the Medes and Lydians arrested by an Eclipse of
the Sun.
On June 29, 1033, an epoch at which the approaching end of the world
struck terror into all hearts, an annular eclipse of the Sun occurring about
midday frustrated the designs of a band of conspirators who intended to
strangle the Pope at the altar. This Pope was Benedict IX, a youth of less
than twenty, whose conduct is said to have been anything but exemplary.
the Sun.
On June 29, 1033, an epoch at which the approaching end of the world
struck terror into all hearts, an annular eclipse of the Sun occurring about
midday frustrated the designs of a band of conspirators who intended to
strangle the Pope at the altar. This Pope was Benedict IX, a youth of less
than twenty, whose conduct is said to have been anything but exemplary.
Page 214
The assassins, terrified at the darkening of the Sun, dared not touch the
Pontiff, and he reigned till 1044.[15]
On March 1, 1504, a lunar eclipse saved the life of Christopher
Columbus. He was threatened with death by starvation in Jamaica, where
the contumacious savages refused to give him provisions. Forewarned of
the arrival of this eclipse by the astronomical almanacs, he threatened to
deprive the Caribs of the light of the Moon—and kept his word. The eclipse
had hardly begun when the terrified Indians flung themselves at his feet,
and brought him all that he required.
In all times and among all people we find traces of popular superstitions
connected with eclipses. Here, the abnormal absence of the Moon's light is
regarded as a sign of divine anger: the humble penitents betake themselves
to prayer to ward off the divine anger. There, the cruelty of the dread dragon
is to be averted: he must be chased away by cries and threats, and the sky is
bombarded with shots to deliver the victim from his monstrous oppressor.
In France the announcement of a solar eclipse for August 21, 1560, so
greatly disturbed our ancestors' peace of mind as to make them idiotic.
Preparations were made for assisting at an alarming phenomenon that
threatened Humanity with deadly consequences! The unhappy eclipse had
been preceded by a multitude of ill omens! Some expected a great
revolution in the provinces and in Rome, others predicted a new universal
deluge, or, on the other hand, the conflagration of the world; the most
optimistic thought the air would be contaminated. To preserve themselves
from so many dangers, and in accordance with the physicians' orders,
numbers of frightened people shut themselves up in tightly closed and
perfumed cellars, where they awaited the decrees of Fate. The approach of
the phenomenon increased the panic, and it is said that one village curé,
being unable to hear the confessions of all his flock, who wanted to
discharge their souls of sin before taking flight for a better world, was fain
to tell them "there was no hurry, because the eclipse had been put off a
fortnight on account of the number of penitents"!
Pontiff, and he reigned till 1044.[15]
On March 1, 1504, a lunar eclipse saved the life of Christopher
Columbus. He was threatened with death by starvation in Jamaica, where
the contumacious savages refused to give him provisions. Forewarned of
the arrival of this eclipse by the astronomical almanacs, he threatened to
deprive the Caribs of the light of the Moon—and kept his word. The eclipse
had hardly begun when the terrified Indians flung themselves at his feet,
and brought him all that he required.
In all times and among all people we find traces of popular superstitions
connected with eclipses. Here, the abnormal absence of the Moon's light is
regarded as a sign of divine anger: the humble penitents betake themselves
to prayer to ward off the divine anger. There, the cruelty of the dread dragon
is to be averted: he must be chased away by cries and threats, and the sky is
bombarded with shots to deliver the victim from his monstrous oppressor.
In France the announcement of a solar eclipse for August 21, 1560, so
greatly disturbed our ancestors' peace of mind as to make them idiotic.
Preparations were made for assisting at an alarming phenomenon that
threatened Humanity with deadly consequences! The unhappy eclipse had
been preceded by a multitude of ill omens! Some expected a great
revolution in the provinces and in Rome, others predicted a new universal
deluge, or, on the other hand, the conflagration of the world; the most
optimistic thought the air would be contaminated. To preserve themselves
from so many dangers, and in accordance with the physicians' orders,
numbers of frightened people shut themselves up in tightly closed and
perfumed cellars, where they awaited the decrees of Fate. The approach of
the phenomenon increased the panic, and it is said that one village curé,
being unable to hear the confessions of all his flock, who wanted to
discharge their souls of sin before taking flight for a better world, was fain
to tell them "there was no hurry, because the eclipse had been put off a
fortnight on account of the number of penitents"!
Page 215
Fig. 76.—Eclipse of the Moon at Laos (February 27, 1877).
These fears and terrors are still extant among ignorant peoples. In the
night of February 27, 1877, an eclipse of the Moon produced an
indescribable panic among the inhabitants of Laos (Indo-China). In order to
frighten off the Black Dragon, the natives fired shots at the half-devoured
orb, accompanying their volley with the most appalling yells. Dr. Harmand
has memorialized the scene in the lively sketch given on p. 269.
During the solar eclipse of March 15, 1877, an analogous scene occurred
among the Turks, who for the moment forgot their preparations for war with
Russia, in order to shoot at the Sun, and deliver him from the toils of the
Dragon.
These fears and terrors are still extant among ignorant peoples. In the
night of February 27, 1877, an eclipse of the Moon produced an
indescribable panic among the inhabitants of Laos (Indo-China). In order to
frighten off the Black Dragon, the natives fired shots at the half-devoured
orb, accompanying their volley with the most appalling yells. Dr. Harmand
has memorialized the scene in the lively sketch given on p. 269.
During the solar eclipse of March 15, 1877, an analogous scene occurred
among the Turks, who for the moment forgot their preparations for war with
Russia, in order to shoot at the Sun, and deliver him from the toils of the
Dragon.
Page 216
The lunar eclipse of December 16, 1880, was not unnoticed at Tackhent
(Russian Turkestan), where it was received with a terrific din of saucepans,
samovars and various implements struck together again and again by
willing hands that sought to deliver the Moon from the demon Tchaitan who
was devouring her.
In China, eclipses are the object of imposing ceremonies, whose object
is to reestablish the regularity of the celestial motions. Since the Emperor is
regarded as the Son of Heaven, his government must in some sort be a
reflection of the immutable order of the sidereal harmonies. As eclipses
were regarded by astrologers as disturbances of the divine order, their
appearance indicates some irregularity in the government of the Celestial
Empire. Accordingly, they are received with all kinds of expiatory
ceremonies prescribed thousands of years ago, and still in force to-day.
In the twentieth century, as in the nineteenth, the eighteenth, or in
ancient epochs, the same awe and terror operates upon the ignorant
populations who abound upon the surface of our planet.
To return to astronomical realities.
We said above that these phenomena were produced when the Full Moon
and the New Moon reached the line of intersection, known as the line of
nodes, when the plane of the lunar orbit cuts the plane of the ecliptic. As
this line turns and comes back in the same direction relatively to the Sun at
the end of eighteen years, eleven days, we have only to register the eclipses
observed during this period in order to know all that will occur in the future,
and to find such as happened in the past. This period was known to the
Greeks under the name of the Metonic Cycle, and the Chaldeans employed
it three thousand years ago under the name of Saros.
On examining this cycle, composed of 223 lunations, we see that there
can not be more than seven eclipses in one year, nor less than two. When
there are only two, they are eclipses of the Sun.
(Russian Turkestan), where it was received with a terrific din of saucepans,
samovars and various implements struck together again and again by
willing hands that sought to deliver the Moon from the demon Tchaitan who
was devouring her.
In China, eclipses are the object of imposing ceremonies, whose object
is to reestablish the regularity of the celestial motions. Since the Emperor is
regarded as the Son of Heaven, his government must in some sort be a
reflection of the immutable order of the sidereal harmonies. As eclipses
were regarded by astrologers as disturbances of the divine order, their
appearance indicates some irregularity in the government of the Celestial
Empire. Accordingly, they are received with all kinds of expiatory
ceremonies prescribed thousands of years ago, and still in force to-day.
In the twentieth century, as in the nineteenth, the eighteenth, or in
ancient epochs, the same awe and terror operates upon the ignorant
populations who abound upon the surface of our planet.
To return to astronomical realities.
We said above that these phenomena were produced when the Full Moon
and the New Moon reached the line of intersection, known as the line of
nodes, when the plane of the lunar orbit cuts the plane of the ecliptic. As
this line turns and comes back in the same direction relatively to the Sun at
the end of eighteen years, eleven days, we have only to register the eclipses
observed during this period in order to know all that will occur in the future,
and to find such as happened in the past. This period was known to the
Greeks under the name of the Metonic Cycle, and the Chaldeans employed
it three thousand years ago under the name of Saros.
On examining this cycle, composed of 223 lunations, we see that there
can not be more than seven eclipses in one year, nor less than two. When
there are only two, they are eclipses of the Sun.
Page 217
The totality of a solar eclipse can not last more than seven minutes, fifty-
eight seconds at the equator, and six minutes, ten seconds in the latitude of
Paris. The Moon, on the contrary, may be entirely eclipsed for nearly two
hours.
Eclipses of the Sun are very rare for a definite spot. Thus not one
occurred for Paris during the whole of the nineteenth century, the last which
happened exactly above the capital of France having been on May 22, 1724.
I have calculated all those for the twentieth century, and find that two will
take place close to Paris, on April 17, 1912, at eighteen minutes past noon
(total for Choisy-le-Roi, Longjumeau, and Dourdan, but very brief: seven
seconds), and August 11, 1999, at 10.28 a.m. (total for Beauvais,
Compiègne, Amiens, St. Quentin, fairly long: two minutes, seventeen
seconds). Paris itself will not be favored before August 12, 2026. In order to
witness the phenomenon, one must go and look for it. This the author did on
May 28, 1900, in Spain.
The progress of the lunar shadow upon the surface of the Earth is traced
beforehand on maps that serve to show the favored countries for which our
satellite will dispense her ephemeral night. The above figure shows the
trajectory of the total phase of the 1900 eclipse in Portugal, Spain, Algeria,
and Tunis.
eight seconds at the equator, and six minutes, ten seconds in the latitude of
Paris. The Moon, on the contrary, may be entirely eclipsed for nearly two
hours.
Eclipses of the Sun are very rare for a definite spot. Thus not one
occurred for Paris during the whole of the nineteenth century, the last which
happened exactly above the capital of France having been on May 22, 1724.
I have calculated all those for the twentieth century, and find that two will
take place close to Paris, on April 17, 1912, at eighteen minutes past noon
(total for Choisy-le-Roi, Longjumeau, and Dourdan, but very brief: seven
seconds), and August 11, 1999, at 10.28 a.m. (total for Beauvais,
Compiègne, Amiens, St. Quentin, fairly long: two minutes, seventeen
seconds). Paris itself will not be favored before August 12, 2026. In order to
witness the phenomenon, one must go and look for it. This the author did on
May 28, 1900, in Spain.
The progress of the lunar shadow upon the surface of the Earth is traced
beforehand on maps that serve to show the favored countries for which our
satellite will dispense her ephemeral night. The above figure shows the
trajectory of the total phase of the 1900 eclipse in Portugal, Spain, Algeria,
and Tunis.
Page 218
Fig. 77.—The path of the Eclipse of May 28, 1900.
The immutable splendor of the celestial motions had never struck the
author so impressively as during the observation of this grandiose
phenomenon. With the absolute precision of astronomical calculations, our
satellite, gravitating round the Earth, arrived upon the theoretical line drawn
from the orb of day to our planet, and interposed itself gradually, slowly,
and exactly, in front of it. The eclipse was total, and occurred at the moment
predicted by calculation. Then the obscure globe of the Moon pursued its
regular course, discovered the radiant orb behind, and gradually and slowly
completed its transit in front of him. Here, to all observers, was a double
philosophical lesson, a twofold impression: that of the greatness, the
omnipotence of the inexorable forces that govern the universe, and that of
the inexorable valor of man, of this thinking atom straying upon another
atom, who by the travail of his feeble intelligence has arrived at the
knowledge of the laws by which he, like the rest of the world, is borne away
through space, through time, and through eternity.
The immutable splendor of the celestial motions had never struck the
author so impressively as during the observation of this grandiose
phenomenon. With the absolute precision of astronomical calculations, our
satellite, gravitating round the Earth, arrived upon the theoretical line drawn
from the orb of day to our planet, and interposed itself gradually, slowly,
and exactly, in front of it. The eclipse was total, and occurred at the moment
predicted by calculation. Then the obscure globe of the Moon pursued its
regular course, discovered the radiant orb behind, and gradually and slowly
completed its transit in front of him. Here, to all observers, was a double
philosophical lesson, a twofold impression: that of the greatness, the
omnipotence of the inexorable forces that govern the universe, and that of
the inexorable valor of man, of this thinking atom straying upon another
atom, who by the travail of his feeble intelligence has arrived at the
knowledge of the laws by which he, like the rest of the world, is borne away
through space, through time, and through eternity.
Page 219
The line of centrality passed through Elche, a picturesque city of 30,000
inhabitants, not far from Alicante, and we had chosen this for our station on
account of the probability of fine weather.
From the terrace of the country house of the hospitable Mayor, a farm
transformed into an observatory by our learned friend, Count de la Baume
Pluvinel, there were no obstacles between ourselves and any part of the sky
or landscape. The whole horizon lay before us. In front was a town of Arab
aspect framed in a lovely oasis of palm-trees; a little farther off, the blue sea
beyond the shores of Alicante and Murcia: on the other side a belt of low
mountains, and near us fields and gardens. A Company of the Civic Guard
kept order, and prevented the entrance of too many curious visitors, of
whom over ten thousand had arrived.
At the moment when the first contact of the lunar disk with the solar disk
was observed in the telescope, we fired a gun, in order to announce the
precise commencement of the occultation to the 40,000 persons who were
awaiting the phenomenon, and to discover what difference would exist
between this telescopic observation and those made with the unaided eyes
(protected simply by a bit of smoked glass) of so many improvised
spectators. This had already been done by Arago at Perpignan in 1842. The
verification was almost immediate for the majority of eyes, and may be
estimated at eight or ten seconds. So that the commencement of the eclipse
was confirmed almost as promptly for the eye as with the astronomical
instruments.
The sky was splendidly clear; no cloud, no mist, deep blue; blazing Sun.
The first period of the eclipse showed nothing particular. It is only from the
moment when more than half the solar disk is covered by the lunar disk that
the phenomenon is imposing in its grandeur. At this phase, I called the
attention of the people standing in the court to the visibility of the stars, and
indicating the place of Venus in the sky asked if any with long sight could
perceive her. Eight at once responded in the affirmative. It should be said
that the planet was at that time at its period of maximum brilliancy, when
inhabitants, not far from Alicante, and we had chosen this for our station on
account of the probability of fine weather.
From the terrace of the country house of the hospitable Mayor, a farm
transformed into an observatory by our learned friend, Count de la Baume
Pluvinel, there were no obstacles between ourselves and any part of the sky
or landscape. The whole horizon lay before us. In front was a town of Arab
aspect framed in a lovely oasis of palm-trees; a little farther off, the blue sea
beyond the shores of Alicante and Murcia: on the other side a belt of low
mountains, and near us fields and gardens. A Company of the Civic Guard
kept order, and prevented the entrance of too many curious visitors, of
whom over ten thousand had arrived.
At the moment when the first contact of the lunar disk with the solar disk
was observed in the telescope, we fired a gun, in order to announce the
precise commencement of the occultation to the 40,000 persons who were
awaiting the phenomenon, and to discover what difference would exist
between this telescopic observation and those made with the unaided eyes
(protected simply by a bit of smoked glass) of so many improvised
spectators. This had already been done by Arago at Perpignan in 1842. The
verification was almost immediate for the majority of eyes, and may be
estimated at eight or ten seconds. So that the commencement of the eclipse
was confirmed almost as promptly for the eye as with the astronomical
instruments.
The sky was splendidly clear; no cloud, no mist, deep blue; blazing Sun.
The first period of the eclipse showed nothing particular. It is only from the
moment when more than half the solar disk is covered by the lunar disk that
the phenomenon is imposing in its grandeur. At this phase, I called the
attention of the people standing in the court to the visibility of the stars, and
indicating the place of Venus in the sky asked if any with long sight could
perceive her. Eight at once responded in the affirmative. It should be said
that the planet was at that time at its period of maximum brilliancy, when
Page 220
for observers blessed with good sight, it is always visible to the unaided
eye.
When some three-quarters of the Sun were eclipsed, the pigeons which
had flown back to the farm huddled into a corner, and made no further
movement. They told me that evening that the fowls had done the same a
little later, returning to the hen-house as though it had been night, and that
the small children (who were very numerous at Elche, where the population
is certainly not diminishing) left off their games, and came back to their
mothers' skirts. The birds flew anxiously to their nests. The ants in one
garden were excessively agitated, no doubt disconcerted in their strategics.
The bats came out.
A few days before the eclipse I had prepared the inhabitants of this part
of Spain for the observation of the phenomenon by the following
description, which sums up the previous accounts of the astronomers:
"The spectacle of a total eclipse of the Sun is one of the most
magnificent and imposing that it is possible to see in nature. At the exact
moment indicated by calculation, the Moon arrives in front of the Sun, eats
into it gradually, and at last entirely covers it. The light of the day lessens
and is transformed. A sense of oppression is felt by all nature, the birds are
hushed, the dog takes refuge with his master, the chickens hide beneath
their mother's wing, the wind drops, the temperature falls, an appalling
stillness is everywhere perceptible, as though the universe were on the
verge of some imminent catastrophe. Men's faces assume a cadaverous hue
similar to that given at night by the flame of spirits of wine and salt, a livid
funereal light, the sinister illumination of the world's last hour.
"At the moment when the last line of the solar crescent disappears, we
see, instead of the Sun, a black disk surrounded with a splendid luminous
aureole shooting immense jets into space, with roseate flames burning at the
base.
eye.
When some three-quarters of the Sun were eclipsed, the pigeons which
had flown back to the farm huddled into a corner, and made no further
movement. They told me that evening that the fowls had done the same a
little later, returning to the hen-house as though it had been night, and that
the small children (who were very numerous at Elche, where the population
is certainly not diminishing) left off their games, and came back to their
mothers' skirts. The birds flew anxiously to their nests. The ants in one
garden were excessively agitated, no doubt disconcerted in their strategics.
The bats came out.
A few days before the eclipse I had prepared the inhabitants of this part
of Spain for the observation of the phenomenon by the following
description, which sums up the previous accounts of the astronomers:
"The spectacle of a total eclipse of the Sun is one of the most
magnificent and imposing that it is possible to see in nature. At the exact
moment indicated by calculation, the Moon arrives in front of the Sun, eats
into it gradually, and at last entirely covers it. The light of the day lessens
and is transformed. A sense of oppression is felt by all nature, the birds are
hushed, the dog takes refuge with his master, the chickens hide beneath
their mother's wing, the wind drops, the temperature falls, an appalling
stillness is everywhere perceptible, as though the universe were on the
verge of some imminent catastrophe. Men's faces assume a cadaverous hue
similar to that given at night by the flame of spirits of wine and salt, a livid
funereal light, the sinister illumination of the world's last hour.
"At the moment when the last line of the solar crescent disappears, we
see, instead of the Sun, a black disk surrounded with a splendid luminous
aureole shooting immense jets into space, with roseate flames burning at the
base.
Page 221
"A sudden night has fallen on us, a weird, wan night in which the
brightest of the stars are visible in the Heavens. The spectacle is splendid,
grandiose, solemn, and sublime."
This impression was actually felt by us all, as may be seen from the
following notes, written in my schedule of observation during the event, or
immediately after:
"3.50 p.m. Light very weak, sky leaden gray, mountains standing out
with remarkable clearness from the horizon, and seeming to approach us.
"3.55 p.m. Fall of temperature very apparent. Cold wind blowing through
the atmosphere.
"3.56 p.m. Profound silence through nature, which seems to participate in
the celestial phenomenon. Silence in all the groups.
"3.57 p.m. Light considerably diminished, becoming wan, strange, and
sinister. Landscape leaden gray, sea looks black. This diminution of light is
not that of every day after the sunset. There is, as it were, a tint of sadness
spread over the whole of nature. One becomes accustomed to it, and yet
while we know that the occultation of the Sun by the Moon is a natural
phenomenon, we can not escape a certain sense of uneasiness. The
approach of some extraordinary spectacle is imminent."
At this point we examined the effects of the solar light upon the seven
colors of the spectrum. In order to determine as accurately as possible the
tonality of the light of the eclipse, I had prepared seven great sheets, each
painted boldly in the colors of the spectrum, violet, indigo, blue, green,
yellow, orange, red; and a similar series in pieces of silk. These colors were
laid at our feet upon the terrace where my wife, as well as Countess de la
Baume, were watching with me. We then saw the first four disappear
successively and entirely and turn black in a few seconds, in the following
order: violet, indigo, blue, green. The three other colors were considerably
attenuated by the darkness, but remained visible.
brightest of the stars are visible in the Heavens. The spectacle is splendid,
grandiose, solemn, and sublime."
This impression was actually felt by us all, as may be seen from the
following notes, written in my schedule of observation during the event, or
immediately after:
"3.50 p.m. Light very weak, sky leaden gray, mountains standing out
with remarkable clearness from the horizon, and seeming to approach us.
"3.55 p.m. Fall of temperature very apparent. Cold wind blowing through
the atmosphere.
"3.56 p.m. Profound silence through nature, which seems to participate in
the celestial phenomenon. Silence in all the groups.
"3.57 p.m. Light considerably diminished, becoming wan, strange, and
sinister. Landscape leaden gray, sea looks black. This diminution of light is
not that of every day after the sunset. There is, as it were, a tint of sadness
spread over the whole of nature. One becomes accustomed to it, and yet
while we know that the occultation of the Sun by the Moon is a natural
phenomenon, we can not escape a certain sense of uneasiness. The
approach of some extraordinary spectacle is imminent."
At this point we examined the effects of the solar light upon the seven
colors of the spectrum. In order to determine as accurately as possible the
tonality of the light of the eclipse, I had prepared seven great sheets, each
painted boldly in the colors of the spectrum, violet, indigo, blue, green,
yellow, orange, red; and a similar series in pieces of silk. These colors were
laid at our feet upon the terrace where my wife, as well as Countess de la
Baume, were watching with me. We then saw the first four disappear
successively and entirely and turn black in a few seconds, in the following
order: violet, indigo, blue, green. The three other colors were considerably
attenuated by the darkness, but remained visible.
Page 222
It should be noted that in the normal order of things—that is, every
evening—the contrary appears; violet remains visible after the red.
This experiment shows that the last light emitted by the eclipsed Sun
belongs to the least refrangible rays, to the greatest wave-lengths, to the
slowest vibrations, to the yellow and red rays. Such therefore is the
predominating color of the solar atmosphere.
This experiment completed, we turn back to the Sun. Magical and
splendid spectacle! Totality has commenced, the Sun has disappeared, the
black disk of the Moon covers it entirely, leaving all round it a magnificent
corona of dazzling light. One would suppose it to be an annular eclipse,
with the difference that this can be observed with the naked eye, without
fatigue to the retina, and drawn quietly.
This luminous coronal atmosphere entirely surrounds the solar disk, at a
pretty equal depth, equivalent to about the third of half the solar diameter. It
may be regarded as the Sun's atmosphere.
Beyond this corona is an aureole, of vaster glory but less luminous,
which sends out long plumes, principally in the direction of the equatorial
zone of the Sun, and of the belt of activity of the spots and prominences.
At the summit of the disk it is conical in shape. Below it is double, and
its right-hand portion ends in a point, not far from Mercury, which shines
like a dazzling star of first magnitude, and seems placed there expressly to
give us the extent and direction of the solar aureole.
I draw these various aspects (which, moreover, change with the
movement of the Moon), and what strikes me most is the distinction in light
between this aureole and the coronal atmosphere; the latter appears to be a
brilliant silvery white, the former is grayer and certainly less dense.
My impression is that there are two solar envelopes of entirely different
nature, the corona belonging to the globe of the Sun, and forming its
atmosphere properly so-called, very luminous; the aureole formed of
evening—the contrary appears; violet remains visible after the red.
This experiment shows that the last light emitted by the eclipsed Sun
belongs to the least refrangible rays, to the greatest wave-lengths, to the
slowest vibrations, to the yellow and red rays. Such therefore is the
predominating color of the solar atmosphere.
This experiment completed, we turn back to the Sun. Magical and
splendid spectacle! Totality has commenced, the Sun has disappeared, the
black disk of the Moon covers it entirely, leaving all round it a magnificent
corona of dazzling light. One would suppose it to be an annular eclipse,
with the difference that this can be observed with the naked eye, without
fatigue to the retina, and drawn quietly.
This luminous coronal atmosphere entirely surrounds the solar disk, at a
pretty equal depth, equivalent to about the third of half the solar diameter. It
may be regarded as the Sun's atmosphere.
Beyond this corona is an aureole, of vaster glory but less luminous,
which sends out long plumes, principally in the direction of the equatorial
zone of the Sun, and of the belt of activity of the spots and prominences.
At the summit of the disk it is conical in shape. Below it is double, and
its right-hand portion ends in a point, not far from Mercury, which shines
like a dazzling star of first magnitude, and seems placed there expressly to
give us the extent and direction of the solar aureole.
I draw these various aspects (which, moreover, change with the
movement of the Moon), and what strikes me most is the distinction in light
between this aureole and the coronal atmosphere; the latter appears to be a
brilliant silvery white, the former is grayer and certainly less dense.
My impression is that there are two solar envelopes of entirely different
nature, the corona belonging to the globe of the Sun, and forming its
atmosphere properly so-called, very luminous; the aureole formed of
Page 223
particles that circulate independently round it, probably arising from
eruptions, their form as a whole being possibly due to electric or magnetic
forces, counterbalanced by resistances of various natures. In our own
atmosphere the volcanic eruptions are distinct from the aerial envelope.
The general configuration of this external halo, spreading more
particularly in the equatorial zone, is sufficiently like that of the eclipse of
1889, published in my Popular Astronomy, which also corresponded with a
minimum of solar energy. The year 1900 is in fact close upon the minimum
of the eleven-year period. This equatorial form is, moreover, what all the
astronomers were expecting.
eruptions, their form as a whole being possibly due to electric or magnetic
forces, counterbalanced by resistances of various natures. In our own
atmosphere the volcanic eruptions are distinct from the aerial envelope.
The general configuration of this external halo, spreading more
particularly in the equatorial zone, is sufficiently like that of the eclipse of
1889, published in my Popular Astronomy, which also corresponded with a
minimum of solar energy. The year 1900 is in fact close upon the minimum
of the eleven-year period. This equatorial form is, moreover, what all the
astronomers were expecting.
Page 224
Fig. 78.—Total eclipse of the Sun, May 28, 1900, as observed from Elche
(Spain).
There can no longer be the slightest doubt that the solar envelope varies
with the activity of the Sun....
"But the total eclipse lasted a much shorter time than I have taken to
write these lines. The seventy-nine seconds of totality are over. A dazzling
(Spain).
There can no longer be the slightest doubt that the solar envelope varies
with the activity of the Sun....
"But the total eclipse lasted a much shorter time than I have taken to
write these lines. The seventy-nine seconds of totality are over. A dazzling
Page 225
light bursts from the Sun, and tells that the Moon pursuing its orbit has left
it. The splendid sight is over. It has gone like a shadow.
"Already over! It is almost a disillusion. Nothing beautiful lasts in this
world. Too sad! If only the celestial spectacle could have lasted two, three,
or four minutes! It was too short....
"Alas! we are forced to take things as they are.
"The surprise, the oppression, the terror of some, the universal silence
are over. The Sun reappears in his splendor, and the life of nature resumes
its momentarily suspended course.
"While I was making my drawing, M. l'Abbé Moreux, my colleague
from the Astronomical Society of France, who accompanied me to Spain
for this observation, was taking one of his own, without any reciprocal
communication. These two sketches are alike, and confirmatory.
"The differential thermometers that I exposed to the Sun, hanging freely,
and protected from reflection from the ground, were read every five
minutes. The black thermometer went down from 33.1° to 20.7°, that is
12.4°; the white from 29° to 20.2°—that is, 8.8°. The temperature in the
shade only varied three degrees.
"The light received during totality was due: first, to the luminous
envelope of the Sun; second, to that of the terrestrial atmosphere,
illuminated at forty kilometers (twenty-five miles) on the one side and the
other of the line of centrality. It appeared to be inferior to that of the Full
Moon, on account of the almost sudden transition. But, in reality, it was
more intense, for only first-magnitude stars were visible in the sky, whereas
on a night of full moon, stars of second, and even of third magnitude are
visible. We recognized, among others, Venus, Mercury, Sirius, Procyon,
Capella, Rigel, Betelgeuse."
it. The splendid sight is over. It has gone like a shadow.
"Already over! It is almost a disillusion. Nothing beautiful lasts in this
world. Too sad! If only the celestial spectacle could have lasted two, three,
or four minutes! It was too short....
"Alas! we are forced to take things as they are.
"The surprise, the oppression, the terror of some, the universal silence
are over. The Sun reappears in his splendor, and the life of nature resumes
its momentarily suspended course.
"While I was making my drawing, M. l'Abbé Moreux, my colleague
from the Astronomical Society of France, who accompanied me to Spain
for this observation, was taking one of his own, without any reciprocal
communication. These two sketches are alike, and confirmatory.
"The differential thermometers that I exposed to the Sun, hanging freely,
and protected from reflection from the ground, were read every five
minutes. The black thermometer went down from 33.1° to 20.7°, that is
12.4°; the white from 29° to 20.2°—that is, 8.8°. The temperature in the
shade only varied three degrees.
"The light received during totality was due: first, to the luminous
envelope of the Sun; second, to that of the terrestrial atmosphere,
illuminated at forty kilometers (twenty-five miles) on the one side and the
other of the line of centrality. It appeared to be inferior to that of the Full
Moon, on account of the almost sudden transition. But, in reality, it was
more intense, for only first-magnitude stars were visible in the sky, whereas
on a night of full moon, stars of second, and even of third magnitude are
visible. We recognized, among others, Venus, Mercury, Sirius, Procyon,
Capella, Rigel, Betelgeuse."
Page 226
From these notes, taken on the spot, it is evident that the contemplation
of a total eclipse of the Sun is one of the most marvelous spectacles that can
be admired upon our planet.
Some persons assured me that they saw the shadow of the Moon flying
rapidly over the landscape. My attention was otherwise occupied, and I was
unable to verify this interesting observation. The shadow of the Moon in
effect took only eleven minutes (3.47 p.m. to 3.58 p.m.) to traverse the
Iberian Peninsula from Porto to Alicante, i.e., a distance of 766 kilometers
(475 miles). It must therefore have passed over the ground at a velocity of
sixty-nine kilometers per minute, or 1,150 meters per second, a speed
higher than that of a bullet. It can easily be watched from afar, on the
mountains.
Some weeks previous to this fine eclipse, when I informed the Spaniards
of the belt along which it could be observed, I had invited them to note all
the interesting phenomena they might witness, including the effects
produced by the eclipse upon animals. Birds returned hurriedly to their
nests, swallows lost themselves, sheep huddled into compact packs,
partridges were hypnotized, frogs croaked as if it were night, fowls took
refuge in the hen-house, and cocks crowed, bats came out, and were
surprised by the sun, chicks gathered under their mothers' wing, cage-birds
ceased their songs, some dogs howled, others crept shivering to their
masters' feet, ants returned to the antheap, grasshoppers chirped as at
sunset, pigeons sank to the ground, a swarm of bees went silently back to
their hive, and so on.
These creatures behaved as though the night had come, but there were
also signs of fear, surprise, even of terror, differing only "in degree" from
those manifested during the grandiose phenomenon of a total eclipse by
human beings unenlightened by a scientific education.
At Madrid the eclipse was only partial. The young King of Spain,
Alfonso XIII, took care to photograph it, and I offer the photograph to my
of a total eclipse of the Sun is one of the most marvelous spectacles that can
be admired upon our planet.
Some persons assured me that they saw the shadow of the Moon flying
rapidly over the landscape. My attention was otherwise occupied, and I was
unable to verify this interesting observation. The shadow of the Moon in
effect took only eleven minutes (3.47 p.m. to 3.58 p.m.) to traverse the
Iberian Peninsula from Porto to Alicante, i.e., a distance of 766 kilometers
(475 miles). It must therefore have passed over the ground at a velocity of
sixty-nine kilometers per minute, or 1,150 meters per second, a speed
higher than that of a bullet. It can easily be watched from afar, on the
mountains.
Some weeks previous to this fine eclipse, when I informed the Spaniards
of the belt along which it could be observed, I had invited them to note all
the interesting phenomena they might witness, including the effects
produced by the eclipse upon animals. Birds returned hurriedly to their
nests, swallows lost themselves, sheep huddled into compact packs,
partridges were hypnotized, frogs croaked as if it were night, fowls took
refuge in the hen-house, and cocks crowed, bats came out, and were
surprised by the sun, chicks gathered under their mothers' wing, cage-birds
ceased their songs, some dogs howled, others crept shivering to their
masters' feet, ants returned to the antheap, grasshoppers chirped as at
sunset, pigeons sank to the ground, a swarm of bees went silently back to
their hive, and so on.
These creatures behaved as though the night had come, but there were
also signs of fear, surprise, even of terror, differing only "in degree" from
those manifested during the grandiose phenomenon of a total eclipse by
human beings unenlightened by a scientific education.
At Madrid the eclipse was only partial. The young King of Spain,
Alfonso XIII, took care to photograph it, and I offer the photograph to my
Page 227
readers (Fig. 79), as this amiable sovereign did me the honor to give it me a
few days after the eclipse.
The technical results of
these observations of solar
eclipses relate more
especially to the elucidation
of the grand problem of the
physical constitution of the
Sun. We alluded to them in
the chapter devoted to this
orb. The last great total
eclipses have been of
immense value to science.
The eclipses of the Moon
are less important, less
interesting, than the eclipses
Fig. 79.—The Eclipse of May 28, 1900, as photographed
of the Sun. Yet their aspect
by King Alfonso XIII, at Madrid.
must not be neglected on this
account, and it may be said to
vary for each eclipse.
Generally speaking, our satellite does not disappear entirely in the
Earth's cone of shadow; the solar rays are refracted round our globe by our
atmosphere, and curving inward, illumine the lunar globe with a rosy tint
that reminds one of the sunset. Sometimes, indeed, this refraction does not
occur, owing doubtless to lack of transparency in the atmosphere, and the
Moon becomes invisible. This happened recently, on April 11, 1903.
For any spot, eclipses of the Moon are incomparably more frequent than
eclipses of the Sun, because the cone of lunar shadow that produces the
solar eclipses is not very broad at its contact with the surface of the globe
(10, 20, 30, 50, 100 kilometers, according to the distance of the Moon),
few days after the eclipse.
The technical results of
these observations of solar
eclipses relate more
especially to the elucidation
of the grand problem of the
physical constitution of the
Sun. We alluded to them in
the chapter devoted to this
orb. The last great total
eclipses have been of
immense value to science.
The eclipses of the Moon
are less important, less
interesting, than the eclipses
Fig. 79.—The Eclipse of May 28, 1900, as photographed
of the Sun. Yet their aspect
by King Alfonso XIII, at Madrid.
must not be neglected on this
account, and it may be said to
vary for each eclipse.
Generally speaking, our satellite does not disappear entirely in the
Earth's cone of shadow; the solar rays are refracted round our globe by our
atmosphere, and curving inward, illumine the lunar globe with a rosy tint
that reminds one of the sunset. Sometimes, indeed, this refraction does not
occur, owing doubtless to lack of transparency in the atmosphere, and the
Moon becomes invisible. This happened recently, on April 11, 1903.
For any spot, eclipses of the Moon are incomparably more frequent than
eclipses of the Sun, because the cone of lunar shadow that produces the
solar eclipses is not very broad at its contact with the surface of the globe
(10, 20, 30, 50, 100 kilometers, according to the distance of the Moon),
Page 228
whereas all the countries of the Earth for which the Moon is above the
horizon at the hour of the lunar eclipse are able to see it. It is at all times a
remarkable spectacle that uplifts our thoughts to the Heavens, and I strongly
advise my readers on no account to forego it.
horizon at the hour of the lunar eclipse are able to see it. It is at all times a
remarkable spectacle that uplifts our thoughts to the Heavens, and I strongly
advise my readers on no account to forego it.
Page 229
CHAPTER XI
ON METHODS
How Celestial Distances are Determined, and how the Sun is Weighed
I will not do my readers the injustice to suppose that they will be
alarmed at the title of this Lesson, and that they do not employ some
"method" in their own lives. I even assume that if they have been good
enough to take me on faith when I have spoken of the distances of the Sun
and Moon, and Stars, or of the weight of bodies at the surface of Mars, they
retain some curiosity as to how the astronomers solve these problems.
Hence it will be as interesting as it is useful to complete the preceding
statements by a brief summary of the methods employed for acquiring these
bold conclusions.
The Sun seems to touch the Earth when it disappears in the purple mists
of twilight: an immense abyss separates us from it. The stars go hand in
hand down the constellated sky; and yet one can not think of their
inconceivable distance without a shiver.
Our neighbor, Moon, floats in space, a stone's throw from us: but
without calculation we should never know the distance, which remains an
impassable desert to us.
The best educated persons sometimes find it difficult to admit that these
distances of Sun and Moon are better determined and more precise than
those of certain points on our minute planet. Hence, it is of particular
moment for us to give an exact account of the means employed in
determining them.
ON METHODS
How Celestial Distances are Determined, and how the Sun is Weighed
I will not do my readers the injustice to suppose that they will be
alarmed at the title of this Lesson, and that they do not employ some
"method" in their own lives. I even assume that if they have been good
enough to take me on faith when I have spoken of the distances of the Sun
and Moon, and Stars, or of the weight of bodies at the surface of Mars, they
retain some curiosity as to how the astronomers solve these problems.
Hence it will be as interesting as it is useful to complete the preceding
statements by a brief summary of the methods employed for acquiring these
bold conclusions.
The Sun seems to touch the Earth when it disappears in the purple mists
of twilight: an immense abyss separates us from it. The stars go hand in
hand down the constellated sky; and yet one can not think of their
inconceivable distance without a shiver.
Our neighbor, Moon, floats in space, a stone's throw from us: but
without calculation we should never know the distance, which remains an
impassable desert to us.
The best educated persons sometimes find it difficult to admit that these
distances of Sun and Moon are better determined and more precise than
those of certain points on our minute planet. Hence, it is of particular
moment for us to give an exact account of the means employed in
determining them.
Page 230
The calculation of these distances is made by "triangulation." This
process is the same that surveyors use in the measurement of terrestrial
distances. There is nothing very alarming about it. If the word repels us a
little at first, it is from its appearance only.
When the distance of an object is unknown, the only means of
expressing its apparent size is by measurement of the angle which it
subtends before our eyes.
We all know that an object appears smaller, in proposition with its
distance from us. This diminution is not a matter of chance. It is geometric,
and proportional to the distance. Every object removed to a distance of 57
times its diameter measures an angle of 1 degree, whatever its real
dimensions. Thus a sphere 1 meter in diameter measures exactly 1 degree, if
we see it at a distance of 57 meters. A statue measuring 1.80 meters (about 5
ft. 8 in.) will be equal to an angle of 1 degree, if distant 57 times its height,
that is to say, at 102.60 meters. A sheet of paper, size 1 decimeter, seen at
5.70 meters, represents the same magnitude.
In length, a degree is the 57th part of the radius of a circle, i.e., from the
circumference to the center.
The measurement of an angle is expressed in parts of the circumference.
Now, what is an angle of a degree? It is the 360th part of any
circumference. On a table 3.60 meters round, an angle of one degree is a
centimeter, seen from the center of the table. Trace on a sheet of paper a
circle 0.360 meters round—an angle of 1 degree is a millimeter.
If the circumference of a circus measuring 180 meters be divided into
360 places, each measuring 0.50 meters in width, then when the circus is
full a person placed at the center will see each spectator occupying an angle
of 1 degree. The angle does not alter with the distance, and whether it be
measured at 1 meter, 10 meters, 100 kilometers, or in the infinite spaces of
Heaven, it is always the same angle. Whether a degree be represented by a
meter or a kilometer, it always remains a degree. As angles measuring less
process is the same that surveyors use in the measurement of terrestrial
distances. There is nothing very alarming about it. If the word repels us a
little at first, it is from its appearance only.
When the distance of an object is unknown, the only means of
expressing its apparent size is by measurement of the angle which it
subtends before our eyes.
We all know that an object appears smaller, in proposition with its
distance from us. This diminution is not a matter of chance. It is geometric,
and proportional to the distance. Every object removed to a distance of 57
times its diameter measures an angle of 1 degree, whatever its real
dimensions. Thus a sphere 1 meter in diameter measures exactly 1 degree, if
we see it at a distance of 57 meters. A statue measuring 1.80 meters (about 5
ft. 8 in.) will be equal to an angle of 1 degree, if distant 57 times its height,
that is to say, at 102.60 meters. A sheet of paper, size 1 decimeter, seen at
5.70 meters, represents the same magnitude.
In length, a degree is the 57th part of the radius of a circle, i.e., from the
circumference to the center.
The measurement of an angle is expressed in parts of the circumference.
Now, what is an angle of a degree? It is the 360th part of any
circumference. On a table 3.60 meters round, an angle of one degree is a
centimeter, seen from the center of the table. Trace on a sheet of paper a
circle 0.360 meters round—an angle of 1 degree is a millimeter.
If the circumference of a circus measuring 180 meters be divided into
360 places, each measuring 0.50 meters in width, then when the circus is
full a person placed at the center will see each spectator occupying an angle
of 1 degree. The angle does not alter with the distance, and whether it be
measured at 1 meter, 10 meters, 100 kilometers, or in the infinite spaces of
Heaven, it is always the same angle. Whether a degree be represented by a
meter or a kilometer, it always remains a degree. As angles measuring less
Page 231
than a degree often have to be
calculated, this angle has
been subdivided into 60 parts,
to which the name of minutes
has been given, and each
minute into 60 parts or
seconds. Written short, the
degree is indicated by a little
zero (°) placed above the Fig. 80.—Measurement of Angles.
figure; the minute by an
apostrophe (′), and the second
by two (″). These minutes and seconds of arc have no relation with the
same terms as employed for the division of the duration of time. These
latter ought never to be written with the signs of abbreviation just indicated,
though journalists nowadays set a somewhat pedantic example, by writing,
e.g., for an automobile race, 4h. 18′ 30″, instead of 4h. 18m. 30s.
This makes clear the distinction between the relative measure of an
angle and the absolute measures, such, for instance, as the meter. Thus, a
degree may be measured on this page, while a second (the 3,600th part of a
degree) measured in the sky may correspond to millions of kilometers.
Now the measure of the Moon's diameter gives us an angle of a little
more than half a degree. If it were exactly half a degree, we should know by
that that it was 114 times the breadth of its disk away from us. But it is a
little less, since we have more than half a degree (31′), and the geometric
ratio tells us that the distance of our satellite is 110 times its diameter.
Hence we have very simply obtained a first idea of the distance of the
Moon by the measure of its diameter. Nothing could be simpler than this
method. The first step is made. Let us continue.
This approximation tells us nothing as yet of the real distance of the orb
of night. In order to know this distance in miles, we need to know the width
calculated, this angle has
been subdivided into 60 parts,
to which the name of minutes
has been given, and each
minute into 60 parts or
seconds. Written short, the
degree is indicated by a little
zero (°) placed above the Fig. 80.—Measurement of Angles.
figure; the minute by an
apostrophe (′), and the second
by two (″). These minutes and seconds of arc have no relation with the
same terms as employed for the division of the duration of time. These
latter ought never to be written with the signs of abbreviation just indicated,
though journalists nowadays set a somewhat pedantic example, by writing,
e.g., for an automobile race, 4h. 18′ 30″, instead of 4h. 18m. 30s.
This makes clear the distinction between the relative measure of an
angle and the absolute measures, such, for instance, as the meter. Thus, a
degree may be measured on this page, while a second (the 3,600th part of a
degree) measured in the sky may correspond to millions of kilometers.
Now the measure of the Moon's diameter gives us an angle of a little
more than half a degree. If it were exactly half a degree, we should know by
that that it was 114 times the breadth of its disk away from us. But it is a
little less, since we have more than half a degree (31′), and the geometric
ratio tells us that the distance of our satellite is 110 times its diameter.
Hence we have very simply obtained a first idea of the distance of the
Moon by the measure of its diameter. Nothing could be simpler than this
method. The first step is made. Let us continue.
This approximation tells us nothing as yet of the real distance of the orb
of night. In order to know this distance in miles, we need to know the width
Page 232
in miles of the lunar disk.
Page 233
Fig. 81.—Division of the Circumference into 360 degrees.
This problem has been solved, as follows:
Two observers go as far as possible from each other, and observe the
Moon simultaneously, from two stations situated on the same meridian, but
having a wide difference of latitude. The distance that separates the two
points of observation forms the base of a triangle, of which the two long
sides come together on the Moon.
This problem has been solved, as follows:
Two observers go as far as possible from each other, and observe the
Moon simultaneously, from two stations situated on the same meridian, but
having a wide difference of latitude. The distance that separates the two
points of observation forms the base of a triangle, of which the two long
sides come together on the Moon.
Page 234
Fig. 82.—Measurement of the distance of the Moon.
It is by this proceeding that the distance of our satellite was finally
established, in 1751 and 1752, by two French astronomers, Lalande and
Lacaille; the former observing at Berlin, the latter at the Cape of Good
Hope. The result of their combined observations showed that the angle
formed at the center of the lunar disk by the half-diameter of the Earth is 57
minutes of arc (a little less than a degree). This is known as the parallax of
the Moon.
Here is a more or less alarming word; yet it is one that we can not
dispense with in discussing the distance of the stars. This astronomical term
will soon become familiar in the course of the present lesson, where it will
frequently recur, and always in connection with the measurement of
celestial distances. "Do not let us fear," wrote Lalande in his Astronomie des
Dames, "do not let us fear to use the term parallax, despite its scientific
aspect; it is convenient, and this term explains a very simple and very
familiar effect."
"If one is at the play," he continues, "behind a woman whose hat is too
large, and prevents one from seeing the stage [written a hundred years
ago!], one leans to the left or right, one rises or stoops: all this is a parallax,
a diversity of aspect, in virtue of which the hat appears to correspond with
another part of the theater from that in which are the actors." "It is thus," he
It is by this proceeding that the distance of our satellite was finally
established, in 1751 and 1752, by two French astronomers, Lalande and
Lacaille; the former observing at Berlin, the latter at the Cape of Good
Hope. The result of their combined observations showed that the angle
formed at the center of the lunar disk by the half-diameter of the Earth is 57
minutes of arc (a little less than a degree). This is known as the parallax of
the Moon.
Here is a more or less alarming word; yet it is one that we can not
dispense with in discussing the distance of the stars. This astronomical term
will soon become familiar in the course of the present lesson, where it will
frequently recur, and always in connection with the measurement of
celestial distances. "Do not let us fear," wrote Lalande in his Astronomie des
Dames, "do not let us fear to use the term parallax, despite its scientific
aspect; it is convenient, and this term explains a very simple and very
familiar effect."
"If one is at the play," he continues, "behind a woman whose hat is too
large, and prevents one from seeing the stage [written a hundred years
ago!], one leans to the left or right, one rises or stoops: all this is a parallax,
a diversity of aspect, in virtue of which the hat appears to correspond with
another part of the theater from that in which are the actors." "It is thus," he
Page 235
adds, "that there may be an eclipse of the Sun in Africa and none for us, and
that we see the Sun perfectly, because we are high enough to prevent the
Moon's hiding it from us."
See how simple it is. This parallax of 57 minutes proves that the Earth is
removed from the Moon at a distance of about 60 times its half-diameter
(precisely, 60.27). From this to the distance of the Moon in kilometers is
only a step, because it suffices to multiply the half-diameter of the Earth,
which is 6,371 kilometers (3,950 miles) by this number. The distance of our
satellite, accordingly, is 6,371 kilometers, multiplied by 60.27—that is,
384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles). The parallax of the Moon not only tells
us definitely the distance of our planet, but also permits us to calculate its
real volume by the measure of its apparent volume. As the diameter of the
Moon seen from the Earth subtends an angle of 31′, while that of the Earth
seen from the Moon is 114′, the real diameter of the orb of night must be to
that of the terrestrial globe in the relation of 273 to 1,000. That is a little
more than a quarter, or 3,480 kilometers (2,157 miles), the diameter of our
planet being 12,742 kilometers (7,900 miles).
This distance, calculated thus by geometry, is positively determined with
greater precision than that employed in the ordinary measurements of
terrestrial distances, such as the length of a road, or of a railway. This
statement may seem to be a romance to many, but it is undeniable that the
distance separating the Earth from the Moon is measured with greater care
than, for instance, the length of the road from Paris to Marseilles, or the
weight of a pound of sugar at the grocer's. (And we may add without
comment, that the astronomers are incomparably more conscientious in
their measurements than the most scrupulous shop-keepers.)
Had we conveyed ourselves to the Moon in order to determine its
distance and its diameter directly, we should have arrived at no greater
precision, and we should, moreover, have had to plan out a journey which
in itself is the most insurmountable of all the problems.
that we see the Sun perfectly, because we are high enough to prevent the
Moon's hiding it from us."
See how simple it is. This parallax of 57 minutes proves that the Earth is
removed from the Moon at a distance of about 60 times its half-diameter
(precisely, 60.27). From this to the distance of the Moon in kilometers is
only a step, because it suffices to multiply the half-diameter of the Earth,
which is 6,371 kilometers (3,950 miles) by this number. The distance of our
satellite, accordingly, is 6,371 kilometers, multiplied by 60.27—that is,
384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles). The parallax of the Moon not only tells
us definitely the distance of our planet, but also permits us to calculate its
real volume by the measure of its apparent volume. As the diameter of the
Moon seen from the Earth subtends an angle of 31′, while that of the Earth
seen from the Moon is 114′, the real diameter of the orb of night must be to
that of the terrestrial globe in the relation of 273 to 1,000. That is a little
more than a quarter, or 3,480 kilometers (2,157 miles), the diameter of our
planet being 12,742 kilometers (7,900 miles).
This distance, calculated thus by geometry, is positively determined with
greater precision than that employed in the ordinary measurements of
terrestrial distances, such as the length of a road, or of a railway. This
statement may seem to be a romance to many, but it is undeniable that the
distance separating the Earth from the Moon is measured with greater care
than, for instance, the length of the road from Paris to Marseilles, or the
weight of a pound of sugar at the grocer's. (And we may add without
comment, that the astronomers are incomparably more conscientious in
their measurements than the most scrupulous shop-keepers.)
Had we conveyed ourselves to the Moon in order to determine its
distance and its diameter directly, we should have arrived at no greater
precision, and we should, moreover, have had to plan out a journey which
in itself is the most insurmountable of all the problems.
Page 236
The Moon is at the frontier of our little terrestrial province: one might
say that it traces the limits of our domain in space. And yet, a distance of
384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles) separates the planet from the satellite.
This space is insignificant in the immeasurable distances of Heaven: for the
Saturnians (if such exist!) the Earth and the Moon are confounded in one
tiny star; but for the inhabitants of our globe, the distance is beyond all to
which we are accustomed. Let us try, however, to span it in thought.
A cannon-ball at constant speed of 500 meters (547 yards) per second
would travel 8 days, 5 hours to reach the Moon. A train started at a speed of
one kilometer per minute, would arrive at the end of an uninterrupted
journey in 384,000 minutes, or 6,400 hours, or 266 days, 16 hours. And in
less than the time it takes to write the name of the Queen of Night, a
telegraphic message would convey our news to the Moon in one and a
quarter seconds.
Long-distance travelers who have been round the world some dozen
times have journeyed a greater distance.
The other stars (beginning with the Sun) are incomparably farther from
us. Yet it has been found possible to determine their distances, and the same
method has been employed.
But it will at once be seen that different measures are required in
calculating the distance of the Sun, 388 times farther from us than the
Moon, for from here to the orb of day is 12,000 times the breadth of our
planet. Here we must not think of erecting a triangle with the diameter of
the Earth for its base: the two ideal lines drawn from the extremities of this
diameter would come together between the Earth and the Sun; there would
be no triangle, and the measurement would be absurd.
In order to measure the distance which separates the Earth from the Sun,
we have recourse to the fine planet Venus, whose orbit is situated inside the
terrestrial orbit. Owing to the combination of the Earth's motion with that of
the Star of the Morning and Evening, the capricious Venus passes in front of
say that it traces the limits of our domain in space. And yet, a distance of
384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles) separates the planet from the satellite.
This space is insignificant in the immeasurable distances of Heaven: for the
Saturnians (if such exist!) the Earth and the Moon are confounded in one
tiny star; but for the inhabitants of our globe, the distance is beyond all to
which we are accustomed. Let us try, however, to span it in thought.
A cannon-ball at constant speed of 500 meters (547 yards) per second
would travel 8 days, 5 hours to reach the Moon. A train started at a speed of
one kilometer per minute, would arrive at the end of an uninterrupted
journey in 384,000 minutes, or 6,400 hours, or 266 days, 16 hours. And in
less than the time it takes to write the name of the Queen of Night, a
telegraphic message would convey our news to the Moon in one and a
quarter seconds.
Long-distance travelers who have been round the world some dozen
times have journeyed a greater distance.
The other stars (beginning with the Sun) are incomparably farther from
us. Yet it has been found possible to determine their distances, and the same
method has been employed.
But it will at once be seen that different measures are required in
calculating the distance of the Sun, 388 times farther from us than the
Moon, for from here to the orb of day is 12,000 times the breadth of our
planet. Here we must not think of erecting a triangle with the diameter of
the Earth for its base: the two ideal lines drawn from the extremities of this
diameter would come together between the Earth and the Sun; there would
be no triangle, and the measurement would be absurd.
In order to measure the distance which separates the Earth from the Sun,
we have recourse to the fine planet Venus, whose orbit is situated inside the
terrestrial orbit. Owing to the combination of the Earth's motion with that of
the Star of the Morning and Evening, the capricious Venus passes in front of
Page 237
the Sun at the curious intervals of 8 years, 1131⁄2 years less 8 years, 8 years,
1131⁄2 years plus 8 years.
Thus there was a transit in June, 1761, then another 8 years after, in
June, 1769. The next occurred 1131⁄2 years less 8 years, i.e., 1051⁄2 years
after the preceding, in December, 1874; the next in December, 1882. The
next will be in June, 2004, and June, 2012. At these eagerly anticipated
epochs, astronomers watch the transit of Venus across the Sun at two
terrestrial stations as far as possible removed from each other, marking the
two points at which the planet, seen from their respective stations, appears
to be projected at the same moment on the solar disk. This measure gives
the width of an angle formed by two lines, which starting from two
diametrically opposite points of the Earth, cross upon Venus, and form an
identical angle upon the Sun. Venus is thus at the apex of two equal
triangles, the bases of which rest, respectively, upon the Earth and on the
Sun. The measurement of this angle gives what is called the parallax of the
Sun—that is, the angular dimension at which the Earth would be seen at the
distance of the Sun.
Fig. 83.—Measurement of the distance of the Sun.
Thus, it has been found that the half-diameter of the Earth viewed from
the Sun measures 8.82″. Now, we know that an object presenting an angle
of one degree is at a distance of 57 times its length.
The same object, if it subtends an angle of a minute, or the sixtieth part
of a degree, indicates by the measurement of its angle that it is 60 times
more distant, i.e., 3,438 times.
1131⁄2 years plus 8 years.
Thus there was a transit in June, 1761, then another 8 years after, in
June, 1769. The next occurred 1131⁄2 years less 8 years, i.e., 1051⁄2 years
after the preceding, in December, 1874; the next in December, 1882. The
next will be in June, 2004, and June, 2012. At these eagerly anticipated
epochs, astronomers watch the transit of Venus across the Sun at two
terrestrial stations as far as possible removed from each other, marking the
two points at which the planet, seen from their respective stations, appears
to be projected at the same moment on the solar disk. This measure gives
the width of an angle formed by two lines, which starting from two
diametrically opposite points of the Earth, cross upon Venus, and form an
identical angle upon the Sun. Venus is thus at the apex of two equal
triangles, the bases of which rest, respectively, upon the Earth and on the
Sun. The measurement of this angle gives what is called the parallax of the
Sun—that is, the angular dimension at which the Earth would be seen at the
distance of the Sun.
Fig. 83.—Measurement of the distance of the Sun.
Thus, it has been found that the half-diameter of the Earth viewed from
the Sun measures 8.82″. Now, we know that an object presenting an angle
of one degree is at a distance of 57 times its length.
The same object, if it subtends an angle of a minute, or the sixtieth part
of a degree, indicates by the measurement of its angle that it is 60 times
more distant, i.e., 3,438 times.
Page 238
Finally, an object that measures one second, or the sixtieth part of a
minute, is at a distance of 206,265 times its length.
Hence we find that the Earth is at a distance from the Sun of 206265⁄8.82—
that is, 23,386 times its half-diameter, that is, 149,000,000 kilometers
(93,000,000 miles). This measurement again is as precise and certain as that
of the Moon.
I hope my readers will easily grasp this simple method of triangulation,
the result of which indicates to us with absolute certainty the distance of the
two great celestial torches to which we owe the radiant light of day and the
gentle illumination of our nights.
The distance of the Sun has, moreover, been confirmed by other means,
whose results agree perfectly with the preceding. The two principal are
based on the velocity of light. The propagation of light is not instantaneous,
and notwithstanding the extreme rapidity of its movements, a certain time is
required for its transmission from one point to another. On the Earth, this
velocity has been measured as 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) per
second. To come from Jupiter to the Earth, it requires thirty to forty
minutes, according to the distance of the planet. Now, in examining the
eclipses of Jupiter's satellites, it has been discovered that there is a
difference of 16 minutes, 34 seconds in the moment of their occurrence,
according as Jupiter is on one side or on the other of the Sun, relatively to
the Earth, at the minimum and maximum distance. If the light takes 16
minutes, 34 seconds to traverse the terrestrial orbit, it must take less than
that time, or 8 minutes, 17 seconds, to come to us from the Sun, which is
situated at the center. Knowing the velocity of light, the distance of the Sun
is easily found by multiplying 300,000 by 8 minutes, 17 seconds, or 497
seconds, which gives about 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles).
Another method founded upon the velocity of light again gives a
confirmatory result. A familiar example will explain it: Let us imagine
ourselves exposed to a vertical rain; the degree of inclination of our
minute, is at a distance of 206,265 times its length.
Hence we find that the Earth is at a distance from the Sun of 206265⁄8.82—
that is, 23,386 times its half-diameter, that is, 149,000,000 kilometers
(93,000,000 miles). This measurement again is as precise and certain as that
of the Moon.
I hope my readers will easily grasp this simple method of triangulation,
the result of which indicates to us with absolute certainty the distance of the
two great celestial torches to which we owe the radiant light of day and the
gentle illumination of our nights.
The distance of the Sun has, moreover, been confirmed by other means,
whose results agree perfectly with the preceding. The two principal are
based on the velocity of light. The propagation of light is not instantaneous,
and notwithstanding the extreme rapidity of its movements, a certain time is
required for its transmission from one point to another. On the Earth, this
velocity has been measured as 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) per
second. To come from Jupiter to the Earth, it requires thirty to forty
minutes, according to the distance of the planet. Now, in examining the
eclipses of Jupiter's satellites, it has been discovered that there is a
difference of 16 minutes, 34 seconds in the moment of their occurrence,
according as Jupiter is on one side or on the other of the Sun, relatively to
the Earth, at the minimum and maximum distance. If the light takes 16
minutes, 34 seconds to traverse the terrestrial orbit, it must take less than
that time, or 8 minutes, 17 seconds, to come to us from the Sun, which is
situated at the center. Knowing the velocity of light, the distance of the Sun
is easily found by multiplying 300,000 by 8 minutes, 17 seconds, or 497
seconds, which gives about 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles).
Another method founded upon the velocity of light again gives a
confirmatory result. A familiar example will explain it: Let us imagine
ourselves exposed to a vertical rain; the degree of inclination of our
Page 239
umbrella will depend on the relation between our speed and that of the
drops of rain. The more quickly we run, the more we need to dip our
umbrella in order not to meet the drops of water. Now the same thing occurs
for light. The stars, disseminated in space, shed floods of light upon the
Heavens. If the Earth were motionless, the luminous rays would reach us
directly. But our planet is spinning, racing, with the utmost speed, and in
our astronomical observations we are forced to follow its movements, and
to incline our telescopes in the direction of its advance. This phenomenon,
known under the name of aberration of light, is the result of the combined
effects of the velocity of light and of the Earth's motion. It shows that the
speed of our globe is equivalent to 1⁄10,000 that of light, i.e., = about 30
kilometers (19 miles) per second. Our planet accordingly accomplishes her
revolution round the Sun along an orbit which she traverses at a speed of 30
kilometers (better 291⁄2) per second, or 1,770 kilometers per minute, or
106,000 kilometers per hour, or 2,592,000 kilometers per day, or
946,080,000 kilometers (586,569,600 miles) in the year. This is the length
of the elliptical path described by the Earth in her annual translation.
The length of orbit being thus discovered, one can calculate its diameter,
the half of which is exactly the distance of the Sun.
We may cite one last method, whose data, based upon attraction, are
provided by the motions of our satellite. The Moon is a little disturbed in
the regularity of her course round the Earth by the influence of the powerful
Sun. As the attraction varies inversely with the square of the distance, the
distance may be determined by analyzing the effect it has upon the Moon.
Other means, on which we will not enlarge in this summary of the
methods employed for determinations, confirm the precisions of these
measurements with certainty. Our readers must forgive us for dwelling at
some length upon the distance of the orb of day, since this measurement is
of the highest importance; it serves as the base for the valuation of all stellar
distances, and may be considered as the meter of the universe.
drops of rain. The more quickly we run, the more we need to dip our
umbrella in order not to meet the drops of water. Now the same thing occurs
for light. The stars, disseminated in space, shed floods of light upon the
Heavens. If the Earth were motionless, the luminous rays would reach us
directly. But our planet is spinning, racing, with the utmost speed, and in
our astronomical observations we are forced to follow its movements, and
to incline our telescopes in the direction of its advance. This phenomenon,
known under the name of aberration of light, is the result of the combined
effects of the velocity of light and of the Earth's motion. It shows that the
speed of our globe is equivalent to 1⁄10,000 that of light, i.e., = about 30
kilometers (19 miles) per second. Our planet accordingly accomplishes her
revolution round the Sun along an orbit which she traverses at a speed of 30
kilometers (better 291⁄2) per second, or 1,770 kilometers per minute, or
106,000 kilometers per hour, or 2,592,000 kilometers per day, or
946,080,000 kilometers (586,569,600 miles) in the year. This is the length
of the elliptical path described by the Earth in her annual translation.
The length of orbit being thus discovered, one can calculate its diameter,
the half of which is exactly the distance of the Sun.
We may cite one last method, whose data, based upon attraction, are
provided by the motions of our satellite. The Moon is a little disturbed in
the regularity of her course round the Earth by the influence of the powerful
Sun. As the attraction varies inversely with the square of the distance, the
distance may be determined by analyzing the effect it has upon the Moon.
Other means, on which we will not enlarge in this summary of the
methods employed for determinations, confirm the precisions of these
measurements with certainty. Our readers must forgive us for dwelling at
some length upon the distance of the orb of day, since this measurement is
of the highest importance; it serves as the base for the valuation of all stellar
distances, and may be considered as the meter of the universe.
Page 240
This radiant Sun to which we owe so much is therefore enthroned in
space at a distance of 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from here.
Its vast brazier must indeed be powerful for its influence to be exerted upon
us to such a manifest extent, it being the very condition of our existence,
and reaching out as far as Neptune, thirty times more remote than ourselves
from the solar focus.
It is on account of its great distance that the Sun appears to us no larger
than the Moon, which is only 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles) from
here, and is itself illuminated by the brilliancy of this splendid orb.
No terrestrial distance admits of our conceiving of this distance. Yet, if
we associate the idea of space with the idea of time, as we have already
done for the Moon, we may attempt to picture this abyss. The train cited
just now would, if started at a speed of a kilometer a minute, arrive at the
Sun after an uninterrupted course of 283 years, and taking as long to return
to the Earth the total would be 566 years. Fourteen generations of stokers
would be employed on this celestial excursion before the bold travelers
could bring back news of the expedition to us.
Sound is transmitted through the air at a velocity of 340 meters (1,115
feet) per second. If our atmosphere reached to the Sun, the noise of an
explosion sufficiently formidable to be heard here would only reach us at
the end of 13 years, 9 months. But the more rapid carriers, such as the
telegraph, would leap across to the orb of day in 8 minutes, 17 seconds.
Our imagination is confounded before this gulf of 93,000,000 miles,
across which we see our dazzling Sun, whose burning rays fly rapidly
through space in order to reach us.
And now let us see how the distances of the planets were determined.
space at a distance of 149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) from here.
Its vast brazier must indeed be powerful for its influence to be exerted upon
us to such a manifest extent, it being the very condition of our existence,
and reaching out as far as Neptune, thirty times more remote than ourselves
from the solar focus.
It is on account of its great distance that the Sun appears to us no larger
than the Moon, which is only 384,000 kilometers (238,000 miles) from
here, and is itself illuminated by the brilliancy of this splendid orb.
No terrestrial distance admits of our conceiving of this distance. Yet, if
we associate the idea of space with the idea of time, as we have already
done for the Moon, we may attempt to picture this abyss. The train cited
just now would, if started at a speed of a kilometer a minute, arrive at the
Sun after an uninterrupted course of 283 years, and taking as long to return
to the Earth the total would be 566 years. Fourteen generations of stokers
would be employed on this celestial excursion before the bold travelers
could bring back news of the expedition to us.
Sound is transmitted through the air at a velocity of 340 meters (1,115
feet) per second. If our atmosphere reached to the Sun, the noise of an
explosion sufficiently formidable to be heard here would only reach us at
the end of 13 years, 9 months. But the more rapid carriers, such as the
telegraph, would leap across to the orb of day in 8 minutes, 17 seconds.
Our imagination is confounded before this gulf of 93,000,000 miles,
across which we see our dazzling Sun, whose burning rays fly rapidly
through space in order to reach us.
And now let us see how the distances of the planets were determined.
Page 241
We will leave aside the method of which we have been speaking; that
now to be employed is quite different, but equally precise in its results.
It is obvious that the revolution of a planet round the Sun will be longer
in proportion as the distance is greater, and the orbit that has to be traveled
vaster. This is simple. But the most curious thing is that there is a geometric
proportion in the relations between the duration of the revolutions of the
planets and their distances. This proportion was discovered by Kepler, after
thirty years of research, and embodied in the following formula:
"The squares of the times of revolution of the planets round the Sun (the
periodic times) are proportional to the cubes of their mean distances from
the Sun."
This is enough to alarm the boldest reader. And yet, if we unravel this
somewhat incomprehensible phrase, we are struck with its simplicity.
What is a square? We all know this much; it is taught to children of ten
years old. But lest it has slipped your memory: a square is simply a number
multiplied by itself.
Thus: 2 × 2 = 4; 4 is the square of 2.
Four times 4 is 16; 16 is the square of 4.
And so on, indefinitely.
Now, what is a cube? It is no more difficult. It is a number multiplied
twice by itself.
For instance: 2 multiplied by 2 and again by 2 equals 8. So 8 is the cube
of 2. 3 × 3 × 3 = 27; 27 is the cube of 3, and so on.
Now let us take an example that will show the simplicity and precision
of the formula enunciated above. Let us choose a planet, no matter which.
Say, Jupiter, the giant of the worlds. He is the Lord of our planetary group.
This colossal star is five times (precisely, 5.2) as far from us as the Sun.
now to be employed is quite different, but equally precise in its results.
It is obvious that the revolution of a planet round the Sun will be longer
in proportion as the distance is greater, and the orbit that has to be traveled
vaster. This is simple. But the most curious thing is that there is a geometric
proportion in the relations between the duration of the revolutions of the
planets and their distances. This proportion was discovered by Kepler, after
thirty years of research, and embodied in the following formula:
"The squares of the times of revolution of the planets round the Sun (the
periodic times) are proportional to the cubes of their mean distances from
the Sun."
This is enough to alarm the boldest reader. And yet, if we unravel this
somewhat incomprehensible phrase, we are struck with its simplicity.
What is a square? We all know this much; it is taught to children of ten
years old. But lest it has slipped your memory: a square is simply a number
multiplied by itself.
Thus: 2 × 2 = 4; 4 is the square of 2.
Four times 4 is 16; 16 is the square of 4.
And so on, indefinitely.
Now, what is a cube? It is no more difficult. It is a number multiplied
twice by itself.
For instance: 2 multiplied by 2 and again by 2 equals 8. So 8 is the cube
of 2. 3 × 3 × 3 = 27; 27 is the cube of 3, and so on.
Now let us take an example that will show the simplicity and precision
of the formula enunciated above. Let us choose a planet, no matter which.
Say, Jupiter, the giant of the worlds. He is the Lord of our planetary group.
This colossal star is five times (precisely, 5.2) as far from us as the Sun.
Page 242
Multiply this number twice by itself 5.2 × 5.2 × 5.2 = 140.
On the other hand, the revolution of Jupiter takes almost twelve years
(11.85). This number multiplied by itself also equals 140. The square of the
number 11.85 is equal to the cube of the number 5.2. This very simple law
regulates all the heavenly bodies.
Thus, to find the distance of a planet, it is sufficient to observe the time
of its revolution, then to discover the square of the given number by
multiplying it into itself. The result of the operation gives simultaneously
the cube of the number that represents the distance.
To express this distance in kilometers (or miles), it is sufficient to
multiply it by 149,000,000 (in miles 93,000,000), the key to the system of
the world.
Nothing, then, could be less complicated than the definition of these
methods. A few moments of attention reveal to us in their majestic
simplicity the immutable laws that preside over the immense harmony of
the Heavens.
But we must not confine ourselves to our own solar province. We have
yet to speak of the stars that reign in infinite space far beyond our radiant
Sun.
Strange and audacious as it may appear, the human mind is able to cross
these heights, to rise on the wings of genius to these distant suns, and to
plumb the depths of the abyss that separates us from these celestial
kingdoms.
Here, we return to our first method, that of triangulation. And the
distance that separates us from the Sun must serve in calculating the
distances of the stars.
On the other hand, the revolution of Jupiter takes almost twelve years
(11.85). This number multiplied by itself also equals 140. The square of the
number 11.85 is equal to the cube of the number 5.2. This very simple law
regulates all the heavenly bodies.
Thus, to find the distance of a planet, it is sufficient to observe the time
of its revolution, then to discover the square of the given number by
multiplying it into itself. The result of the operation gives simultaneously
the cube of the number that represents the distance.
To express this distance in kilometers (or miles), it is sufficient to
multiply it by 149,000,000 (in miles 93,000,000), the key to the system of
the world.
Nothing, then, could be less complicated than the definition of these
methods. A few moments of attention reveal to us in their majestic
simplicity the immutable laws that preside over the immense harmony of
the Heavens.
But we must not confine ourselves to our own solar province. We have
yet to speak of the stars that reign in infinite space far beyond our radiant
Sun.
Strange and audacious as it may appear, the human mind is able to cross
these heights, to rise on the wings of genius to these distant suns, and to
plumb the depths of the abyss that separates us from these celestial
kingdoms.
Here, we return to our first method, that of triangulation. And the
distance that separates us from the Sun must serve in calculating the
distances of the stars.
Page 243
The Earth, spinning round the Sun at a distance of 149,000,000
kilometers (93,000,000 miles), describes a circumference, or rather an
ellipse, of 936,000,000 kilometers (580,320,000 miles), which it travels
over in a year. The distance of any point of the terrestrial orbit from the
diametrically opposite point which it passes six months later is 298,000,000
kilometers (184,760,000 miles), i.e., the diameter of this orbit. This
immense distance (in comparison with those with which we are familiar)
serves as the base of a triangle of which the apex is a star.
The difficulty in exact measurements of the distance of a star consists in
observing the little luminous point persistently for a whole year, to see if
this star is stationary, or if it describes a minute ellipse reproducing in
perspective the annual revolution of the Earth.
If it remains fixed, it is lost in such depths of space that it is impossible
to gage the distance, and our 298,000,000 kilometers have no meaning in
view of such an abyss. If, on the contrary, it is displaced, it will in the year
describe a minute ellipse, which is only the reflection, the perspective in
miniature, of the revolution of our planet round the Sun.
The annual parallax of a star is the angle under which one would see the
radius, or half-diameter, of the terrestrial orbit from it. This radius of
149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) is indeed, as previously
observed, the unit, the meter of celestial measures. The angle is of course
smaller in proportion as the star is more distant, and the apparent motion of
the star diminishes in the same proportion. But the stars are all so distant
that their annual displacement of perspective is almost imperceptible, and
very exact instruments are required for its detection.
The researches of the astronomers have proved that there is not one star
for which the parallax is equal to that of another. The minuteness of this
angle, and the extraordinary difficulties experienced in measuring the
distance of the stars, will be appreciated from the fact that the value of a
kilometers (93,000,000 miles), describes a circumference, or rather an
ellipse, of 936,000,000 kilometers (580,320,000 miles), which it travels
over in a year. The distance of any point of the terrestrial orbit from the
diametrically opposite point which it passes six months later is 298,000,000
kilometers (184,760,000 miles), i.e., the diameter of this orbit. This
immense distance (in comparison with those with which we are familiar)
serves as the base of a triangle of which the apex is a star.
The difficulty in exact measurements of the distance of a star consists in
observing the little luminous point persistently for a whole year, to see if
this star is stationary, or if it describes a minute ellipse reproducing in
perspective the annual revolution of the Earth.
If it remains fixed, it is lost in such depths of space that it is impossible
to gage the distance, and our 298,000,000 kilometers have no meaning in
view of such an abyss. If, on the contrary, it is displaced, it will in the year
describe a minute ellipse, which is only the reflection, the perspective in
miniature, of the revolution of our planet round the Sun.
The annual parallax of a star is the angle under which one would see the
radius, or half-diameter, of the terrestrial orbit from it. This radius of
149,000,000 kilometers (93,000,000 miles) is indeed, as previously
observed, the unit, the meter of celestial measures. The angle is of course
smaller in proportion as the star is more distant, and the apparent motion of
the star diminishes in the same proportion. But the stars are all so distant
that their annual displacement of perspective is almost imperceptible, and
very exact instruments are required for its detection.
The researches of the astronomers have proved that there is not one star
for which the parallax is equal to that of another. The minuteness of this
angle, and the extraordinary difficulties experienced in measuring the
distance of the stars, will be appreciated from the fact that the value of a
Page 244
second is so small that the displacement
of any star corresponding with it could be
covered by a spider's thread.
A second of arc corresponds to the size
of an object at a distance of 206,265 times
its diameter; to a millimeter seen at 206
meters' distance; to a hair, 1⁄10 of a
millimeter in thickness, at 20 meters'
distance (more invisible to the naked eye).
And yet this value is in excess of those
actually obtained. In fact:—the apparent
displacement of the nearest star is
calculated at 75⁄100 of a second (0.75″),
i.e., from this star, α of Centaur, the half-
diameter of the terrestrial orbit is reduced
to this infinitesimal dimension. Now in
order that the length of any straight line
seen from the front be reduced until it
appear to subtend no more than an angle
of 0.75″, it must be removed to a distance
275,000 times its length. As the radius of
the terrestrial orbit is 149,000,000
kilometers (93,000,000 miles), the
distance which separates α of Centaur
from our world must therefore =
41,000,000,000,000 kilometers
(25,000,000,000,000 miles). And that is
the nearest star. We saw in Chapter II that
it shines in the southern hemisphere. The
next, and one that can be seen in our
latitudes, is 61 of Cygnus, which floats in
Fig. 84.—Small apparent ellipses
the Heavens 68,000,000,000,000
of any star corresponding with it could be
covered by a spider's thread.
A second of arc corresponds to the size
of an object at a distance of 206,265 times
its diameter; to a millimeter seen at 206
meters' distance; to a hair, 1⁄10 of a
millimeter in thickness, at 20 meters'
distance (more invisible to the naked eye).
And yet this value is in excess of those
actually obtained. In fact:—the apparent
displacement of the nearest star is
calculated at 75⁄100 of a second (0.75″),
i.e., from this star, α of Centaur, the half-
diameter of the terrestrial orbit is reduced
to this infinitesimal dimension. Now in
order that the length of any straight line
seen from the front be reduced until it
appear to subtend no more than an angle
of 0.75″, it must be removed to a distance
275,000 times its length. As the radius of
the terrestrial orbit is 149,000,000
kilometers (93,000,000 miles), the
distance which separates α of Centaur
from our world must therefore =
41,000,000,000,000 kilometers
(25,000,000,000,000 miles). And that is
the nearest star. We saw in Chapter II that
it shines in the southern hemisphere. The
next, and one that can be seen in our
latitudes, is 61 of Cygnus, which floats in
Fig. 84.—Small apparent ellipses
the Heavens 68,000,000,000,000
Page 245
kilometers (42,000,000,000,000 miles)
described by the stars as a result of the
annual displacement of the Earth. from here. This little star, of fifth
magnitude, was the first of which the
distance was determined (by Bessel, 1837–1840).
All the rest are much more remote, and the procession is extended to
infinity.
We can not conceive directly of such distances, and in order to imagine
them we must again measure space by time.
In order to cover the distance that separates us from our neighbor, α of
Centaur, light, the most rapid of all couriers, takes 4 years, 128 days. If we
would follow it, we must not jump from start to finish, for that would not
give us the faintest idea of the distance: we must take the trouble to think
out the direct advance of the ray of light, and associate ourselves with its
progress. We must see it traverse 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) during
the first second of the journey; then 300,000 more in the second, which
makes 600,000 kilometers; then once more 300,000 kilometers during the
third, and so on without stopping for four years and four months. If we take
this trouble we may realize the value of the figure; otherwise, as this
number surpasses all that we are in the habit of realizing, it will have no
significance for us, and will be a dead letter.
If some appalling explosion occurred in this star, and the sound in its
flight of 340 meters (1,115 feet) per second were able to cross the void that
separates us from it, the noise of this explosion would only reach us in
3,000,000 years.
A train started at a speed of 106 kilometers (65 miles) per hour would
have to run for 46,000,000 years, in order to reach this star, our neighbor in
the celestial kingdom.
The distance of some thirty of the stars has been determined, but the
results are dubious.
described by the stars as a result of the
annual displacement of the Earth. from here. This little star, of fifth
magnitude, was the first of which the
distance was determined (by Bessel, 1837–1840).
All the rest are much more remote, and the procession is extended to
infinity.
We can not conceive directly of such distances, and in order to imagine
them we must again measure space by time.
In order to cover the distance that separates us from our neighbor, α of
Centaur, light, the most rapid of all couriers, takes 4 years, 128 days. If we
would follow it, we must not jump from start to finish, for that would not
give us the faintest idea of the distance: we must take the trouble to think
out the direct advance of the ray of light, and associate ourselves with its
progress. We must see it traverse 300,000 kilometers (186,000 miles) during
the first second of the journey; then 300,000 more in the second, which
makes 600,000 kilometers; then once more 300,000 kilometers during the
third, and so on without stopping for four years and four months. If we take
this trouble we may realize the value of the figure; otherwise, as this
number surpasses all that we are in the habit of realizing, it will have no
significance for us, and will be a dead letter.
If some appalling explosion occurred in this star, and the sound in its
flight of 340 meters (1,115 feet) per second were able to cross the void that
separates us from it, the noise of this explosion would only reach us in
3,000,000 years.
A train started at a speed of 106 kilometers (65 miles) per hour would
have to run for 46,000,000 years, in order to reach this star, our neighbor in
the celestial kingdom.
The distance of some thirty of the stars has been determined, but the
results are dubious.
Page 246
The dazzling Sirius reigns 92,000,000,000,000 kilometers
(57,000,000,000,000 miles), the pale Vega at 204,000,000,000,000. Each of
these magnificent stars must be a huge sun to burn at such a distance with
such luminosity. Some are millions of times larger than the Earth. Most of
them are more voluminous than our Sun. On all sides they scintillate at
inaccessible distances, and their light strays a long while in space before it
encounters the Earth. The luminous ray that we receive to-day from some
pale star hardly perceptible to our eyes—so enormous is its distance—may
perhaps bring us the last emanation of a sun that expired thousands of years
ago.
If these methods have been clear to my readers, they may also be
interested perhaps in knowing the means employed in weighing the worlds.
The process is as simple and as clear as those of which we have been
speaking.
Weighing the stars! Such a pretension seems Utopian, and one asks
oneself curiously what sort of balance the astronomers must have adopted
in order to calculate the weight of Sun, Moon, planets or stars.
Here, figures replace weights. Ladies proverbially dislike figures: yet it
would be easier for some society dame to weigh the Sun at the point of her
pen, by writing down a few columns of figures with a little care, than to
weigh a 12 kilogram case of fruit, or a dress-basket of 35 kilos, by direct
methods.
Weighing the Sun is an amusement like any other, and a change of
occupation.
If the Moon were not attracted by the Earth, she would glide through the
Heavens along an indefinite straight line, escaping at the tangent. But in
virtue of the attraction that governs the movements of all the Heavenly
(57,000,000,000,000 miles), the pale Vega at 204,000,000,000,000. Each of
these magnificent stars must be a huge sun to burn at such a distance with
such luminosity. Some are millions of times larger than the Earth. Most of
them are more voluminous than our Sun. On all sides they scintillate at
inaccessible distances, and their light strays a long while in space before it
encounters the Earth. The luminous ray that we receive to-day from some
pale star hardly perceptible to our eyes—so enormous is its distance—may
perhaps bring us the last emanation of a sun that expired thousands of years
ago.
If these methods have been clear to my readers, they may also be
interested perhaps in knowing the means employed in weighing the worlds.
The process is as simple and as clear as those of which we have been
speaking.
Weighing the stars! Such a pretension seems Utopian, and one asks
oneself curiously what sort of balance the astronomers must have adopted
in order to calculate the weight of Sun, Moon, planets or stars.
Here, figures replace weights. Ladies proverbially dislike figures: yet it
would be easier for some society dame to weigh the Sun at the point of her
pen, by writing down a few columns of figures with a little care, than to
weigh a 12 kilogram case of fruit, or a dress-basket of 35 kilos, by direct
methods.
Weighing the Sun is an amusement like any other, and a change of
occupation.
If the Moon were not attracted by the Earth, she would glide through the
Heavens along an indefinite straight line, escaping at the tangent. But in
virtue of the attraction that governs the movements of all the Heavenly
Page 247
bodies, our satellite at a distance of 60 times the terrestrial half-diameter
revolves round us in 27 days, 7 hours, 43 minutes, 111⁄2 seconds,
continually leaving the straight line to approach the Earth, and describing
an almost circular orbit in space. If at any moment we trace an arc of the
lunar orbit, and if a tangent is taken to this arc, the deviation from the
straight line caused by the attraction of our planet is found to be 11⁄3
millimeter per second.
This is the quantity by which the Moon drops toward us in each second,
during which she accomplishes 1,017 meters of her orbit.
On the other hand, no body can fall unless it be attracted, drawn by
another body of a more powerful mass.
Beings, animals, objects, adhere to the soil, and weigh upon the Earth,
because they are constantly attracted to it by an irresistible force.
Weight and universal attraction are one and the same force.
On the other hand, it can be determined that if an object is left to itself
upon the surface of the Earth, it drops 4.90 meters during the first second of
its fall.
We also know that attraction diminishes with the square of the distance,
and that if we could raise a stone to the height of the Moon, and then
abandon it to the attraction of our planet, it would in the first second fall
4.90 meters divided by the square of 60, or 3,600—that is, of 11⁄3
millimeters, exactly the quantity by which the Moon deviates from the
straight line she would pursue if the Earth were not influencing her.
The reasoning just stated for the Moon is equally applicable to the Sun.
The distance of the Sun is 23,386 times the radius of the Earth. In order
to know how much the intensity of terrestrial weight would be diminished
at such a distance, we should look, in the first place, for the square of the
revolves round us in 27 days, 7 hours, 43 minutes, 111⁄2 seconds,
continually leaving the straight line to approach the Earth, and describing
an almost circular orbit in space. If at any moment we trace an arc of the
lunar orbit, and if a tangent is taken to this arc, the deviation from the
straight line caused by the attraction of our planet is found to be 11⁄3
millimeter per second.
This is the quantity by which the Moon drops toward us in each second,
during which she accomplishes 1,017 meters of her orbit.
On the other hand, no body can fall unless it be attracted, drawn by
another body of a more powerful mass.
Beings, animals, objects, adhere to the soil, and weigh upon the Earth,
because they are constantly attracted to it by an irresistible force.
Weight and universal attraction are one and the same force.
On the other hand, it can be determined that if an object is left to itself
upon the surface of the Earth, it drops 4.90 meters during the first second of
its fall.
We also know that attraction diminishes with the square of the distance,
and that if we could raise a stone to the height of the Moon, and then
abandon it to the attraction of our planet, it would in the first second fall
4.90 meters divided by the square of 60, or 3,600—that is, of 11⁄3
millimeters, exactly the quantity by which the Moon deviates from the
straight line she would pursue if the Earth were not influencing her.
The reasoning just stated for the Moon is equally applicable to the Sun.
The distance of the Sun is 23,386 times the radius of the Earth. In order
to know how much the intensity of terrestrial weight would be diminished
at such a distance, we should look, in the first place, for the square of the
Page 248
number representing the distance—that is, 23,386 multiplied by itself, =
546,905,000. If we divide 4.90 meters, which represents the attractive force
of our planet, by this number, we get 9⁄1,000,000 of a millimeter, and we see
that at the distance of the Sun, the Earth's attraction would really be almost
nil.
Now let us do for our planet what we did for its satellite. Let us trace the
annual orbit of the terrestrial globe round the central orb, and we shall find
that the Earth falls in each second 2.9 millimeters toward the Sun.
This proportion gives the attractive force of the Sun in relation to that of
the Earth, and proves that the Sun is 324,000 times more powerful than our
world, for 2.9 millimeters divided by 0.000,009 equals 324,000, if worked
out into the ultimate fractions neglected here for the sake of simplicity.
A great number of stars have been weighed by the same method.
Their mass is estimated by the movement of a satellite round them, and
it is by this method that we are able to affirm that Jupiter is 310 times
heavier than the Earth, Saturn 92 times, Neptune 16 times, Uranus 14 times,
while Mars is much less heavy, its weight being only two-thirds that of our
own.
The planets which have no satellites have been weighed by the
perturbations which they cause in other stars, or in the imprudent comets
that sometimes tarry in their vicinity. Mercury weighs very much less than
the Earth (only 6⁄100) and Venus about 8⁄10. So the beautiful star of the
evening and morning is not so light as her name might imply, and there is
no great difference between her weight and our own.
As the Moon has no secondary body submitted to her influence, her
weight has been calculated by reckoning the amount of water she attracts at
each tide in the ocean, or by observing the effects of her attraction on the
terrestrial globe. When the Moon is before us, in the last quarter, she makes
546,905,000. If we divide 4.90 meters, which represents the attractive force
of our planet, by this number, we get 9⁄1,000,000 of a millimeter, and we see
that at the distance of the Sun, the Earth's attraction would really be almost
nil.
Now let us do for our planet what we did for its satellite. Let us trace the
annual orbit of the terrestrial globe round the central orb, and we shall find
that the Earth falls in each second 2.9 millimeters toward the Sun.
This proportion gives the attractive force of the Sun in relation to that of
the Earth, and proves that the Sun is 324,000 times more powerful than our
world, for 2.9 millimeters divided by 0.000,009 equals 324,000, if worked
out into the ultimate fractions neglected here for the sake of simplicity.
A great number of stars have been weighed by the same method.
Their mass is estimated by the movement of a satellite round them, and
it is by this method that we are able to affirm that Jupiter is 310 times
heavier than the Earth, Saturn 92 times, Neptune 16 times, Uranus 14 times,
while Mars is much less heavy, its weight being only two-thirds that of our
own.
The planets which have no satellites have been weighed by the
perturbations which they cause in other stars, or in the imprudent comets
that sometimes tarry in their vicinity. Mercury weighs very much less than
the Earth (only 6⁄100) and Venus about 8⁄10. So the beautiful star of the
evening and morning is not so light as her name might imply, and there is
no great difference between her weight and our own.
As the Moon has no secondary body submitted to her influence, her
weight has been calculated by reckoning the amount of water she attracts at
each tide in the ocean, or by observing the effects of her attraction on the
terrestrial globe. When the Moon is before us, in the last quarter, she makes
Page 249
us travel faster, whereas in the first quarter, when she is behind, she delays
us.
All the calculations agree in showing us that the orb of night is 81 times
less heavy than our planet. There is nearly as much difference in weight
between the Earth and the Moon as between an orange and a grape.
Not content with weighing the planets of our system, astronomers have
investigated the weight of the stars. How have they been enabled to
ascertain the quantity of matter which constitutes these distant Suns—
incandescent globes of fire scattered in the depths of space?
They have resorted to the same method, and it is by the study of the
attractive influence of a sun upon some other contiguous neighboring star,
that the weight of a few of these has been calculated.
Of course this method can only be applied to those double stars of which
the distance is known.
It has been discovered that some of the tiny stars that we can hardly see
twinkling in the depths of the azure sky are enormous suns, larger and
heavier than our own, and millions of times more voluminous than the
Earth.
Our planet is only a grain of dust floating in the immensity of Heaven.
Yet this atom of infinity is the cradle of an immense creation incessantly
renewed, and perpetually transformed by the accumulated centuries.
And what diversity exists in this army of worlds and suns, whose regular
harmonious march obeys a mute order....
But we have as yet said nothing about weight on the surface of the
worlds, and I see signs of impatience in my readers, for after so much
us.
All the calculations agree in showing us that the orb of night is 81 times
less heavy than our planet. There is nearly as much difference in weight
between the Earth and the Moon as between an orange and a grape.
Not content with weighing the planets of our system, astronomers have
investigated the weight of the stars. How have they been enabled to
ascertain the quantity of matter which constitutes these distant Suns—
incandescent globes of fire scattered in the depths of space?
They have resorted to the same method, and it is by the study of the
attractive influence of a sun upon some other contiguous neighboring star,
that the weight of a few of these has been calculated.
Of course this method can only be applied to those double stars of which
the distance is known.
It has been discovered that some of the tiny stars that we can hardly see
twinkling in the depths of the azure sky are enormous suns, larger and
heavier than our own, and millions of times more voluminous than the
Earth.
Our planet is only a grain of dust floating in the immensity of Heaven.
Yet this atom of infinity is the cradle of an immense creation incessantly
renewed, and perpetually transformed by the accumulated centuries.
And what diversity exists in this army of worlds and suns, whose regular
harmonious march obeys a mute order....
But we have as yet said nothing about weight on the surface of the
worlds, and I see signs of impatience in my readers, for after so much
Page 250
simple if unpoetical demonstration, they will certainly ask me for the
explanation that will prove to them that a kilogram transported to Jupiter or
Mars would weigh more or less than here.
Give me your attention five minutes longer, and I will restore your faith
in the astronomers.
It must not be supposed that objects at the surface of a world like Jupiter,
310 times heavier than our own, weigh 310 times more. That would be a
serious error. In that case we should have to assume that a kilogram
transported to the surface of the Sun would there weigh 324,000 times
more, or 324,000 kilograms. That would be correct if these orbs were of the
same dimensions as the Earth. But to speak, for instance, only of the divine
Sun, we know that he is 108 times larger than our little planet.
Now, weight at the surface of a celestial body depends not only on its
mass, but also on its diameter.
In order to know the weight of any body upon the surface of the Sun, we
must argue as follows:
Since a body placed upon the surface of the Sun is 108 times farther
from its center than it is upon a globe of the dimensions of the Earth, and
since, on the other hand, attraction diminishes with the square of the
distance, the intensity of the weight would there be 108 multiplied by 108,
or 11,700 times weaker. Now divide the number representing the mass, i.e.,
324,000, by this number 11,700, and it results that bodies at the surface of
the Sun are 28 times heavier than here. A woman whose weight was 60
kilos would weigh 1,680 kilograms there if organized in the same way as on
the Earth, and would find walking very difficult, for at each step she would
lift up a shoe that weighed at least ten kilograms.
This reasoning as just stated for the Sun may be applied to the other
stars. We know that on the surface of Jupiter the intensity of weight is twice
and a third times as great as here, while on Mars it only equals 37⁄100.
explanation that will prove to them that a kilogram transported to Jupiter or
Mars would weigh more or less than here.
Give me your attention five minutes longer, and I will restore your faith
in the astronomers.
It must not be supposed that objects at the surface of a world like Jupiter,
310 times heavier than our own, weigh 310 times more. That would be a
serious error. In that case we should have to assume that a kilogram
transported to the surface of the Sun would there weigh 324,000 times
more, or 324,000 kilograms. That would be correct if these orbs were of the
same dimensions as the Earth. But to speak, for instance, only of the divine
Sun, we know that he is 108 times larger than our little planet.
Now, weight at the surface of a celestial body depends not only on its
mass, but also on its diameter.
In order to know the weight of any body upon the surface of the Sun, we
must argue as follows:
Since a body placed upon the surface of the Sun is 108 times farther
from its center than it is upon a globe of the dimensions of the Earth, and
since, on the other hand, attraction diminishes with the square of the
distance, the intensity of the weight would there be 108 multiplied by 108,
or 11,700 times weaker. Now divide the number representing the mass, i.e.,
324,000, by this number 11,700, and it results that bodies at the surface of
the Sun are 28 times heavier than here. A woman whose weight was 60
kilos would weigh 1,680 kilograms there if organized in the same way as on
the Earth, and would find walking very difficult, for at each step she would
lift up a shoe that weighed at least ten kilograms.
This reasoning as just stated for the Sun may be applied to the other
stars. We know that on the surface of Jupiter the intensity of weight is twice
and a third times as great as here, while on Mars it only equals 37⁄100.
Page 251
On the surface of Mercury, weight is nearly twice as small again as here.
On Neptune it is approximately equal to our own.
With deference to the Selenites, everything is at its lightest on the Moon:
a man weighing 70 kilograms on the Earth would not weigh more than 12
kilos there.
So all tastes can be provided for: the only thing to be regretted is that
one can not choose one's planet with the same facility as one's residence
upon the Earth.
On Neptune it is approximately equal to our own.
With deference to the Selenites, everything is at its lightest on the Moon:
a man weighing 70 kilograms on the Earth would not weigh more than 12
kilos there.
So all tastes can be provided for: the only thing to be regretted is that
one can not choose one's planet with the same facility as one's residence
upon the Earth.
Page 252
CHAPTER XII
LIFE, UNIVERSAL AND ETERNAL
And now, while thanking my readers for having followed me so far in
this descriptive account of the marvels of the Cosmos, I must inquire what
philosophical impression has been produced on their minds by these
celestial excursions to the other worlds? Are you left indifferent to the
pageant of the Heavens? When your imagination was borne away to these
distant stars, suns of the infinite, these innumerable stellar systems
disseminated through a boundless eternity, did you ask what existed there,
what purpose was served by those dazzling spheres, what effects resulted
from these forces, radiations, energies? Did you reflect that the elements
which upon our little Earth determined a vital activity so prodigious and so
varied must needs have spread the waves of an incomparably vaster and
more diversified existence throughout the immensities of the Universe?
Have you felt that all can not be dead and deserted, as we are tempted by
the illusions of our terrestrial senses and of our isolation to believe in the
silence of the night: that on the contrary, the real aim of Astronomy, instead
of ending with statements of the positions and movements of the stars, is to
enable us to penetrate to them, to make us divine, and know, and appreciate
their physical constitution, their degree of life and intellectuality in the
universal order?
On the Earth, it is Life and Thought that flourish; and it is Life and
Thought that we seek again in these starry constellations strewn to
Infinitude amid the immeasurable fields of Heaven.
The humble little planet that we inhabit presents itself to us as a
brimming cup, overflowing at every outlet. Life is everywhere. From the
bottom of the seas, from the valleys to the mountains, from the vegetation
LIFE, UNIVERSAL AND ETERNAL
And now, while thanking my readers for having followed me so far in
this descriptive account of the marvels of the Cosmos, I must inquire what
philosophical impression has been produced on their minds by these
celestial excursions to the other worlds? Are you left indifferent to the
pageant of the Heavens? When your imagination was borne away to these
distant stars, suns of the infinite, these innumerable stellar systems
disseminated through a boundless eternity, did you ask what existed there,
what purpose was served by those dazzling spheres, what effects resulted
from these forces, radiations, energies? Did you reflect that the elements
which upon our little Earth determined a vital activity so prodigious and so
varied must needs have spread the waves of an incomparably vaster and
more diversified existence throughout the immensities of the Universe?
Have you felt that all can not be dead and deserted, as we are tempted by
the illusions of our terrestrial senses and of our isolation to believe in the
silence of the night: that on the contrary, the real aim of Astronomy, instead
of ending with statements of the positions and movements of the stars, is to
enable us to penetrate to them, to make us divine, and know, and appreciate
their physical constitution, their degree of life and intellectuality in the
universal order?
On the Earth, it is Life and Thought that flourish; and it is Life and
Thought that we seek again in these starry constellations strewn to
Infinitude amid the immeasurable fields of Heaven.
The humble little planet that we inhabit presents itself to us as a
brimming cup, overflowing at every outlet. Life is everywhere. From the
bottom of the seas, from the valleys to the mountains, from the vegetation
Page 253
that carpets the soil, from the mold in the fields and woods, from the air we
breathe, arises an immense, prodigious, and perpetual murmur. Listen! it is
the great voice of Nature, the sum of all the unknown and mysterious voices
that are forever calling to us, from the ocean waves, from the forest winds,
from the 300,000 kinds of insects that are redundant everywhere, and make
a lively community on the surface of our globe. A drop of water contains
thousands of curious and agile creatures. A grain of dust from the streets of
Paris is the home of 130,000 bacteria. If we turn over the soil of a garden,
field, or meadow, we find the earthworms working to produce assimilable
slime. If we lift a stone in the path, we discover a crawling population. If
we gather a flower, detach a leaf, we everywhere find little insects living a
parasitic existence. Swarms of midges fly in the sun, the trees of the wood
are peopled with nests, the birds sing, and chase each other at play, the
lizards dart away at our approach, we trample down the antheaps and the
molehills. Life enwraps us in an inexorable encroachment of which we are
at once the heroes and the victims, perpetuating itself to its own detriment,
as imposed upon it by an eternal reproduction. And this from all time, for
the very stones of which we build our houses are full of fossils so
prodigiously multiplied that one gram of such stone will often contain
millions of shells, marvels of geometrical perfection. The infinitely little is
equal to the infinitely great.
Life appears to us as a fatal law, an imperious force which all obey, as
the result and the aim of the association of atoms. This is illustrated for us
upon the Earth, our only field of direct observation. We must be blind not to
see this spectacle, deaf not to hear its reaching. On what pretext could one
suppose that our little globe which, as we have seen, has received no
privileges from Nature, is the exception; and that the entire Universe, save
for one insignificant isle, is devoted to vacancy, solitude, and death?
We have a tendency to imagine that Life can not exist under conditions
other than terrestrial, and that the other worlds can only be inhabited on the
condition of being similar to our own. But terrestrial nature itself
demonstrates to us the error of this way of thinking. We die in the water:
breathe, arises an immense, prodigious, and perpetual murmur. Listen! it is
the great voice of Nature, the sum of all the unknown and mysterious voices
that are forever calling to us, from the ocean waves, from the forest winds,
from the 300,000 kinds of insects that are redundant everywhere, and make
a lively community on the surface of our globe. A drop of water contains
thousands of curious and agile creatures. A grain of dust from the streets of
Paris is the home of 130,000 bacteria. If we turn over the soil of a garden,
field, or meadow, we find the earthworms working to produce assimilable
slime. If we lift a stone in the path, we discover a crawling population. If
we gather a flower, detach a leaf, we everywhere find little insects living a
parasitic existence. Swarms of midges fly in the sun, the trees of the wood
are peopled with nests, the birds sing, and chase each other at play, the
lizards dart away at our approach, we trample down the antheaps and the
molehills. Life enwraps us in an inexorable encroachment of which we are
at once the heroes and the victims, perpetuating itself to its own detriment,
as imposed upon it by an eternal reproduction. And this from all time, for
the very stones of which we build our houses are full of fossils so
prodigiously multiplied that one gram of such stone will often contain
millions of shells, marvels of geometrical perfection. The infinitely little is
equal to the infinitely great.
Life appears to us as a fatal law, an imperious force which all obey, as
the result and the aim of the association of atoms. This is illustrated for us
upon the Earth, our only field of direct observation. We must be blind not to
see this spectacle, deaf not to hear its reaching. On what pretext could one
suppose that our little globe which, as we have seen, has received no
privileges from Nature, is the exception; and that the entire Universe, save
for one insignificant isle, is devoted to vacancy, solitude, and death?
We have a tendency to imagine that Life can not exist under conditions
other than terrestrial, and that the other worlds can only be inhabited on the
condition of being similar to our own. But terrestrial nature itself
demonstrates to us the error of this way of thinking. We die in the water:
Page 254
fishes die out of the water. Again, short-sighted naturalists affirm
categorically that Life is impossible at the bottom of the sea: 1, because it is
in complete darkness; 2, because the terrible pressure would burst any
organism; 3, because all motion would be impossible there, and so on.
Some inquisitive person sends down a dredge, and brings up lovely
creatures, so delicate in structure that the daintiest touch must proceed with
circumspection. There is no light in these depths: they make it with their
own phosphorescence. Other inquirers visit subterranean caverns, and
discover animals and plants whose organs have been transformed by
adaptation to their gloomy environment.
What right have we to say to the vital energy that radiates round every
Sun of the Universe: "Thus far shalt thou come, and no further"? In the
name of Science? An absolute mistake. The Known is an infinitesimal
island in the midst of the vast ocean of the Unknown. The deep seas which
seemed to be a barrier are, as we have seen, peopled with special life. Some
one objects: But after all, there is air there, there is oxygen: oxygen is
indispensable: a world without oxygen would be a world of death, an
eternally sterile desert. Why? Because we have not yet come across beings
that can breathe without air, and live without oxygen? Another mistake.
Even if we did not know of any, it would not prove that they do not exist.
But as it happens, we do know of such: the anærobia. These beings live
without air, without oxygen. Better still: oxygen kills them!
All the evidence goes to show that in interpreting as we ought the
spectacle of terrestrial life, and the positive facts acquired by Science, we
should enlarge the circle of our conceptions and our judgments, and not
limit extra-terrestrial existence to the servile image of what is in existence
here below. Terrestrial organic forms are due to local causes upon our
planet. The chemical constitution of water and of the atmosphere,
temperature, light, density, weight, are so many elements that have gone to
form our bodies. Our flesh is composed of carbon, nitrogen, hydrogen, and
oxygen combined in the state of water, and of some other elements, among
which we may instance sodium chloride (salt). The flesh of animals is not
categorically that Life is impossible at the bottom of the sea: 1, because it is
in complete darkness; 2, because the terrible pressure would burst any
organism; 3, because all motion would be impossible there, and so on.
Some inquisitive person sends down a dredge, and brings up lovely
creatures, so delicate in structure that the daintiest touch must proceed with
circumspection. There is no light in these depths: they make it with their
own phosphorescence. Other inquirers visit subterranean caverns, and
discover animals and plants whose organs have been transformed by
adaptation to their gloomy environment.
What right have we to say to the vital energy that radiates round every
Sun of the Universe: "Thus far shalt thou come, and no further"? In the
name of Science? An absolute mistake. The Known is an infinitesimal
island in the midst of the vast ocean of the Unknown. The deep seas which
seemed to be a barrier are, as we have seen, peopled with special life. Some
one objects: But after all, there is air there, there is oxygen: oxygen is
indispensable: a world without oxygen would be a world of death, an
eternally sterile desert. Why? Because we have not yet come across beings
that can breathe without air, and live without oxygen? Another mistake.
Even if we did not know of any, it would not prove that they do not exist.
But as it happens, we do know of such: the anærobia. These beings live
without air, without oxygen. Better still: oxygen kills them!
All the evidence goes to show that in interpreting as we ought the
spectacle of terrestrial life, and the positive facts acquired by Science, we
should enlarge the circle of our conceptions and our judgments, and not
limit extra-terrestrial existence to the servile image of what is in existence
here below. Terrestrial organic forms are due to local causes upon our
planet. The chemical constitution of water and of the atmosphere,
temperature, light, density, weight, are so many elements that have gone to
form our bodies. Our flesh is composed of carbon, nitrogen, hydrogen, and
oxygen combined in the state of water, and of some other elements, among
which we may instance sodium chloride (salt). The flesh of animals is not
Page 255
chemically different from our own. All this comes from the water and the
air, and returns to them again. The same elements, in very minute
quantities, make up all living bodies. The ox that browses on the grass is
formed of the same flesh as the man who eats the beef. All organized
terrestrial matter is only carbon combined in variable proportions with
hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, etc.
But we have no right to forbid Nature to act differently in worlds from
which carbon is absent. A world, for example, in which silica replaces
carbon, silicic acid carbonic acid, might be inhabited by organisms
absolutely different from those which exist on the Earth, different not only
in form, but also in substance. We already know stars and suns for which
spectral analysis reveals a predominance of silica, e.g., Rigel and Deneb. In
a world where chlorine predominated, we might expect to find hydrochloric
acid, and all the fecund family of chlorides, playing an important part in the
phenomena of life. Might not bromine be associated in other formations?
Why, indeed, should we draw the line at terrestrial chemistry? What is to
prove that these elements are really simple? May not hydrogen, carbon,
oxygen, nitrogen, and sulphur all be compounds? Their equivalents are
multiples of the first: 1, 6, 8, 14, 16. And is even hydrogen the most simple
of the elements? Is not its molecule composed of atoms, and may there not
exist a single species of primitive atom, whose geometric arrangement and
various associations might constitute the molecules of the so-called simple
elements?
In our own solar system we discover the essential differences between
certain planets. In the spectrum of Jupiter, for instance, we are aware of the
action of an unknown substance that manifests itself by a marked
absorption of certain red rays. This gas, which does not exist upon the
Earth, is seen still more obviously in the atmospheres of Saturn and Uranus.
Indeed, upon this last planet the atmosphere appears, apart from its water
vapor, to have no sort of analogy with our own. And in the solar spectrum
itself, many of the lines have not yet been identified with terrestrial
substances.
air, and returns to them again. The same elements, in very minute
quantities, make up all living bodies. The ox that browses on the grass is
formed of the same flesh as the man who eats the beef. All organized
terrestrial matter is only carbon combined in variable proportions with
hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, etc.
But we have no right to forbid Nature to act differently in worlds from
which carbon is absent. A world, for example, in which silica replaces
carbon, silicic acid carbonic acid, might be inhabited by organisms
absolutely different from those which exist on the Earth, different not only
in form, but also in substance. We already know stars and suns for which
spectral analysis reveals a predominance of silica, e.g., Rigel and Deneb. In
a world where chlorine predominated, we might expect to find hydrochloric
acid, and all the fecund family of chlorides, playing an important part in the
phenomena of life. Might not bromine be associated in other formations?
Why, indeed, should we draw the line at terrestrial chemistry? What is to
prove that these elements are really simple? May not hydrogen, carbon,
oxygen, nitrogen, and sulphur all be compounds? Their equivalents are
multiples of the first: 1, 6, 8, 14, 16. And is even hydrogen the most simple
of the elements? Is not its molecule composed of atoms, and may there not
exist a single species of primitive atom, whose geometric arrangement and
various associations might constitute the molecules of the so-called simple
elements?
In our own solar system we discover the essential differences between
certain planets. In the spectrum of Jupiter, for instance, we are aware of the
action of an unknown substance that manifests itself by a marked
absorption of certain red rays. This gas, which does not exist upon the
Earth, is seen still more obviously in the atmospheres of Saturn and Uranus.
Indeed, upon this last planet the atmosphere appears, apart from its water
vapor, to have no sort of analogy with our own. And in the solar spectrum
itself, many of the lines have not yet been identified with terrestrial
substances.
Page 256
The interrelation of the planets is of course incontrovertible, since they
are all children of the same parent. But they differ among themselves, not
merely in respect of situation, position, volume, mass, density, temperature,
atmosphere, but again in physical and chemical constitution. And the point
we would now accent is that this diversity should not be regarded as an
obstacle to the manifestations of life, but, on the contrary, as a new field
open to the infinite fecundity of the universal mother.
When our thoughts take wing, not only to our neighbors, Moon, Venus,
Mars, Jupiter, or Saturn, but still more toward the myriads of unknown
worlds that gravitate round the suns disseminated in space, we have no
plausible reason for imagining that the inhabitants of these other worlds of
Heaven resemble us in any way, whether in form, or even in organic
substance.
The substance of the terrestrial human body is due to the elements of our
planet, and notably to carbon. The terrestrial human form derives from the
ancestral animal forms to which it has gradually raised itself by the
continuous progress of the transformation of species. To us it seems obvious
that we are man or woman, because we have a head, a heart, lungs, two
legs, two arms, and so on. Nothing is less a matter of course. That we are
constituted as we are, is simply the result of our pro-simian ancestors
having also had a head, a heart, lungs, legs, and arms—less elegant than
your own, it is true, Madam, but still of the same anatomy. And more and
more, by the progress of paleontology, we are delving down to the origin of
beings. As certain as it is that the bird derives from the reptile by a process
of organic evolution, so certain is it that terrestrial Humanity represents the
topmost branches of the huge genealogical tree, whereof all the limbs are
brothers, and the roots of which are plunged into the very rudiments of the
most elementary and primitive organisms.
The multitude of worlds is surely peopled by every imaginable and
unimaginable form. Terrestrial man is endowed with five senses, or perhaps
it is better to say six. Why should Nature stop at this point? Why, for
are all children of the same parent. But they differ among themselves, not
merely in respect of situation, position, volume, mass, density, temperature,
atmosphere, but again in physical and chemical constitution. And the point
we would now accent is that this diversity should not be regarded as an
obstacle to the manifestations of life, but, on the contrary, as a new field
open to the infinite fecundity of the universal mother.
When our thoughts take wing, not only to our neighbors, Moon, Venus,
Mars, Jupiter, or Saturn, but still more toward the myriads of unknown
worlds that gravitate round the suns disseminated in space, we have no
plausible reason for imagining that the inhabitants of these other worlds of
Heaven resemble us in any way, whether in form, or even in organic
substance.
The substance of the terrestrial human body is due to the elements of our
planet, and notably to carbon. The terrestrial human form derives from the
ancestral animal forms to which it has gradually raised itself by the
continuous progress of the transformation of species. To us it seems obvious
that we are man or woman, because we have a head, a heart, lungs, two
legs, two arms, and so on. Nothing is less a matter of course. That we are
constituted as we are, is simply the result of our pro-simian ancestors
having also had a head, a heart, lungs, legs, and arms—less elegant than
your own, it is true, Madam, but still of the same anatomy. And more and
more, by the progress of paleontology, we are delving down to the origin of
beings. As certain as it is that the bird derives from the reptile by a process
of organic evolution, so certain is it that terrestrial Humanity represents the
topmost branches of the huge genealogical tree, whereof all the limbs are
brothers, and the roots of which are plunged into the very rudiments of the
most elementary and primitive organisms.
The multitude of worlds is surely peopled by every imaginable and
unimaginable form. Terrestrial man is endowed with five senses, or perhaps
it is better to say six. Why should Nature stop at this point? Why, for
Page 257
instance, may she not have given to certain beings an electrical sense, a
magnetic sense, a sense of orientation, an organ able to perceive the ethereal
vibrations of the infra-red or ultra-violet, or permitted them to hear at a
distance, or to see through walls? We eat and digest like coarse animals, we
are slaves to our digestive tube: may there not be worlds in which a
nutritive atmosphere enables its fortunate inhabitants to dispense with this
absurd process? The least sparrow, even the dusky bat, has an advantage
over us in that it can fly through the air. Think how inferior are our
conditions, since the man of greatest genius, the most exquisite woman, are
nailed to the soil like any vulgar caterpillar before its metamorphosis!
Would it be a disadvantage to inhabit a world in which we might fly whither
we would; a world of scented luxury, full of animated flowers; a world
where the winds would be incapable of exciting a tempest, where several
suns of different colors—the diamond glowing with the ruby, or the emerald
with the sapphire—would burn night and day (azure nights and scarlet
days) in the glory of an eternal spring; with multi-colored moons sleeping
in the mirror of the waters, phosphorescent mountains, aerial inhabitants,—
men, women, or perhaps of other sexes,—perfect in their forms, gifted with
multiple sensibilities, luminous at will, incombustible as asbestos, perhaps
immortal, unless they commit suicide out of curiosity? Lilliputian atoms as
we are, let us once for all be convinced that our imagination is but sterility,
in the midst of an infinitude hardly glimpsed by the telescope.
One important point seems always to be ignored expressly by those who
blindly deny the doctrine of the plurality of worlds. It is that this doctrine
does not apply more particularly to the present epoch than to any other. Our
time is of no importance, no absolute value. Eternity is the field of the
Eternal Sower. There is no reason why the other worlds should be inhabited
now more than at any other epoch.
What, indeed, is the Present Moment? It is an open trap through which
the Future falls incessantly into the gulf of the Past.
magnetic sense, a sense of orientation, an organ able to perceive the ethereal
vibrations of the infra-red or ultra-violet, or permitted them to hear at a
distance, or to see through walls? We eat and digest like coarse animals, we
are slaves to our digestive tube: may there not be worlds in which a
nutritive atmosphere enables its fortunate inhabitants to dispense with this
absurd process? The least sparrow, even the dusky bat, has an advantage
over us in that it can fly through the air. Think how inferior are our
conditions, since the man of greatest genius, the most exquisite woman, are
nailed to the soil like any vulgar caterpillar before its metamorphosis!
Would it be a disadvantage to inhabit a world in which we might fly whither
we would; a world of scented luxury, full of animated flowers; a world
where the winds would be incapable of exciting a tempest, where several
suns of different colors—the diamond glowing with the ruby, or the emerald
with the sapphire—would burn night and day (azure nights and scarlet
days) in the glory of an eternal spring; with multi-colored moons sleeping
in the mirror of the waters, phosphorescent mountains, aerial inhabitants,—
men, women, or perhaps of other sexes,—perfect in their forms, gifted with
multiple sensibilities, luminous at will, incombustible as asbestos, perhaps
immortal, unless they commit suicide out of curiosity? Lilliputian atoms as
we are, let us once for all be convinced that our imagination is but sterility,
in the midst of an infinitude hardly glimpsed by the telescope.
One important point seems always to be ignored expressly by those who
blindly deny the doctrine of the plurality of worlds. It is that this doctrine
does not apply more particularly to the present epoch than to any other. Our
time is of no importance, no absolute value. Eternity is the field of the
Eternal Sower. There is no reason why the other worlds should be inhabited
now more than at any other epoch.
What, indeed, is the Present Moment? It is an open trap through which
the Future falls incessantly into the gulf of the Past.
Page 258
The immensity of Heaven bears in its bosom cradles as well as tombs,
worlds to come and perished worlds. It abounds in extinct suns, and
cemeteries. In all probability Jupiter is not yet inhabited. What does this
prove? The Earth was not inhabited during its primordial period: what did
that prove to the inhabitants of Mars or of the Moon, who were perhaps
observing it at that epoch, a few million years ago?
To pretend that our globe must be the only inhabited world because the
others do not resemble it, is to reason, not like a philosopher, but, as we
remarked before, like a fish. Every rational fish ought to assume that it is
impossible to live out of water, since its outlook and its philosophy do not
extend beyond its daily life. There is no answer to this order of reasoning,
except to advise a little wider perception, and extension of the too narrow
horizon of habitual ideas.
For us the resources of Nature may be considered infinite, and "positive"
science, founded upon our senses only, is altogether inadequate, although it
is the only possible basis of our reasoning. We must learn to see with the
eyes of our spirit.
As to the planetary systems other than our own, we are no longer
reduced to hypotheses. We already know with certainty that our Sun is no
exception, as was suggested, and is still maintained, by some theorists. The
discovery in itself is curious enough.
It is surely an exceptional situation that, given a sidereal system
composed of a central sun, and of one or more stars gravitating round him,
the plane of such a system should fall just within our line of vision, and that
it should revolve in such a way that the globes of which it is composed pass
exactly between this sun and ourselves in turning round him, eclipsing him
more or less during this transit. As, on the other hand, the eclipses would be
our only means of determining the existence of these unknown planets
(save indeed from perturbation, as in the case of Sirius and Procyon), it
might have seemed quixotic to hope for like conditions in order to discover
worlds to come and perished worlds. It abounds in extinct suns, and
cemeteries. In all probability Jupiter is not yet inhabited. What does this
prove? The Earth was not inhabited during its primordial period: what did
that prove to the inhabitants of Mars or of the Moon, who were perhaps
observing it at that epoch, a few million years ago?
To pretend that our globe must be the only inhabited world because the
others do not resemble it, is to reason, not like a philosopher, but, as we
remarked before, like a fish. Every rational fish ought to assume that it is
impossible to live out of water, since its outlook and its philosophy do not
extend beyond its daily life. There is no answer to this order of reasoning,
except to advise a little wider perception, and extension of the too narrow
horizon of habitual ideas.
For us the resources of Nature may be considered infinite, and "positive"
science, founded upon our senses only, is altogether inadequate, although it
is the only possible basis of our reasoning. We must learn to see with the
eyes of our spirit.
As to the planetary systems other than our own, we are no longer
reduced to hypotheses. We already know with certainty that our Sun is no
exception, as was suggested, and is still maintained, by some theorists. The
discovery in itself is curious enough.
It is surely an exceptional situation that, given a sidereal system
composed of a central sun, and of one or more stars gravitating round him,
the plane of such a system should fall just within our line of vision, and that
it should revolve in such a way that the globes of which it is composed pass
exactly between this sun and ourselves in turning round him, eclipsing him
more or less during this transit. As, on the other hand, the eclipses would be
our only means of determining the existence of these unknown planets
(save indeed from perturbation, as in the case of Sirius and Procyon), it
might have seemed quixotic to hope for like conditions in order to discover
Page 259
solar systems other than our own. But these exceptional circumstances have
reproduced themselves at different parts of the Heavens.
Thus, for instance, we have seen that the variable star Algol owes its
variations in brilliancy, which reduce it from second to fourth magnitude
every sixty-nine hours, to the interposition of a body between itself and the
Earth, and celestial mechanics has already been able to determine
accurately the orbit of this body, its dimensions and its mass, and even the
flattening of the sun Algol. Here, then, is a system in which we know the
sun and an enormous planet, whose revolution is effected in sixty-nine
hours with extreme rapidity, as measured by the spectroscope.
The star δ of Cepheus is in the same case: it is an orb eclipsed in a period
of 129 hours, and its eclipsing planet also revolves in the plane of our
vision. The variable star in Ophiuchus has an analogous system, and
observation has already revealed a great number of others.
Since, then, a certain number of solar systems differing from our own
have been revealed, as it were in section, to terrestrial observation, this
affords us sufficient evidence of the existence of an innumerable quantity of
solar systems scattered through the immensities of space, and we are no
longer reduced to conjecture.
On the other hand, analysis of the motions of several stars, such as
Sirius, Procyon, Altaïr, proves that these distant orbs have companions,—
planets not yet discovered by the telescope, and that perhaps never will be
discovered, because they are obscure, and lost in the radiation of the star.
Some savants have asserted that Life can not germinate if the conditions
of the environment differ too much from terrestrial conditions.
This hypothesis is purely gratuitous, and we will now discuss it.
reproduced themselves at different parts of the Heavens.
Thus, for instance, we have seen that the variable star Algol owes its
variations in brilliancy, which reduce it from second to fourth magnitude
every sixty-nine hours, to the interposition of a body between itself and the
Earth, and celestial mechanics has already been able to determine
accurately the orbit of this body, its dimensions and its mass, and even the
flattening of the sun Algol. Here, then, is a system in which we know the
sun and an enormous planet, whose revolution is effected in sixty-nine
hours with extreme rapidity, as measured by the spectroscope.
The star δ of Cepheus is in the same case: it is an orb eclipsed in a period
of 129 hours, and its eclipsing planet also revolves in the plane of our
vision. The variable star in Ophiuchus has an analogous system, and
observation has already revealed a great number of others.
Since, then, a certain number of solar systems differing from our own
have been revealed, as it were in section, to terrestrial observation, this
affords us sufficient evidence of the existence of an innumerable quantity of
solar systems scattered through the immensities of space, and we are no
longer reduced to conjecture.
On the other hand, analysis of the motions of several stars, such as
Sirius, Procyon, Altaïr, proves that these distant orbs have companions,—
planets not yet discovered by the telescope, and that perhaps never will be
discovered, because they are obscure, and lost in the radiation of the star.
Some savants have asserted that Life can not germinate if the conditions
of the environment differ too much from terrestrial conditions.
This hypothesis is purely gratuitous, and we will now discuss it.
Page 260
In order to examine what is happening on the Earth, let us mount the
ladder of time for a moment, to follow the evolutions of Nature.
There was an epoch when the Earth did not exist. Our planet, the future
world of our habitation, slept in the bosom of the solar nebula.
At last it came to birth, this cherished Earth, a gaseous, luminous ball,
poor reflection of the King of Orbs, its parent. Millions of years rolled by
before the condensation and cooling of this new globe were sufficiently
transformed to permit life to manifest itself in its most rudimentary aspects.
The first organic forms of the protoplasm, the first aggregations of cells,
the protozoons, the zoophytes or plant-animals, the gelatinous mussels of
the still warm seas, were succeeded by the fishes, then by the reptiles, the
birds, the mammals, and lastly man, who at present occupies the top of the
genealogical tree, and crowns the animal kingdom.
Humanity is comparatively young upon the Earth. We may attribute
some thousands of centuries of existence to it ... and some five years of
reason!
The terrestrial organisms, from the lowest up to man, are the resultant of
the forces in action at the surface of our planet. The earliest seem to have
been produced by the combinations of carbon with hydrogen and nitrogen;
they were, so to speak, without animation, save for some very rudimentary
sensibility; the sponges, corals, polyps, and medusæ, give us a notion of
these primitive beings. They were formed in the tepid waters of the primary
epoch. As long as there were no continents, no islands emerging from the
level of the universal ocean, there were no beings breathing in the air. The
first aquatic creatures were succeeded by the amphibia, the reptiles. Later
on were developed the mammals and the birds.
What, again, do we not owe to the plant-world of the primary epoch, of
the secondary epoch, of the tertiary epoch, which slowly prepared the good
ladder of time for a moment, to follow the evolutions of Nature.
There was an epoch when the Earth did not exist. Our planet, the future
world of our habitation, slept in the bosom of the solar nebula.
At last it came to birth, this cherished Earth, a gaseous, luminous ball,
poor reflection of the King of Orbs, its parent. Millions of years rolled by
before the condensation and cooling of this new globe were sufficiently
transformed to permit life to manifest itself in its most rudimentary aspects.
The first organic forms of the protoplasm, the first aggregations of cells,
the protozoons, the zoophytes or plant-animals, the gelatinous mussels of
the still warm seas, were succeeded by the fishes, then by the reptiles, the
birds, the mammals, and lastly man, who at present occupies the top of the
genealogical tree, and crowns the animal kingdom.
Humanity is comparatively young upon the Earth. We may attribute
some thousands of centuries of existence to it ... and some five years of
reason!
The terrestrial organisms, from the lowest up to man, are the resultant of
the forces in action at the surface of our planet. The earliest seem to have
been produced by the combinations of carbon with hydrogen and nitrogen;
they were, so to speak, without animation, save for some very rudimentary
sensibility; the sponges, corals, polyps, and medusæ, give us a notion of
these primitive beings. They were formed in the tepid waters of the primary
epoch. As long as there were no continents, no islands emerging from the
level of the universal ocean, there were no beings breathing in the air. The
first aquatic creatures were succeeded by the amphibia, the reptiles. Later
on were developed the mammals and the birds.
What, again, do we not owe to the plant-world of the primary epoch, of
the secondary epoch, of the tertiary epoch, which slowly prepared the good
Page 261
nutritious soil of to-day, in which the roses flourish, and the peach and
strawberry ripen?
Before it gave birth to a Helen or a Cleopatra, life manifested itself
under the roughest forms, and in the most varied conditions. A long-period
comet passing in sight of the Earth from time to time would have seen
modifications of existence in each of its transits, in accordance with a slow
evolution, corresponding to the variation of the conditions of existence, and
progressing incessantly, for if Life is the goal of nature, Progress is the
supreme law.
The history of our planet is the history of life, with all its
metamorphoses. It is the same for all the worlds, with some exceptions of
orbs arrested in their development.
The constitution of living beings is in absolute relation with the
substances of which they are composed, the environment in which they
move, temperature, light, weight, density, the length of day and night, the
seasons, etc.—in a word, with all the cosmographic elements of a world.
If, for example, we compare between themselves two worlds such as the
Earth and Neptune, utterly different from the point of view of distance from
the Sun, we could not for an instant suppose that organic structures could
have followed a parallel development on these planets. The average
temperature must be much lower on Neptune than on the Earth, and the
same holds for intensity of light. The years and seasons there are 165 times
longer than with us, the density of matter is three times as weak, and weight
is, on the contrary, a little greater. Under conditions so different from our
own, the activities of Nature would have to translate themselves under other
forms. And doubtless the elementary bodies would not be found there in the
same proportions. Consequently we have to conclude that organs and senses
would not be the same there as here. The optic nerve, for instance, which
has formed and developed here from the rudimentary organ of the trilobite
to the marvels of the human eye, must be incomparably more sensitive upon
strawberry ripen?
Before it gave birth to a Helen or a Cleopatra, life manifested itself
under the roughest forms, and in the most varied conditions. A long-period
comet passing in sight of the Earth from time to time would have seen
modifications of existence in each of its transits, in accordance with a slow
evolution, corresponding to the variation of the conditions of existence, and
progressing incessantly, for if Life is the goal of nature, Progress is the
supreme law.
The history of our planet is the history of life, with all its
metamorphoses. It is the same for all the worlds, with some exceptions of
orbs arrested in their development.
The constitution of living beings is in absolute relation with the
substances of which they are composed, the environment in which they
move, temperature, light, weight, density, the length of day and night, the
seasons, etc.—in a word, with all the cosmographic elements of a world.
If, for example, we compare between themselves two worlds such as the
Earth and Neptune, utterly different from the point of view of distance from
the Sun, we could not for an instant suppose that organic structures could
have followed a parallel development on these planets. The average
temperature must be much lower on Neptune than on the Earth, and the
same holds for intensity of light. The years and seasons there are 165 times
longer than with us, the density of matter is three times as weak, and weight
is, on the contrary, a little greater. Under conditions so different from our
own, the activities of Nature would have to translate themselves under other
forms. And doubtless the elementary bodies would not be found there in the
same proportions. Consequently we have to conclude that organs and senses
would not be the same there as here. The optic nerve, for instance, which
has formed and developed here from the rudimentary organ of the trilobite
to the marvels of the human eye, must be incomparably more sensitive upon
Page 262
Neptune than in our dazzling solar luminosity, in order to perceive
radiations that we do not perceive here. In all probability, it is replaced there
by some other organ. The lungs, functioning there in another atmosphere,
are different from our own. So, too, for the stomach and digestive organs.
Corporeal forms, animal and human, can not resemble those which exist
upon the Earth.
Certain savants contend that if the conditions differed too much from
terrestrial conditions, life could not be produced there at all. Yet we have no
right to limit the powers of Nature to the narrow bounds of our sphere of
observation, and to pretend that our planet and our Humanity are the type of
all the worlds. That is a hypothesis as ridiculous as it is childish.
Do not let us be "personal," like children, and old people who never see
beyond their room. Let us learn to live in the Infinite and the Eternal.
From this larger point of view, the doctrine of the plurality of worlds is
the complement and the natural crown of Astronomy. What interests us
most in the study of the Universe is surely to know what goes on there.
These considerations show that, in all the ages, what really constitutes a
planet is not its skeleton but the life that vibrates upon its surface.
And again, if we analyze things, we see that for the Procession of
Nature, life is all, and matter nothing.
What has become of our ancestors, the millions of human beings who
preceded us upon this globe? Where are their bodies? What is left of them?
Search everywhere. Nothing is left but the molecules of air, water, dust,
atoms of hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, carbon, etc., which are incorporated
in turn in the organism of every living being.
radiations that we do not perceive here. In all probability, it is replaced there
by some other organ. The lungs, functioning there in another atmosphere,
are different from our own. So, too, for the stomach and digestive organs.
Corporeal forms, animal and human, can not resemble those which exist
upon the Earth.
Certain savants contend that if the conditions differed too much from
terrestrial conditions, life could not be produced there at all. Yet we have no
right to limit the powers of Nature to the narrow bounds of our sphere of
observation, and to pretend that our planet and our Humanity are the type of
all the worlds. That is a hypothesis as ridiculous as it is childish.
Do not let us be "personal," like children, and old people who never see
beyond their room. Let us learn to live in the Infinite and the Eternal.
From this larger point of view, the doctrine of the plurality of worlds is
the complement and the natural crown of Astronomy. What interests us
most in the study of the Universe is surely to know what goes on there.
These considerations show that, in all the ages, what really constitutes a
planet is not its skeleton but the life that vibrates upon its surface.
And again, if we analyze things, we see that for the Procession of
Nature, life is all, and matter nothing.
What has become of our ancestors, the millions of human beings who
preceded us upon this globe? Where are their bodies? What is left of them?
Search everywhere. Nothing is left but the molecules of air, water, dust,
atoms of hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, carbon, etc., which are incorporated
in turn in the organism of every living being.
Page 263
The whole Earth is a vast cemetery, and its finest cities are rooted in the
catacombs. But now, in crossing Paris, I passed for at least the thousandth
time near the Church of St. Germain-l'Auxerrois, and was obliged to turn
out of the direct way, on account of excavations. I looked down, and saw
that immediately below the pavement, they had just uncovered some stone
coffins still containing the skeletons that had reposed there for ten centuries.
From time immemorial the passers-by had trampled them unwittingly under
foot. And I reflected that it is much the same in every quarter of Paris. Only
yesterday, some Roman tombs and a coin with the effigy of Nero were
found in a garden near the Observatory.
And from the most general standpoint of Life, the whole world is in the
same case, and even more so, seeing that all that exists, all that lives, is
formed of elements that have already been incorporated in other beings, no
longer living. The roses that adorn the bosom of the fair ... but I will not
enlarge upon this topic.
And you, so strong and virile, of what elements is your splendid body
formed? Where have the elements you absorb to-day in respiration and
assimilation been drawn from, what lugubrious adventures have they been
subject to? Think away from it: do not insist on this point: on no account
consider it....
And yet, let us dwell on it, since this reality is the most evident
demonstration of the ideal; since what exists is you, is all of us, is Life; and
matter is only its substance, like the materials of a house, and even less so,
since its particles only pass rapidly through the framework of our bodies. A
heap of stones does not make a house. Quintillions of tons of materials
would not represent the Earth or any other world.
Yes, what really exists, what constitutes a complete orb, is the city of
Life. Let us recognize that the flower of life flourishes on the surface of our
planet, embellishing it with its perfume; that it is just this life that we see
and admire,—of which we form part,—and which is the raison d'être of
catacombs. But now, in crossing Paris, I passed for at least the thousandth
time near the Church of St. Germain-l'Auxerrois, and was obliged to turn
out of the direct way, on account of excavations. I looked down, and saw
that immediately below the pavement, they had just uncovered some stone
coffins still containing the skeletons that had reposed there for ten centuries.
From time immemorial the passers-by had trampled them unwittingly under
foot. And I reflected that it is much the same in every quarter of Paris. Only
yesterday, some Roman tombs and a coin with the effigy of Nero were
found in a garden near the Observatory.
And from the most general standpoint of Life, the whole world is in the
same case, and even more so, seeing that all that exists, all that lives, is
formed of elements that have already been incorporated in other beings, no
longer living. The roses that adorn the bosom of the fair ... but I will not
enlarge upon this topic.
And you, so strong and virile, of what elements is your splendid body
formed? Where have the elements you absorb to-day in respiration and
assimilation been drawn from, what lugubrious adventures have they been
subject to? Think away from it: do not insist on this point: on no account
consider it....
And yet, let us dwell on it, since this reality is the most evident
demonstration of the ideal; since what exists is you, is all of us, is Life; and
matter is only its substance, like the materials of a house, and even less so,
since its particles only pass rapidly through the framework of our bodies. A
heap of stones does not make a house. Quintillions of tons of materials
would not represent the Earth or any other world.
Yes, what really exists, what constitutes a complete orb, is the city of
Life. Let us recognize that the flower of life flourishes on the surface of our
planet, embellishing it with its perfume; that it is just this life that we see
and admire,—of which we form part,—and which is the raison d'être of
Page 264
things; that matter floats, and crosses, and crosses back again, in the web of
living beings,—and the reality, the goal, is not matter—it is the life matter
is employed upon.
Yes, matter passes, and being also, after sharing in the concerted
symphony of life.
And indeed everything passes rapidly!
What irrepressible grief, what deep melancholy, what ineffaceable
regrets we feel, when as age comes on we look back, when we see our
friends fallen upon the road one after the other, above all when we visit the
beloved scenes of our childhood, those homes of other years, that witnessed
our first start in terrestrial existence, our first games, our first affections—
those affections of childhood that seemed eternal—when we wander over
those fields and valleys and hills, when we see again the landscape whose
aspect has hardly changed, and whose image is so intimately linked with
our first impressions. There near this fireside the grandfather danced us on
his knee, and told us blood-curdling stories; here the kind grandmother
came to see if we were comfortably tucked in, and not likely to fall out of
the big bed; in this little wood, along these alleys that seemed endless, we
spread our nets for birds; in this stream we fished for crayfish; there on the
path we played at soldiers with our elders, who were always captains; on
these slopes we found rare stones and fossils, and mysterious petrifactions;
on this hill we admired the fine sunsets, the appearance of the stars, the
form of the constellations. There we began to live, to think, to love, to form
attachments, to dream, to question every problem, to breathe intellectually
and physically. And now, where is this beloved grandfather? the good
grandmother? where are all whom we knew in infancy? where are our
dreams of childhood? Winged thoughts still seem to flutter in the air, and
that is all. People, caresses, voices, all have gone and vanished. The
cemetery has closed over them all. There is a silent void. Were all those fine
and sunny hours an illusion? Was it only to weep one day over this negation
that our childish hearts were so tenderly attached to these fleeting shadows?
living beings,—and the reality, the goal, is not matter—it is the life matter
is employed upon.
Yes, matter passes, and being also, after sharing in the concerted
symphony of life.
And indeed everything passes rapidly!
What irrepressible grief, what deep melancholy, what ineffaceable
regrets we feel, when as age comes on we look back, when we see our
friends fallen upon the road one after the other, above all when we visit the
beloved scenes of our childhood, those homes of other years, that witnessed
our first start in terrestrial existence, our first games, our first affections—
those affections of childhood that seemed eternal—when we wander over
those fields and valleys and hills, when we see again the landscape whose
aspect has hardly changed, and whose image is so intimately linked with
our first impressions. There near this fireside the grandfather danced us on
his knee, and told us blood-curdling stories; here the kind grandmother
came to see if we were comfortably tucked in, and not likely to fall out of
the big bed; in this little wood, along these alleys that seemed endless, we
spread our nets for birds; in this stream we fished for crayfish; there on the
path we played at soldiers with our elders, who were always captains; on
these slopes we found rare stones and fossils, and mysterious petrifactions;
on this hill we admired the fine sunsets, the appearance of the stars, the
form of the constellations. There we began to live, to think, to love, to form
attachments, to dream, to question every problem, to breathe intellectually
and physically. And now, where is this beloved grandfather? the good
grandmother? where are all whom we knew in infancy? where are our
dreams of childhood? Winged thoughts still seem to flutter in the air, and
that is all. People, caresses, voices, all have gone and vanished. The
cemetery has closed over them all. There is a silent void. Were all those fine
and sunny hours an illusion? Was it only to weep one day over this negation
that our childish hearts were so tenderly attached to these fleeting shadows?
Page 265
Is there nothing, down the long length of human history, but eternal
delusion?
It is here, above all, that we find ourselves in presence of the greatest
problems. Life is the goal, it is Life that produces the conditions of
Thought. Without Thought, where would be the Universe?
We feel that without life and thought, the Universe would be an empty
theater, and Astronomy itself, sublime science, a vain research. We feel that
this is the truth, veiled as yet to actual science, and that human races
kindred with our own exist there in the immensities of space. Yes, we feel
that this is truth.
But we would fain go a little further in our knowledge of the universe,
and penetrate in some measure the secret of our destinies. We would know
if these distant and unknown Humanities are not attached to us by
mysterious cords, if our life, which will assuredly be extinguished at some
definite moment here below, will not be prolonged into the regions of
Eternity.
A moment ago we said that nothing is left of the body. Millions of
organisms have lived, there are no remains of them. Air, water, smoke, dust.
Memento, homo, quia pulvis es et in pulverem revertebis. Remember oh
man! that dust thou art, and unto dust thou shalt return, says the priest to the
faithful, when he scatters the ashes on the day after the carnival.
The body disappears entirely. It goes where the corpse of Cæsar went an
hour after the extinction of his pyre. Nor will there be more remains of any
of us. And the whole of Humanity, and the Earth itself, will also disappear
one day. Let no one talk of the Progress of Humanity as an end! That would
be too gross a decoy.
If the soul were also to disappear in smoke, what would be left of the
vital and intellectual organization of the world? Nothing.
On this hypothesis, all would be reduced to nothing.
delusion?
It is here, above all, that we find ourselves in presence of the greatest
problems. Life is the goal, it is Life that produces the conditions of
Thought. Without Thought, where would be the Universe?
We feel that without life and thought, the Universe would be an empty
theater, and Astronomy itself, sublime science, a vain research. We feel that
this is the truth, veiled as yet to actual science, and that human races
kindred with our own exist there in the immensities of space. Yes, we feel
that this is truth.
But we would fain go a little further in our knowledge of the universe,
and penetrate in some measure the secret of our destinies. We would know
if these distant and unknown Humanities are not attached to us by
mysterious cords, if our life, which will assuredly be extinguished at some
definite moment here below, will not be prolonged into the regions of
Eternity.
A moment ago we said that nothing is left of the body. Millions of
organisms have lived, there are no remains of them. Air, water, smoke, dust.
Memento, homo, quia pulvis es et in pulverem revertebis. Remember oh
man! that dust thou art, and unto dust thou shalt return, says the priest to the
faithful, when he scatters the ashes on the day after the carnival.
The body disappears entirely. It goes where the corpse of Cæsar went an
hour after the extinction of his pyre. Nor will there be more remains of any
of us. And the whole of Humanity, and the Earth itself, will also disappear
one day. Let no one talk of the Progress of Humanity as an end! That would
be too gross a decoy.
If the soul were also to disappear in smoke, what would be left of the
vital and intellectual organization of the world? Nothing.
On this hypothesis, all would be reduced to nothing.
Page 266
Our reason is not immense, our terrestrial faculties are sufficiently
limited, but this reason and these faculties suffice none the less to make us
feel the improbability, the absurdity, of this hypothesis, and we reject it as
incompatible with the sublime grandeur of the spectacle of the universe.
Undoubtedly, Creation does not seem to concern itself with us. It
proceeds on its inexorable course without consulting our sensations. With
the poet we regret the implacable serenity of Nature, opposing the irony of
its smiling splendor to our mourning, our revolts, and our despair.
Que peu de temps suffit pour changer toutes choses!
Nature au front serein, comme vous oubliez!
Et comme vous brisez dans vos métamorphoses
Les fils mystérieux où nos cœurs sont liés.
D'autres vont maintenant passer où nous passâmes;
Nous y sommes venus, d'autres vont y venir,
Et le songe qu'avaient ébauché nos deux âmes,
Ils le continueront sans pouvoir le finir.
Car personne ici-bas ne termine et n'acheve;
Les pires des humains sont comme les meilleurs;
Nous nous éveillons tous au même endroit du rêve:
Tout commence en ce monde et tout finit ailleurs.
Répondez, vallon pur, répondez, solitude!
O Nature, abritée en ce désert si beau,
Quand nous serons couchés tous deux, dans l'attitude
Que donne aux morts pensifs la forme du tombeau,
Est-ce que vous serez à ce point insensible,
De nous savoir perdus, morts avec nos amours,
Et de continuer votre fête paisible
Et de toujours sourire et de chanter toujours?[16]
limited, but this reason and these faculties suffice none the less to make us
feel the improbability, the absurdity, of this hypothesis, and we reject it as
incompatible with the sublime grandeur of the spectacle of the universe.
Undoubtedly, Creation does not seem to concern itself with us. It
proceeds on its inexorable course without consulting our sensations. With
the poet we regret the implacable serenity of Nature, opposing the irony of
its smiling splendor to our mourning, our revolts, and our despair.
Que peu de temps suffit pour changer toutes choses!
Nature au front serein, comme vous oubliez!
Et comme vous brisez dans vos métamorphoses
Les fils mystérieux où nos cœurs sont liés.
D'autres vont maintenant passer où nous passâmes;
Nous y sommes venus, d'autres vont y venir,
Et le songe qu'avaient ébauché nos deux âmes,
Ils le continueront sans pouvoir le finir.
Car personne ici-bas ne termine et n'acheve;
Les pires des humains sont comme les meilleurs;
Nous nous éveillons tous au même endroit du rêve:
Tout commence en ce monde et tout finit ailleurs.
Répondez, vallon pur, répondez, solitude!
O Nature, abritée en ce désert si beau,
Quand nous serons couchés tous deux, dans l'attitude
Que donne aux morts pensifs la forme du tombeau,
Est-ce que vous serez à ce point insensible,
De nous savoir perdus, morts avec nos amours,
Et de continuer votre fête paisible
Et de toujours sourire et de chanter toujours?[16]
Page 267
Note.—Free Translation.
How brief a time suffices for all things to change! Serene-
fronted Nature, too soon you will forget!... in your
metamorphoses ruthlessly snapping the cords that bind our
hearts together!
Others will pass where we pass; we have arrived, and others
will arrive after us: the thought sketched out by our souls will be
pursued by theirs ... and they will not find the solution of it.
For no one here begins or finishes: the worst are as the best
of humans; we all awake at the same moment of the dream: we
all begin in this world, and end otherwhere.
Reply, sweet valley, reply, solitude; O Nature, sheltering in
this splendid desert, when we are both asleep, and cast by the
tomb into the attitude of pensive death.
Will you to the last verge be so insensible, that, knowing us
lost, and dead with our loves, you will pursue your cheerful
feast, and smile, and sing always?
Yes, mortals may say that when they are sleeping in the grave, spring
and summer will still smile and sing; husband and wife may ask themselves
if they will meet again some day, in another sphere; but do we not feel that
our destinies can not be terminated here, and that short of absolute and final
nonentity for everything, they must be renewed beyond, in that starry
Heaven to which every dream has flown instinctively since the first origins
of Humanity?
As our planet is only a province of the Infinite Heavens, so our actual
existence is only a stage in Eternal Life. Astronomy, by giving us wings,
conducts us to the sanctuary of truth. The specter of death has departed
from our Heaven. The beams of every star shed a ray of hope into our
hearts. On each sphere Nature chants the pæan of Life Eternal.
How brief a time suffices for all things to change! Serene-
fronted Nature, too soon you will forget!... in your
metamorphoses ruthlessly snapping the cords that bind our
hearts together!
Others will pass where we pass; we have arrived, and others
will arrive after us: the thought sketched out by our souls will be
pursued by theirs ... and they will not find the solution of it.
For no one here begins or finishes: the worst are as the best
of humans; we all awake at the same moment of the dream: we
all begin in this world, and end otherwhere.
Reply, sweet valley, reply, solitude; O Nature, sheltering in
this splendid desert, when we are both asleep, and cast by the
tomb into the attitude of pensive death.
Will you to the last verge be so insensible, that, knowing us
lost, and dead with our loves, you will pursue your cheerful
feast, and smile, and sing always?
Yes, mortals may say that when they are sleeping in the grave, spring
and summer will still smile and sing; husband and wife may ask themselves
if they will meet again some day, in another sphere; but do we not feel that
our destinies can not be terminated here, and that short of absolute and final
nonentity for everything, they must be renewed beyond, in that starry
Heaven to which every dream has flown instinctively since the first origins
of Humanity?
As our planet is only a province of the Infinite Heavens, so our actual
existence is only a stage in Eternal Life. Astronomy, by giving us wings,
conducts us to the sanctuary of truth. The specter of death has departed
from our Heaven. The beams of every star shed a ray of hope into our
hearts. On each sphere Nature chants the pæan of Life Eternal.
Page 268
THE END
Page 269
INDEX
A
Aberration, 300
Adams, 168
Agnesi, Marie, 5
Alcar, 34
Aldebaran, 44, 66
Alexandria, 3
Algol, 39
Ancients, views of, 30
Andrew Ellicot, 195
Andromeda, 37, 38
Angles, 289
Antares, 45, 66, 70
Antipodes, 208
A
Aberration, 300
Adams, 168
Agnesi, Marie, 5
Alcar, 34
Aldebaran, 44, 66
Alexandria, 3
Algol, 39
Ancients, views of, 30
Andrew Ellicot, 195
Andromeda, 37, 38
Angles, 289
Antares, 45, 66, 70
Antipodes, 208
Page 270
Arago, 275
Arcturus, 39, 66
Asteroids, 146, 195
Astronomie des Dames, 9
Attraction, 208
Aureole, 279
Autumn Constellations, 54
Axis, 225
B
Babylonian Tables, 30
Bartholomew Diaz, 176
Bear, Little, 35
Great, 32, 34, 35
Betelgeuse, 49, 66
Biela's Comet, 189, 198
Bode's law, 167
Bolides, 201
Arcturus, 39, 66
Asteroids, 146, 195
Astronomie des Dames, 9
Attraction, 208
Aureole, 279
Autumn Constellations, 54
Axis, 225
B
Babylonian Tables, 30
Bartholomew Diaz, 176
Bear, Little, 35
Great, 32, 34, 35
Betelgeuse, 49, 66
Biela's Comet, 189, 198
Bode's law, 167
Bolides, 201
Page 271
C
Cancer, 72
Capella, 38, 66
Cassiopeia, 36
Castor, 44, 68
Catalogue of Lalande, 65
Catharine of Alexandria, 3
Centaur, 52, 64, 65, 80
Ceres, 147
Chaldean pastors, 30
Chaldeans, 271
Chariot of David, 32
Charioteer, 38
Chart of Mars, 140
Châtelet, Marquise du, 4
Chiron, The Centaur, 30, 51
Cancer, 72
Capella, 38, 66
Cassiopeia, 36
Castor, 44, 68
Catalogue of Lalande, 65
Catharine of Alexandria, 3
Centaur, 52, 64, 65, 80
Ceres, 147
Chaldean pastors, 30
Chaldeans, 271
Chariot of David, 32
Charioteer, 38
Chart of Mars, 140
Châtelet, Marquise du, 4
Chiron, The Centaur, 30, 51
Page 272
Chromosphere, 102
Clairaut, 3
Clerke, Agnes, 7
Cnidus, 31
Coggia's Comet, 187
Comet of Biela, 197
of 1811, 186
of 1858, 174
Comets, 111, 185
Constellations, 28
figures of, 31
Autumn, 54
Constellations, Spring, 52
Summer, 53
Winter, 51
Copernicus, 125
Corona Borealis, 40
Corona of the Sun, 104
Cygnus, 40
Clairaut, 3
Clerke, Agnes, 7
Cnidus, 31
Coggia's Comet, 187
Comet of Biela, 197
of 1811, 186
of 1858, 174
Comets, 111, 185
Constellations, 28
figures of, 31
Autumn, 54
Constellations, Spring, 52
Summer, 53
Winter, 51
Copernicus, 125
Corona Borealis, 40
Corona of the Sun, 104
Cygnus, 40
Page 273
D
de Blocqueville, Madame,
5
de Breteuil, Gabrielle-
Émilie, 4
de Charrière, Madame, 5
Deneb, 41
des Brosses, 5
Diaz, Bartholomew, 176
Dipper, 32, 34
Donati, 187
Double star, stellar dial of,
86
Double stars, 68, 70
Dragon, 36
du Châtelet, Marquise, 4
E
de Blocqueville, Madame,
5
de Breteuil, Gabrielle-
Émilie, 4
de Charrière, Madame, 5
Deneb, 41
des Brosses, 5
Diaz, Bartholomew, 176
Dipper, 32, 34
Donati, 187
Double star, stellar dial of,
86
Double stars, 68, 70
Dragon, 36
du Châtelet, Marquise, 4
E
Page 274
Eagle, 41
Earth, 205
ancient notions of, 19
distance from the sun,
215
how sustained, 21
inclination, 224
in space, 20
motion of, round the
Sun, 222
movement of, 217
rotundity of, 206
viewed from Mars, 144
viewed from Mercury,
119
viewed from Venus, 130
weight, 210
Eclipse of Sun, May, 1900,
273
Eclipses, 259
Ellicot, Andrew, 195
Entretiens sur la Pluralité
des mondes, 9
Equator, 225
Eudoxus, 31
Earth, 205
ancient notions of, 19
distance from the sun,
215
how sustained, 21
inclination, 224
in space, 20
motion of, round the
Sun, 222
movement of, 217
rotundity of, 206
viewed from Mars, 144
viewed from Mercury,
119
viewed from Venus, 130
weight, 210
Eclipse of Sun, May, 1900,
273
Eclipses, 259
Ellicot, Andrew, 195
Entretiens sur la Pluralité
des mondes, 9
Equator, 225
Eudoxus, 31
Page 275
Evening Star, 123
F
Faculæ, 98, 100
Fire-balls, 198
Flammarion's Lunar Ring,
253
Fleming, Mrs., 7
Fontenelle, 9
Foucault, 219
G
Galileo, 95, 98, 125, 244
Galle, 168
Globe, divisions of, 226
Great Bear, 32, 34, 35
Great Dog, 50
Grecian Calendar, 229
F
Faculæ, 98, 100
Fire-balls, 198
Flammarion's Lunar Ring,
253
Fleming, Mrs., 7
Fontenelle, 9
Foucault, 219
G
Galileo, 95, 98, 125, 244
Galle, 168
Globe, divisions of, 226
Great Bear, 32, 34, 35
Great Dog, 50
Grecian Calendar, 229
Page 276
Greek alphabet, 33
H
Hall, Mr., 143
Halley, 181
Halley's Comet, 3, 175
Heavens, map of, 61
Hercules, 41, 66, 79
Herdsman, 39
Herschel, Caroline, 6
Hevelius, 246
Hipparchus, 31
Houses of the Sun, 43
Huggins, Lady, 8
Huyghens, 49
Hyades, 44
Hypatia, 3
H
Hall, Mr., 143
Halley, 181
Halley's Comet, 3, 175
Heavens, map of, 61
Hercules, 41, 66, 79
Herdsman, 39
Herschel, Caroline, 6
Hevelius, 246
Hipparchus, 31
Houses of the Sun, 43
Huggins, Lady, 8
Huyghens, 49
Hyades, 44
Hypatia, 3
Page 277
J
Janssen, 102
Jupiter, 148
satellites, 155
telescopic aspect of, 150
K
Klumpke, Miss, 7
Kovalevsky, Sophie, 6
L
Lacaille, 292
Lalande, 3, 9, 65, 292
Latitudes, 226
Leonids, 195
Lepaute, Madame
Hortense, 3, 4
Le Verrier, 167
Little Bear, 35
Janssen, 102
Jupiter, 148
satellites, 155
telescopic aspect of, 150
K
Klumpke, Miss, 7
Kovalevsky, Sophie, 6
L
Lacaille, 292
Lalande, 3, 9, 65, 292
Latitudes, 226
Leonids, 195
Lepaute, Madame
Hortense, 3, 4
Le Verrier, 167
Little Bear, 35
Page 278
Little Dog, 50
Lockyer, 102
Longitudes, 226
Lucifer, 122
Lunar Apennines, 251
landscape, 254
topography, 252
Lyre, 40
M
Mars, 131
chart of, 140
Measurement, 289
Medes and Lydians, 266
Mercury, 114
Meteorites, 201
Meteors, 190, 191
Metonic Cycle, 271
Lockyer, 102
Longitudes, 226
Lucifer, 122
Lunar Apennines, 251
landscape, 254
topography, 252
Lyre, 40
M
Mars, 131
chart of, 140
Measurement, 289
Medes and Lydians, 266
Mercury, 114
Meteorites, 201
Meteors, 190, 191
Metonic Cycle, 271
Page 279
Milky Way, 78, 87
Mira Ceti, 77
Mitchell, Maria, 7
Mizar, 34, 69
Moon, 232
diameter of, 242
distance of, 292
geological features of,
245
map of, 247
mountains of, 246
phases of, 241
photograph of, 240
revolution of, 234
rotation of, 242
size of, 242
temperature of, 250
total eclipse of, 263
N
Nebula, in Andromeda, 81
in Orion, 81
in the Greyhounds, 82
Neptune, 65, 166
revolution of, 169
Mira Ceti, 77
Mitchell, Maria, 7
Mizar, 34, 69
Moon, 232
diameter of, 242
distance of, 292
geological features of,
245
map of, 247
mountains of, 246
phases of, 241
photograph of, 240
revolution of, 234
rotation of, 242
size of, 242
temperature of, 250
total eclipse of, 263
N
Nebula, in Andromeda, 81
in Orion, 81
in the Greyhounds, 82
Neptune, 65, 166
revolution of, 169
Page 280
Newton, 181
Nucleus, 95, 185
O
Orion, 48, 49, 81
P
Parallax, 292, 293
annual, 306
Pearl, 40
Pegasus, 38
Penumbra, 96
Periodic Comet, orbit of,
182
Perseids, 195
Perseus, 38, 70, 78
Phenician navigators, 30
Phœbus, 67
Photosphere, 101
Nucleus, 95, 185
O
Orion, 48, 49, 81
P
Parallax, 292, 293
annual, 306
Pearl, 40
Pegasus, 38
Penumbra, 96
Periodic Comet, orbit of,
182
Perseids, 195
Perseus, 38, 70, 78
Phenician navigators, 30
Phœbus, 67
Photosphere, 101
Page 281
Piazzi, 147
Planets, 109, 113, 146
distances, 110, 302
orbits of, 115
orbits of, 116
Pleiades, 38, 39, 44, 83
occultation of, 85
Pleione, 84
Polaris, 63
Pole-star, 34, 63
Poles, 225
Pollux, 44
Pope Calixtus, 176
Prodigies in the heavens,
178
Ptolemy, 31, 217
R
Radiant, 195
Planets, 109, 113, 146
distances, 110, 302
orbits of, 115
orbits of, 116
Pleiades, 38, 39, 44, 83
occultation of, 85
Pleione, 84
Polaris, 63
Pole-star, 34, 63
Poles, 225
Pollux, 44
Pope Calixtus, 176
Prodigies in the heavens,
178
Ptolemy, 31, 217
R
Radiant, 195
Page 282
Riccioli, 246
Rigel, 49, 70
Roberts, Mrs. Isaac, 7
S
Saidak, 34
Saros, 271
Satellites, 110
Saturn, 156
revolution of, 157
satellites, 162, 165
volume, 158
Saturn's rings, 161
Scarpellini, Madame, 7
Scheiner, 95
Schiaparelli, 139
Secchi, Father, 7
Seven Oxen, 32
Sextuple star, 74
Rigel, 49, 70
Roberts, Mrs. Isaac, 7
S
Saidak, 34
Saros, 271
Satellites, 110
Saturn, 156
revolution of, 157
satellites, 162, 165
volume, 158
Saturn's rings, 161
Scarpellini, Madame, 7
Scheiner, 95
Schiaparelli, 139
Secchi, Father, 7
Seven Oxen, 32
Sextuple star, 74
Page 283
Shepherd's Star, 11
Shooting stars, 193, 194,
196
Sirius, 66, 309
Solar storms, 100
flames, 105
system, 65
Somerville, Mrs., 6
Spring constellations, 52
Stars, distances, 62
double, 68, 70
first magnitude, 57
number of, 60
quadruple, 73
second magnitude, 58
shooting, 193, 194
temporary, 77
Stars, triple, 72
variable, 75
weight of, 313
Star cluster in Hercules, 79
in the Centaur, 80
St. Catherine, 3
Shooting stars, 193, 194,
196
Sirius, 66, 309
Solar storms, 100
flames, 105
system, 65
Somerville, Mrs., 6
Spring constellations, 52
Stars, distances, 62
double, 68, 70
first magnitude, 57
number of, 60
quadruple, 73
second magnitude, 58
shooting, 193, 194
temporary, 77
Stars, triple, 72
variable, 75
weight of, 313
Star cluster in Hercules, 79
in the Centaur, 80
St. Catherine, 3
Page 284
Summer constellations, 53
Sun, 88
houses of the, 43
measurement of distance,
297
photograph of, 96
rotation, 99
temperature of, 105
total eclipse of, 276
weight, 106
Sun and Earth, comparative
sizes of, 93
Sun-spots, 95, 101
telescopic aspect of, 97
T
Temporary stars, 77, 78
Three Kings, 49
Total eclipse of the moon,
263
of sun, 276
Triangulation, 288
Triple Star, 72
Sun, 88
houses of the, 43
measurement of distance,
297
photograph of, 96
rotation, 99
temperature of, 105
total eclipse of, 276
weight, 106
Sun and Earth, comparative
sizes of, 93
Sun-spots, 95, 101
telescopic aspect of, 97
T
Temporary stars, 77, 78
Three Kings, 49
Total eclipse of the moon,
263
of sun, 276
Triangulation, 288
Triple Star, 72
Page 285
U
Umbra, 95
Universe, 22, 23, 90
Urania, 8, 9
Uranoliths, 201, 204
Uranus, 162
V
Variable stars, 75
Vega, 40
Venus, 121, 296
phases of, 124
Vesper, 122
Victor Hugo, 24
W
Weighing worlds, 309
Umbra, 95
Universe, 22, 23, 90
Urania, 8, 9
Uranoliths, 201, 204
Uranus, 162
V
Variable stars, 75
Vega, 40
Venus, 121, 296
phases of, 124
Vesper, 122
Victor Hugo, 24
W
Weighing worlds, 309
Page 286
Winter constellations, 51
Z
Zodiac, constellations of,
46, 47
Zones, 225
FOOTNOTES:
[1] The French edition of this book is entitled Astronomy for Women.—
Translator.
[2] 1 kilometer = 0.6214 mile; 100 kilometers may be taken as 62 miles. 1
kilogram is about 2.2 lb.; 5 kilograms = 11 lb.—Translator.
[3] It is useful to know the letters of the Greek Alphabet. They are easily
learned, as follows:
α Alpha
β Beta
γ Gamma
δ Delta
ε Epsilon
ζ Zeta
η Eta
θ Theta
ι Iota
κ Kappa
λ Lambda
μ Mu
ν Nu
ξ Xi
ο Omicron
π Pi
ρ Rho
Z
Zodiac, constellations of,
46, 47
Zones, 225
FOOTNOTES:
[1] The French edition of this book is entitled Astronomy for Women.—
Translator.
[2] 1 kilometer = 0.6214 mile; 100 kilometers may be taken as 62 miles. 1
kilogram is about 2.2 lb.; 5 kilograms = 11 lb.—Translator.
[3] It is useful to know the letters of the Greek Alphabet. They are easily
learned, as follows:
α Alpha
β Beta
γ Gamma
δ Delta
ε Epsilon
ζ Zeta
η Eta
θ Theta
ι Iota
κ Kappa
λ Lambda
μ Mu
ν Nu
ξ Xi
ο Omicron
π Pi
ρ Rho
Page 287
σ or ς Sigma
τ Tau
υ Upsilon
φ Phi
χ Chi
ψ Psi
ω Omega
[4] All the stars visible at any hour during the year can easily be found with
the help of the author's Planisphere mobile.
[5] Let it be remarked in passing that the stars might be much farther off than
they are, and invisible to our eyes; the Heavens would then assume the aspect of
an absolutely empty space, the moon and planets alone remaining.
[6] 14″ = 14 seconds of arc. One second of the circle is an exceedingly
minute quantity. It is 1 millimeter seen at a distance of 206 meters. One
millimeter seen at a distance of 20 m. 62 = 10 secs. These values are invisible to
the unaided eye.
[7] These fine double stars can be observed with the help of the smallest
telescope.
[8] For the explanation of the angular distances of degrees, minutes, and
seconds, see Chapter XI, on Methods of Measurement.
[9] The author has endeavored on the plates to represent the aspect of the
Earth in the starry sky of Mercury, Venus, and Mars; but in all representations of
this kind the stars are necessarily made too large. By calculation the diameters of
the Earth and Moon as seen from the planets, and their distances, are as follows:
Diameter Diameter Distance
of of Earth-
the Earth. the Moon. Moon.
Of Mercury
20″ 8″ 871″
(opposition)
Of Venus
64″ 17″ 1,928″
(opposition)
Of Mars (quadrature) 15″ 4″ 464″
Of Jupiter
3.5″ 0.1″ 105″
(quadrature)
These aspects will be appreciated if we remember that the distance of the
components of ε Lyre = 207″, that of Atlas in Pleione = 301″, and that of the
stars Mizar and Alcor = 708″.
[10] A few evenings ago, after observing Venus in the calm and silent
Heavens at the close of day, my eyes fell upon a drawing sent me by my friend
τ Tau
υ Upsilon
φ Phi
χ Chi
ψ Psi
ω Omega
[4] All the stars visible at any hour during the year can easily be found with
the help of the author's Planisphere mobile.
[5] Let it be remarked in passing that the stars might be much farther off than
they are, and invisible to our eyes; the Heavens would then assume the aspect of
an absolutely empty space, the moon and planets alone remaining.
[6] 14″ = 14 seconds of arc. One second of the circle is an exceedingly
minute quantity. It is 1 millimeter seen at a distance of 206 meters. One
millimeter seen at a distance of 20 m. 62 = 10 secs. These values are invisible to
the unaided eye.
[7] These fine double stars can be observed with the help of the smallest
telescope.
[8] For the explanation of the angular distances of degrees, minutes, and
seconds, see Chapter XI, on Methods of Measurement.
[9] The author has endeavored on the plates to represent the aspect of the
Earth in the starry sky of Mercury, Venus, and Mars; but in all representations of
this kind the stars are necessarily made too large. By calculation the diameters of
the Earth and Moon as seen from the planets, and their distances, are as follows:
Diameter Diameter Distance
of of Earth-
the Earth. the Moon. Moon.
Of Mercury
20″ 8″ 871″
(opposition)
Of Venus
64″ 17″ 1,928″
(opposition)
Of Mars (quadrature) 15″ 4″ 464″
Of Jupiter
3.5″ 0.1″ 105″
(quadrature)
These aspects will be appreciated if we remember that the distance of the
components of ε Lyre = 207″, that of Atlas in Pleione = 301″, and that of the
stars Mizar and Alcor = 708″.
[10] A few evenings ago, after observing Venus in the calm and silent
Heavens at the close of day, my eyes fell upon a drawing sent me by my friend
Page 288
Gustave Dore, which is included in the illustrations of his wonderful edition of
Dante's Divina Commedia. This drawing seems to be in place here, and I offer
my readers a poor reproduction of it, taken from the fine engraving in the book.
Dante and Virgil, in the peaceful evening, are contemplating lo bel pianeta ch'ad
amar conforta (the beautiful planet that incites to love).
[11] Strictly speaking, 1 kilometer = 0.6214 mile. Here, as throughout, the
equivalents are only given in round numbers.—Translator.
[12] Translator: Compare the well-known English rhyme:
Thirty days hath September,
April, June, and November.
While all the rest have thirty-one,
Excepting February alone,
In which but twenty-eight appear
And twenty-nine when comes Leap Year.
[13] Fifty-eight different pictures of the aspect of the Moon to the unaided
eye will be found in the Monthly Bulletins of the Astronomical Society of
France, for the year 1900, in pursuance of an investigation made by the author
among the different members of the Society.
[14] My readers are charged not to speak of this property (which is fairly
extensive), lest the Budget Commission, at the end of its resources, should be
tempted to put on an unexpected tax. This ring, which the astronomers presented
to me in the year 1887, is almost in the center of the lunar disk, to the north of
Ptolemy and Herschel.
[15] "La fin du Monde." Flammarion, p. 186.
[16] Victor Hugo. Tristesse d'Olympia.
Dante's Divina Commedia. This drawing seems to be in place here, and I offer
my readers a poor reproduction of it, taken from the fine engraving in the book.
Dante and Virgil, in the peaceful evening, are contemplating lo bel pianeta ch'ad
amar conforta (the beautiful planet that incites to love).
[11] Strictly speaking, 1 kilometer = 0.6214 mile. Here, as throughout, the
equivalents are only given in round numbers.—Translator.
[12] Translator: Compare the well-known English rhyme:
Thirty days hath September,
April, June, and November.
While all the rest have thirty-one,
Excepting February alone,
In which but twenty-eight appear
And twenty-nine when comes Leap Year.
[13] Fifty-eight different pictures of the aspect of the Moon to the unaided
eye will be found in the Monthly Bulletins of the Astronomical Society of
France, for the year 1900, in pursuance of an investigation made by the author
among the different members of the Society.
[14] My readers are charged not to speak of this property (which is fairly
extensive), lest the Budget Commission, at the end of its resources, should be
tempted to put on an unexpected tax. This ring, which the astronomers presented
to me in the year 1887, is almost in the center of the lunar disk, to the north of
Ptolemy and Herschel.
[15] "La fin du Monde." Flammarion, p. 186.
[16] Victor Hugo. Tristesse d'Olympia.
Page 289
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ASTRONOMY
FOR AMATEURS ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
FOR AMATEURS ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
Page 290
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
Page 291
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
Page 292
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived from
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
Page 293
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing,
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
Page 294
Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
Page 295
you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
Page 296
efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
Page 297
including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
Page 298
copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
Page 299
back
Page 300
back